Meg 76400 PG 0a00 En-Us

Product Guide
Revision A
McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances
COPYRIGHT
Copyright 2015 McAfee, Inc., 2821 Mission College Boulevard, Santa Clara, CA 95054, 1.888.847.8766, www.intelsecurity.com
TRADEMARK ATTRIBUTIONS
Intel and the Intel logo are registered trademarks of the Intel Corporation in the US and/or other countries. McAfee and the McAfee logo, McAfee Active
Protection, McAfee DeepSAFE, ePolicy Orchestrator, McAfee ePO, McAfee EMM, McAfee Evader, Foundscore, Foundstone, Global Threat Intelligence,
McAfee LiveSafe, Policy Lab, McAfee QuickClean, Safe Eyes, McAfee SECURE, McAfee Shredder, SiteAdvisor, McAfee Stinger, McAfee TechMaster, McAfee
Total Protection, TrustedSource, VirusScan are registered trademarks or trademarks of McAfee, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the US and other countries.
Other marks and brands may be claimed as the property of others.
LICENSE INFORMATION
License Agreement
NOTICE TO ALL USERS: CAREFULLY READ THE APPROPRIATE LEGAL AGREEMENT CORRESPONDING TO THE LICENSE YOU PURCHASED, WHICH SETS
FORTH THE GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR THE USE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE. IF YOU DO NOT KNOW WHICH TYPE OF LICENSE YOU
HAVE ACQUIRED, PLEASE CONSULT THE SALES AND OTHER RELATED LICENSE GRANT OR PURCHASE ORDER DOCUMENTS THAT ACCOMPANY YOUR
SOFTWARE PACKAGING OR THAT YOU HAVE RECEIVED SEPARATELY AS PART OF THE PURCHASE (AS A BOOKLET, A FILE ON THE PRODUCT CD, OR A
FILE AVAILABLE ON THE WEBSITE FROM WHICH YOU DOWNLOADED THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS SET
FORTH IN THE AGREEMENT, DO NOT INSTALL THE SOFTWARE. IF APPLICABLE, YOU MAY RETURN THE PRODUCT TO MCAFEE OR THE PLACE OF
PURCHASE FOR A FULL REFUND.
Product Guide
Contents
Preface
About this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
What's in this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Find product documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Working with your McAfee Email Gateway
11
How McAfee Email Gateway processes mail traffic through your network . . . . . . . . . . .
The interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make changes to the appliance's configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import and export information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ports used by Email Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the McAfee Email Gateway 7.x troubleshooting tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upgrading Email Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits of upgrading from previous versions of the product . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Migrate settings from Email Gateway 7.5.3 or higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Migrate settings from Email Gateway virtual appliances 7.5.3 or higher . . . . . .
Task Upgrade from Email Gateway 7.6.2 or higher appliances managed by McAfee ePolicy
Orchestrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About timeouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with FIPS 140-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting user interface access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reasons the user interface might be locked out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset user interface access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Dashboard features
29
30
31
32
32
33
35
Benefits of using the Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dashboard portlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configurable thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Inbound Mail Summary portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Outbound Mail Summary portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions SMTP Detections portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions POP3 Detections portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions System Summary portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Hardware Summary portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Network Summary portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Services portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Clustering portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Advanced Threat Defense portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Tasks portlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
13
15
17
17
20
21
24
26
26
26
26
27
28
36
37
37
38
41
43
46
47
47
49
50
52
54
55
Product Guide
Contents
Task Setting System Summary thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Task Setting Services thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
Overview of Reports features
59
Types of reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Search overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits of using Message Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Search parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Search results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Search icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Identify quarantined email messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Find out which email messages are queued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Find out which email messages are being blocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Find the emails that were successfully delivered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task A user has requested that I release one of their quarantined email messages . . .
Task Export a message search report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Find a message containing a named attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using multiple search parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for archived content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task - Configure identification of archived content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task - Find content of archived files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Blacklist/whitelist URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits of creating scheduled reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Scheduled Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task See the number of detections by protocol and threat type over the last week . . .
Task Send your manager an email activity report in PDF format every Monday at 10.00am
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Download a report in .csv format for further processing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Send the email administrator a report that shows virus detections in email messages
over the last week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled Reports New Report dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled Reports Edit Report dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to the Email Reports page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits of using email reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Email reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Email report views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of email report filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Favorite reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Generate an email activity overview for a particular sender . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Show me the total viruses detected over the previous week . . . . . . . . . .
System Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to the System Reports page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits of using system reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of System reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of System report views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of System report filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Favorite reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Generate a report that shows all threat detection updates . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Email menu
59
60
61
62
65
68
69
71
72
72
72
73
73
74
75
76
76
77
77
78
80
81
81
81
82
82
82
84
84
84
85
86
87
89
90
91
91
92
92
92
92
93
93
94
95
Life of an email message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Email Configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
Option definitions Protocol Presets dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Product Guide
Contents
Option definition - New Protocol Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Receiving Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sending Email Add Relay List dialog box and Add MX Lookup dialog box . . . . . . .
Anti-Relay Settings Add Relay Domain dialog box and Add MX Lookup dialog box . . .
Email Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction to policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Policy exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Re-write the Subject of all messages matching a policy . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Modify the headers of all messages matching a policy . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email Policies - Add Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Add rule or Edit rule dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Definitions Scanning Policies New Policy Exception . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Scanning Policies | New Policy | Add user group . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Scanning Policies | New Policy | Add network group . . . . . . .
Option definitions Subject Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Header Modification Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Notification Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Add/Edit Notification Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Add/Edit Header Modification Template . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Virus policy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-spam policy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compliance policy settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Policy Options settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions URL reputation blacklists and whitelists . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLP and Dictionaries overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registered Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compliance Dictionaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Add Dictionary Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Applicable File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions OR Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions AND Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Edit Regular Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Secure Web Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S/MIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PGP encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Secure Web Mail Branding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Encrypt all email that triggers against the HIPAA compliance dictionaries . . . .
Task Use S/MIME to encrypt all email to a specific target domain . . . . . . . . . .
Task Deliver all email from a specific customer using S/MIME encryption . . . . . . .
Task Use PGP to encrypt all email messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Deliver all email from a specific customer using PGP encryption . . . . . . . .
Certificate Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Certificate Details dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hybrid configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits of using hybrid email scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the hybrid email registration and configuration process . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Domain Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
114
126
133
134
134
135
141
144
146
151
154
156
159
166
166
168
168
169
169
169
171
171
207
236
289
331
332
332
337
347
347
347
348
348
348
349
350
360
362
364
367
370
371
372
372
373
374
374
380
380
382
382
384
384
387
Product Guide
Contents
Group Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Add Network Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Add Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email Senders and Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Add User Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Add a user group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Directory Service wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits of adding LDAP directory services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Directory Service Details page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Directory Service Queries page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Directory Service Query page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option Definitions Test Directory Service Query page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Set up the appliance to use a Microsoft Exchange Server as an LDAP server . . .
Task Create a sample LDAP query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quarantine Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quarantine Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quarantine Digest Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Digest Message Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quarantine Queue Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of System menu
411
Appliance Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Interfaces Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DNS and Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email Gateway Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certificate and Key Export wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UPS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add UPS Device Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cluster Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions MAC Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resilient Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Automatic Configuration Backups wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rescue Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Users and Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions New Role dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Role Details dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forgotten password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Login Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Login Services wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Session Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DoD CAC Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions CAC Certificate Attribute Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Custom Text dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
390
390
393
393
394
394
395
395
396
396
397
398
399
399
400
400
401
401
403
405
405
411
412
413
417
419
420
426
427
427
430
431
433
434
436
438
442
443
444
446
449
453
455
455
457
457
457
459
460
461
463
464
465
465
Product Guide
Contents
Option definitions User Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Virtual Hosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions - Edit Virtual Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Virtual Host wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions New Scanning Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definition - New Protocol Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits of configuring McAfee Advanced Threat Defense Servers . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions ATD Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Configure Email Gateway to communicate with your Advanced Threat Defense
appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Configure the file types to be sent to Advanced Threat Defense . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Add ATD Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging, Alerting and SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email Alerting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNMP Alert Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SNMP Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Log Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Configuration Override events dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure System Log Archive wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Update Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Package Installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ePO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-virus engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Anti-Virus Updates wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Anti-Spam Updates wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Automatic Package Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions Configure Updates (Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Preferences (Warning Thresholds) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Interfaces Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Interface Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restore from a file Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ePO Managed Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encryption Only Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Troubleshoot features
476
477
477
478
478
486
486
487
497
499
500
501
502
506
507
511
511
512
513
514
515
515
515
517
520
529
533
533
539
545
553
Troubleshooting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ping and Trace Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generate Test Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Route Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIPS Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Escalation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capture Network Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
466
466
466
469
470
470
474
474
475
475
475
553
554
554
555
555
556
557
557
558
558
558
559
Product Guide
Contents
Save Email Queues . . . . . .

Save Log Files . . . . . . . .
Error Reporting Tool . . . . . .
Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option definitions System Tests
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
Overview of Email Gateway appliances and ePolicy Orchestrator Integration

How appliances work with ePolicy Orchestrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differences in Email Gateway appliance administration under ePolicy Orchestrator . . . . . . .
Configuring your appliance for ePolicy Orchestrator management . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the ePolicy Orchestrator extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing your appliances from within ePolicy Orchestrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Orchestrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Policy comparisons in ePolicy Orchestrator 5.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of McAfee Quarantine Manager Integration
Overview of Content Security Reporter integration
565
566
569
570
570
571
572
573
573
574
574
577
About Content Security Reporter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How Content Security Reporter works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits of using Content Security Reporter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure McAfee Email Gateway to send log data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Configure Content Security Reporter to receive Email Gateway data . . . . . . . . . .
Index
565
573
About McAfee Quarantine Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How appliances work with McAfee Quarantine Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The relationship between quarantine categories displayed in Message Search and MQM . .
Custom quarantine queues in McAfee Quarantine Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . .
560
561
562
563
563
577
577
578
578
579
579
581
Product Guide
Preface
Contents
About this guide
Find product documentation
About this guide

This information describes the guide's target audience, the typographical conventions and icons used
in this guide, and how the guide is organized.
Audience
McAfee documentation is carefully researched and written for the target audience.
The information in this guide is intended primarily for:
Administrators People who implement and enforce the company's security program.
Conventions
This guide uses these typographical conventions and icons.
Book title, term,
emphasis
Title of a book, chapter, or topic; a new term; emphasis.
Bold
Text that is strongly emphasized.
User input, code,

message
Commands and other text that the user types; a code sample; a displayed
message.
Interface text
Words from the product interface like options, menus, buttons, and dialog
boxes.
Hypertext blue
A link to a topic or to an external website.

Note: Additional information, like an alternate method of accessing an
option.
Tip: Suggestions and recommendations.
Important/Caution: Valuable advice to protect your computer system,
software installation, network, business, or data.
Warning: Critical advice to prevent bodily harm when using a hardware
product.
Product Guide
Preface
What's in this guide

After a product is released, information about the product is entered into the McAfee online Knowledge
Center.
Task
10
Go to the Knowledge Center tab of the McAfee ServicePortal at http://support.mcafee.com.
In the Knowledge Base pane, click a content source:
Product Documentation to find user documentation
Technical Articles to find KnowledgeBase articles
Select Do not clear my filters.
Enter a product, select a version, then click Search to display a list of documents.
Product Guide
Working with your McAfee Email

Gateway
McAfee Email Gateway protects your network from viruses, undesirable content, spam, and other
threats. Understand these concepts to help you configure your McAfee Email Gateway.
Contents
How McAfee Email Gateway processes mail traffic through your network
The interface
Ports used by Email Gateway
Resources
Top Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Using the McAfee Email Gateway 7.x troubleshooting tree
Upgrading Email Gateway
About timeouts
Working with FIPS 140-2
Resetting user interface access
How McAfee Email Gateway processes mail traffic through your

network
This information describes how McAfee Email Gateway processes mail traffic through your internal and
external networks.
Mail traffic flow

Within McAfee Email Gateway, all email messages originating from outside of your organization are
considered Inbound, and all messages leaving your organization and considered to be Outbound.
Product Guide
11

How McAfee Email Gateway processes mail traffic through your network
12
Product Guide

The interface
The interface
The user interface provides you with an intuitive way of finding information and configuring options for
your McAfee Email Gateway.
The interface you see might look slightly different from that shown here, because it can vary depending
on the appliance's hardware platform, software version, and language.
Figure 1-1 Areas of the user interface
A Navigation area
The navigation area contains four areas: user information, section icons, tab bar, and support controls.
B User information bar

C Section icons
The icons include the following:
Icon
Menu
Features
Dashboard
Use this page to see a summary of the appliance. From this page you can
access most of the pages that control the appliance.
Reports
Use the Reports pages to view events recorded on the appliance, such as
viruses detected in email messages, and system activities such as details of
recent updates and logins.
Email
Use the Email pages to manage threats to email messages, quarantine of

infected email, and other aspects of email configuration.
Product Guide
13

The interface
Icon
Menu
Features
System
Use the System pages to configure various features on the appliance.
Troubleshoot Use the Troubleshoot pages to diagnose any problems with the appliance.
D Tab bar
The contents of the tab bar are controlled by the selected section icon. The selected tab dictates what
is displayed in the content area.
E Support control buttons

The support control buttons are actions that apply to the content area.
Icon Description
Refreshes or updates the content.
Returns you to the previously viewed page. We recommend that you click this button, rather
than your browser's Back button.
Appears when you configure something to allow you to apply your changes.
Appears when you configure something to allow you to cancel your changes.
Opens a window of Help information. Much of the information in this window also appears in
the Product Guide.
F View control
The view control button shows or hides a status window.
The status window, which appears in the bottom right of the interface, shows recent activity. New
messages are added at the top of the window. If a message is blue and underlined, you can click the
link to visit another page. You can also manage the window with its own Clear and Close links.
G Content area
The content area contains the currently active content and is where most of your interaction will be.
The changes that you make take effect after you click the green checkmark.
Contents
User preferences
Make changes to the appliance's configuration
Using lists
Import and export information
14
Product Guide

The interface
User preferences
The User Preferences link in the User information bar allows you to personalize specific behaviors in
McAfee Email Gateway.
You can use this feature to:
Set the opening page for Email Gateway.
Reset the password for your user account.
Benefits of configuring user preferences

Use the User Preferences link to control your log-on process.
Setting the opening page streamlines your Email Gateway access, and changing your password
provides increased security to your account.
Setting your opening page

Users might encounter situations where they routinely access Email Gateway for specific reasons. If
so, they might regularly navigate to a particular tab in the interface. User Preferences allows them to set
their preferred destination in the application.
User permissions determine the available page selections for each account. They also determine the
default opening page. For example, an administrator with full access can set any tab as the opening
page. A user with more limited permissions can set only the allowed tabs.
Issue You have responsibility for monitoring and creating reports for management review. This task
requires logging on to Email Gateway several times per day. Navigating directly to the Reports tab
streamlines the work flow.
Solution Use User Preferences to set Reports as the opening page for your account.
Changing your password

Users might need to change their passwords for several reasons. When the need arises, User Preferences
allows them to reset their passwords directly.
Issue You are an administrator for your McAfee Email Gateway appliance, and you think other
users with fewer rights might have seen your password. You want to ensure that unauthorized users
cannot access your account.
Solution Use User Preferences to reset your password yourself.
Product Guide
15

The interface
Option definitions - User preferences

Use the options in this dialog box to set the opening page when you log on, and to reset your
password.
Table 1-1
Option definitionsUser preferences
Option
Definition
Preferences
After login open From the drop-down list, select the page Email Gateway displays when you log on.
Options include:
Dashboarddisplays the opening page for the Dashboard tab.
Reportsdisplays the opening page for the Reports tab.
Emaildisplays the opening page for the Email tab.
Systemdisplays the opening page for the System tab.
Troubleshootdisplays the opening page for the Troubleshoot tab.
Last visited pagetakes you back to the last page you opened before you last logged
off.
Change password
Current password
Type your current password in the data field
New password
Type the new password you want to configure
Confirm password
Type the new password again
Task Set your opening page

This task allows you to determine which page McAfee Email Gateway displays when you log on.
You can only set user preferences for the account you use to log on to McAfee Email Gateway. If you
use more than one user account, you can set preferences for each account.
Task
1
Log on to Email Gateway with your user name and password.

The current opening page displays. Your permissions determine the default page.
In the user information bar, select User Preferences.

The User Preferences dialog box opens.
In the Preferences section, After login open, select the page to display from the drop-down menu.
The menu contains only those pages available for your access permissions.
Click Apply.
The next time you log on to Email Gateway, the page you chose appears as your opening page.
Task Reset your password

Use these options to reset your McAfee Email Gateway password.
You can only reset your password for the account you use to log on to McAfee Email Gateway. If you
use more than one user account, you can reset passwords for each account.
16
Product Guide

The interface
Task
1
Log on to Email Gateway with your user name and password.

The current opening page displays. Dashboard is the default.
In the user information bar, select User Preferences.

The User Preferences dialog box opens.
In the Change Password section, type your current password in the data field.
Type your new password in the New password data field.
Type your new password again in the Confirm password data field.
Click Apply.
Your new password is effective the next time you log on.
Make changes to the appliance's configuration

Use this task to make changes to the operation of the appliance.
Task
1
In the navigation bar, click an icon. The blue tabs below the icons change to show the available
features.
Click the tabs until you reach the page you need.
To locate any page, examine the tabs, or locate the subject in the Help index. The location of the
page is often described at the top of the Help page. Example:
System | System Administration | Database Maintenance.

3
On the page, select the options. Click the Help button (?) for information about each option.
Navigate to other pages as needed.
To save your configuration changes, click the green checkmark icon at the top right of the window.
In the Configuration change comment window, type a comment to describe your changes, then click OK.
Wait a few minutes while the configuration is updated.
To see all your comments, select Review Configuration Changes in System | System Administration | Configuration
Management.
Using lists
Within the McAfee Email Gateway user interface, lists are used in many places to help define
information.
Contents
Make and view lists
Add information to a list
Remove single items from a list
Remove many items from a list
Change information in a list
View information in a long list
Product Guide
17

The interface
Order information in a list by priority

Order information alphabetically in a list
Make and view lists

Lists specify information such as domains, addresses and port numbers on many pages in the
interface. You can add new items to a list, and delete existing items.
Although the number of rows and columns might vary, all lists behave in similar ways. In some lists,
you can also import items from a prepared file, and change the order of the items. Not all lists have
these actions. This section describes all the actions that are available in the interface.
Add information to a list

Add information into a list within the user interface.
Task
1
Click Add below the list.

A new row appears in the table. If this is your first item, a column of checkboxes appears on the
left of the table. You might also see a Move column on the right of the table.
Type the details in the new row. Press Tab to move between fields.
For help with typing the correct information, move your cursor over the table cell, and wait for a
pop-up to appear. For more information, click
To save the new items immediately, click the green checkmark:
Remove single items from a list

Some lists take a long time to create, and therefore you can delete only one entry at a time to prevent
the accidental deletion of a lot of information.
If the item cannot be deleted, the trashcan icon is unavailable:
Task
1
Click the item to select it. The row turns pale blue.
Click the trashcan icon
, or click Delete at the bottom of the list.
Remove many items from a list

On some long lists, you can remove many items quickly.
Task
1
In the column of checkboxes on the left of the table, select each required item. To select many
items, select the checkbox in the table's heading row to select all the items, then deselect those
that you want to keep.
Click Delete at the bottom of the list.
18
To save the new changes immediately, click the green checkmark:
Product Guide

The interface
Change information in a list

Change information contained within a list within the user interface.
If an item cannot be changed, the icon is unavailable:
Task
1
Click the edit icon
Click on the text, then delete or retype it.
3
4
To save the new changes immediately, click the green checkmark:

To cancel any recent changes, click the close button at the top right of the window:
View information in a long list

If the list has many items, you might not be able to see them all at the same time.
Task
1
To determine the position of an item in the list or the size of the list, view the text at the bottom of
the list, such as Items 20 to 29 of 40.
To move through the list or to move quickly to either end of the list, click the arrows at the bottom
right of the list. (
).
Order information in a list by priority

Some lists display items in priority order. The first item in the list is the highest priority, the last item
is the lowest priority. To change an item's priority:
Task
1
Find the row that contains the item.
In the Move column (on the right of the table), click the upward or downward arrow:
Order information alphabetically in a list

When information is given in a list, you can sort the list alphabetically.
Task
To change the order:
To force items in a column into alphabetical order, click the column heading. Items in other
columns are automatically sorted accordingly. An icon appears in the column heading to indicate
that this column is sorted:
To sort the information differently, click the other column headings.
To reverse and restore the alphabetical order of the information within a single column, click the
icons in the column heading:
Product Guide
19

The interface
Import and export information

Find out how to import information to, and export information from the McAfee Email Gateway.
Contents
Import prepared information
Export prepared information
Import prepared information

From some pages, you can import information from other devices, appliances, or software for use on
the appliance, such as from a previously prepared comma-separated value (.csv) file, or a certificate
needed to verify identity of your appliance or other devices.
Imported information normally overwrites the original information.
Task
1
Click Import.
In the Import window, browse to the file.

The contents of the Import dialog box change according to the requirements of the type of file or
information you are importing. If further options are displayed in the dialog box, make the relevant
choices based on that information.
Click Open to import the information from the file.

Table 1-2 Some formats for comma-separated value (.csv) files
Type of information
Format
Example
Domain
D, domain, IP address
D, www.example.com, 192.168.254.200
Network address
N, IP address, IP subnet mask
N, 192.168.254.200, 255.255.255.0
Email address
E, email-address
E, network_user@example.com
Each item in the file is on a single line.
Export prepared information

From some pages, you can export or download information from the appliance for use on other
devices, appliances, software, or to read.
The information is generated in various forms, such as a .zip file, a .pdf, or a .csv file.
Table 1-3 Some formats for comma-separated value (.csv) files
Type of information
Format
Example
Domain
D, domain, IP address
D, www.example.com, 192.168.254.200
Network address
N, IP address, IP subnet mask
N, 192.168.254.200, 255.255.255.0
Email address
E, email-address
E, network_user@example.com
Each item in the file is on a single line.
Task
20
Click Export or Download.
In the Export or Download window, follow the instructions to create the file.
Product Guide


The appliance uses various ports to communicate with your network and other devices.
Table 1-4
Use
Application Transport Port

Protocol
Protocol
Number
Destination
Direction
Software updates
FTP
Anti-virus DAT and HTTP

Engine update
FTP
TCP
21
ftp.nai.com
Outbound
TCP
80
(default)
update.nai.com
Outbound
21
(optional)
The
anti-virus
DAT and
Engine
update
packages
are
encrypted
and signed
before
being
transported
over HTTP.
ftp.nai.com
2nd Anti-virus DAT HTTPS

and Engine
updates
TCP
443
tau.mcafee.com
Outbound
Anti-spam rules
and streaming
updates
TCP
80
http://su3.mcafee.com
Outbound
HTTP
http://sav-su3-1.mcafee.com
208.69.152.139
The
anti-spam
rules and
streaming
updates are
encrypted
and signed
before
being
transported
over HTTP.
192.187.128.17
Anti-spam engine
updates
HTTP
TCP
443
tau.mcafee.com
Outbound
Advanced Threat
Defense server
HTTPS
TCP
443
(default)
Your Advanced Threat

Defense appliance
Outbound
URL reputation
lookup
HTTPS
TCP
443
tunnel.web.trustedsource.org
Outbound
URL reputation
database update
HTTP
TCP
80
list.smartfilter.com
Outbound
Secure Web Mail

client
HTTPS
TCP
443
Your Email Gateway appliance Inbound
Management Port
for the User
Interface
HTTPS
TCP
10443
Your Email Gateway appliance Inbound
Product Guide
21

Table 1-4
Ports used by Email Gateway (continued)
Use

Protocol
Protocol
Number
Destination
Direction
Domain Name
System (DNS)
DNS
TCP/UDP
53
Your DNS server
Outbound
LDAP (and Active

Directory) Global
catalog
LDAP
TCP
3268
Your directory server
Outbound
Secure LDAP (and

Active Directory)
LDAP
TCP
636
Outbound
Secure LDAP (and

Active Directory)
Global catalog
LDAP
TCP
3269
Outbound
Active Directory
LDAP
TCP
389
Outbound
McAfee Quarantine HTTP

Manager
HTTPS
TCP
80
Your MQM server
Bidirectional
McAfee Global
HTTPS
Threat Intelligence
message
reputation
TCP
443
tunnel.web.trustedsource.org
Outbound
McAfee Global
DNS
Threat Intelligence
file reputation
UDP
53
Your DNS server
Outbound
McAfee Global
HTTPS
Threat Intelligence
feedback
TCP
443
gtifeedback.trustedsource.org Outbound
443
Ports used for Email Hybrid communication

When you configure your Email Gateway for hybrid scanning with the McAfee Email Protection
(Hybrid), the following ports are used by default for communication between Email Gateway and
McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid).
Table 1-5 Email Hybrid communication ports
Use

Destination
Protocol
Protocol
Number
Direction
Email Hybrid
Proprietary
TCP
25
Your Email Gateway

appliance
Inbound
Email Hybrid
HTTPS
(hybridapi.mxlogic.com)
TCP
443
208.65.144.0/21
Outbound
Anti-spam cloud lookup
TCP
HTTPS
208.81.64.0/21
443
default.megrh.mxlogic.net Outbound
Ports used for ePolicy Orchestrator communication

When you configure ePolicy Orchestrator to manage or monitor and report on your Email Gateway
appliances, the following ports are used by default for communication between ePolicy Orchestrator
and your appliances.
22
Product Guide

Table 1-6 ePolicy Orchestrator communication ports

Port usage
Port number
Agent-to-server communication port
80
Agent-to-server communication secure port
443 (when enabled)
Agent wake-up communication port
8081 (default)
Agent broadcast communication port
8082 (default)
Console-to-application server communication port
8443
Client-to-server authenticated communication port
8444
Intercept ports
When operating in transparent modes transparent bridge mode or transparent router mode the
appliance uses the following intercept ports to intercept traffic for scanning.
Table 1-7 Intercept ports
Protocol
Port number
POP3
110
SMTP
25
Listening ports
The appliance typically uses the following ports to listen for traffic on each protocol. The appliance
listens for traffic arriving on the designated ports. You can set up one or more listening ports for each
type of traffic scanned by your appliance.
Table 1-8 Typical listening ports
Protocol
Port number
POP3
110
SMTP
25
IP addresses needed for communication between Email Gateway and the McAfee
Email Protection (Hybrid)
To allow communication between Email Gateway and the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid), you must
ensure that relevant IP addresses for the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) can be accessed from your
Email Gateway appliances.
Preferred Setting
If your hardware firewall solution accepts CIDR notation and supports Class 8 C notation, include the
following information:
CIDR
Starting IP address
Ending IP address
208.65.144.0/21
208.65.144.0
208.65.151.255
208.81.64.0/21
208.81.64.0
208.81.71.255
Alternative settings
Product Guide
23

Resources
If your hardware firewall solution accepts CIDR notation but supports only Class 1 C notation, you
must include the following entries for the entire subnet:
CIDR
Starting IP address
Ending IP address
208.65.144.0/24
208.65.144.0
208.65.144.255
208.65.145.0/24
208.65.145.0
208.65.145.255
208.65.146.0/24
208.65.146.0
208.65.146.255
208.65.147.0/24
208.65.147.0
208.65.147.255
208.65.148.0/24
208.65.148.0
208.65.148.255
208.65.149.0/24
208.65.149.0
208.65.149.255
208.65.150.0/24
208.65.150.0
208.65.150.255
208.65.151.0/24
208.65.151.0
208.65.151.255
208.81.64.0/24
208.81.64.0
208.81.64.255
208.81.65.0/24
208.81.65.0
208.81.65.255
208.81.66.0/24
208.81.66.0
208.81.66.255
208.81.67.0/24
208.81.67.0
208.81.67.255
208.81.68.0/24
208.81.68.0
208.81.68.255
208.81.69.0/24
208.81.69.0
208.81.69.255
208.81.70.0/24
208.81.70.0
208.81.70.255
208.81.71.0/24
208.81.71.0
208.81.71.255
Further alternate setting

If your hardware firewall solution does not accept CIDR notation, you must include the start and end
IP addresses for the Class 8 C or the Class 1 C addresses.
Least desirable setting
If your hardware firewall does not accept CIDR notation or ranges of starting and ending IP addresses,
you can download a complete listing of affected IP addresses at: http://co.mcafeesaas.com/configtest/
validiplist.txt.
You can make any of these changes by creating a firewall rule or restricting access at the server level.
We highly recommend that you lock down these subnets at your firewall as the priority preference.
Before making changes, speak to your network administrator. For additional information regarding the
restriction of IP addresses, see the instructions for setting up your firewall or the guidelines from your
firewall provider.
Resources
The information, links, and supporting files that you can find from the Resources dialog box.
Click Resources from the black information bar at the top of the McAfee Email Gateway user interface.
The Resources dialog box contains links to different areas or to files that you might need when setting
up your appliance.
24
Product Guide

Resources
Link name
Description
Technical
Support
Clicking this link takes you to the McAfee Technical Support ServicePortal login page
(https://mysupport.mcafee.com/Eservice/Default.aspx).
From this page, you can search the KnowledgeBase, view product documentation and
video tutorials, as well as access other technical support services.
Submit a sample
If you have a file that you believe to be malicious, but that your McAfee systems are
not detecting, you can safely submit it to McAfee for further analysis.
Follow the Submit a sample link and either log on or register as a new user to access the
McAfee Labs Tool to submit suspicious files.
Virus Information Viruses are continually evolving, with new malicious files being developed daily. To
Library
find out more about particular viruses or other threats, follow the link to the McAfee
Threat Center.
McAfee
This free tool integrates into Microsoft Outlook and allows users to submit missed
Customer
spam samples and email that was wrongly categorized as spam to McAfee Labs.
Submission Tool McAfee Customer Submission Tool version 2.3 can also be used with McAfee Email
Gateway and McAfee Quarantine Manager.
The tool supports automated blacklisting and whitelisting, and has an installer that
supports automated script-based installations.
The latest McAfee Customer Submission Tool and documents can also be downloaded
from the following location:
http://www.mcafee.com/us/downloads/free-tools/customer-submission-tool.aspx
ePO Extensions
Download the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator extensions for Email and Web Security
Appliances.
This file contains both the EWG and the EWS extensions.
The EWG extension allows reporting from within McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator for the
following products:
McAfee Email and Web Security Appliances version 5.5
McAfee Email and Web Security Appliances version 5.6
McAfee Web Gateway
McAfee Email Gateway
The EWS extension provides full McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator management for McAfee
Email and Web Security Appliances version 5.6.
For you to use McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator for either reporting or management, the
ePO extensions need to be installed on your McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator server.
ePO Help
Extensions
Download the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator Help extensions for the ePO extensions
listed above.
This file installs the Help extensions relating to the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator
extensions for Email and Web Security Appliances onto your McAfee ePolicy
Orchestrator server.
SMI File
Download the Structure of Managed Information (SMI) file for use with the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
This file provides information about the syntax used by the SNMP Management
Information Base (MIB) file.
MIB File
Download the MIB file for use with SNMP.

This file is used to define the information that your McAfee Email Gateway can
transmit using SNMP.
HP OpenView
NNM Smart
Plug-in Installer
Download the HP OpenView installer file to enable you to configure your McAfee Email
Gateway to communicate with HP OpenView.
Product Guide
25


To view a selection of frequently asked questions that have been submitted by other customers, and
learn the answers provided by McAfee Technical Support, refer to KnowledgeBase article KB76144.
Using the McAfee Email Gateway 7.x troubleshooting tree

McAfee support has published a troubleshooting tree to assist you in resolving issues that you might
experience with your McAfee Email Gateway.
Download the McAfee Email Gateway 7.x troubleshooting tree from KnowledgeBase article PD23748.

You can upgrade Email Gateway physical appliances, virtual appliances, or blade servers to the latest
version of the Email Gateway software. You can select how much of the previous configuration to
apply to the upgraded software. Upgrades can be applied with a CD or remotely.
Upgrading or migrating settings from previous versions restores all protocol, policy, and system
settings using the migration tools within Email Gateway. This process ensuring your previous levels of
protection are maintained in all areas.
The term 'upgrading your appliance' refers to installing the latest version of the software onto your
existing hardware or virtual appliances. The term 'migrating' refers to you setting up new hardware or
virtual appliances with the latest version of the Email Gateway software. When you have installed the
software, you use the in-built migration tools to restore the protocol, policy, and systems settings from
your existing Email Gateway system.
Benefits of upgrading from previous versions of the product

Learn how to upgrade from Email Gateway 7.5.3 or higher.
There are several supported methods to manage the process in the way that is best suited to your
organization:
From an Email Gateway installation CD, perform a new installation and then restore a configuration
file from a previous version.
From an Email Gateway installation CD, perform an upgrade from a previous version, retaining
configuration and log files.
Perform the upgrade remotely, by obtaining the latest Email Gateway ISO image and uploading it
to your Email Gateway. Use the Rescue Image feature (System | System Administration | Rescue Image) to
perform this remote upgrade.
Features associated with LDAP and role-based access control include enhanced protection options in
Email Gateway.
26
Product Guide

Migrate settings from Email Gateway 7.5.3 or higher

This task describes how to migrate settings from version 7.5.3 or higher to the latest version of Email
Gateway.
Before you begin
Before performing any upgrade, back up your Email Gateway configuration (System | Cluster
Management | Backup and Restore Configuration).
If upgrading a cluster of appliances, first upgrade the Failover Management appliance. Repeat the
upgrade on the Management appliance, and then upgrade all scanning appliances.
If installing on a blade server, first upgrade the Failover Management blade. Repeat the upgrade on
the Management blade, and then upgrade all scanning blades.
Task
1
Switch on the appliance or blade server, and agree to the license agreement.
When the installation options menu appears, choose one of the following installation options:
a
To upgrade from the appliance itself:
Choose option a to perform a new installation, then restore the Email Gateway configuration
from a previously backed up configuration file.
Choose option c to back up the configuration, policies, log files, and email messages and
restore them automatically when you install the latest version of Email Gateway.
Choose option d to restore only the network configuration settings.
Choose option e to restore policy settings, but no log files or email messages.
To get a description of the installation options, press the RETURN key on the installation
options menu . Press the RETURN key to continue through the descriptions until you return to
the installation options menu.
Use the installation options menu to define further options, such as the action you want to take
when the installation finishes. Press the ENTER key.
Select option a to perform the upgrade, then press the ENTER key to confirm the installation
option that you chose.
Press the RETURN key to complete the installation, and wait while the computer restarts.
Open a web browser, and connect to the appliance's IP address.

If you chose option a, select Restore from a File to reinstate the previous configuration settings.
Depending on your chosen installation option, all protocol, email policy, and system settings from
Email Gateway 7.5.3 or higher are migrated. This migration ensures that your previous levels of
protection are maintained.
To change any network settings after installation, select System | Appliance Management | General and click
Change Network Settings.
Product Guide
27

Task Migrate settings from Email Gateway virtual appliances

7.5.3 or higher
Use this task to upgrade to the latest version from an existing Email Gateway virtual appliance using
the software .ISO installation file .
Before you begin
You must have Email Gateway virtual appliance 7.5.3 or higher already installed.
After an operating system is installed on a virtual appliance, the virtual machine always starts from
the hard disk first. To work around this feature, you have to shut down the virtual machine and
configure a power-on-boot delay so that you have enough time to access the Boot menu and tell it to
start from the installation CD instead.
Task
1
Download the Email Gateway virtual appliance .ISO file from the McAfee download site and extract
it.
Shut down the virtual appliance:

a
Log on to the virtual appliance user interface and go to System | System Administration | System
Commands
Enter the password.
Select Shutdown Appliance.
Log on to VMware ESX Server or use the VMware Infrastructure Client, or the VMware vSphere
Client to log on to VMware Virtual Center Server.
Enable a Power-on-Boot delay to get enough time to force the virtual machine to boot from CD:
a
Select the virtual appliance in the Inventory list and click Summary.
Select Edit Settings | Options | Boot Options.
In Power-on-Boot delay, type 10,000 in the text box, and click OK.
Turn on the virtual appliance.
Make sure the cursor focus is on the virtual appliance console. Then press the ESC key to open the
Boot Menu.
Do not select any options yet.
Release the cursor from the console and select Connect CD/DVD1.
Browse to the folder where you downloaded the Email Gateway virtual appliance .ISO file and
double-click <McAfee-MEG 7.6-<build-number>.VMbuy.iso>.
When the .ISO file is connected, click back on to the console screen. Select CD-ROM Drive and press
the ENTER key.
The virtual appliance starts from the .ISO file.
10 Press y to agree to the terms of the license agreement.

11 Select the upgrade option that you want, and press the ENTER key to perform the upgrade.
12 Type y to confirm that you want to continue.
28
Product Guide

Depending on your chosen installation option, all protocol, email policy, and system settings from your
Email Gateway virtual appliance 7.5.3 or higher are migrated. This migration ensures that your
previous levels of protection are maintained.
Task Upgrade from Email Gateway 7.6.2 or higher appliances

managed by McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator
Use this task to upgrade to the latest version from an existing Email Gateway appliance managed by
McAfee ePO.
Before you begin
When upgrading the software on appliances that are managed by McAfee ePO, it is
important that you upgrade the components in the following order:
Upgrade the software on all appliances.
Download the ePO Extensions and ePO Help Extensions from the Resources link
within the user interface of one of the upgraded appliances.
From within your McAfee ePO user interface, install the new versions of the
ePO Extensions and ePO Help Extensions.
Before you can upgrade to the latest version of Email Gateway, your existing appliance
must be running Email Gateway version 7.6.2 and be correctly configured and running.
This upgrade process automatically disconnects the appliance from being managed by
McAfee ePO.
The in-built Email Gateway migration tools migrate many of your existing Email Gateway settings for
you. However, some settings may need to be recreated.
Task
1
In McAfee ePO, click Policy Catalog and select the Email Gateway 7.6.2 or higher product.
Click Export to export the product policies.
Right-click the Policies_for_McAfee_Email_Gateway_7.<x>.xml link, and save the file.
Go to your Email Gateway appliance.
Go to System | Component Management | ePO.
Select Migrate ePO Configuration.
Import the Policies_for_McAfee_Email_Gateway_7.<x>.xml file you just created.

The import process can take a few minutes to complete.
Select the epo_config_<date_stamp>.xml file produced at the end of this process, and save the file.
From the Email Gateway Resources link, download the ePO Extensions and ePO Help Extensions files.
10 From McAfee ePO, install the ePO Extensions and ePO Help Extensions files.
11 In McAfee ePO, click Policy Catalog and select the McAfee Email Gateway 7.<x> product.
Product Guide
29

About timeouts
12 Click Import, and import the epo_config_<date_stamp>.xml you saved in step 8.

The policies and settings within the configuration file are migrated across to your McAfee ePO
server.
After you have imported the settings into Email Gateway managed by McAfee ePO, you need to
re-assign the migrated policies to the correct groups in the System Tree in McAfee ePO.
13 On McAfee ePO, navigate to Menu | Gateway Protection | Email and Web Gateway.
14 From Actions, select Export Connection Settings. Save the epoConfig<xxxxxxx>.zip file.
15 On your Email Gateway, navigate to System | Component Management | ePO, click Import ePO connection
settings. Browse to the epoConfig<xxxxxxx>.zip file, and click OK.
Your McAfee ePO configuration settings are imported into your Email Gateway appliance.
16 Select both Enable ePO management, and Allow configuration to be applied from ePO.
17 Apply changes within your Email Gateway.
Your upgraded appliance is again under McAfee ePO control.
If you had documents registered for Data Loss Prevention in your previous Email Gateway appliance,
the document fingerprints for these are copied to your new Email Gateway McAfee ePO installation.
If you chose to create a scheduled task to push your previous Email Gateway DLP database to the new
Email Gateway version, you will need to create an equivalent scheduled task to push the new Email
Gateway DLP database to your appliance.
About timeouts
Learn about the timeouts that occur between the appliance receiving a message, scanning it, and
delivering it.
When the appliance receives an email message, the SMTP conversation and corresponding timeouts
occur as follows:
Where T equals "Time".
T0 The time the appliance receives the connection (where time = zero)
T1 The time taken between commands (EHLO, MAIL FRIM, RCPT TO, DATA (but not the dot that
signifies the end of DATA), RSET) defined in Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Connection
Settings (SMTP) | Timeouts
T2 The time taken between receiving the chunks of data during DATA transfer
T3 The time taken for the whole conversation to occur, that is, to receive a message, scan it,
and deliver it
T4 The total time taken to scan the message, that is, when the appliance has received all the
data
T5 The appliance has received all the data
As an email message passes through the appliance, the following timeouts are applied.
30
Product Guide

Client: Connection
Appliance: 220 banner
The appliance waits T1 seconds to receive the next command
Client: EHLO
Appliance: 250 OK
Client: MAIL FROM: from @.bc
Appliance: 220 OK
Client: RCPT TO: rcpt@e.f

Appliance 220 OK
Client: DATA
Appliance: 354 Enter mail, end with "dot" on a line by itself
The appliance waits T2 seconds to receive each chunk of data
Client:
Subject: 1234
Hello there
The appliance scans the data
The appliance waits T4 seconds to scan the data
The appliance delivers the message and makes an onward connection. It has taken T3 T5
T0 to deliver the message. In other words, if the overall time to process a message is six
minutes, (T3), and receiving the message and scanning has taken four minutes, the appliance
has two minutes to deliver the message. If this limit is exceeded, the email is queued for
delivery later.
Appliance: 250 OK

Describes how to configure the appliance in FIPS 140-2 mode.
FIPs mode is enabled during installation. When the appliance is installed with FIPS mode enabled, the
Email Gateway installation menu (available locally, serial, ssh) is available. By default, it does not
include "Shell access"
To enable FIPS, select Option k Enable FIPS 140-2 level 1 compliant installation in the configuration console, then
select Option a - Perform installation.
In the Email Gateway Configuration Menu, a FIPS option is available. Select it to access the following options:
Product Guide
31

Table 1-9 Option definitions

Option Definition
Shell
Enable or disable shell access (disabled by default)

This option makes the appliance non FIPS compliant.
Failure
Configure how to handle FIPS validation failure:

Ignore the failure and continue booting.
Prompt for cryptographic officer password (Default).
This privilege is available to an administrator role with Access system administration privileges.
SSLFIPS Enable or disable the OpenSSL FIPS checking (enabled by default) All applications on the
appliance that use the OpenSSL library perform the OpenSSL FIPS validity check when they
start. If it causes compatibility issues with other devices, it can be disabled
Validate
Re-run FIPS validity tests The ability to re-run the tests and view the output in the console.
To check that the appliance is running in FIPS mode, click About the Appliance in the menu bar. The FIPS
140-2 Compliant status shows Yes, No, or Partial.
A Partial status is given in the following situations:
The Shell is enabled.
FIPS validation failures occurred, where the failure handling has been modified from the
default setting Prompt for cryptographic officer password.
OpenSSL checking is disabled.
Go to Reports | System Reports in the user interface to get more information about the FIPS
status.

If the McAfee Email Gateway user interface becomes inaccessible, you can reset the access.
Contents
Reasons the user interface might be locked out
Reset user interface access
Reasons the user interface might be locked out

McAfee Email Gateway includes several features and methods to enable you to secure access to the
user interface.
However, it is possible to configure these secure access features so that they can prevent all access to
the McAfee Email Gateway user interface.
You can resolve the following lock-out scenarios:
32
The user-configured management port is being blocked by a firewall, preventing access to the
appliance user interface.
A badly formed Access Control List (ACL) can result in 403 Forbidden responses when you attempt
to log on to the user interface.
Product Guide

X.509 (also known as Department of Defense Common Access Card or DoD CAC) authentication
can be misconfigured in a number of ways, perhaps because the CA certificates required to validate
the user certificates are not present, the user certificates have expired, role mapping has been
mistyped, or the certificate chain length might exceed the permitted length.
If out-of-band management has been enabled on the appliance but incorrectly configured, and
in-band management has been disabled, the appliance user interface will not be accessible from
any network interface.
Reset user interface access

Reset access to the McAfee Email Gateway user interface if it becomes inaccessible.
Before you begin
To reset access to the McAfee Email Gateway user interface, ensure that you have a
keyboard and monitor connected to your physical appliance. If you have a virtual
installation of McAfee Email Gateway, use your VMware management system to open a
console session to your virtual appliance.
Task
1
Log on to the McAfee Email Gateway using the administrator account.
Select 2. Configuration console, then press Enter.

The Configuration Menu is displayed.
From the Configuration Menu, select Manage and then press Enter.
The Management Menu is displayed.
Select GUI, then press Enter.

The GUI Menu is displayed. Potentially problematic settings appear in red at the top of the page.
Reset options appear at the bottom of the page.
For each potentially problematic setting:

a
Select a reset option, then press Enter.

A single checkbox is displayed.
Use the space bar to select or deselect the checkbox, then press Enter.
The relevant reset screen is displayed. If you have multiple issues that may cause access to be
locked out, repeat this process for the other problematic settings.
6
When you have reset any problematic settings, select Quit until the top-level Configuration Menu is
displayed.
Select Apply. Press Enter.

Confirm that you want to apply your changes. Your McAfee Email Gateway configuration is updated
with the problematic settings removed.
Product Guide
33

34
Product Guide
When you first open the browser, you see the Dashboard, which gives a summary of the activity of the
appliance.
Dashboard
From this page you can access most of the pages that control the appliance.
Contents
Benefits of using the Dashboard
Dashboard portlets
Configurable thresholds
Option definitions Inbound Mail Summary portlet
Option definitions Outbound Mail Summary portlet
Option definitions SMTP Detections portlet
Option definitions POP3 Detections portlet
Option definitions System Summary portlet
Option definitions Hardware Summary portlet
Option definitions Network Summary portlet
Option definitions Services portlet
Option definitions Clustering portlet
Option definitions Advanced Threat Defense portlet
Option definitions Tasks portlet
Task Setting System Summary thresholds
Task Setting Services thresholds
Product Guide
35


The Dashboard provides a single location for you to view summaries of the activities of the appliance
through a series of portlets.
Figure 2-1 Dashboard portlets
Some portlets display graphs that show appliance activity over the following periods of time:
1 hour
2 weeks
1 day (the default)
4 weeks
1 week
Within the Dashboard, you can make some changes to the information and graphs displayed:
Expand and collapse the portlet data using the

corner.
Drill down to specific data using the
See a status indicator that shows whether the item needs attention:
36
and
and
buttons in the portlet's top right-hand
buttons.
Healthy The reported items are functioning normally.

Requires Attention A warning threshold has been exceeded.
Requires Immediate Attention A critical threshold has been exceeded.
Disabled A service is not enabled.
Use
and
to zoom in and zoom out of a timeline of information. There is a short delay while
the view is updated. By default, the Dashboard shows data relating to the previous one day.
Move a portlet to another location on the Dashboard.
Product Guide

Dashboard portlets
Double-click the top bar of a portlet to expand it across the top of the Dashboard.
Set your own alert and warning thresholds to trigger events. To do so, highlight the item and click
it, edit the alert and warning threshold fields, and click Save. When the item exceeds the threshold
you set, an event is triggered.
Depending on the browser used to view the McAfee Email Gateway user interface, the Dashboard
"remembers" the current state of each portlet (whether it is expanded or collapsed, and if you have
drilled down to view specific data), and attempts to re-create that view if you navigate to another page
within the user interface and then return to the Dashboard within the same browsing session.
Dashboard portlets
The McAfee Email Gateway Dashboard portlets provide information about the state of email traffic,
recent detections and the current status of your McAfee Email Gateway.
Option
Definition
Inbound Mail
Summary
Displays the delivery and status information about messages sent to your
organization.
Outbound Mail
Summary
Displays the delivery and status information about messages sent from your
organization.
SMTP Detections
Displays the total number of messages that triggered a detection based on the
sender or connection, the recipient, or the content, and to view data specific to
either inbound or outbound SMTP traffic.
POP3 Detections
Displays how many messages triggered a detection based on threats such as

viruses, packers, or potentially inappropriate images.
System Summary
Displays information about load balancing, the disk space used for each partition,
total CPU usage, used and available memory, and swap details.
Hardware Summary
Status indicators to show the status of network interfaces, UPS servers, bridge
mode (if enabled), and RAID status.
Network Summary
Provides information about the status of your connections, network throughput

and counters relating to Kernel Mode Blocking
Services
Displays update and service status statistics based on protocol and external
servers used by the appliance.
Clustering
Provides information about the entire cluster when appliance is part of a cluster or
you are using the blade server hardware.
Tasks
Links directly to the areas of the user interface that search the message queue,
view reports, manage policies, configure mail protocol settings and network and
system settings, and access troubleshooting features.
Configurable thresholds
You can configure user-defined warning thresholds and critical thresholds for some status indicators.
When set, McAfee Email Gateway then provides the relevant level of warnings when these
user-defined values are exceeded.
For the System Summary portlet, you can configure the threshold values for the following parameters:
Swap | Used
Disk Space | /deferred | Inodes used
Disk Space | /deferred | Disk used
Product Guide
37

Disk Space | /encryption | Inodes used

Disk Space | /encryption | Disk used
Disk Space | /logs | Inodes used
Disk Space | /logs | Disk used
Disk Space | /quarantine | Inodes used
Disk Space | /quarantine | Disk used
Disk Space | /scandir | Inodes used
Disk Space | /scandir | Disk used
Disk Space | /var | Inodes used
Disk Space | /var | Disk used
Disk Space | /wk | Inodes used
Disk Space | /wk | Disk used
Message Queue | Inbound
Message Queue | Outbound
Message Queue | Total
For the Services portlet, you can configure the threshold values for the following parameters:
External | McAfee ePO | Event reports
External | McAfee ePO | Communication Attempts
External | McAfee ePO | Configuration Integrity
External | McAfee ePO | Policy Enforcement
External | McAfee ePO | DLP DB Update

Use this portlet to get the delivery and status information about messages sent to your organization.
The information in this portlet relates to data from the SMTP Detections | Inbound portlet. Data is shown in
bar chart format.
Each incoming message is categorized as either:
38
Delivered
Queued for ATD
Blocked
Queued
Product Guide

Bounced
Scanning Skipped
Quarantined
Counter
Definition
Total Inbound
Messages
A top level counter which increments for each email that passes the MAIL FROM stage
of the SMTP conversation.
If multiple messages are sent down one connection, this counter will increment. You
can drill down to see how the email connection was received:
TLS The email was received over a TLS connection.
Non TLS The email was received over a standard non TLS connection.
Delivered
A top level counter which increments for each email that is delivered. You can drill
down to see how the email was delivered:
Plain The email was delivered as a standard plain message.
Encrypted The email was delivered encrypted by:
TLS The email was delivered over a TLS connection:
Secure Web Mail The content was encrypted using one of the following methods:
Push
Pull
Push/Pull
S/Mime The content was encrypted by S/MIME.
PGP The content was encrypted by PGP.
Plain The content was a standard plain message.
Non TLS The email was delivered over a standard non TLS connection:
Secure Web Mail The content was encrypted by one of the following methods:
Push
Pull
Push/Pull
Product Guide
39

Counter
Definition
Blocked
A top level counter which increments for each email that is blocked. You can expand
the counter to see the number of messages blocked by sender or connection, recipient,
and content:
Sender/Connection provides a breakdown of the scanner that blocked the email,
either:
Deny Sender
BATV
RBL (Real-time blackhole lists)
SPF (Sender Policy Framework).
FCrDNS
Recipient provides a breakdown of the scanner that blocked the email, either:
Anti-Relay
LDAP Recipient
Grey Listing
Directory Harvesting
Rejected Recipient
Content provides a breakdown of the scanner that blocked the email, either:
GTI Message Reputation
Compliance
Sender ID
Image Filtering
DKIM
Mail URL Reputation
Spam
Mail URL Reputation DoS
Phish
DLP
Mail Filtering
Virus
Mail Size Filtering
PUPs
File Filtering
Packers
Denial of Service
Advanced Threat Defense
Bounced
The total number of inbound messages that were refused.
Scanning
Skipped
The total number of inbound messages that resulted in a policy-based action that did
not require scanning to be carried out.
Queued for ATD The total number of inbound messages that are currently queued to be sent to the
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers.
Queued
The total number of inbound messages that are queued awaiting delivery.
Quarantined
A top level counter which increments for each message that is quarantined.
The total number of messages in all of the quarantine queues.
The total number of messages requested for release by users by quarantine digests.
From within the Quarantined area, you can also drill-down into the number of email
messages quarantined in each quarantine category.
A single message may be quarantined to more than one category. Summing the total
number of messages in all categories will not necessarily generate the total quarantined
messages.
40
Sender and
Recipient
Type the name of a particular sender or recipient for whom you wish to locate a
message, and click Search to go to the Message Search page.
Search
Click Search to go to the Message Search feature where you can look for messages based
on their status; either blocked, bounced, delivered, quarantined, or queued.
Product Guide


Use this portlet to get the delivery and status information about messages sent from your
organization.
The information in this portlet relates to data from the SMTP Detections | Outbound portlet. Each incoming
message is categorized as either:
Delivered
Queued for ATD
Blocked
Queued
Bounced
Quarantined
Scanning Skipped
If you are using the quarantine features, messages may also summarized in the quarantined list.
Counter
Definition
Total Outbound A top level counter which increments for each email that passes the MAIL TO stage of
Messages
the SMTP conversation.
If multiple messages are sent down one connection, this counter will increment. You
can drill down to see how the email connection was received:
TLS The email was received over a TLS connection.
Non TLS The email was received over a standard non TLS connection.
Delivered
A top level counter which increments for each email that is delivered. You can drill
down to see how the email was delivered:
Plain The email was delivered as a standard plain message
Encrypted The email was delivered encrypted by:
TLS The email was delivered over a TLS connection:
Secure Web Mail the content was encrypted using one of the following methods:
Push
Pull
Push/Pull
Plain The content was a standard plain message.
Non TLS The email was delivered over a standard non TLS connection:
Secure Web Mail The content was encrypted by one of the following methods:
Push
Pull
Push/Pull
Product Guide
41

Counter
Definition
Blocked
A top level counter which increments for each email that is blocked. You can expand
the counter to see the number of messages blocked by sender or connection, recipient,
and content:
Sender/Connection Provides a breakdown of the scanner that blocked the email,
either:
Deny Sender
BATV
SPF (Sender Policy Framework).
FCrDNS
Recipient Provides a breakdown of the scanner that blocked the email, either:
Anti-Relay
LDAP Recipient
Grey Listing
Rejected Recipient
Content Provides a breakdown of the scanner that blocked the email, either:
Compliance
Sender ID
Image Filtering
DKIM
Mail URL Reputation
Spam
Phish
DLP
Mail Filtering
Virus
Mail Size Filtering
PUPs
File Filtering
Packers
Denial of Service
Bounced
The total number of outbound messages that were refused.
Scanning
Skipped
The total number of outbound messages that resulted in a policy-based action that did
not require scanning to be carried out.
Queued for ATD The total number of outbound messages that are currently queued to be sent to the
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense server.
Queued
The total number of outbound messages that are queued awaiting delivery.
Quarantined
A top level counter which increments for each message that is quarantined.
The total number of messages in all of the quarantine queues.
The total number of messages requested for release by users by quarantine digests.
number of messages in all categories will not necessarily generate the total quarantined
messages.
Search
42
Click Search to go to the Message Search feature where you can look for messages based
on their status; either blocked, bounced, delivered, quarantined, or queued.
Product Guide


Use this portlet to find out the total number of messages that triggered a detection based on the
sender or connection, the recipient, or the content, and to view data specific to either inbound or
outbound SMTP traffic.
The counters that appear in this portlet work differently to those in the Inbound and Outbound
Summary portlets where each message represents a single counter. In the Detections portlets, one
message can increment several counters, depending on the number of checks it fails.
Product Guide
43

Option Definition
Total
Shows the total number of inbound and outbound messages that triggered a detection, and
expands the statistics further to see the number of messages based on the following
criteria:
Sender/Connection Provides a breakdown of the scanner that triggered a detection, either:
Deny Sender
BATV
SPF (Sender Policy Framework)
FCrDNS
Recipient Provides a breakdown of the scanner that triggered a detection, either:
Anti-Relay
LDAP Recipient
Grey Listing
Rejected Recipient
Policy Based Action Provides a count of the actions taken based on policy rather than a
scanning trigger.
Content Provides a breakdown of the scanner that triggered a detection, either:
Sender ID
DKIM
Spam
Phish
Mail Filtering
Mail Size Filtering
File Filtering
Denial of Service
Compliance
Image Filtering
Mail URL Reputation
DLP
Virus By either the McAfee or the Commtouch
Command scanner
PUPs By either the McAfee or the Commtouch
Command scanner
Packers By either the McAfee or the Commtouch
Command scanner

Inbound
Shows the total number of inbound messages that triggered a detection, and expands the
statistics further to see the number of messages based on the following criteria:
Deny Sender
BATV
FCrDNS
44
Product Guide

Option Definition
Anti-Relay
LDAP Recipient
Grey Listing
Rejected Recipient
scanning trigger.
Sender ID
DKIM
Spam
Phish
Mail Filtering
Mail Size Filtering
File Filtering
Denial of Service
Compliance
Image Filtering
Mail URL Reputation
DLP
Command scanner
Command scanner
Command scanner

Outbound Shows the total number of inbound messages that triggered a detection, and expands the
statistics further to see the number of messages based on the following criteria:
Deny Sender
BATV
FCrDNS
Anti-Relay
LDAP Recipient
Grey Listing
Rejected Recipient
scanning trigger.
Product Guide
45

Option Definition
Sender ID
DKIM
Spam
Phish
Mail Filtering
Mail Size Filtering
File Filtering
Denial of Service
Compliance
Image Filtering
Mail URL Reputation
DLP
Command scanner
Command scanner
Command scanner

This information describes the data available from the POP3 Detections portlet. From here, find out
how many messages triggered a detection based on threats such as viruses, packers, or potentially
inappropriate images.
The counters that appear in this portlet work differently to those in the Inbound and Outbound
Summary portlets where each message represents a single counter incrementation. In the Detections
portlets, one message can increment several counters, depending on the number of checks it fails.
46
Option
Definition
Spam
Messages that could originate from a spammer.
Phish
Messages that could contain a phish attack.
Mail Size Filtering
Messages filtered because of their size.
Image Filtering
Messages that could contain inappropriate or pornographic images.
Virus
Messages that exhibit virus-like behavior or content.
PUPs
Messages that contain potentially unwanted programs.
Packers
Messages that could contain packers.
Product Guide


The System Summary portlet displays information about load balancing, the disk space used for each
partition, total CPU usage, used and available memory, and swap details.
Option
Definition
Uptime
Displays the amount of time the appliance has been running since it was last started
Load Average
Displays the five second load average
Processor
Displays the total usage for all processors
Memory
Displays:
Memory used includes used and buffered memory
Free memory includes free and cached memory
Displays:
Swap
Used Percentage used of swap (the area on the hard disk that is part of the
appliance's virtual memory which temporarily stores inactive memory pages if there
is insufficient physical memory available to do so.)
Rate A high swap-rate indicates the system is in some form of overload.
Disk Space
Displays the percentage of Inodes and disk space used for each partition
Message Queue Displays the current status of the message queue.

The Hardware Summary portlet uses status indicators to show the status of network interfaces, UPS
servers, bridge mode (if enabled), and RAID status.
Information states
On the Hardware Summary portlet, there are the following status indicators available:
functioning normally
a warning threshold has been exceeded
a critical threshold has been exceeded
the service is not enabled.
Further descriptions of a red status indicator for external services are given in the definition table.
Product Guide
47

Option
Definition
Network
Interface
Shows the following for LAN1 and LAN2:

Received Data received over the network interface
Transmitted Data sent over the network interface
Speed Speed of the network interface in bits per second
A red status indicator against any Network Interface indicates that urgent attention is
required.
You may need to:

Review your network configuration and check it is correct.
Check that the switch is functioning correctly.
Check that the switch configuration is correct.
Check the cabling to and from the appliance. (Not necessary for the Content
Security Blade Server).
In virtual appliance installations, check the virtual switch configuration.
Hardware
Modules
Shows a summary status indicator about the following hardware modules:

Temperature
Cooling Device
Voltage
Memory
Fan
Module Board
Current
Cable Interconnect
Physical Security
Management subsystem
Power Supply
Any module that is not installed is categorized as Not Applicable. Any module that shows as
red or amber contains links to Troubleshoot | Tools | Hardware Status where you can get more
detailed information.
UPS
When enabled, the following status indicators are available:
Healthy The UPS is online with the mains power working

Requires Attention Due to one of the following potential reasons:
Using battery power (that is, not
mains power)
The UPS is overloaded
The battery is discharging
The UPS is trimming or boosting

incoming voltage
No battery protection is available
48
Requires Immediate Attention The UPS is offline

Critical The battery is low
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Bridge
A red status indicates that McAfee Email Gateway is running in bridge mode, and is not
forwarding the network data.
RAID
Depending on the type of RAID controller and hard disk drives installed on your appliance
or blade server, the overall status of the RAID system is displayed:
Healthy The RAID system is functioning correctly.

Requires attention The RAID system is functioning, but one or more of the hard disk
drives are reporting that a predictive failure is imminent.
Critical One or more hard disk drives have failed.
In addition, where this information is reported to McAfee Email Gateway, the status of
each hard disk drive within the RAID array is reported. The possible statuses for these
drives are:
Healthy The hard disk drive is functioning correctly.

Operational but requires attention The diagnostics within the hard disk drive is reporting
that failure of the drive is possible. This indicates that the drive needs to be replaced.
Requires immediate attention The hard disk drive has failed and needs to be replaced
immediately.

This information describes the data available from the Network Summary portlet.
Option
Definition
Connections
A top level counter which increments to show the total number of TCP connections
made to the SMTP port on the appliance
Throughput
A top level counter which increments to show the average throughput of data for all
TCP connections made to the SMTP port on the appliance
Kernel Mode
Blocking
A top level counter which increments to show the total number of SYN packets
blocked from an IP address that has triggered a Reject, close and deny (Block) action. The
GTI message reputation lookup feature is configured to perform this action by default
for the next ten minutes.
Within the Kernel Mode Blocking counter, you can also drill down to view information
about the number of Blocked Hosts.
The information given by the Kernel Mode Blocking counter are the number of blocked
packets for the currently selected time frame. The information given by the Blocked Hosts
counter are the number of hosts currently being blocked.
Product Guide
49


The Services portlet displays update and service status statistics based on protocol and external servers
used by the appliance.
Information states
On the Services portlet, the following status indicators are available:
Functioning normally.
A warning threshold has been exceeded.
A critical threshold has been exceeded.
The service is not enabled.
Further descriptions of a red status indicator for external services are given in the definition table.
50
Product Guide

Option Definition
Updates
Anti-Virus Shows the anti-virus DAT and engine update status. Any older than three days
are shown in red.
If you have activated the additional Commtouch Command anti-virus engine, information
specific to this engine is also shown.
Anti-Spam Shows the anti-spam definition and engine update status. Any older than 30
minutes are shown in red.
Status
Configuration Shows any configuration alerts, such as the appliance operating as an open
relay.
FIPS 140-2 Compliance When installed in FIPS-compliant mode, shows the current FIPS
status for the McAfee Email Gateway. More details information on the FIPS status can be
found at Troubleshoot | Tools | FIPS Status.
SMTP Service Shows whether the SMTP service is functioning correctly.
POP3 Service Shows whether the POP3 service is functioning correctly.
Encryption Service Shows whether the encryption service is functioning correctly.
External
McAfee ePO Shows the state of the communication between Email Gateway and McAfee
ePolicy Orchestrator.
The following are reported:
Event Reports Events are regularly sent from the appliance to the ePolicy Orchestrator
server for to be used to generate reports. If event files are not successfully uploaded,
this indicator turns red. (The default threshold is 25 files that failed to upload.)
Communication Attempts The appliance communicates with the ePolicy Orchestrator server
at regular intervals. Failures with these communication attempts are shown here.
Configuration Integrity The appliance checks that the configuration that has been pushed
by the ePolicy Orchestrator server does not contain any inconsistencies. Inconsistencies
could be a policy that refers to a Policy group or Directory service that might no longer
exist. The status is either Healthy, or Operational, but requires attention.
This issue can occur if incorrect ePolicy Orchestrator policies are assigned within the
ePolicy Orchestrator System tree.
Policy Enforcement Confirmation that the policy has been correctly enforced on the
appliance.
DLP DB Updates Confirmation that the Data Loss Prevention database has been correctly
updated.
MQM Shows the state of the communication between Email Gateway and McAfee
Quarantine Manager (MQM).
A red status indicates that communication between Email Gateway and MQM is broken.
GTI Message Reputation Shows the state of the communication between Email Gateway and
the McAfee Global Threat Intelligence (McAfee GTI) message reputation server.
A red status indicates that communication between Email Gateway and the McAfee
GTImessage reputation server is broken.
GTI Feedback Shows the state of the communication between Email Gateway and the
McAfee GTI feedback server.
Product Guide
51

Option Definition
A red status indicates that communication between Email Gateway and the McAfee GTI
feedback server is broken.
GTI File Reputation Shows the state of the communication between Email Gateway and the
McAfee GTI file reputation server.
A red status indicates that a DNS query of a sample <Artemis> query did not respond
with the expected answer.
RBL Shows the state of the communication between Email Gateway and any RBL
(Real-time Blackhole List) servers that are configured.
A red status indicates that communication between Email Gateway and RBL servers is
broken, or gray status can indicate that there are no servers to monitor.
Syslog Shows the state of the communication between Email Gateway and any off-box
system log servers that are configured.
A red status indicates that communication between Email Gateway and the system log
servers is broken, or a gray status can indicate that there are no servers to monitor.
LDAP Shows the state of the communication between Email Gateway and any LDAP
servers that are configured.
A red status indicates that a test query did not respond with the expected response, or
gray status can indicate that there are no servers to monitor.
SNMP Shows whether the SNMP service is functioning correctly.
A red status indicates that the SNMPD agent is not running or functioning correctly.
DNS Shows the state of the communication between Email Gateway and any DNS
servers that are configured.
A red status indicates that communication between Email Gateway and the DNS servers is
broken, or gray status can indicate that there are no servers to monitor.
NTP Shows the state of the communication between Email Gateway and active NTP
(Network Time Protocol) servers that are configured.
A red status indicates that the time synchronization is not up to date with the active NTP
server.
Anti-spam cloud lookup Shows the state of the communication between Email Gateway and
the anti-spam cloud servers.
A red status indicates that communication between Email Gateway and the anti-spam
cloud servers is broken.

This topic discusses the Clustering portlet found on the dashboard when you have configured your
appliance as part of a cluster, or if you are using the blade server hardware to run your Email
Gateway.
This section is available only on a cluster master appliance or management blade (on a blade
server).
52
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Email
When clicked, the meter displays Message per hour.
Message per hour
Displays the average throughput of the cluster, based on measurements taken every
few minutes. If the cluster has twice as many scanning appliances, its throughput
almost doubles too. Extra management activity consumes some of the processing
power
Status
Displays the status of the device:

Operating normally
Needs attention
Needs immediate attention
Scanning Device
Type
Displays the type of scanning device:

Cluster Master
Cluster Failover
Email Gateway Appliance
Name
Displays the name of the appliance as configured
State
Displays the current state of each appliance:

Network Connected to the network
Redundant The Cluster Failover device is not currently running but will take over if
the master cluster appliance fails
Install Installing software
Synchronizing Synchronizing with the cluster master
Boot Booting
Shutdown Shutting down
Malconfigured Configuration file is faulty
Unconfigured Not configured for load balancing
Disabled Disabled by the user
Failed No longer on the network. No heartbeat was detected
Fault A fault has been detected on this appliance
Legacy Not compatible for load balancing
Load
Displays the average system load over a period of five minutes
Active
Displays the number of active connections for each appliance. The row for the
cluster master shows the total for all appliance
Connections
Displays the number of connections handled by each appliance since the counters
were last reset
Component
Displays the versions of anti-spam and anti-virus DAT files. The version numbers are
version information the same if the appliances are up-to-date. During updating, the values might be
different. To see more information, move the cursor over the text and wait for a
yellow box to appear
Product Guide
53


When you have configured McAfee Email Gateway to communicate to your McAfee Advanced Threat
Defense servers, the Advanced Threat Defense portlet displays the current status of communication to your
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers.
On the Advanced Threat Defense portlet, the following status indicators are available:
Functioning normally.
Needs attention. This error is usually due to an issue with a specific scan request, rather than
general communication issues between the McAfee Email Gateway and McAfee Advanced Threat
Defense servers.
Needs immediate attention. This could be because authentication to the Advanced Threat Defense
server has failed, incorrect credentials have been entered or other communication errors between
the McAfee Email Gateway and McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers have occurred.

Option
Definition
<McAfee Advanced Threat Defense server name> Each of your configured McAfee Advanced Threat Defense
servers are listed.
54
Product Guide


Use the Tasks portlet to link directly to the areas of the user interface that search the message queue,
view reports, manage policies, configure mail protocol settings and network and system settings, and
access troubleshooting features.
Option
Definition
View Message
Queue and
Reports
Search the Message Queue Search for messages blocked, bounced, delivered,
quarantined, and queued by sender, recipient, and subject.
View Favorite Reports Display your most popular email reports in a variety of view
types.
Manage Scheduled Reports Create schedules for available report documents, such as
email activity.
Create Policy
Manage Policy (SMTP) Go to the Email Policies settings for the SMTP protocol where you
can create and edit policies for anti-virus and anti-spam protection, and compliance
settings.
Manage Policy (POP3) Go to the Email Policies settings for the POP3 protocol where you
can create and edit policies for anti-virus and anti-spam protection, and compliance
settings.
Manage Compliance Dictionaries Choose from a library of predefined rules, or create your
own rules and dictionaries specific to your organization. Compliance rules can vary in
complexity from a straightforward trigger when an individual term within a dictionary
is detected, to building on and combining score-based dictionaries which will only
trigger when a certain threshold is reached. Using the advanced features of
compliance rules, dictionaries can be combined using logical operations.
Register DLP Documents Restrict the flow of sensitive information sent by email
through the appliance. for example, block the transmission of a sensitive document
such as a financial report that is to be sent outside of your organization.
Configure Mail
Protocol
Configure Email Relay Domains Build a list of IP addresses, networks, and users who
can, or cannot connect to the appliance.
Configure Domain Routing Set up the network hosts that you want the appliance to use
to route mail traffic to specific domains.
Configure Encryption Enable the appliance to use supported encryption methods to
securely deliver your email messages.
Manage Certificates Use digitally signed certificates for tasks such as securely
transferring email using TLS, or using S/MIME certificates.
Configure
Network
Manage Network Settings View and edit basic settings for the appliance such as its
domain name, and the network interfaces settings.
Manage a Cluster Specify the appliance's load balancing requirements when it acts as
part of a cluster.
Manage Virtual Hosting Specify the addresses where the appliance receives or
intercepts mail traffic on the Inbound Address Pool.
Product Guide
55

Option
Definition
Configure
System
Configure ePO Management Set up the appliance to be managed by epolicy

Orchestrator.
Configure Quarantine Options Tell the appliane to store quarantined messages itself, or
to store them using the McAfee Quarantine Manager (MQM) service.
Generate Syslog Reports Set up and view system logs for a variety of events.
Define Directory Services Configure the appliance to work with your LDAP servers.
Configure SNMP Send alerts to the trap manager for a variety of events.
Configure DNS and Routing Create a list of DNS servers and sort them in order of
priority, and set up routes.
Troubleshoot
Generate a Minimum Escalation Reports Create a report that contains the minimum
information needed by support to help them diagnose a problem with the appliance.
Run System Tests Perform a series of tests on the appliance to ensure that key areas
are functioning correctly.
Back up and Restore Configuration Configure the appliance to back up the configuration,
or create a backup schedule, and restore the configuration if necessary.

Within the System Summary portlet, you can specify thresholds for some of the status indicators.
These thresholds are the points at which the status indicators change color and at which the appliance
logs an event, indicating a potential issue with your McAfee Email Gateway.
Task
1
Expand the Dashboard | System Summary portlet.
Drill down to an area that allows user-defined thresholds to be set.
Click the status indicator (the red, yellow or green circle) for the area on which to set the
threshold.
The parameter name is replaced as shown:
Adjust the threshold values for the

fields.
Click
Requires Attention and
Requires Immediate Attention threshold
to save the changed thresholds.
When the values for the dashboard information reaches the new threshold, the status indicator
changes to the appropriate color and an event is logged.
Events will not be logged until after the thresholds have been saved, the next Dashboard refresh has
taken place and the threshold has been hit or exceeded.
56
Product Guide


Within the Services portlet, you can specify thresholds related to McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator status
indicators.
You can set alerts and warnings for the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator-related status indicators.
You can set thresholds for warnings, alerts or both. The warning threshold must be equal to or less than
the alert threshold.
Task
1
Expand the Dashboard | Services portlet.
Click the status icon beside the area to have thresholds set.
The parameter name is replaced as shown:
Adjust the threshold values for the

fields.
Click
Requires Attention and
Requires Immediate Attention threshold
to save the changed thresholds.
When the values for the dashboard information reaches the new threshold, the status indicator
changes to the appropriate color and an event is logged.
Events will not be logged until after the thresholds have been saved, the next Dashboard refresh has
taken place and the threshold has been hit or exceeded.
Product Guide
57

58
Product Guide
This topic provides an overview of the features within Email Gateway that relate to reporting the
activities of the appliance.
Reports
Contents
Types of reports
Message Search overview
Option definitions Blacklist/whitelist URLs
Scheduled Reports
Scheduled Reports New Report dialog box
Scheduled Reports Edit Report dialog box
Email Reports
System Reports
Types of reports
You can generate reports either on your appliance, your ePolicy Orchestrator server, or externally.
System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP
Reports
Use the external methods to keep the reported events over a longer period of time than that offered
by the reporting options on the appliance itself. Use features available from System | Logging, Alerting and
SNMP, or McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator to send data to generate reports externally.
Table 3-1 External reporting options
External report
generation option
Definition
System log
System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP. Supports the common event formats for
Splunk and ArcSight.
SNMP
System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP. Supports the SNMP Alert Settings and SNMP
Monitor Settings options. The MIB file can be downloaded from the Resources tab
available from the appliances toolbar.
Product Guide
59

Table 3-1 External reporting options (continued)

External report
generation option
Definition
Email Alerting
System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP | Email Alerting. You can configure Email
Alerting to alert specified people about different events that occur on your
appliance.
McAfee ePolicy
Orchestrator
Use ePolicy Orchestrator to generate reports about multiple appliances and

security software within your organization, such as information about the
total number of viruses detected within your organization.
McAfee Web Reporter
System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP. Generates reports about Uniform Resource
Locator (URL) filtering activities. See the McAfee Web Reporter Product
Guide, available from the McAfee download site.
Use the appliance Dashboard to see high-level event statistics. Use the options in Reports to produce
regular and real-time reports on the following types of events on the appliance.
Table 3-2 Reporting options on the appliance
Report type
Definition
Scheduled reports Reports Set up regular activity overview (by protocol, threat type, and
detection), email detections, web detections, and system event reports and send
them to other administrators.
Email reports
Reports Create and view information about threats detected in the email passing
through your appliance, and the subsequent actions taken by the appliance.
System reports
Reports Create and view information about threat detection updates, and
system events.

Use this feature to search for email messages that have passed to the DATA phase on your appliance.
This feature is also available from within McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator.
Reports | Message search

Message Search provides you with a convenient method to locate email messages on your appliance.
If the appliance has not received the message body, the message cannot be found in Message Search. For
example, if an email message is blocked by the Real-time Blackhole Lists (RBLs), the appliance will not have
received the message body. In this situation, use Reports | Email Reports from the McAfee Email Gateway to
find further information about this email message.
Contents
Benefits of using Message Search
Message Search parameters
Message Search results
Message Search icons
Task Identify quarantined email messages
Task Find out which email messages are queued
Task Find out which email messages are being blocked
Task Find the emails that were successfully delivered
Task A user has requested that I release one of their quarantined email messages
60
Product Guide

Task Export a message search report

Task Find a message containing a named attachment
Using multiple search parameters
Searching for archived content
Task - Configure identification of archived content
Task - Find content of archived files
Benefits of using Message Search

Message Search enables you to search for email messages that have passed to the DATA phase on
your McAfee Email Gateway appliance.
Figure 3-1 Message Search
A common request from users is "What happened to the email message I sent yesterday?", or "My
supplier emailed me on Monday, why haven't I received his message yet?"
From a single location within the user interface, Message Search allows you to confirm the status of
email messages that have passed through the appliance. It provides you with information about the
email, including:
Was it delivered?
Was it blocked?
Did the message bounce?
Was the message quarantined?
Is the message queued pending further action?
Does the message contain attachments? If so, what are the file names?
If an archive attachment includes non-English filenames that do not display correctly within Message
Search, change the Default decode character set options from Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Content handling |
Email Options | Advanced Options.
You can use a wide range of different criteria to search on, including:
The Message status
Source IP
Sender, Recipient or Subject information
Email disposition
Category
If the Email has been modified or not
Product Guide
61

Date range
Audit ID
The Virtual host used
If you have configured Sender address masquerading or Recipient address aliasing, Message Search shows the
masqueraded or aliased email addresses.
Message Search parameters

This topic provides you with information about each of the parameters that are available to you with
the Message Search feature.
Option
Definition
Message status
You can choose to search All email messages. If you suspect that a message is in a
certain state, you can also search only for messages that are:
Message Search only reports Advanced Threat Defense messages that are either
pending or being scanned by the Advanced Threat Defense servers. As soon as
scanning is complete, the messages are shown within the section relevant to the
scan results.
Blocked
Bounced
Delivered
Quarantined
This includes quarantined items that have pending release requests.
Queued
You can multi-select to search for messages in more than one status.
Sender,
You can search for emails containing particular sender, recipient, or subject text.
Recipient, Subject The appliance can modify the subject of some emails, typically by adding a [spam] or
[phish] prefix to the subject line. However, the subject displayed on the Message
Search page is the original subject line of the email message before the appliance
makes any changes.
You can use the * and ? wildcard characters in your searches.
To search for a literal *, ?, or \ character within these fields, use the backslash (\)
character before the search term. For example, use \* to search for the asterisk
character.
62
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Category
When you search on Blocked or Quarantined items, you can further refine your
search by selecting the Category that the appliance used to block or quarantine the
message.
When viewing messages that have been Blocked, the following Category options are
available:
Anti-Phish
Anti-Spam
Anti-Virus
If you have enabled the additional Commtouch Command anti-virus engine, you
will see anti-virus detections listed by detection engine.
Anti-Virus (Packer)
Anti-Virus (PUP)
Compliance
Corrupt Content
Data Loss Prevention
Encrypted Content
File Filtering
Mail Filtering
Mail Size
Signed Content
Image Filtering
URL Reputation
Denial of Service
Unscannable Content
Sender Authentication Threshold
DKIM
SenderID
Message reputation
For messages that were Quarantined by the appliance, the following Category
options are available:
Anti-Phish
Anti-Spam
Anti-Virus
If you have enabled the additional Commtouch Command anti-virus engine, you
will see anti-virus detections listed by detection engine.
Anti-Virus (Packer)
Anti-Virus (PUP)
Product Guide
63

Option
Definition
Compliance
Corrupt Content
Encrypted Content
File Filtering
Mail Filtering
Mail Size
Signed Content
Image Filtering
URL Reputation
Denial of Service
Unscannable Content
Sender Authentication Threshold
DKIM
SenderID
Message reputation
You can multi-select to search for messages in more than one category. See
Quarantine Options to find out how the categories relate to those reported in McAfee
Quarantine Manager.
Quarantined to:
For messages that were quarantined, you can search all quarantine queues, or select
one or more from the list of configured queues. The queues are:
Viruses
Other
PUPs
Phish
Compliance
Spam
number of messages in all categories will not necessarily generate the total
quarantined messages.
All Dates / Date

Range
64
You can search on All Dates , or you can specify a Date Range, using From and To
dates and times.
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Audit ID
When an email message passes through the appliance, a received header

containing audit ID information is added to the message header.
The received header will look similar to the following:
Received: from (mta1.example.com [192.168.254.200]) by
meg_appliance1.example.com with smtp
id 1448_0004_4d37a0e8_93e1_11df_b43f_00114336c271
Tue, 20 Jul 2011 09:29:31 +0000
This audit ID information can be used to track the message as it passes through the
appliance.
Source IP
This is the source IP address of the originating email server. If your appliance is
configured behind one or more Mail Transfer Agents (MTAs), the email headers are
used to obtain the correct source IP address.
If you know the IP address that is sending email messages to you, you can search
using this address.
You can use either a single address (for example, 192.168.0.1) or a network
address/netmask (for example, 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0).
Disposition
Allows you to select All or One or more of Inbound, Outbound and Internal messages
in your search.
Type
When dealing with quarantined email messages, this allows you to search for the all,
messages, original email or for messages that have been modified by the appliance.
It also allows you to search for messages that have their Release requested by your
users.
Virtual host
If you have enabled the use of virtual hosts on your appliance, you can track or view
email messages that are processed by an individual virtual host on the appliance.
To do this, select the relevant host name from the Virtual host drop-down list.
Attachment
(only visible
when
Attachment
identification
is enabled)
To find specific attachments within email messages, enter a full or partial attachment
name. You can also use wildcard characters.
View recipients
Clicking on any of the highlighted links in the View recipients area shows you either All
messages, or a list of recipients and the number of items against each recipient
beginning with the selected character. For example, it might show that one recipient
currently has four queued messages, one quarantined message and three delivered
messages.
By clicking on a particular recipient, you can then view all relevant items for that
recipient.
To revert to the total view of messages, click Close.
Search/Refresh
Click to search the appliance for email messages that match your search parameters,
or to refresh the list if you have changed any of the parameters.
Clear Parameters
Resets all search parameters to their default states.
Message Search results

Within the Message Search, the following results might be displayed.
Product Guide
65

Option
Definition
Options
After you search for your required email types, you can perform actions based on the
type of message. These actions include:
Delete selected.
Release selected Only available if all selected messages are quarantined
"on-the-box," and do not contain viral content.
Retry selected.
Forward selected Only available if all selected messages are either queued or
quarantined.
Find related.
Submit false positive Submit the selected messages to McAfee for analysis, to help
reduce false positive detections.
Submit unscannable content.
Delete all.
Blacklist / whitelist URLs Enables you to extract URLs from within the scan log, and to
add these URLs to either the blacklist or whitelist.
Cancel ATD scan Allows the appliance to proceed with processing the email without
waiting for scan results from the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense server.
This action does not stop the Advanced Threat Defense server from completing the
scan.
If you configured your appliance to perform off-box quarantining using McAfee
Quarantine Manager, you cannot make release requests from within Message Search.
Real-Time retry
To retry the delivery of a queued item and to then show the results of the SMTP
conversation with the target MTA, click Real-Time Retry.
You can only use Real-Time Retry by selecting a single queued message.
Download ATD
Report
When using Advanced Threat Defense, click Download ATD Report to save and view the
report from the Advanced Threat Defense server that scanned the selected message.
View Message
If the message is still available to the appliance, you can view the selected message.
For example, if the email message has been queued or quarantined on the appliance.
From within the message view, you can:
Delete the message from the appliance.
Release the message from the appliance. (Quarantined messages only).
Retry to deliver the message from the appliance. (Queued messages only).
Forward the message to another email address.
Download the message to your local file system in .eml format.
You can also use Show headers to view the information contained within the email
header.
66
Product Guide

Option
Definition
View
You can view conversation details of email messages through the different stages of
Conversation Log the SMTP conversation.
SMTP conversation logging must be enabled on your appliance (from Email | Email Configuration
| Protocol Configuration | Connection Settings (SMTP) | SMTP conversation logging.)
Select an email message and click View Conversation Log to see the conversation details
for the selected message.
Download
Messages
Show Report
Downloads the selected queued or quarantined messages to your local file system.
If you select a single message, an .eml file is downloaded. If you select multiple
messages, a .zip file containing individual .eml files is downloaded.
View information about the selected email message.
Hide and
You can hide and show columns in the Message Search results area.
show columns
Click the left arrow to hide the selected column.
Click the down arrow to display options to sort or hide a column.
Click the right arrow to redisplay information in the hidden column.
Export
Click to export a report based on your message search results.
Maintenance
options
Click to go to the Database Maintenance area, where you can define the number of items
identified using Message Search that is retained in the database.
Table 3-3 Search results table

Column
heading
Definition
Checkbox
Select the checkbox next to a particular message to enable actions you can take
regarding that message. The checkbox in the header row enables or disables all
messages in the list.
Date
Displays the date and time Email Gateway received the message.
Sender
Displays the email address for the sender of the message.
Recipient
Displays the email address for the recipient of the message.
Subject
Displays the subject of the message, from the Subject line.
Policy
Indicates the configured email policy used to process the message.
Status/Category
Indicates the disposition of the message, such as delivered, blocked, quarantined.

When messages have been sent to Advanced Threat Defense, this column
indicates the status information returned from the Advanced Threat Defense
server. The status can be:
Advanced Threat Defense.
Advanced Threat Defense Timeout.
Advanced Threat Defense Queue Exceeded.
Advanced Threat Defense Scan Failed.
Quarantined to
If Email Gateway quarantined the message, the quarantine queue is displayed.
Product Guide
67

Table 3-3 Search results table (continued)

Column
heading
Definition
Attachments
When attachment detection is enabled, shows information in a tree form about the
attachments. The information includes file name and file type, and can also include
archive data.
Email Gateway cannot obtain attachment information from the following file types:
CAB files
BZIP-compressed files
Password-protected files
Encrypted files
Source IP
Displays the IP address where the message originated.
Properties
Displays icons indicating message properties.
Size
Displays the message size, including attachments.
Message Search icons

Understand the meaning of the icons that are used within the message search page.
Option Definition
Email message is Inbound.
Email message is Outbound.
Email message was composed within the Secure Web Mail Client.
Email message is Internal.
Internal email messages are Alert messages and Quarantine Digest messages.
This is the original version of the quarantined message.

This is the version of the quarantined message that has been modified by the appliance.
This email message is currently held in a queue, but the appliance is not actively trying to
deliver the message.
The appliance is trying to deliver this message.
The appliance has a release request pending for this message.
Queued for delivery to your McAfee Quarantine Manager server.
Email message is secured using the Encryption policy settings.
Email message was received or delivered using TLS.
Email Gateway is waiting to send the email message to Advanced Threat Defense for
processing.
Advanced Threat Defense is scanning the email message.
68
Product Guide

Option Definition
Email message was scanned by Advanced Threat Defense, and scanning has completed.
Access to the quarantined email message is restricted. You do not have sufficient privileges
to view or download the message, or perform any actions (delete, release, forward) on the
message.
Task Identify quarantined email messages

Use this task to discover which email messages have been quarantined by your McAfee Email Gateway
Appliance.
To view a list of all messages that have been quarantined:
Task
1
Click Reports | Message Search.
Select Quarantined from the Message status drop-down list.
Click Search/Refresh.
All messages that have been quarantined are displayed in the lower part of the page.
Task Refine the search

You can further refine your search for quarantined email messages to show only those that have been
quarantined due to specific triggers. In this example, to find those email messages quarantined due to
compliance issues:
Task
1
Complete the steps in Task Find out which email messages are quarantined.
Select Compliance from the Category drop-down list.
The lower part of the screen is refreshed to show only the messages that have been quarantined due
to compliance issues.
Task View a specific email message

You can view the content of a quarantined email message.
Task
1
Complete the steps in Task Refine the search.
Select the relevant quarantined message using the checkbox to the left of the page.
Click View Message.
The selected message is displayed in a new window. From this window, you can view the content of
the email message. You can also choose to view the detailed email header information. After you have
viewed the message, by clicking the relevant buttons, you can choose further actions to perform on
the email message.
Product Guide
69

Task Release a quarantined email message

After viewing the email message that has been quarantined, you may want to release the message
from Quarantine. This task allows you to do this.
To release a selected message from quarantine:
Task
1
Complete the steps in Task View a specific email message.
Click Release Selected.
The selected email message is released from quarantine.

Email messages that contain viral content cannot be released from quarantine, as to do so would risk
causing damage to your systems.
Task Submit a false positive sample to McAfee

Submit email messages that have been incorrectly detected as spam or phishing messages to McAfee,
to help reduce false positive detections in the future.
Before you begin
You can only submit messages that have been detected as either spam or phishing email
messages, and that have then been quarantined by McAfee Email Gateway.
By investigating samples of genuine email messages that have been incorrectly detected as either
spam or phishing email messages (false positive detections), McAfee can improve the accuracy of the
spam and phishing message detections.
Task
1
Select Reports | Message search.
Select the email messages that have been incorrectly identified as either spam or phishing
messages.
Select Submit false positive from Options.
Click Go.
The selected incorrectly-identified spam or phishing messages are submitted to a secure McAfee site
where they can be analyzed and the results used to improve spam and phishing email message
detections.
70
Product Guide

Task Find out which email messages are queued

Use this task to find out which email messages are currently queued pending delivery on your Email
Gateway appliance.
To view a list of all messages that have been queued on the appliance:
Task
1
Select Queued from the Message status drop-down list.
All messages that have been queued are displayed in the lower part of the page.
Task Find out which email messages are queued for inbound delivery
Use this task to refine your search for messages queued for inbound delivery.
You can further refine your search for queued email messages to show only those messages that have
been queued for inbound or outbound delivery. To view the queued messages awaiting inbound
delivery:
Task
1
Complete the steps in Task Find out which email messages are queued.
Select Inbound from the Disposition drop-down list.
All messages that have been queued for inbound delivery are displayed in the lower part of the page.
Task Delivering the queued email message

Use this task to deliver the email message that are currently queued on your Email Gateway
appliance.
Having found the queued email messages, and investigated the reason for the messages to be
queued, you then need to force the appliance to try again to deliver the messages:
Task
1
Complete the steps in Task Find out which email messages are queued for inbound delivery.
Select the relevant queued messages using the check-boxes to the left of the page.
Choose one of the following:
From the Options drop-down list, select Retry selected.
For a single message, click View Message, and then select the Retry button.
To retry the sending of the messages and then see the results within the page, click Real-Time
Retry.
Your Email Gateway appliance attempts delivery of the queued messages.
Product Guide
71

Task Find out which email messages are being blocked

Use this task to find email messages that have been blocked by your Email Gateway appliance.
To view a list of all messages that have been blocked on the appliance:
Task
1
Select Blocked from the Message status drop-down list.
All messages that have been blocked are displayed in the lower part of the page. Email messages can
be blocked for a variety of reasons, and the table showing all blocked messages includes the reason
that each message was blocked within the Status/Category column.
Task Find the emails that were successfully delivered

Use this task to find all emails that were successfully delivered by your Email Gateway appliance.
You may have a request from your users to verify that an email message has been successfully
delivered to its intended recipient. To verify this:
Task
1
Select Delivered from the Message status drop-down list.
All messages that have been successfully delivered by the appliance are listed in the lower part of the
page.
Task A user has requested that I release one of their

quarantined email messages
Use this task to release a quarantined email.
When an email message is quarantined, your users may receive a digest message, giving them
options relating to the messages in quarantine. To view and then release an email message that a user
has requested be released:
Task
72
Select Release requested from the Type drop-down list.
Select the email message (or messages) to be released.
Click View Message.
Product Guide

If you are happy that the selected message is safe to release, select Release selected from the Options
drop-down list.
Click Go.
In the Dashboard | Email Queues area, you can see how many quarantine release requests have been made
by your users. Clicking the link on this page opens the Message Search page, and auto-populates the fields
required to release these messages.
Task Export a message search report

When you have run a message search, you have the option of exporting a report of the results in .csv
format.
Before you begin
Before you can export the report, you must run a message search that did not return 0
results.
Task
1
Navigate to the Message Search window.

You can navigate using Reports | Message search, or using the Task portlet on the Dashboard (Dashboard |
Tasks | Message Search & Reports | Search the Message Queue).
The Message Search window opens.
Select your desired parameters and perform a message search.

Your search results display.
The report you create will contain the entire results from your search.
Click the Export link at the bottom of the results window.

A message displays, providing a link to the exported .csv file.
Click the link to access the .csv file.
The report displays. The format is essentially the same as the Message Search results table, with a
few differences:
The audit ID displays.
The time displays both as seconds for sorting, and as a human-readable local time string.
The reason value for quarantined items displays.
The Properties column shows as three columns: Disposition, Type, and Encryption Type.
Task Find a message containing a named attachment

Search for messages that contain named attachments
Before you begin
Before you can find messages that contain attachments, you must Enable attachment
identification from Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Connection Settings (SMTP) |
Attachment identification.
Product Guide
73

Task
1
Navigate to the Message Search window. You can navigate using Reports | Message search, or using the
Task portlet on the Dashboard ( Dashboard | Tasks | Message Search & Reports | Search the Message Queue).
Choose the search parameters to use.
Click Search / Refresh.
Use the Attachments column to identify messages containing the relevant attachment.
You can also search for specific attachment names by using the Attachment field. This field accepts
either complete attachment names or partial names with wildcard characters.
Use the available controls to take appropriate actions on the selected messages.
Using multiple search parameters

Using the information you have, you can refine a message search to produce manageable results.
When you use one or only a few search parameters, the search can produce a long list of results. You
can avoid searching through such a list by using more information about the message.
Searching with multiple parameters

This example illustrates how to use a complex search.
Situation A colleague expected to receive an email message from a sales representative about a
new product. The message has not arrived, although the sender created it several days ago. You want
to find out where the message went and attempt to get it delivered. Here is the information you have.
The sales representative named Rep1, representing Example Corporation, sent the message. We
don't know the first name.
The message should have arrived during the last week of last month (February 23, 2015 through
February 27, 2015), probably on February 25, 2015.
User1 is the recipient.
The message included a PDF attachment, the information sheet about the new product.
The message might include words like "Revolutionary" or "Amazing" in the subject line.
Solution Conduct a message search based on this information.
Task Perform a detailed search

Use multiple parameters to narrow your message search.
This search is based on hypothetical information provided in the previous example.
Task
1
Select Reports | Message Search.
For Message Status, select One or more of, then select Quarantined.
Since the message was not delivered, it might be quarantined or blocked.
For Sender, type *rep1@examplecorp.com.

You know the last name of the sender, and the name of the company as it appears in email
addresses.
74
Product Guide

For Recipient, type user1@mycompany.com.
For Subject, type *Revolutionary*.
The subject line might include this word.

6
Select Default policy (SMTP).
For Category, select One or more of, then select Anti-Spam, File Filtering, and Mail Filtering.
You suspect one of these three categories includes the message.
For Quarantined to, select One or more of, then select Spam.
Select Date Range, the select February 23, 2015 and February 27, 2015 from the calendars as From and To
dates.
10 For Attachment, type *.pdf.

11 Click Search/Refresh.
Email Gateway performs the search and displays the results.
If the search does not produce the wanted result, change some of the parameters, such as the date
range. Perform the search again.
Searching for archived content

Identifying file names in archived attachments allows you to search for hidden malicious payload.
The names of archived files, including attachments, are viewable and searchable using the Message
Search feature.
Supported archive formats

Email Gateway can identify the contents of the following archive formats:
ZIP (*.zip)
GZIP-compressed archives (*.tar.gz)
TAR (*.tar)
RAR (*.rar)
7-ZIP (*.7z)
Email Gateway cannot retrieve attachment information from the following:
BZIP-compressed archives (*.tar.bz2)
CAB (*.cab)
Encrypted files
Other formats have not been tested.
Using archive content detection

This example illustrates a situation where you might want to list the contents of archived files,
including attachments.
Issue Someone has sent an email containing a file attachment with a malicious payload to targeted
individuals. The attachment containing the payload is a .zip file, and zeroday protection does not
detect it. The .zip file name is randomized, so searching for the attachment is not practical. The name
of the payload is payload.exe, and it is therefore searchable. You want to know the recipients of the
malicious content.
Product Guide
75

Solution Identifying file names in archive attachments permits you to conduct the required search.
Configure Attachment Identification and include identification of archive contents by typing payload.exe in
the Attachment data field. Then click Search/Refresh to conduct a message search.
Task - Configure identification of archived content

Attachment Identification includes archived content identification.
You cannot enable identification of archived content without enabling Attachment Identification.
Task
1
Select Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Connection Settings (SMTP) | Basic SMTP settings.
The Connection Settings (SMTP) window opens.
Scroll down the page to the Attachment Identification section. Click the expansion icon to reveal the
configuration parameters.
Select the Enable attachment identification checkbox and configure a limit for the Maximum number of
attachments scanned per message.
Option
Description
Enter a number If you encounter issues due to large numbers of attachments, deselect the No limit
checkbox. Enter a limit for the number of attachments to identify.
No limit
4
Selected by default. All attachments are identified and searchable in Message Search.
Select the Enable identification of archive contents checkbox and configure a limit for the Maximum nesting depth
per message.
Option
Description
Enter a number By default, the appliance identifies attachments in nested archives up to five levels
deep. If you encounter issues with attachments due to layers of nesting, reduce this
number.
No limit
5
All attachments are identified with no limit on the number of layers of nesting.
Click the green checkmark in the menu bar to save your changes.
Task - Find content of archived files

Search archive files for messages that contain named attachments.
Before you begin
Before you can find messages that contain attachments, Enable attachment identification and
Enable identification of archive contents from Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Connection
Settings (SMTP) | Attachment identification.
Task
1
Navigate to the Message Search window. You can navigate using Reports | Message search, or using the
Task portlet on the Dashboard.
76
Product Guide

Select or add the search parameters you want, including Attachment information, such as the archive,
attachment, and file name.
The Attachment field accepts either complete attachment names or partial names with wildcard
characters.
Click Search / Refresh.

Search results populate the table in the lower half of the page.
Message search results display the archive files in a tree view. Hover the mouse over the entry to
reveal the complete path to the item.
Use the available controls to take appropriate actions on the selected messages.

Add URLs found within the scan log to your policy blacklists or whitelists.
Option
Definition
URLs found
Lists the unique URLs found within the scan log. Information from the scan log,
and the available action options, are shown.
URL Pattern
Score
Action to be taken. The available actions are:
Ignore
Blacklist
Whitelist
Parse options
Choose between using Simple pattern or Regular expression to match the URLs.
Also, choose if the matches are case-sensitive.
Select the policies to

update
You can add the discovered URLs to the blacklists or whitelists for one or more
of the available policies where URL reputation has been enabled.
Scheduled Reports
Use this page to see a list of the available reports about threats that the appliance has detected.
Reports | Scheduled Reports

You can view the reports, send reports immediately to other people, or schedule reports to be sent at
regular intervals.
Product Guide
77

Scheduled Reports
Benefits of creating scheduled reports

Use scheduled reports to keep up to date with vital threat detection statistics and system activity, and
to share that information.
The Scheduled Reports option has some default report types already set up for you, or you can customize
their content or frequency, or even create new report types as necessary. The resulting reports can be
sent by email immediately, or at regular intervals to other people in your organization in a variety of
formats, such as PDF, HTML, or text.
You must enable the default reports to run automatically. To do so, select the report type from the list of
available reports, and click Edit. In the Edit Report dialog box, select Enable scheduled delivery.
Table 3-5 Report types

Option
Definition
Overview
Lists the number of detections by protocol, and type of threat, and provides details
about the types of detection made per protocol.
Email
Email security summary (inbound) shows the percent and number of messages to internal
users that were delivered or blocked because a threat was detected.
Email security summary (outbound) shows the percent and number of messages to external
users that were delivered or blocked because a threat was detected.
Email traffic flow provides information relating to the flow of messages into and out of
the organization.
Email security trend.
Email volume trends (inbound and outbound) provides information relating to the amount of
messages coming into and going out of the organization.
Email size trends (inbound and outbound) provides information relating to the size of the
messages coming into and going out of the organization.
Average number of emails displays the average number of messages sent into or out of
the organization for one or more days.
Users activity lists internal or external users who send or receive the most blocked or
monitored messages.
Top detections lists top viruses, potentially unwanted programs, spam or phish
detections, and sender authentication failures.
Favorite
78
Click Edit to choose from a list of pre-defined report types for email and system
reports, and to optionally send the report to other people in your organization daily,
weekly, or monthly. Any new favorite reports that you created in the Email Interactive
Reports section are available from here, too.
Product Guide

Scheduled Reports
Table 3-5 Report types (continued)

Option
Definition
Dashboard
Allows you to select information that is displayed in the dashboard portlets.

Select the information to include:
Inbound Mail lists all inbound mail activity, broken out into various categories, such as
plain text, encryption method used, information about messages quarantined,
bounced, queued and blocked, detection types triggered and information about the
senders, connections and email recipients.
Outbound Mail lists all outbound mail activity, broken out into various categories, such
as plain text, encryption method used, information about messages quarantined,
bounced, queued and blocked, detection types triggered and information about the
senders, connections and email recipients.
Services lists information about the software services provided.
SMTP Detections lists information about SMTP detections made.
POP3 Detections lists information about POP3 detections made.
Network Summary shows network connections, kernel mode blocking statistics and total
throughput.
System Summary Shows the status of the services, network and hardware.
Hardware Summary provides information about your hardware, including information
about the mode of operation, the network interfaces, information relating to the
hardware modules, RAID and UPS status.
Clustering provides information about your McAfee Email Gateway cluster.
Inbound Mail
Lists all inbound mail activity, broken out into various categories, such as plain text,
encryption method used, information about messages quarantined, bounced, queued
and blocked, detection types triggered and information about the senders, connections
and email recipients.
Outbound Mail
Lists all outbound mail activity, broken out into various categories, such as plain text,
encryption method used, information about messages quarantined, bounced, queued
and blocked, detection types triggered and information about the senders, connections
and email recipients.
Services
Lists information about the software services provided.
SMTP
Detections
Lists information about SMTP detections made.
POP3 Detections Lists information about POP3 detections made.

Network
Summary
Shows network connections, kernel mode blocking statistics and total throughput.
System
Summary
Shows the status of the services, network and hardware.
Hardware
Summary
Shows information about your hardware, including information about the mode of
operation, the network interfaces, information relating to the hardware modules, RAID
and UPS status.
Product Guide
79

Scheduled Reports
Table 3-5 Report types (continued)

Option
Definition
Clustering
Shows information about your McAfee Email Gateway cluster.
Attachment
Profiling
Shows a variety of information about attachments detected in your email traffic,

including reporting period, attachment type, numbers of attachments, and so forth.
If Attachment Profiling is disabled, a dialog box informs you and provides a link to
enable it.
The report includes information about the number of attachments sent to ATD if it is
enabled, or that would be sent if ATD were enabled. Administrators can use this data
to assess deployment of ATD servers.
Option definitions Scheduled Reports

Use this information to learn about the options available for the Scheduled Reports from within the
user interface.
Option
Definition
Name
Displays the name of the report. By default, the list includes some standard reports,
which you cannot delete.
The icon indicates the type of content in that report:
Overview, such as numbers of overall detections.
Email activity
System activity such as disk usage.
A choice of popular reports.
Description
Displays the title that appears on the first page of the report, the scheduling
information, and a list of the recipients.
Download
When clicked, generates the report, then allows you to download it for viewing in a
browser or saving as a file.
Email Now
When clicked, generates the report, then immediately sends it to the recipients. Any
regular schedule is not affected.
If the icon is disabled, the schedule has not been set. Double-click the icon, then
specify the details under Delivery Schedule.
New report
When clicked, lets you create a new report, which is an exact copy of an existing
report. A dialog box prompts you for further information:
Report name, which appears under the Name column on this page.
Report title, which appears at the top of the report.
When you click OK, you return to the main page. There you can select the new report,
click the icon under Edit, and design your own report.
Edit
Delete
80
When the icon is clicked, enables you to change the schedule, content, format and
delivery information of the selected report.
When the icon is clicked, deletes the selected report.
Product Guide

Scheduled Reports
Task See the number of detections by protocol and threat

type over the last week
Use this task to create a scheduled report to see the number of detections by protocol and threat type
over the last week.
Task
1
Select Reports | Scheduled Reports.
From the list of report types, select Overview, and click Edit.
In the Edit Report dialog box, set the Reporting period to 1 week.
Click OK, and apply the changes to the appliance.
Click Download to generate the report.
Task Send your manager an email activity report in PDF

format every Monday at 10.00am
Use this task to send a PDF version of an email activity report at a specific time and day each week, to
a nominated person.
Task
1
From the list of report types, select Email, and click Edit.
In the Edit Report dialog box, click Enable scheduled delivery.
Set the Report sent option to Weekly and choose Monday from the drop-down menu.
Click New Recipient, type myboss@examplecompany.com.
Click OK, and apply the changes to the appliance.
Task Download a report in .csv format for further processing

To enable further processing of information from your McAfee Email Gateway, export your report
in .csv format.
Task
1
From the list of report types, select Favorite, and click Edit.
In Delivery schedule, ensure that Enable scheduled delivery is unselected.
In Report content, select the information that you want to appear in the .csv formatted file. For
example, select Email reports and Top Spam Senders (last 24h).
In Advanced options, select CSV as the Document format. Configure other options to suit your
requirements.
Click OK, and apply the changes.
Click Download.
Click on the link to download the file to your local computer.
Product Guide
81

Task Send the email administrator a report that shows virus

detections in email messages over the last week
Use this task to send a report to a specific person showing all virus detections found within email
messages in the last week.
Task
1
From the list of report types, select Favorite, and click Edit.
In Sender and recipient details, type emailadministrator@examplecompany.com.
Select Report content, and select the Top Viruses report.
Click Email Now.

Use this information to understand the options available when creating a new report.
Option
Definition
Name
Type a name for the new report that you are creating.
Title
Use the Title field to enter a descriptive title for the new report.
Use template
Select the template that you want to use as the basis of the new report.

Use this information to understand the options available when editing the specification for an existing
report.
Table 3-6 Option definitions Delivery schedule
Option
Definition
Enable scheduled delivery
When selected, reports are delivered according to the configured options.
Report sent to At
Use Daily, Weekly, Monthly and At to specify how often, and at what time, you
want the scheduled report to be delivered.
Reporting period
Select the time period that you want covered by the report.
(Attachment Profiling only) Select the checkbox to choose the preconfigured
options or to set the beginning and ending dates for the reporting period.
For Period, the available options are:
Today (default option)
2 weeks
Previous day
1 month
1 week
For Date, click the calendar icons for From and To, and select the dates you want
to include.
If the mail database is empty, only the current date is available.
82
Product Guide

Table 3-6 Option definitions Delivery schedule (continued)

Option
Definition
Granularity
From the drop-down list, select the time period to include in each line of the
(Attachment Profiling report. Options are:
only)
1 hour
12 hours
3 hours
1 day
6 hours
7 days
Granularity selections might be limited based on the reporting period you

configure. This limitation prevents users from generating extremely
demanding reports, such as a one-month report with a granularity of one
hour.
Use the postmaster

address as the sender
Select to use the postmaster address as the sending address for the
scheduled reports.
Sender address
To use a sender address different than the already configured postmaster

address, enter an address here. Make sure you deselect Use the postmaster address
as the sender.
Recipients
The list of email addresses to which the scheduled reports are to be sent.
Click New Recipient to specify new addresses.
Table 3-7 Option definitions Report content

Option
Definition
Title
Specify the title for the scheduled report you are creating.
Include these reports Select the information to be included in the scheduled report. The available options
change depending on the type of report (Overview, Email, or System report.)
Header
Enter text that you want displayed on the header of the report.
Footer
Enter text that you want displayed on the footer of the report.
Table 3-8 Option definitions Advanced options

Option
Definition
Document format
Select your required format for the scheduled report.
Paper size
Select the paper size for the scheduled report.
Character set
Select the character set for the scheduled report.
Message subject
Enter the subject line that you want to appear on the email containing
the scheduled report.
Message body text
Enter the body text for the email message containing the scheduled
report.
Generate unique file names
Select this option to ensure that each scheduled report has a unique file
name.
Attachment file name
To specify the name of the attachment file containing the scheduled

report, unselect Generate unique file names and then enter the required file
name.
Maximum number of items in a list Specify the maximum number of items that you want to appear in each
list.
Product Guide
83

Email Reports
Email Reports
Use this page to create and view real-time reports about threats detected in the email passing through
your Email Gateway, and the subsequent actions taken by the appliance.
Reports | Email Reports

You can generate a report based on a set of predefined filters, or edit the filters, test the results, and
save the report as a new report.
Introduction to the Email Reports page

This information introduces the Email Reports page, found in the Reporting section of Email Gateway.
Email Reports contains several sub-pages, accessed from the tabs beneath Email Interactive Reporting and
Selection.
The following tabs are shown beneath Email Interactive Reporting, each providing different views on a
report's results. See View types:
Total view
Time view
Itemized view
Detail view
There are two pages beneath Selection:
Favorites enables you to choose a report with pre-defined filters, and generate it immediately. See
Report types.
Filter enables you to further define the data in each Favorite report using standard and advanced
filter settings, and set the period of time for which you want to retrieve data. See Filter types.
Benefits of using email reports

This topic discusses the benefits of using the report features of Email Gateway to create and view
reports about email traffic.
To keep your email infrastructure running at optimal levels, you need access to up-to-date information
about threats detected in the email flowing through the appliance. Generate email reports to get
information such as:
Types of threats detected, such as viruses, or spam and phishing messages.
Messages that had to have an action taken upon them.
Messages that were prevented from entering or leaving your network.
Individual sender activity.
Additionally, use the Email Reports feature with the Scheduled Reports feature to create regular
reports, and send them immediately to other people, or at regular intervals.
You can compile a list of, for example, blocked email messages using the Message Search feature
(Reports | Message search). Message Search cannot locate messages if the appliance has not received the
message body, such as messages blocked by the Real-time Blackhole Lists (RBLs). In this situation, use
the Email Reports feature to find out about an individual message.
84
Product Guide

Email Reports
Types of Email reports

Information on the types of email reports that you can find within the Reports area of the user
interface are discussed.
The appliance comes with a set of reports with pre-defined filters available from the Favorites tab. You
can run these reports immediately, or edit them using standard and advanced settings and save as a
new favorite report to run again in the future, then make it available in the Scheduled Reports feature.
To see the default settings in each report, hold your mouse cursor to the left of a report name.

Option
Definition
Email Overview
Displays results in Total view by default. Results show the number of legitimate,
monitored, modified, rerouted, or blocked messages processed over the previous
day.
Email Profile
Displays results in Itemized view by default. Results show the number of items detected
for each filter selection over the previous week.
Top Spam Senders Displays results in Itemized view by default. Results are filtered using the Spam/
Phish category by default, and show the spam or phish (or both) messages by sender
over the previous 24 hours.
Top Viruses
Displays results in Itemized view by default. Results are filtered using the Viruses
category by default, and show the viruses detected over the previous week, or
results for a specific threat that you specify.
Legitimate
Displays results in Time view by default. Results show the number of messages
categorized as Legitimate (that is, delivered with no detection or modification) for all
threat categories over the previous 24 hours.
Monitored
Displays results in Time view by default. Results show the number of messages for all
threat categories over the previous 24 hours that triggered an event log but were
delivered with no modification.
Modified
Displays results in Time view by default. Results show the number of modified
messages (for example, cleaned or replaced with an alert message) for all threat
categories over the previous 24 hours.
Rerouted
Displays results in Time view by default. Results show the number of messages routed
to another server (for example, an encryption server) for all threat categories over
the previous 24 hours.
Blocked
Displays results in Time view by default. Results show the number of inbound or
outbound messages stopped by the appliance for all threat categories over the
previous 24 hours.
Product Guide
85

Email Reports
Types of Email report views

The Email Gateway reporting system uses different views of the available data, to enable you to select
the view best suited to your needs.
Each report that you generate can be presented in one of the following views:
Type of Definition
View
Total view
Reports | Email Reports | Email Interactive Reporting | Total View

The information is displayed in a horizontal bar chart. If you see no information, click Apply
on the Filter tab, or change the period and click Apply.
For information about the Filter or Favorites section on the right, click its tab, then click the Help
button (?).
Action Displays the list of actions taken by the appliances policies against each email
message or web access.
Number of email messages Displays the number of email messages or web accesses where
this action was applied.
Time view
Reports | Email Reports | Email Interactive Reporting | Time View

Displays results in a bar chart and table format over the time specified. Results are shown
in periods of ten minutes for hourly reports, by the hour for 24 hour reports, every six
hours for weekly reports, twelve hours for fortnightly reports, or daily for monthly reports.
The information is displayed in a vertical bar chart, and organized into small intervals. For
example, a weekly report shows activity in whole 6-hour portions of each day. If you see no
information, click Apply on the Filter tab, or change the period and click Apply.
You might not be able to view some older data, because the appliances log is regularly
purged.
For information about the Filter or Favorites section on the right, click its tab, then
click the Help button (?).
Start Displays the start of the period, such as on the hour.
Legitimate to Blocked Displays the numbers of email messages or web accesses
corresponding to each action in that period. If Action is not set to All, most columns have
values of 0.
86
Product Guide

Email Reports
Type of Definition
View
Itemized
view
Reports | Email Reports | Email Interactive Reporting | Itemized View

The information is displayed in a pie chart and table format for each filter criteria, or for all
filters.
If you see no information, click Apply on the Filter tab, or change the period and click Apply.
button (?).
Pie chart Displays the percentage of all email or web accesses that match the criteria
selected in the Filter tab.
The orange portion of the pie shows the portion of the data that matches the criteria. The
green portion shows the remainder. If no filtering is set, the whole pie appears orange.
Filter criteria Displays the list of categories taken against the email message or web
access. Click any blue link for more information represented as a bar chart.
To return to the pie chart, click List all criteria. To examine the information further, click any
blue links.
As you click each link, values in the Filter tab are updated. Click Apply to display the pie
chart again.
Number of distinct criteria items within the selection Displays the number of email messages or
web accesses where each criteria applies.
Detail view
Reports | Email Reports | Email Interactive Reporting | Detail View

Displays all results in a table format. Results are shown for each detection in the report
results.
Information includes any threat in the email messages or IP addresses. The information is
displayed in a table.
button (?).
Date and other headings Displays the details of each email message or web access.
To see all columns, move the horizontal scroll bar.
To sort the data in any column, click the column heading. The most recently sorted
column is indicated by a red arrow in the column heading.
Data Click the blue link to see further information about an email message in a table
or as raw data (that is, in an XML-like format).
To move through the list or to move quickly to either end of the list, click the arrows at
the bottom right of the list.
Types of email report filters

To assist you finding the information you require, you can select filters to display more specific detail
within the Email Reports.
Reports | Email Reports | Selection | Filter
Product Guide
87

Email Reports
Each report allows you to filter the results by standard and advanced criteria. For example, you can
see information about viruses from all sources in the last month. Make your selections, then click
Apply. The new report might take a while to appear. You can save these selections to produce a similar
report at any time. or clear the selections you made.
Table 3-10 Option definitions Email Reports filter options
Option
Definition
Period and
Ending
Displays information for a period from one hour to one month, based on the selected
start date.
When clicked, the Previous and Next buttons adjust the From date, for example, moving it
to next week or the previous day.
Protocol
Displays the protocols you want to view, such as SMTP.
Traffic
Displays traffic, whether inbound, outbound or both.

In a simple network, you might see reports on compliance for outbound traffic and
reports on spam for inbound traffic.
Sender
Displays information about one sender, such as user@example.com

When selected, the advanced options, Source domain and Source ID, further specify the
sender's domain or IP address, such as server1.example.com and 192.168.254.200.
Examples:
To view information about one sender or recipient, type:
<user@example.com>
The name is wrapped with chevron characters.
To view information about all senders' names that begin with b or B, type:
<b*
To view information about all senders' names that begin with b, B, e, or E, type:
<b*, <e*
Recipient
Displays information about one recipient, such as user@example.com

When selected, the advanced options, Destination domain and Destination ID, further
specify the recipient's domain or IP address, such as server1.example.com and
192.168.254.200.
Examples:
To view information about one sender or recipient, type:
<user@example.com>
The name is wrapped with chevron characters.
To view information about all senders' names that begin with b or B, type:
<b*
To view information about all senders' names that begin with b, B, e, or E, type:
<b*, <e*
88
Product Guide

Email Reports
Table 3-10 Option definitions Email Reports filter options (continued)

Option
Definition
Action
Enables you to filter reports on specific actions, such as Legitimate or Blocked.

Available actions include:
Category
All
Modified
Legitimate
Rerouted
Monitored
Blocked
Displays information about a single type of detection, such as spam or virus.

The available options are:
All
Compliance
Viruses
Spam/Phish
PuPs
Legitimate
Sender Authentication
Advanced Threat Detection
Other
If the selection is not All, you see further options relevant to your selection. For
example, if you select Content, you can further select Mail Size.
Extra categories appear if you have installed any optional software.
Table 3-11 Option definitions Show Advanced options
Option
Definition
Detection
Top Spam Senders report only. Choose whether the report should contain results for
spam senders, phish senders, or both.
Virus/PuPs
Top Viruses report only. Type the name of the virus or potentially unwanted program to
get detection results for that specific threat.
Show Advanced
When clicked, shows the options below.

To hide the options again, click Hide Advanced.
Source Domain
Filter traffic based on the domain that the messages are being sent from.
Source IP
Filter traffic based on the IP address that the messages are being sent from.
Destination Domain Filter traffic based on the domain that the messages are being sent to.
Destination IP
Filter traffic based on the IP address that the messages are being sent to.
Audit ID
As traffic passes through the appliance it can have an Audit ID assigned. Use this
field to filter traffic with a specific Audit ID.
Policy
Provides a selection of policies.
Favorite reports
Use this page to run an existing favorite report immediately, or build a list of links to reports that you
have already saved.
Reports | Email Reports | Selection | Favorites
Reports | System Reports | Selection | Favorites
Product Guide
89

Email Reports

Option
Definition
Name
Displays the name of each report that you have saved.
Run report When clicked, opens the selected report and displays it to the left of the screen.
Edit
Opens the Filter page from where you can change the settings, test the report results, and
save the report criteria into a new favorite report.
Delete
Removes that Favorite report from the list, and from the reports available in Scheduled
Reports.
Task Generate an email activity overview for a particular

sender
Use this task to create an overview of the email activity for a particular sender.
Use this task to:
Create a report that shows global email activity in the previous 24 hours
Filter those results to show the activity of a particular sender
Save the report as a new favorite report to be run again in the future
Set up a schedule to send the report regularly to the email administrator
Task Run a standard email activity report

Create a report that shows global email activity in the previous 24 hours
Task
1
Click Reports | Email Reports.
From the Favorites list, select the Email Overview (last 24h) report.
Click Run report to generate a report for all users.
A report is created that shows the email traffic over the last 24 hours, for all users.
Task Filter the data for a particular sender and save the report as a new
favorite report
Use this task to filter data produced from a global email report to refer to a particular sender.
Additionally, save the new report as a favorite.
Before you begin
Make sure that you have created the report detailed in Task Run a standard email
activity report .
Task
1
Click Filter.
In Sender, type sender@examplecompany.com and click Apply to filter the data for that sender.
Click Save, type a name for the report, and click OK.
The report appears in the list of Favorites.
90
Product Guide

System Reports
Task Set up a schedule to send the report regularly to the email

administrator
Use this task to set up a schedule to regularly send a report to the email administrator.
Before you begin
Make sure that you have created the report detailed in Task Filter the data for a
particular sender and save the report as a new favorite report .
Task
1
Click Reports | Scheduled Reports.
In the list of available report documents, select Favorite, and click Edit.
Select Enable scheduled delivery, and set the report to run Daily at 17:00 hours.
Type the email administrator address.
Click Report content.
In the list of favorite reports, select the report that you created, click OK, and apply the changes to
the appliance.
The selected report is send each day at 17:00 hours to the specified email administrator.
Task Show me the total viruses detected over the previous

week
Use this task to show the total number of viruses detected in the previous week, and analyze the data
using different report views.
Task
1
Click Reports | Email Reports.
From the Favorites list, select the Top Viruses report, and click Filter.
Click Apply to run the report.
Select Time view to see the action that was taken on each message broken down into eight hour
periods.
Select Detail view to see further information such as policy details, and the source IP address for each
message.
The required report, showing the total number of viruses detected in the previous week, is generated.
System Reports
Use this page to create and view real-time reports about threat detection updates, and system events.
Reports | System Reports
You can generate a report based on a set of pre-defined filters, or edit the filters, test the results, and
save the report as a new report.
Product Guide
91

System Reports
Introduction to the System Reports page

This information introduces the System Reports page, found in the Reporting section of Email
Gateway.
System Reports contains several sub-pages, accessed from the tabs beneath System Interactive Reporting and
Selection.
Under System Interactive Reporting is a detailed view of the report results that tells you the type of update
made, when it ran, and whether it was successful. Data shows the update number so you can check
with the McAfee website that you're running the most up-to-date threat detection files available.
There are two pages beneath Selection:
Favorites enables you to choose a report with pre-defined filters, and generate it immediately. See
Report types.
Filter enables you to further define the data in each Favorite report, and set the period of time for
which you want to retrieve data. See Filter types.
Benefits of using system reports

This topic discusses the benefits of using the report features of Email Gateway to create and view
reports about system events.
Keeping up-to-date with McAfee threat detection updates is vital to the continued and successful
running of your organization. Generate system reports to get information about threat detection files
update status, user logon statistics, and network and hardware status .
Additionally, use the System Reports feature with the Scheduled Reports feature to create regular
reports, and send them immediately to other people, or at regular intervals.
Types of System reports

Information on the types of system reports that you can find within the Reports area of the user
interface are discussed.
The appliance comes with a set of reports with pre-defined filters available from the Favorites tab. You
can run these reports immediately, or edit them, and save as a new favorite report to run again in the
future, then make it available in the Scheduled Reports feature.
To see the default settings in each report, hold your mouse cursor to the left of a report name.

Option
Definition
Anti-Virus Updates (last

24h)
Displays results in Detail view by default. Results show the type of update
(anti-virus, spam rules, or URL filtering definitions), when it was made, the
results, and reference number associated with the update file
Anti-Virus Updates (last

week)
Displays results in Detail view by default. Results show the type of update
(anti-virus, spam rules, or URL filtering definitions), when it was made, the
results, and reference number associated with the update file
Types of System report views

Use this page to see the details of system updates or detection file updates.
Reports | System Reports | System Interactive Reporting | Detail View
92
Product Guide

System Reports
For information about the Filter or Favorites section on the right, click its tab, then click the Help button
(?).
Option
Definition
Interactive
reporting Detail
view
Date Displays the details of each email message or web access.

To see all columns, move the horizontal scroll bar.
To sort the data in any column, click the column heading. The most recently sorted
column is indicated by a red arrow in the column heading.
Data Click the blue link to see further information about an email message in a
table or as raw data (that is, in an XML-like format).
To move through the list or to move quickly to either end of the list, click the
arrows at the bottom right of the list.
Types of System report filters

To assist you finding the information you require, you can select filters to display more specific detail
within the System reports.
Reports | System Reports | Selection | Filter
Each report allows you to filter the results.
Table 3-15 Option definitions System Reports filter options
Option
Definition
Period and Ending Displays information for a period from one hour to one month, based on the
selected start date.
When clicked, the Previous and Next buttons adjust the From date, for example,
moving it to next week or the previous day.
Event type
Displays reports about particular event types. For example, issues concerning the
Network.
Event
Select individual events based on the chosen Event type.
Reason
Select individual reasons based on the chosen Event.
Favorite reports
Use this page to run an existing favorite report immediately, or build a list of links to reports that you
have already saved.
Reports | Email Reports | Selection | Favorites
Reports | System Reports | Selection | Favorites
Option
Definition
Name
Displays the name of each report that you have saved.
Run report When clicked, opens the selected report and displays it to the left of the screen.
Edit
Opens the Filter page from where you can change the settings, test the report results, and
save the report criteria into a new favorite report.
Delete
Removes that Favorite report from the list, and from the reports available in Scheduled
Reports.
Product Guide
93

System Reports
Task Generate a report that shows all threat detection

updates
Use this task to show all updates to the threat detection files on your Email Gateway.
Use this task to:
Run a report that shows all updates that took place in the last week
Filter the results to show only the URL filter updates that failed
Save the report as a new favorite report to be run again in the future
Task
1
Click Reports | System Reports.
From the Favorites list, select the Anti-Virus Updates (last week) report.
Click Run report to generate a report for all updates.
Click Filter.
In Event, select URL filter update failed, and click Apply to filter the data accordingly.
Click Save, type a name for the report, and click OK.
The report appears in the list of Favorites.
94
Product Guide
This section of the online help topic provides an overview of the Email features and controls within
your Email Gateway appliances.
Email
Contents
Life of an email message
Email Configuration overview
Email Policies
DLP and Dictionaries overview
Encryption
Certificate Management
Hybrid configuration
Group Management
Add Directory Service wizard
Quarantine Configuration

Use this topic to understand how the appliance processes the email messages that it receives.
The appliance handles an email message according to:
Who sent the email message.
Who will receive the email message.
The content of the email message.
On receiving an email message, the appliance processes it in the following order:

Email message
processing order
Kernel mode blocking
Permit and Deny Lists
CONNECT
Permit Sender [Connection]
Deny Sender [Connection]
Real-time Blackhole Lists

(RBL)
Sender Authentication Settings RBL

Configuration
Permit Sender
Deny Sender
EHLO/MAIL
FROM
Bounce Address Tag Validation Bounce Address Tag Validation
Product Guide
95

RCPT TO
DATA
SPF (Sender Policy

Framework)
Sender Authentication Settings SPF Sender ID

and DKIM
Address Masquerading
Address Masquerading (SMTP)
Anti-Relay
Anti-Relay Settings
Greylisting
Recipient Authentication
Address Aliasing
(Masquerading)
Permitted Recipient list
LDAP recipient check
Directory Harvest Prevention
RBL
Sender Authentication Settings RBL

Configuration
If behind an MTA.
SPF

and DKIM
If behind an MTA.
McAfee Global Threat

Intelligence message
reputation
Sender Authentication Settings McAfee Global

Threat Intelligence message reputation
The McAfee Global Threat Intelligence message
reputation score is also passed to the
anti-Spam engine, where it is used to
supplement the spam scores for the email
message being scanned.
Sender ID

and DKIM
Domain Keys Identified Mail

(DKIM)

and DKIM
Anti-spam
Anti-Spam Settings - Basic Options
Scanning
Anti-Spam Settings - Advanced Options
Anti-Spam Settings - Blacklists and Whitelists
Anti-phish
Anti-Phish Settings
Mail size filter
Mail Size Filtering Settings - Message Size

Mail Size Filtering Settings - Attachment Size
Mail Size Filtering Settings - Attachment Count
96
Encrypted / Signed content

check
Signed or encrypted content Settings
Corrupt content
Content Handling Settings - Corrupt or Unreadable

Content
Encrypted content
Content Handling Settings - Corrupt or Unreadable

Content - Protected files
HTML check
Content Handling Settings - HTML Options
Compliance
Compliance Settings
Product Guide

Anti-virus [Including McAfee

Global Threat Intelligence file
reputation, PUPs, Packers]
Anti-Virus Settings - Basic Options

Anti-Virus Settings - McAfee Anti-Spyware
Anti-Virus Settings - Packers
Anti-Virus Settings - Custom Malware Options
DLP
Data Loss Prevention Settings
Image filtering
Image Filtering Settings
File filter
File Filtering Settings
Delivery
Proxy Mode
Domain Relay
DNS
Fallback relay
Transparent
Mode
When passing through the scanning stage, the next step that the email message takes depends on the
scanners that are triggered and the primary actions defined for each scanner.
Primary actions are prioritized as follows:
Deny connection
Replace
Refuse
Allow through
Accept and drop
For example, consider the following circumstances:
The appliance scans an email message and triggers against both a virus and spam. The anti-virus
scanner is configured to block on detection, whereas the anti-spam scanner is configured to block.
In this situation, the appliance will report the email message as containing viral content, as this is
the highest-priority primary action.
The appliance scans an email message and again triggers against both a virus and spam. However,
this time, both the anti-virus and the anti-spam scanners have their primary actions set to block.
In this case, the appliance will report the anti-spam trigger anti-spam scanning occurs before
the anti-virus scanning but, as both scanners are configured with the same priority primary
action, this will also be reported as containing viral material.

Use these topics to understand the email protocol configuration, receiving email and sending email
pages within the Email Gateway user interface.
Email | Email Configuration

From the Email Configuration pages, you can configure features such as your protocol setting for SMTP
and POP3 email messages, Anti-relay settings, Recipient authentication, Permit and deny lists, as well
as other areas such as DKIM signing, delivering email domains and fallback relays.
Product Guide
97

Contents
Protocol Configuration
Option definitions Protocol Presets dialog box
Option definition - New Protocol Preset
Receiving Email
Sending Email
Sending Email Add Relay List dialog box and Add MX Lookup dialog box
Anti-Relay Settings Add Relay Domain dialog box and Add MX Lookup dialog box
Protocol Configuration
The Protocol Configuration tab within Email Configuration enables you to configure settings that are
protocol-dependant.
Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration

Further tabs enable you to configure connection and protocol settings for both SMTP and POP3
protocols, as well as to configure address masquerading and transport layer security for your SMTP
protocol.
Contents
Connection Settings (SMTP)
Protocol Settings (SMTP)
Connection and Protocol Settings (POP3)
Connection Settings (SMTP)

The Connection Settings (SMTP) page links to configuration areas that set up settings for SMTP
connections on the appliance, such as ports, warning thresholds and timeouts.
Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Connection Settings (SMTP)
Basic SMTP settings

Use this area to specify basic connection settings for the SMTP protocol, such as port numbers.
Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Connection Settings (SMTP) | Basic SMTP settings
Changing these settings can affect scanning performance. If you are not sure about the impact of
making changes, ask your network expert.

Option
Definition
Enable the SMTP

protocol
When deselected, ignores any SMTP traffic. Other traffic is not affected.
Listening ports
Specifies a port number.

The default value is 25.
98
Product Guide

Table 4-2 Option definitions (continued)

Option
Definition
Transparent interception Specifies a port number.

ports
The default value is 25.
Secure ports
Specifies the type of port. The default value is 465.

SMTPS uses a secure port.
Click these icons and the port headings to reveal icons for managing the port
information:
Indicates the port number.

Indicates the traffic that is intercepted.
Indicates a period when traffic is not scanned.
Enable reverse DNS
lookups
When selected, enables the appliance to perform lookups. Default value is Yes.
Append appliance
domain name for DNS
lookups
If you encounter issues with non-delivery of sent email messages routed using
DNS lookups to recipients using legacy email systems, select this option.
Take care if deselecting this setting. If you deny reverse DNS lookups, some
functions might fail.
Selecting this option appends the domain name of the appliance (for example:
appliance.domain.test) to the domain details found within the message. So, if a
message is sent to user@recipientdomain.test, the appliance carries out DNS
lookups for both recipientdomain.test.domain.test and recipientdomain.test.
This option is disabled by default.
Appending appliance domain names to the DNS lookups is known to cause issues
with DNS systems configured with wildcard records.
Timeouts
Use this area to specify the timeouts that apply to the SMTP conversations.
These settings are configured by default to provide the best SMTP performance with most appliances
and network configurations. Changing these settings can affect performance. If you are not sure about
the impact of making any changes, ask your network expert.
Protocol preset
Select the required protocol preset, or create a new preset, using the drop-down list and button to the
right of the page.
Maximum wait times when receiving email

Specifies how long the appliance waits for responses from the mail server that sends the email
message.
Product Guide
99

Option
Definition
Between commands
The default value is 60 seconds.
Between receiving chunks of data
Acknowledgment of all the data
Maximum wait times when sending email

Specifies how long the appliance waits for responses from the mail server that receives the email
message.
Option
Definition
Establishing a connection
Response to a MAIL command
Response to a RCPT command
Response to a DATA command
Between sending chunks of data
Acknowledgment of the final dot
SMTP conversation logging

Learn about enabling SMTP conversation logging.
Option
Definition
Enable SMTP conversation logging Select to produce a log of performed scans. These logs are available
from Reports | Message search.
100
Product Guide

Option definitions Attachment identification

Enable attachment identification to use Message Search to find messages containing attachments.
Option
Definition
Enable attachment identification
Select the checkbox to configure Email Gateway to carry out

additional scanning of email messages to identify attachments
contained within the messages.
Email Gateway cannot obtain

attachment information from
the following file types:
CAB files
After attachment identification is enabled, you can use Message

Search to view details or search for attachments contained in
email messages.
BZIP-compressed files
Search options:
Maximum number of attachments Type a number to limit the

number of attachments identified in each message.
Encrypted files
Enable identification of archive contents
No limit Select the checkbox to allow detection of unlimited

attachments.
Select the checkbox to configure McAfee Email Gateway to
identify files inside archives that are attached to the email
message.
Search options:
Maximum nesting depth Type the number of nesting layers for
which attachment identification is attempted in each
message.
No limit Select the checkbox to allow identification of the
contents of unlimited nesting levels.
If an archive attachment includes non-English filenames that
do not display correctly within Message Search, change the Default
decode character set options from Email | Email Policies | Policy Options
| Content handling | Email Options | Advanced Options.
Enable attachment checksum calculation

calculate MD5 checksum for each attachment.
Options:
Maximum number of checksums to calculate type a number to set
the maximum number of attachments for which checksums
are calculated. Select the No limit checkbox to allow checksums
for any number of attachments.
Maximum attachment size type a number to set the maximum
file size for each attachment for which checksums are
calculated. Select the No limit checkbox to allow checksums for
attachments of any size.
Email Gateway sends the checksums to syslog with the other
existing information about attachments.
Enable identification of file formats for

attachment profiling

identify file formats for all attachments.
Enable identification of file formats to ensure that the formats
of all attachments are included in attachment profiling. Email
Gateway identifies file format as needed, based on appliance
configuration.
Product Guide
101

Unscannable content options

Some content can prevent scanners from completing their scan, potentially resulting in scans being
continuously retried and always failing.
Option
Definition
Enable detection of unscannable content
To prevent unscannable content from tying up resources by

continually being rescanned, enable detection.
Maximum number of failed scan attempts
Configure the number of times that a scan is attempted before

the system marks the message as unscannable. The default is 5
attempts.
Period before content previously detected

as unscannable can be rescanned
Configure the time before another scan of the same email

message is attempted. The default is 24 hours.

The Protocol Settings (SMTP) page links to areas to allow you to configure settings for the SMTP
protocol on the appliance.
Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Protocol Settings (SMTP)
Data command options

Use this area to specify how the appliance responds during the DATA phase when handling SMTP
email.
Option
Definition
Maximum message data size
Specify the maximum size of message data in kilobytes. Setting this

option prevents excessively large email data from being processed by
the appliance. By default, no limit is set.
Maximum length of a single line
Specify the maximum length of a line within the message data. Setting
this option prevents data with excessively long line lengths from being
processed by the appliance. By default, no limit is set.
Maximum number of hops
Specifies the maximum number of hops allowed, that is, the maximum
number of Received lines allowed in the email header.
Default value is 100.
102
If these limits are exceeded
Specifies how the appliance responds. Default value is Close the connection.
Maximum line length before the

message is re-encoded
By default, no limit is set.
Product Guide

Denial of service protection

Use this area to specify how the appliance prevents possible denial-of-service attacks on your mail
server.
Option
Definition
Minimum data throughput
Prevents an average data throughput that is too low. An attacker might

deliberately handle parts of the SMTP conversation slowly.
Default value is No lower limit.
Maximum number of trivial

commands
Prevents the appliance receiving too many trivial commands before a

successful DATA command. An attacker might repeatedly send commands
like HELO, EHLO, NOOP, VRFY, and EXPN.
Maximum number of AUTH

attempts
Prevents too many AUTH conversation attempts. (Transparent Bridge

mode only). The SMTP AUTH command is a request to the email server
for an authentication mechanism.
Default value is No limit.
Maximum command length
Prevents excessive command length. This might be a buffer-overflow

attack. According to RFC 2821, the maximum total length of a command
line including the command word and the CR-LF is 512 characters.
Maximum duration of an SMTP

conversation
Limits the time between opening the connection and receiving the final
dot (.) command.
Allow null senders
Accepts an empty From address.

Default value is Yes.
Reject recipient if the domain is

not routable
Default value is No.
Maximum number of recipients

Prevents an excessive number of recipients. During spam or
before a failure response is given directory-harvest attacks, the number of recipients often exceeds the
number who typically receive company-wide messages. When setting a
number here, consider that typical maximum, then add some more to
allow for possible increases. Consider changing this number if the
network is reconfigured or the typical maximum changes.
Maximum number of recipients
before a delay is imposed
Prevents an excessive number of recipients.
Delay period
Specifies a period before connections may resume.

Default value is Not set.
Impose a lockout period
Specifies a delay to prevent an immediate reconnection.

Default value is 600 seconds.
Generate non-delivery reports for Default value is Yes.

undeliverable email
Product Guide
103

Message processing
Use this area to configure message processing options within the SMTP protocol.
Option
Definition
Welcome message
Specifies the text that is seen by a host when connecting to the appliance in
Explicit Proxy mode.
By default, this message is empty.
Store and forward email Always Selecting the check box causes Email Gateway to queue all messages
for delivery at a later time.
When the message size exceeds Messages which exceed the specified size limits will
always be accepted and queued by the appliance before onward delivery is
attempted. Default value: no limit.
When the number of recipients exceeds Messages which exceed the specified number
of recipients will always be accepted and queued by the appliance before onward
delivery is attempted. Default value: no limit.
Messages below the specified limits will have delivery attempted immediately.
Maximum number of
MX records used
Specifies the response to messages that use MX (mail exchange) records

excessively.
Maximum number of A
records used
Specifies the response to messages that use A (address) records excessively.

Advanced options
Use this section to specify further settings for message processing. You do not normally need to
change the settings.
Table 4-8 Advanced options

Option
Definition
Port for SMTP communications
Specifies the usual port number.

The default port number is 25.
Maximum number of policies per email
Limits the number of policies that can be applied to each email

message. A larger number can affect scanning performance.
Default number is 5.
Add a Received header to email
Adds Received (RCPT) commands to the email headers.

Add the IP address of the connecting

server to the Received header
If you prefer that the IP address of your server is not made

available, deselect this feature.
Add the domain name of the

connecting server to the Received
header
If you prefer that the domain address of your server is not made
available, deselect this feature.
A HELO command implies a reset
Forces the HELO command to automatically perform a reset (RSET

command). The RSET command clears the buffers that store data
such as the sender, recipients, and the email message.
104
Product Guide

Table 4-8 Advanced options (continued)

Option
Definition
A HELO or EHLO command is required
Forces the use of the HELO or EHLO command in any SMTP

communication. Most SMTP conversations begin with these
commands. You need this feature only if the sender does not use the
command.
Provides information for troubleshooting. Select only if instructed to
do so. Otherwise performance will be affected.
Dump input email to disk

Provides information for troubleshooting. Select only if instructed to
do so. Otherwise performance will be affected.
Dump output email to disk
Transparency options (router and bridge mode only)

Use this area to configure options applicable only in the transparent operating modes transparent
router or transparent bridge mode.
Option
Definition
Use the welcome

message from the mail
server
Specifies the welcome message that appears when a host using SMTP connects
to an appliance operating in a transparent mode.
When selected, displays the welcome message of the mail server at the other
end of the connection. Prefixes extra text, if specified in the next option.
When not selected, displays the appliance's own welcome message (in the
Message processing section).
Prepend the following

text
Specifies text for the message.
Send keepalives (NOOP

commands) during the
DATA phase and
Keepalive interval
Prevents the connection between the appliance and the onward email server
from timing-out when the appliance is scanning large email messages by
sending a keep-alive command to the destination server. This keeps the
connection alive until the DATA phase from the sending email server to the
appliance has completed. When the data has been transferred to the appliance,
the appliance stops sending the commands and starts the DATA phase between
the appliance and the destination email server. Default value is No.
Default value is to prefix no text.
Specify how often to send the keep-alive (NOOP) commands during the DATA
phase.
Default value of interval is 55 seconds
Advanced options
Use this section to specify further settings for transparency options. You do not normally need to
change these settings.
Product Guide
105


Option
Definition
Allow the appliance to Generates additional scanning alerts to warn a network administrator or other
generate additional
users when specific events occur.
scanning alerts
The actions that the appliance takes when one of these events occurs, depends on
which detection was triggered and how the policies have been set up for each
protocol. By default, most secondary actions are not available when the appliance
is operating in a transparent mode. Only the quarantine actions are available by
default.
Allow multiple
policies per email
Allows the use of multiple policies for email messages that have more than one
recipient.
If an email message has more than one recipient, you can configure the appliance
to allow different policies to apply to each of the recipients. If you do not allow
multiple policies, the appliance applies only the highest priority policy, as defined
by the order of your policies.
Add a Received
header to email
Adds Received (RCPT) commands to the email headers.
Secure conversation
pass-through
Allows TLS or SSL-secured conversations to be passed through the McAfee Email

Gateway without being interrupted.
With this option selected, when the McAfee Email Gateway either receives the
STARTTLS command or a connection is received on a Secure Port (SMTPS), the
connection is passed through to the other email server, allowing a secure
server-to-server connection to be made directly between the client and server
without McAfee Email Gateway scanning or processing the data.
As the TLS or SSL connection is effectively direct between the two email servers,
McAfee Email Gateway cannot scan the secured traffic that is passed through it
using Secure conversation pass-through. Therefore, it is possible that malicious content
could pass undetected through your McAfee Email Gateway and into your network.
ESMTP extensions
Scans features of the Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.

Default values:
Enable ESMTP extensions Yes
DSN (Delivery Status Notification), 8BITMIME (8-bit data transfer), AUTH
(Authentication) Yes
SIZE No
Microsoft Exchange
ESMTP extensions
Prevents scanning of some extensions.

Default values:
X-EPS, X-LINK2STATE, XEXCH50, CHUNKING No
If the appliance operates between two Microsoft Exchange servers, the appliance
must allow these email headers to be exchanged without scanning.
Address parsing options

Use this area to configure options relating to the parsing of email addresses.
You do not normally need to change these settings. Change the settings only if you understand the
possible effects, or you have consulted an expert.
106
Product Guide

An email address such as user@example.com has two parts:
The local part is before the @ character user.
The domain part is after the @ character example.com.

Option
Definition
Maximum length of the local part
Specifies how many characters can be used in the local part.

The RFC limit is 64 characters.
Specifies how many characters can be used in the domain part.
Maximum length of the domain part
The RFC limit is 255 characters.

Allow non-RFC characters in the domain
part
By default, characters outside the ASCII range are not allowed in

an email address.
McAfee Secure Web Mail

Enable policy support for McAfee Secure Web Mail.
Option
Definition
Advertise McAfee Secure Web Mail When using this appliance to provide encryption services to other
policy support in the EHLO
McAfee Email Gateway appliances, you should enable this option.
response
Use the Protocol presets to ensure that the appliance only advertises
McAfee Secure Web Mail policy support when the connection is coming
from other McAfee Email Gateway appliances.

Use the sections on this page to convert the addresses in incoming or outgoing email messages.
Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Address Masquerading (SMTP)

For example:
Send and receive email for general enquiries using an anonymous address such as
info@example.com, instead of one persons specific address.
Redirect email for several people to one person.
Modify the email headers to hide information about your internal domains.
Make modifications to the From address and sender headers of outgoing email under Sender address
masquerading.
Make modifications to the To address of incoming email under Recipient address aliasing.
Address masquerading is based on protocol presets and can affect a large number of email messages.
When configuring your policies, consider whether you need the policy rules to apply to the email
addresses before or after they might be re-written.
Product Guide
107

Useful websites
Regular expressions: http://www.regular-expressions.info/reference.html
Option definitions Sender address masquerading

Use this area to change the address from which email messages appear to have been sent.
Option
Definition
Type
States whether the sender address is a string replacement, or an LDAP lookup.
Search pattern
Specifies a search pattern that uses regular expressions to convert the original sender
email address to a masqueraded email address.
Take care with the use of ^ and $ in a regular expression. If the email headers contain
extra characters such as chevrons (< >), the regular expression will not replace the
email address, as expected.
Replacement
Displays the address you want to put in place of the original email address.
Move
The search for the pattern is done from the top to the bottom of the list. When a
pattern matches, it replaces using the replacement. In the case of LDAP lookups, it
uses the relevant LDAP query.
Add Entry
Adds a string replacement entry to the list.
Add LDAP entry Adds an LDAP lookup to the list.

Test
When clicked, opens a further window where you can test whether your regular
expression makes the correct replacement address. Type an email address as input,
click Check to see the resulting output address.
Export
When clicked, this link opens a dialog box you can use to export your list of
masquerade addresses as a text file. The list can be stored on the appliance, or on
your local computer.
The list is a text file in the following format:
List, search pattern
Replacement
Replacement
Write down the file name and location in case you need to import it.
Import
108
When clicked, this link opens a dialog box you can use to navigate to a stored
(exported) address list and import it to your current Masquerade window. You can
overwrite existing addresses, or append to the existing list.
Product Guide

Sender mail headers to search (advanced)

Specify the email headers that McAfee Email Gateway will search when using Sender address masquerading
to replace email addresses.
Option
Definition
Sender mail headers Specifies the mail headers to search within outgoing email messages.
to search
You need only add new headers if your mail server attaches its own unique
headers, or extra headers are defined in new email specifications.
By default, the following email headers are searched when using Sender address
masquerading:
return-path
resent-sender
from
reply-to
sender
return
resent-from
Option definitions Recipient address aliasing

Use this area to change the address to which email messages appear to have been sent.
Option
Definition
Type
States whether the sender address is a string replacement, or an LDAP lookup.
Search pattern
Specifies a search pattern that uses regular expressions to convert the recipients email
address to an aliased email address.
Take care with the use of ^ and $ in a regular expression. If the email headers contain
extra characters such as chevrons (< >), the regular expression will not replace the
email address, as expected.
Replacement
Displays the address you want to put in place of the recipient email address.
Move
The search for the pattern is done from the top to the bottom of the list. When a
pattern matches, it replaces using the replacement. In the case of LDAP lookups, it
uses the relevant LDAP query.
Add Entry
Adds a string replacement entry to the list.
Add LDAP Entry Adds an LDAP lookup to the list.

Test
When clicked, opens a further window where you can test whether your regular
expression makes the correct replacement address. Type an email address as input,
click Check to see the resulting output address.
Export
When clicked, this link opens a dialog box you can use to export your list of virtual
addresses as a text file. The list can be stored on the appliance, or on your local
computer.
The list is a text file in the following format:
Replacement
Replacement
Write down the file name and location in case you need to import it.
Import
When clicked, this link opens a dialog box you can use to navigate to a stored
(exported) address list and import it to your current Masquerade window. You can
overwrite existing addresses, or append to the existing list.
Product Guide
109

Recipient mail headers to search (advanced)

Specify the email headers that McAfee Email Gateway will search when using Recipient address aliasing.
Option
Definition
Recipient mail headers to Specifies the email headers to search within incoming email messages.
search
You need only add new headers if your mail server attaches its own unique
headers, or if extra headers are defined in new email specifications.
Task Masquerading all incoming email messages using an attribute in LDAP to

masquerade the sender
Use this task to masquerade all incoming or outgoing email messages using an attribute in LDAP.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have a valid connection to an LDAP server created with a functioning
Address Masquerading query.
You can follow these steps to masquerade a recipient by selecting Add LDAP Entry from the Recipient address
aliasing section of the page.
Task
1
Go to Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Address Masquerading (SMTP)
In the Sender address masquerading section, click Add LDAP Entry.
Enter a search pattern such as .*@test.dom.
In Replacement, select the correct server and address masquerading query and click Test.
In Input email address, type the email address that you want to masquerade. and click Check.
The Pattern matched and Output email address fields are automatically populated.
Click Close.
When the query is selected, any email that comes from, for example originalsender@test.dom, should
be replaced with the masqueraded email address such as <masqueraded sender>@test.dom.
Connection and Protocol Settings (POP3)

Use this area to specify settings for the POP3 protocol such as port numbers and time-outs.
Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Connection and Protocol Settings (POP3)
Optionally specify periods when some parts of the network will not be scanned.
Before turning off scanning of any traffic, consider the security risks. The most secure option is to scan
all traffic. If an appliance is operating in a transparent mode, use this feature to exclude some parts of
the network from scanning traffic in a protocol during specific periods. You might need to do this if you
regularly move many large files through the appliance.
making any changes, ask your network expert.
110
Product Guide

Basic POP3 settings

Use this area to configure the basic setting for using the POP3 protocol.
Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Connection and Protocol Settings (POP3) | Basic POP3
settings
making changes, ask your network expert.

Option
Definition
Enable the POP3

protocol
When deselected, ignores any POP3 traffic. Other traffic is not affected.
Listening ports
Specifies a port number. The default value is 110.
Transparent
interception ports
Specifies a port number. The default value is 110.
Dedicated POP3 proxy

ports
Specifies connections to dedicated POP servers.

Specify a unique port number for each server. Choose port numbers in the range
1024 to 65535, because numbers below 1024 are generally assigned to other
protocols. The server must have an FQDN, for example, pop3server.example.com.
Click these icons and the port headings to reveal icons for managing the port
information:
Indicates the port number.

Indicates the traffic that will be intercepted.
Indicates a period when traffic is not scanned.
Indicates a dedicated port.
Enable reverse DNS
lookups.
When selected, enables the appliance to perform lookups. Default value is Yes.
Append appliance
domain name for DNS
lookups
If you encounter issues with non-delivery of sent email messages routed using
DNS lookups to recipients using legacy email systems, select this option.
Take care if deselecting this setting. If you deny reverse DNS lookups, some
functions might fail.
Selecting this option appends the domain name of the appliance (for example:
appliance.domain.test) to the domain details found within the message. So, if a
message is sent to user@recipientdomain.test, the appliance carries out DNS
lookups for both recipientdomain.test.domain.test and recipientdomain.test.
This option is disabled by default.
Appending appliance domain names to the DNS lookups is known to cause issues
with DNS systems configured with wildcard records.
Timeouts
Use this area to specify time-out values for the POP3 protocol.
You do not need to change these values often.
Product Guide
111


Option
Definition
Maximum wait times when talking to Specifies how long the appliance waits for responses from the
a POP3 client
computer that sends the email message. Default values:
Between commands 600 seconds
Completing data transfer 60 seconds
Maximum wait times when talking to Specifies how long the appliance waits for responses from the mail
a POP3 server
server that receives the email message. Default values:
Establishing a connection 60 seconds
Completing data transfer 60 seconds
POP3 protocol settings

Use this section to specify settings that apply only to the POP3 protocol.
Option
Definition
Enable server
keepalives
Specifies values to keep the server connection open. The appliance can repeatedly
send a POP3 command to prevent the connection between the appliance and the
mail server timing-out.
Default values:
Enable server keepalives No
Keepalive interval 60 seconds
Keepalive command Not set
Enable client
keepalives
Specifies values to keep the client connection open. The appliance can repeatedly
send a POP3 command to prevent the connection between the appliance and the
POP3 mail client timing-out. Default values:
Enable client keepalives No
Keepalive interval 60 seconds
Address delimiters
Specifies the characters that identify each part of an email address. For example:
[user name]#[host name]:[port number]. Default values:
# User delimiter
: Host delimiter
You need only change the delimiter characters if your POP3 provider uses different
characters.
Respond to CAPA
requests
Responds to a POP3 CAPA command, which returns a list of capabilities supported

by the POP3 server. Default value is No.
For more information, see RFC 2449.
112
Product Guide

Option definitions Protocol Presets dialog box

Use this dialog box to re-order, create, and edit or remove existing protocol preset policies.
Option
Definition
Add network group
Click to open the Add Network Group dialog box to group together hosts or networks
that you want to be associated with each other.
Network groups can be used when defining rules for email policies and protocol
presets by selecting the source or destination network group rule type.
Add Policy
Click to open the New Preset dialog box.
Order
Shows the presets in the order in which you want them to be evaluated. The
default policy is always evaluated last.
Policy name /
Move / Delete
Lists the presets, and allows you to move them or edit them as appropriate.
The default policy cannot be modified or deleted.

Use this dialog box to create a protocol preset to apply to a policy.
Some of these options may not be available in all instances of creating a new protocol preset.
Option
Definition
Policy name
Type a name for the virtual host policy
Description
Optionally type a description for the policy to help you identify it.
Inherit settings
from
Select the protocol preset from which you want to inherit the settings, that is, any
settings that are not overridden by this protocol preset will be taken from the
protocol preset specified here.
Policy type
Select either:
Physical A standard policy that has rules available. A physical policy can be
triggered when its rules are matched and can also be used for inheritance.
Virtual A virtual policy can be considered to be a collection of settings available
for the purposes of inheritance. A virtual policy can never be triggered.
This option is only available when you create a protocol preset from Email | Email
Configuration when virtual hosting has been enabled on the appliance.
Match logic
Select either:
Match one or more of the following rules this policy triggers if any of the specified rules
are matched.
Match all of the following rules this policy triggers if all of the specified rules are
matched.
Configuration.
Rule type /
Move / Edit
Lists the rules associated with the preset, and allows you to move or edit them as
appropriate.
Configuration.
Product Guide
113

Option
Definition
Add Rule
Click to specify the type of rule that you want to apply to the preset, and set its
Match and Value.
Configuration.
Add network
group
Click to create a network group to associate with the preset.

Configuration.
Receiving Email
The Receiving Email tab within Email Configuration enables you to configure settings that are
protocol-dependant.
Further tabs enable you to configure permit and deny lists and anti-relay settings as well as recipient
authentication and bounce address tag validation.
Contents
Anti-Relay Settings
Bounce Address Tag Validation

Use this page to build a list of IP addresses, networks and users that are permitted, blocked or
temporarily blocked from connecting to the appliance.
Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email | Permit and Deny Lists

The page has these sections:
Benefits of using the permit and deny lists

Use this information to understand the benefits of using the permit and deny lists.
The permit and deny lists for connections and senders are located on a single page within the user
interface, allowing you to easily configure these settings.
Once set, the permit and deny lists help prevent your users from being swamped by unwanted email
messages, whilst helping ensure that email messages from trusted senders do not accidentally get
blocked.
114
Product Guide

Option definitions Permitted and blocked connections

Use this topic to learn where to specify IP addresses that are always permitted or blocked when
connecting to the appliance.
Table 4-16 Option definitions Permitted connections
Option
Definition
IP address The appliance accepts email from this address even if a detected threat caused a "Deny
connection" action. This setting ensures that the appliance does not delay email from
trusted senders.
Add
Add IP addresses to the Permitted connections list.
Delete
Remove selected IP addresses from the Permitted connections list.
Import List To prevent you having to enter the permitted connections individually onto each of your
appliances, you can import a list of permitted connections.
Export List Once you have configured the permitted connections list for one of your appliances, you
can export the permitted connections list, to be imported onto other appliances.
The file is created in comma separated values (CSV) format.
Table 4-17 Option definitions Blocked connections
Option
Definition
Virtual Host
Displays the name of the virtual host that received the connection currently
being blocked by the appliance.
IP address
Displays the IP addresses for connections that the appliance is currently

blocking. Addresses remain in this list for a specified period during which email
is not accepted.
Permitting a connection does not override any time constraints set up by the
policy that blocks the connection. For example, if a policy states that a
connection will be blocked for 600 seconds and you change the connection to
permitted within the 600 seconds, the connection continues to be blocked until
the 600 seconds have elapsed. This is why a connection can temporarily appear
in both the Blocked and Permitted connections list.
Domain Name
Displays the domain name associated with the blocked IP address.
Port
Displays the number of the port on which the message was received. This is
typically port 25.
VLAN ID
Displays the ID of the virtual LAN on which the message was received. This is
typically 1 to 4094.
Applicable to Transparent Bridge mode only.
Seconds remaining
Displays the time that must pass before the appliance again allows a connection
from this IP address.
Refresh
When clicked, updates the list of connections. The list is not automatically
updated.
Resolve Addresses
When clicked, the appliance attempts to resolve the IP addresses to show the
relevant domain name.
Unblock
When clicked, enables the selected IP address to try to reconnect.
Store a maximum of
items in the blocked
connections list
If the limit is reached, the appliance can only add more IP addresses to the list
when an existing address expires or is removed manually by clicking Unblock.
Product Guide
115

Option definitions Permitted and blocked senders

Use the information in this topic to specify senders, networks and domains that are always permitted
or blocked when connecting to the appliance.
Option
Definition
Value type (Permitted

senders)
If an email is from a permitted sender, Sender Authentication checks are

bypassed, and the sender is accepted.
Value (Permitted senders) Displays the details of the sender:

Email address For example, network_user@ example.com
IP address For example, 192.168.255.240
Domain name For example, www.example.com
Value type (Blocked
senders)
If an email is from a blocked sender, it will be refused unless there is a

corresponding entry in the permitted senders list.
Value (Blocked senders)
Displays the details of the sender (email address, IP address and domain
name).
Response if a sender is in Offers various actions, including:

the block list
Allow through
Accept and drop
Reject and close

Reject, close and deny
Reject
Resolve permitted /
blocked host names to IP
addresses
When selected, causes the appliance to use DNS to resolve host names to IP
addresses from a domain name. These lookups take place when the SMTP
proxy is initialized. The default value is Yes.
Reverse lookup sender IP

address
When selected, causes the appliance to use DNS to do a reverse lookup of the
sending IP address to match domains in the list. Because this requires an extra
lookup for each connection, this can affect performance. The default value is
No.
Import List
To prevent you having to enter the permitted or denied senders individually

onto each of your appliances, you can import lists of permitted or denied
senders.
Export List
Once you have configured the permitted or denied senders list for one of your
appliances, you can export the information, to be imported onto other
appliances.
The files are created in comma separated variables (CSV) format.
Task How do I add a permitted connection?

Use this task to add a permitted connection to your appliance.
To add a permitted connection:
Task
1
Browse to Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email | Permit and Deny Lists | Permitted and blocked connections |
Permitted connections.
Click Add.
Type the IP address and the netmask for the connection that you want listed as permitted.
Apply the changes.
The specified IP address is added as a new permitted connection.
116
Product Guide

Task How do I export my lists of permitted or denied settings?

Use this task to export your lists of either permitted or denied settings.
Once you have configured your appliance with your permitted or denied settings, you can export a list
of these settings, either as a backup or to import into other appliances.
Task
1
Browse to Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email | Permit and Deny Lists.
Click Export List for the relevant area (Permitted connections, Permitted senders or Blocked senders).
Click the displayed link to download it to your local file system.
Click Close.
Your list of Permitted connections, Permitted senders or Blocked senders is downloaded to your local file system.
Task How do I import a list that I exported from another appliance?

Use this task to import a list that was exported from another appliance.
To prevent you having to repeatedly enter the same data into each of your appliances, McAfee Email
Gateway enables you to import a list of permitted or denied senders or permitted connections into
your appliance.
Task
1
Ensure that you have exported the required list, and that it is located where it can be accessed
from your user interface.
Browse to Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email | Permit and Deny Lists.
From the relevant area (Permitted connections, Permitted senders or Blocked senders), click Import List.
Browse to the required file.
Click OK.
The selected list is imported onto your appliance.
Anti-Relay Settings
Use this page to prevent the appliance from being used as an open relay.
Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email | Anti-Relay Settings
Benefits of configuring relaying email and anti-relay settings

Understand the importance of preventing the appliance being used as an open relay.
By default, the appliance is configured as an open relay. This means that anyone can send messages
through it. You must specify the domains that can send and receive messages.
Anti-relay settings are required to ensure that the appliance only handles email for authorized users,
and to prevent other people such as spammers from using the appliance to forward their messages.
When you first log on to the appliance, a warning is given in the Services portlet on the Dashboard.
You must create at least one local domain to prevent the appliance from being used as an open relay.
Even if you have a list of domains categorized as permitted domains or denied domains, the lack of a
local domain will still mean that the appliance can be used as an open relay.
Product Guide
117

Relaying email
Anti-relay options
A typical scenario is that the local domain, such as *.local.dom, accepts messages for delivery by
the appliance. You also have a network from which you accept messages, such as 192.168.0.0/24.
The anti-relay feature checks the contents of these lists to determine whether a recipient is
acceptable.
The order in which anti-relay checks take place

Use this information to understand the order in which Email Gateway makes the anti-relay checks.
The appliance makes anti-relay checks at the RCPT TO phase of the SMTP conversation. It is important
to understand the order in which the anti-relay checks take place:
Is the local domain list empty?
Yes. The appliance operates as an open relay and allows the recipient to receive the message.
No. The appliance performs the next check.
Is the recipient or connection in the permitted domains list?
Yes. The appliance allows the recipient to receive the message.
Is the recipient or connection in the denied domains list?
Yes. The appliance rejects the recipient.
Is the recipient or connection in the local domain list?
Yes. The appliance checks whether the recipient matches on a permitted routing character.
118
Yes. The appliance accepts the recipient.

No. The appliance checks whether the recipient matches on a denied routing character.
Yes. The appliance rejects the recipient.
No. The appliance accepts the recipient.
Product Guide

No. The appliance rejects the recipient.
Option definitions Relaying email

Use this information to specify domains and networks that can use the appliance for handling their
email.
Option
Definition
Add Domain
Click to specify the domains that can relay messages through the appliance to the
recipient. Choose from:
Local domain These are the domains or networks for which email is accepted for
delivery. For convenience, you can import a list of your local domain names using
the Import Lists and Export Lists options. McAfee recommends that you add all domains
or networks that are allowed to relay messages as local domains.
Permitted domain Email is accepted. Use permitted domains to manage exceptions.
Denied domain Email is refused. Use denied domains to manage exceptions.
Hold your mouse cursor over the field to see the recommended format.
Ensure that you define at least one local domain, as well as the domains from which you
want to permit email relaying, and that you want to deny email relaying. Defining a
domain as a Permitted domain ensures that email traffic from that domain is always allowed
to be relayed.
Add MX Lookup
Click to specify a domain that the appliance will use to identify all mail server IP
addresses from which it will deliver messages.
Delete Selected
Items
Removes the selected item from the table. You must apply the changes before the
item is completely removed from the appliance configuration.
Domain Name/
Network
Address/MX
Record
Displays the domain names, wildcard domain names, network addresses, and MX
lookups from which the appliance will accept or refuse email.
Type
Domain name for example, example.dom. The appliance uses this to compare the
recipient's email address and compare the connection against an A record lookup.
Network Address for example, 192.168.0.2/32 or 192.168.0.0/24. The appliance
uses this to compare the recipient's IP literal email address such as
user@[192.168.0.2], or the connection.
MX Record Lookup for example, example.dom. The appliance uses this to compare the
connection against an MX record lookup.
Wildcard domain name for example, *.example.dom. The appliance only uses this
information to compare the recipients email address.
Category
Local domain
Permitted domain
Denied domain
Resolve the
above domain
names to IP
addresses
If selected, allows the appliance to use DNS to resolve the IP addresses of the
domains. These lookups take place only when the SMTP proxy is initialized.
Product Guide
119

Option
Definition
If a sender or
recipient is
rejected
Reject sends an SMTP 550 (permanent failure) response and closes the connection.
Reject the email and close the connection sends a rejection code, SMTP 550 (permanent
failure) response code or a SMTP 421 (Temporarily unavailable service due to
potential threat message), then closes the connection.
Accept and ignore the recipient sends an acceptance code, SMTP 250 (OK). McAfee does
not recommend this option because it suggests to the sender that the message was
received as intended.
Import Lists/
Export Lists
On an appliance from which you want to save a list of domains for anti-relay
specification, click Export Lists to create a comma-separated CSV file that contains
details of all the domains that you specified on this page, whether they are local,
permitted or denied. On an appliance onto which you wish to put the list of domains,
click Import Lists.
To create your own list, see Formats for export lists later on this page.
Option definitions Anti-relay options

Use this information to understand the options relating to the anti-relay settings.
Using routing characters (such as %, !, and |) is a method of passing messages between computers.
With these characters, unauthorized users can relay email messages (often spam) by using computers
inside your network. To permit or block this form of relaying, you specify the routing characters, which
are in the part of an email address before the final @. By default, the appliance does not support
routing characters in email addresses.
Option
Definition
Permitted routing
characters
Specifies permitted routing characters. Normally you do not need to type any
characters here.
Use the default

(Permitted routing
characters)
When selected, prevents the use of the following routing characters: *!* *%*
*|*
Denied routing
characters
Accepts any of the following characters:

*%* - Right-binding routing character (%-exploit).
*!* Local or mail gateway routing.
*|* Pipe is used by some mail servers to execute commands.
*[*]* Parentheses that encloses a dotted-decimal domain address such as
192.168.254.200.
*:* Colon for multiple hops.
For example, to block the relaying of addresses of the type
user@host@relay.com, add *@* to the list of denied characters.
Use the default (Denied

routing characters)
When selected, prevents the use of the following routing characters: *!* *%*
*|*
Enable routing character

checking for sender
When selected, examines routing characters on outgoing mail.
Protocol preset
Lists any connection-based policies to which the routing characters setting

applies.
Click to open the Protocol Presets screen to assign additional policies, or create
new policies or network groups to which the routing characters setting applies.
120
Product Guide

Task Creating a simple configuration

Use this task to create a simple configuration to allow controlled relaying of incoming and outgoing
messages from your Email Gateway.
To allow relaying of incoming messages to your domain, add a wildcard domain. To allow the relaying
of outgoing messages from your domain, add the IP address or network address of the Message
Transfer Agent (MTA):
Task
1
Go to Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email | Anti-Relay Settings.
Click Add Domain.
Type the domain name using a wildcard, such as *example.dom.
In Category, select Local domain, and click OK.
Click Add Domain, and type the network address or the IP address from which you expect to receive
messages (such as 192.168.0.2/32 or 192.168.0.0/24).
In Category, select Local domain, and click OK.
The domains that you specify are allowed to relay incoming or outgoing email traffic.
Task Creating a permitted subdomain based on a larger denied domain

Use this task to create a new permitted subdomain, using the settings for a larger, denied, domain.
To create a small permitted subdomain within a larger denied domain, create the main domain as a
denied domain, and add the sub domain as a permitted domain.
Task
1
Go to Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email | Anti-Relay Settings.
Click Add Domain.
Type the domain name that you want to deny using a wildcard, such as *example.dom to reject all
messages sent to that domain.
In Category, select Denied domain, and click OK.
Click Add Domain again, and type the name of the subdomain that you want to accept, such as
sub.example.dom.
In Category, select Permitted domain, and click OK.
The permitted subdomain is created.
Task Create a list of domains and export it to another appliance

Use this task to configure the domains on one appliance, generate a list of these domains, and then
import this list onto another appliance.
Task
1
On a master appliance, go to Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email to set up the local domain, and
any permitted or denied domains.
Click Export Lists to create a CSV file that contains a list of all domains displayed in the Relaying
email list.
Product Guide
121

Click the link to download the file, and save it onto your local file system.
On a secondary appliance, go to Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email and click Import Lists.
Formats for export lists

Use this information to understand the formats you can use to create an export list.
To create a list of domains for an export list, type the domains into a comma-separated values file
using the following formats:
To add a local domain, type LD *<domain name>
To add a local network address, type LN <IP address>/<CIDR>
To add a permitted domain, type PD *<domain name>
To add a denied domain, type DD *<domain name>
For example:
LD *inbri.bs.dom, LN 10.6.1.3/24, PD *qa.ext.bs.dom, DD *ext.bs.dom
Use this page to prevent attacks from zombie networks, bogus recipient names, and directory
harvesting.
Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email | Recipient Authentication

Benefits of using Recipient Authentication

Use this information to understand the benefits of using Recipient Authentication on your McAfee Email
Gateway.
Greylisting email messages from unknown senders causes messages from these senders to be rejected
for a period of time. If the sending email system is legitimate, it will follow the correct protocols for
re-delivering previously rejected messages. However, most "zombie" networks that are used to send
spam messages do not comply with these protocols, and therefore messages from them are blocked.
Recipient checks are useful tools in preventing directory-harvest attacks and flooding attacks (where
large volumes of email messages are directed at your email servers, in the hope that some will get
through to valid email addresses). Recipient checks work by you providing information about your
genuine recipients of email messages within your organization. This information may already be
available from your LDAP servers. You can also import lists of recipient email addresses from a file.
This option is intended for small companies who can easily maintain a list of email recipients. For
larger companies, consider using LDAP directory services to provide email attributes to the appliance
(Email | Group Management | Directory Services.)
Directory harvest prevention compares the number of email messages being sent to known and unknown
email addresses within your organization. From this, the appliance can identify when a directory
harvest is taking place, and can take steps to minimize the impact of the attack.
122
Product Guide

Option definitions Greylisting

Use this information to learn about the options available for configuring greylisting on your McAfee
Email Gateway.
Use this section to create a grey list, which is effective against attacks from unknown senders such as
zombie networks. Greylisting temporarily rejects email from new senders to resist spam attacks.
Option
Definition
Protocol preset
Specifies the policy (and network group) to which these settings apply.
Accept SMTP
callback requests
If selected, overcomes delays caused by devices that use SMTP callbacks to

prevent spam.
Initial retry delay
Specifies how long to reject any early attempt to resend the email. The default
value is 3600 seconds (1 hour). Many mail servers typically try to resend after one
hour. The range is up to 86400 seconds (1 day).
Unretried record
lifetime
Specifies how long to keep a record, where the sender has not tried to send
another message.
After this time, the appliance deletes the record of any triplet that has not be
retried. We recommend a value below 8 hours. The range is up to 96 hours (4
days). Default value is 4 hours.
Greylisted record
lifetime
Specifies how long to keep a greylisted record. The appliance deletes records of
triplets that have not been referenced for some time. The range is up to 2160
hours (90 days). Default value is 864 hours (36 days), which is suitable for
occasional mail like monthly newsletters.
Maximum number of Specifies the maximum number of greylisted records. When the number of records
records
approaches this value, the appliance starts deleting old records. The range is
50,000 to 2,000,000. Default value is 2000000.
Option definitions Recipient Checks

Use this information to learn about the options available within the user interface for configuring
recipient checks.
Use this section to prevent directory-harvest attacks and attacks that issue large numbers of email
messages (known as flooding). You can provide the appliance with a list of permitted recipients. Your
network might already have this information on its LDAP servers. Alternatively, you can import a list of
email addresses from a text file.
Option
Definition
Protocol preset
If the recipient is not in

the following list
When selected, checks the recipient address against email addresses in the list.
Email address
Lists the acceptable email addresses. You can use wildcards, for example:
user*@example.com. We recommend that you do not overuse wildcards,
because you will defeat the intention. Add or remove addresses as necessary.
Or if the recipient does

not satisfy the query
When selected, checks the recipient address against email addresses in the LDAP.
To connect to an LDAP server, select Email | Group management | Directory Services and
click Add Server.
Take the following

action
Accept and ignore the recipient Accepts the email message and ignores it. The
appliance sends an acceptance code (SMTP 250 OK). We do not recommend
this option because it suggests to the sender that the message was received as
intended.
Reject Sends a rejection code (SMTP 550 Fail). We recommend this option
because the sender is normally informed that the message was not accepted.
Product Guide
123

Option definitions Directory harvest prevention

Use this information to learn about the options available within the user interface for configuring
directory harvest prevention.
Use this section to prevent directory harvest attacks. The appliance examines the number of known
and unknown email addresses to determine whether an attack is taking place.
When used with some email servers, Directory Harvest Prevention might not function as expected.

Option
Definition
Protocol preset
When the appliance is in

transparent mode
None Takes no action.

Tarpit Delays a response to email that has several recipient addresses.
Tarpit then deny connection Delays a response to the email, then adds the
sender to the Denied Connections list.
Deny connection Adds the sender to the Denied Connections list.
Default value is Deny connection.
When the appliance is in

proxy mode
None takes no action.

Deny connection adds the sender to the Denied Connections list.
Default value is Deny connection.
When an email has been

deferred and is being
retried
None Takes no action.

Deny connection Adds the sender to the Denied Connections list.
Deny connection and quarantine email Adds the sender to the Denied Connections
list, then forwards the email to a quarantine area.
Default value is Deny connection and quarantine email.
Response delay
When a tarpit action was selected, specifies the delay in responding to this
email.
Default value is 5 seconds. This is often enough to deter an attack.
Maximum number of
recipients
When a tarpit action was selected, specifies how many recipient addresses
each email may have. Default value is 10.
Applies a delay if there are too many recipient addresses in the email message.
A directory harvesting
attack ...
Defines this type of attack. Default values are 5 failed recipients and 10%
accepted recipients.
Email that falls outside this specification is not considered to be an attack, so
no action is taken.
Task Block all incoming email where the user does not exist in LDAP
Use this task to block all incoming email messages where the user does not exist in LDAP.
Task
124
Go to Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email | Recipient Authentication | Recipient checks.
Select Or if the recipient does not satisfy the query and select the desired Valid recipient query for the LDAP
server.
Product Guide

Select the action that you want to take.
Apply the configuration changes to the appliance.
Bounce Address Tag Validation

Use this page to combat backscatter bounced email that was not originally sent from your
organization.
Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email | Bounce Address Tag Validation

If an Mail Transfer Agent (MTA) cannot deliver an email message, the MTA returns (or 'bounces') the
message to the sender using a return address in the message. Unfortunately, spam email messages
often have a forged (or spoofed) return address. The bounced email often goes to an innocent
organization. This type of email is known as backscatter. During a spam attack, your organization
might receive many such messages.
Benefits of using Bounce Address Tag Validation

This topic discusses the benefits of using Bounce Address Tag Validation.
Bounce Address Tag Validation (BATV) enables your organization to ignore any backscatter email
message by checking whether your organization was its original sender. The appliance can attach a
encrypted digital signature (or tag) to the SMTP MailFrom address on every outgoing email message.
When a bounced email arrives, the appliance searches for the digital signature, and rejects any
message that has no digital signature or has an invalid digital signature. Such a message cannot be a
genuine, bounced email message.
BATV can be implemented on a per-policy basis, using suitably configured Protocol presets.
For more information about BATV, visit http://mipassoc.org/batv/draft-levine-batv-03.txt.
If email is handled by several appliances for example, one appliance handles outgoing email, while
another appliance handles incoming email all the appliances need information about the signature
seeds and signature lifetime. To distribute the information between your appliances, use the import
and export features in the interface.
Option definitions Bounce Address Tag Validation

Use this information to learn about the controls available within the user interface for configuring
Bounce Address Tag Validation.
Table 4-20 Option definitions Bounce Address Tag Validation Actions
Option
Definition
Protocol preset:
Select a Protocol preset to allow you to configure per-policy actions for

BATV on your appliance.
Select Create a new preset if you need to define a new preset.
Click to open a dialog box enabling you to re-order your existing protocol
presets.
Product Guide
125

Table 4-20 Option definitions Bounce Address Tag Validation Actions (continued)
Option
Definition
Enable bounce address tag

validation
Select to configure BATV on your appliance.
When validation fails
Specifies how the appliance must handle each invalid bounced message.
Allow through
Reject
You can assign different actions for each preset.
When you enable BATV tagging, the maximum length of local part of the MAIL FROM address used by
the appliance increases by 16 characters. Adjust your configuration setting to allow up to 80 characters
to allow BATV tagged email addresses. To do this, navigate to Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration |
Protocol Settings (SMTP) | Address Parsing Options and change the maximum length.
Option
Definition
Signature lifetime Specifies how long the signature seed will be used to sign outgoing email. Mail servers
typically try to deliver mail for up to four days. McAfee recommend a value of 47
days.
Signature seed
Specifies a seed for signing the sender's address.

Use only letters, numbers and space characters. The acceptable key length is 464
characters. Type a seed that is not easy to guess.
Generate
When clicked, generates a signature seed that has 20 random letters and numbers.
You can use this method instead of typing your own signature seed.
Import settings
When clicked, opens a file browser to import a text file that contains BATV settings
from another appliance.
Export settings
When clicked, opens a file browser to create a text file that contains BATV settings for
use by another appliance.
Sending Email
Use this page to specify how the appliance delivers email messages.
Email | Email Configuration | Sending Email

Benefits of using the Sending Email features

This information explains some of the benefits of using the Sending Email features found within
The features and options found within the Sending Emails tab enable you to configure the methods used
by the appliance to send email messages on. These options enable you to select the best options to
suit your existing network and email configuration.
126
Product Guide

Option definitions Delivering email

Use this information to understand how the appliance tries to deliver email, based on the domain part
of the recipient's address. In a To field, the domain part of an address such as aaa@example.com is
example.com.
Using the recipient's domain, the appliance uses the following logic to decide how it will deliver
messages:
If the recipient's domain matches those listed in Domain Routing, it uses those relays to deliver the
message.
If the recipient's domain does not match those listed in Domain Routing, it can be configured to use an
MX record lookup to deliver using DNS. If no MX records are available, it attempts to make the
delivery using an A record lookup. MX delivery is attempted to hosts in the order of priority that is
returned by the DNS server.
If it cannot deliver using one of the previous methods, it uses fallback relays to make the delivery
(providing the recipient's domain matches those listed in the Fallback relays field).
If the domain does not exist, the appliance generates a non-delivery report and sends it to the
originator.
If the receiving server cannot accept delivery, or there are no IP addresses to complete the
delivery, the message is queued.
Option
Definition
Import Lists
Click the link to open the Import Lists dialog box.
Export Lists
Click the link to open the Export Lists dialog box.
Product Guide
127

Option
Definition
Domain Routing
Displays a list of domains.

This list allows you to specify specific relays/sets of relays to be used to deliver
messages destined for specific domains. Domains can be identified using exact
matches, or using pattern matches such as *.example.com.
Click Add Relay List to populate the Domain Routing table with a list of host names, or IP
addresses for delivery. Delivery will be attempted in the order specified unless you
select the Round-robin the above hosts option which will distribute the load between the
specified hosts.
Host names/IP addresses may include a port number.
Click Add MX Lookup to populate the Domain Routing table with an MX record lookup to
determine the IP addresses for delivery.
Delivery will be attempted to host names returned by the MX lookup in the order of
priority given by the DNS server.
Click Add LDAP Lookup to populate the Domain routing table with an LDAP lookup to
determine the Home Mail Transfer Agent (MTA) to be used for emails to the specified
domain.
Only LDAP servers that have already been set up in Email | Group Management | Directory
Services | Add Server appear on this list.
Use an IPv4 or IPv6 address with optional port number or a fully qualified domain
name. For example, 10.6.1.6, 10.6.1.5:25,
2001:db8:ac10:fe01:205:2cff:fe03:2a45 or mailrelay.mydomain1.dom. If you
specify a fully qualified domain name, the appliance does an A-record lookup to
determine the IP address.
To specify multiple relays for a single domain, separate each with a space.
If the first mail relay is accepting email, all email is delivered to the first relay. If that
relay stops accepting email, subsequent email is delivered to the next relay in the
list.
128
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Enable DNS
lookup for
domains not
listed above
If selected, the appliance uses DNS to route email for other, unspecified domains.
DNS delivery attempts an MX-record lookup. If there are no MX records, it does an
A-record lookup.
If you deselect this checkbox, the appliance delivers email only to the domains that
are specified under Domain Routing.
Fallback relays for Specifies the fallback relays. If delivery is unsuccessful by any other method, and the
unreachable
domain matches an entry in this list, the appliance uses the information in this list to
domains
determine a host to be used for delivery.
Click Add Relay List to populate the Domain Routing table with a list of host names, or IP
addresses for delivery. Delivery will be attempted using the hosts in the order
specified unless you select the Round-robin the above hosts option which will distribute the
load between the specified hosts.
Click Add MX Lookup to populate the Domain Routing table with an MX record lookup to
Click Add LDAP Lookup to populate the Domain Routing table with an LDAP lookup to
determine the Home Mail Transfer Agent (MTA) to be used for emails to the specified
domain.
Only LDAP servers that have already been set up in Email | Group Management | Directory
Services | Add Server appear on this list.
Option definitions Postmaster address

Use this information to understand the importance of assigning a postmaster address, and how to do
this.
McAfee recommends that you assign a postmaster, so that queries from your users are handled
promptly. The postmaster must be someone who reads email regularly. You can use the name of a
single user or a distribution list.
Option
Definition
Postmaster
address
Specifies an email address that the appliance uses to deliver email that has a
recipient of postmaster.
We recommend that you specify an email address here, so that any delivery
problems are handled promptly. You can specify a distribution list or a single user
who reads email regularly.
Option definitions Enable digests

Use this information to understand the options available to allow you to configure quarantine digest
messages.
Option
Definition
Enable digest messages Specifies whether to enable digest messages for the selected protocol preset.
and message
Protocol preset
Reminds you that digest messages are enabled for this protocol preset.
Allows you to make settings for any exception to the default setting. For
example, you can specify that some parts of the network do not use digest
messages.
Product Guide
129

Option definitions DKIM signing

Use this information to understand DKIM signing, and to view the available options for configuring
DKIM signing.
The Domain Keys Identified Mail (DKIM) technique uses RSA private and public keys and DNS TXT
records to enable the recipient to verify the identity of an email sender.
The sender signs the email message with a private key, by adding an extra header - the
DKIM-Signature header. The header provides the email message with a cryptographic signature. The
signature is typically derived from the message body and email headers such as From and Subject,
then encrypted by the sender's private key.
Recipients can verify that the message is genuine by making a query on the signer's domain to
retrieve the signer's public key from a DNS TXT record. The recipient then verifies that the email and
its signature match. The recipient can therefore be confident that the email was sent from the stated
sender and was not altered during transit.
The appliance can verify signatures from incoming mail and attach signatures to outgoing mail.
For information about Domain Keys Identified Mail (DKIM), visit the Internet Engineering Task Force
website, http://www.ietf.org and http://www.dkim.org.
Use this section to create a Domain Keys Identified Mail (DKIM) key.
Option
Definition
Enable DKIM
signing
When selected, adds a DKIM header (like a digital signature) to each email message as
it is sent.
You must add a key before you can enable DKIM signing.
Domain name
and Selector
During verification, the recipient extracts your Domain Name and Selector from the
signature to retrieve the public key associated with the appliances private signing key.
For example, if your Selector is mail and your Domain Name is example.com, the
recipient must issue a DNS query for the TXT record of mail._domainkey.example.com.
Signing key
Select the key to be used to sign the messages.
DKIM signing
keys
Allows you to create signing keys from numerous parameters.
Export
When clicked, allows you to save the private key to a file, in case the original private
key is lost or erased.
View Public Key Place the public key on your DNS server or give it to your Internet Service Provider, so
that recipients can verify email from your organization.
130
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Import Key
Select this to import an existing DKIM key onto your system.
Advanced
options
This section enables you to select specific advanced options that relate to the way your
appliance carries out DKIM checks.
From this area, you can choose:
What to sign either signing All headers or Selected headers. Click the linked text to select
the individual headers to sign.
Header canonicalization you can choose either Simple or Relaxed canonicalization for the
headers.
Body canonicalization you can choose either Simple or Relaxed canonicalization for the
body text.
Key expiry choose to either have a key that does not expire, or to set an expiry date
for the key.
Signing identity add an optional signing identity to your DKIM keys.
Option definitions Queued email delivery

Use this information to understand how to specify the handling of email delivery if the first attempt to
send is not successful. You do not normally need to change these settings.
Use the Per-domain settings section to specify how the appliance delivers email intended for known
domains. The options outside this section apply to email for all other destinations.
Option
Definition
Maximum number of connections

open at any one time
Time before an NDR is issued
Specifies how long the appliance tries to deliver an email message

before sending a non-delivery report (NDR) to its sender. Default value
is 108 hours (4.5 days).
Domain
Specifies a domain to which the appliance delivers many email

messages during a single connection. To organize priority for delivery,
click the icons in the Move column.
An asterisk (*) indicates all domains.
Retry Interval (success) and Retry

Interval (failure)
Specifies how often to retry delivery to the specified domain.
Maximum open connections and

Emails per connection
Specifies other options that control the rate for delivering email to this
domain.
By default, further email is sent every 1 minute if previous email was

sent successfully. If a previous attempt failed, the appliance waits 10
minutes before trying again.
Task Deliver all email using MX record delivery

Use this task to deliver all email using MX record delivery.
By default, your Email Gateway uses MX records to deliver all email.
Task
Use the default settings.
Your Email Gateway uses MX records to deliver all email by default.
Product Guide
131

Task Deliver all email to a specific domain using round robin delivery
Use this task to deliver all email to a specific domain using round robin delivery.
Task
1
Go to Email | Email Configuration | Sending Email.
In Delivering email, click Add Relay List.
In Domain name, type example.com.
Click Add Host and type internal1.mailserver.com and internal2.mailserver.com.
Click Round-robin the above hosts.
Your Email gateway is configured to deliver all email to the specified domain using round robin
delivery.
Task Use MX to manage your delivery to a specific domain

Use this task to use your own MX environment to deliver email messages to a specific domain.
You can use your own MX environment to manage your infrastructure externally. For example,
mx.mailserver.com could be set up to either have priority or round-robin delivery.
Task
1
In Delivering email, click Add MX Lookup.
In MX record, type mx.mailserver.com.
Your email messages sent to the specified domain are delivered using MX lookup.
Task Use a specified LDAP server to deliver email from a specific domain
Use this task to specify that email messages from a particular domain are handed by a specified LDAP
server.
Before you begin
You must configure your appliance to use the required LDAP server using Email | Group
Management | Directory Services | Add Server before using this feature. You also need ensure that
the Home MTA queries in the Add Server wizard match the configuration for your LDAP directory
services.
Task
1
In Delivering email, click Add LDAP Lookup.
In Directory servers, select the LDAP directory server to be used to deliver email messages to the
domain specified in Domain name.
The specified LDAP server is used to handle email messages from the selected domain.
132
Product Guide

Task Deliver all failed deliveries to a specific server

Use this task to ensure that all failed email message deliveries are sent to a specific server.
Task
1
In Fallback relays for unreachable domains, click Add Relay List.
In Domain name, type *.
Click Add Host, and type internal3.mailserver.com.
All failed email message deliveries are now sent to the specified server.
Task - Deliver the email for a user to the Home MTA attribute defined in
LDAP
Use this task to deliver a message for a user to the Home Message Transfer Agent attribute defined in
LDAP.
Task
1
Go to Email | Email Configuration | Sending Email .
In the Domain Routing area under Delivering email, select Add LDAP Lookup.
In the Domain name field, add the domain name of the email recipients on which you want to perform
the LDAP lookups.
Select the server from the list of directory servers, and click OK.
Sending Email Add Relay List dialog box and Add MX Lookup
dialog box
Add a relay to the lists for sending email, or use MX lookups.
Table 4-22 Add Relay List dialog box
Option
Definition
Domain name
Enter the domain name to which the new relay applies.
Relay host
Shows the relay hosts that are already configured.
Add Host
Click to add a new host to the relay Hosts list.
Delete Selected Hosts
To delete relays listed in the lists, select the relevant relays, and click Delete
Selected Hosts.
Round-robin the above hosts Select this to enable the hosts to be used in a round-robin when sending
email.
Table 4-23 Add MX Lookup dialog box
Option
Definition
Domain name
Enter the domain name to which the lookup applies
MX record
Enter the MX lookup information that determines the IP addresses for delivery.
Product Guide
133

Email Policies
Anti-Relay Settings Add Relay Domain dialog box and Add MX

Lookup dialog box
Add a relay to the lists for receiving email, or use MX lookups.
Table 4-24 Option definitions Add Domain dialog box
Option
Definition
Domain name
Type the domain name to be used within the anti-relay settings.
Category
Define the type of domain, either:

Local domain
Permitted domain
Denied domain
Table 4-25 Option definitions Add MX Lookup dialog box

Option Definition
MX record To have McAfee Email Gateway do a mail exchange record lookup for domain example.dom,
type server1.example.dom where domain name is example.dom, and the MX record is
server1.example.dom.
Define the type of domain, either:
Category
Local domain
Permitted domain
Denied domain
You can only enter one MX record per domain name.
Email Policies
Use this page to view and configure policies relating to your email traffic.
134
Product Guide

Email Policies
Introduction to policies
The appliance uses policies which describe the actions that the appliance must take against threats
such as viruses, spam, unwanted files, and the loss of confidential information.
Email | Email Policies
Figure 4-1 Email Policies
Policies are collections of rules or settings that can be applied to specific types of traffic or to groups of
users.
SMTP policies
Email Gateway provides the following features when scanning the SMTP protocol:
SMTP
Anti-Virus, including:
Anti-virus
McAfee GTI file reputation
McAfee Anti-Spyware
Packer detection
Spam, including:
Spam
Phish
Product Guide
135

Email Policies
Sender Authentication
McAfee GTI message reputation
Compliance, including:
File filtering
Image filtering
Signed or encrypted content
Mail size filtering
McAfee GTI URL reputation
Compliance
Policy Options, including:
Scanning limits
Notification and routing
Content handling
McAfee GTI feedback
Alert settings
Encryption
POP3 policies
Email Gateway provides the following features when scanning the POP3 protocol:
136
POP3
Anti-virus
McAfee Anti-Spyware
Packer detection
Spam, including:
Spam
Phish
Mail size filtering
Image filtering
Scanner Options, including:
Scanning limits
Content handling
Alert settings
Product Guide

Email Policies
Secure Web Mail policies

McAfee Email Gateway provides the following policies when using the Secure Web Mail client to send
email messages.
Email | Email Policies (McAfee Secure Web Mail
Anti-virus
McAfee Anti-Spyware
Packer detection
Spam, including:
Spam
Phish
File filtering
Compliance
Image filtering
Mail size filtering
Scanner Options, including:
Scanning limits
Notification and routing
Content handling
McAfee GTI feedback
Alert settings
Encryption
About Protocol Presets

Protocol presets enable you to configure your appliance to cater for differences in parts of your
network, or for specific devices on your network.
Normally you design your connection settings to apply to all devices. However some parts of your
network might need some differences because some devices operate differently.
For example:
Part of the network can handle larger or smaller files than normal.
A slow connection requires a different time-out value.
Part of the network must use an alternative authentication service.
By creating a protocol preset, you can cater for this exception to the connection settings.
Product Guide
137

Email Policies
Where this feature is available, you can click this icon:
Primary and secondary actions

McAfee Email Gateway can be configured to apply two levels of actions when a detection is made.
In general, a client MTA sends an email to Email Gateway. The email message is then scanned. If no
detections are found, the message is delivered to its intended recipients on the server MTAs. However,
if a scanner triggers a detection, Email Gateway applies the selected primary action and a number of
secondary actions to the message that contains the detection.
When Email Gateway is configured in hybrid mode, email messages from the inbound client MTA are
scanned by the cloud-based McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid). If no detections are found, the message
is delivered to the Email Gateway for onward delivery to its intended recipients. However, the process
taken when a scanner triggers a detection varies depending on the scanner.
Primary Action
The primary action is defined as What happens to the message coming from the client MTA to the
server MTA?":
Was it blocked?
Was it modified and then delivered?
Was it delivered to the recipient without modification?
The message is scanned by all scanners. If multiple scanners trigger, the primary action that has the
highest priority is applied. For example, if the file filtering policy is set to Allow Through (Monitor), and the
anti-spam policy was set to Accept and Drop the data (Block), then the Accept and Drop the data (Block) action
applies.
Table 4-26 Primary actions behavior in top-down priority order
138
Type
Action
Sender perspective
Blocking
Deny Connection
550 Message Rejected. Might No message is

receive notification that the
received.
message was delivered.
Yes
Blocking
Refuse the data

and return an
error code

received.
No
Blocking
Accept and drop

the data

received.
No
Modify
Replace the
content with an
alert
250 Message Accepted. It

appears to the sender that the
message is delivered.
Replacement
message (alert
received)
No
Reroute
Reroute
250 - Message Accepted.
Dependent on
action taken by
onward server
No
Recipient
perspective
Kernel
mode
blocking
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-26 Primary actions behavior in top-down priority order (continued)

Type
Action
Sender perspective
Recipient
perspective
Kernel
mode
blocking
Monitor
Allow Through
250 Message Accepted.
Message received
No
Skip
scanning
Allow through,
without scanning
250 Message Accepted.
Message received
No
This option might allow

viruses and other
unwanted content to pass
through without
detection.
Only one primary action is taken per detection.
Available primary actions

If a scanner triggers a detection, these primary actions are available:
Deny Connection (Block) Blocks the message from being delivered, returns a 550 SMTP code to the
sending MTA, places the connecting IP address in the Kernel Mode Block list.
Refuse the data and return an error code (Block) Blocks the message from being delivered, returns a 550
SMTP code to the sending MTA.
Accept and Drop the data (Block) Accepts the connection, but blocks the message from being delivered,
returning a 250 SMTP code to the sending MTA.
Replace the content with an alert (Modify) Replaces any detected content with a configurable alert and
delivers the modified Email to its intended recipients.
Allow Through (Monitor) Lets the message pass to its intended recipients, but information is retained
within the logs and reports.
Skip scanning No scanning is performed on this action.

This option might allow viruses and other unwanted content to pass through without detection.
Even though the feature is called Skip scanning, it is still necessary to perform some sort of scanning
of the email to ensure that certain features (for example, attachment identification and disclaimers)
still function. Therefore, the SMTP proxy still needs to be protected from Denial of Service attacks.
Tarpit - Delays the response to the email message. By default, the delay is 5 seconds, and is
configurable from the Default Sender Authentication Settings | Cumulative score and other options tab.
Add to score Combines the results of several methods of sender authentication.
Select the score to be added.
Reject (Block) Blocks the message from being delivered, and returns the appropriate code to the
sending MTA.
Reject and close (Block) Blocks the message from being delivered, returns appropriate code to the
sending MTA and the closes the connection.
Reject, close and deny (Block) - Kernel Mode Blocking. This is an effective method of combating spam, as
it deals with the message itself (reject), the connection (close) and adds the sending server to the
deny list.
Not all primary actions are available to all policy areas.
Product Guide
139

Email Policies
Secondary action
A secondary action is defined as What additional actions will happen due to the scanner triggering a
detection?:
The message is scanned by all scanners. If multiple scanners trigger, the secondary actions are
aggregated together. For example, if the file filtering policy is set to Annotate and deliver original to a list, and
the anti-spam policy is set to Annotate and deliver original to a list, then only one notification is sent.
You can also configure any or all of the following secondary actions:
Quarantine options
Quarantine original Select to have the original message added to the Quarantine database.
Quarantine modified Select to have the modified message added to the Quarantine database.
If you are using off-box quarantine, you can also select the quarantine queue into which the email
message is placed. This selection can include custom quarantine queues that you have created.
Notification email options
Send one or more notification emails Use notification templates to customize the notifications send. Click
Manage templates to make changes to the notification options.
Annotate and deliver original to sender Deliver the original email message to the sender, with
annotations added.
Deliver a notification email to 'Notification Email List' Deliver a notification email to all addresses defined
within the notification email list.
Deliver a notification email to the original recipient(s) Deliver a notification email to all the recipients on
the original email message.
Deliver a notification email to the sender Deliver a notification email to the sender of the email
message.
Deliver an audit copy to 'Auditing Email List' Deliver a copy of the original email message for auditing
purposes to all addresses defined within the auditing email list.
Deliver the modified email to the sender Deliver the email message to the sender, with modifications
made by McAfee Email Gateway included.
Show selected/Show all To help manage the options shown, you can hide unselected notification
templates.
In addition to the pre-defined templates shown above, this list will also include any custom
notification templates that you create.
Other actions
140
Modify subject McAfee Email Gateway rewrites the subject of the email message using
user-definable templates, and then delivers the message to the intended recipients. Click Manage
templates to change the way the subject is re-written.
Modify headers McAfee Email Gateway modifies the email message headers using user-definable
templates, and then delivers the message to the intended recipients. You can select multiple
header modification templates. Click Manage templates to change the way the headers are re-written.
Product Guide

Email Policies
The following icons indicate the template settings:
When triggered, adds a header, and removes pre-existing headers of the same name.
When triggered, adds a header without removing any pre-existing headers.
When triggered, removes any pre-existing headers of the same name.
Deliver message using encryption Attempt delivery of the message using your configured encryption
settings.
Policy exceptions
Use policy exceptions to minimize the number of policies that you need to create and maintain.
By applying exceptions for specific circumstances to standard policies, you avoid the time-consuming
task of changing all of your policies.
Contents
What are policy exceptions?
Benefits of using policy exceptions
Task - Configure a policy exception to allow email messages containing blacklisted URLs to be
received by members of Human Resources
What are policy exceptions?

Policy exceptions are rules that change the behavior of a policy only in certain circumstances.
To simplify the process of creating and maintaining the policies that define the scanning behavior for
McAfee Email Gateway, you can configure policy exceptions. Policy exceptions allow you to create
policies that can be applied to a wide user base, and to then create exceptions to these policies for
specific users or groups of users that might need different scanning criteria.
For example, you might configure a policy that includes mail size filtering, with a corporate-wide size
limit of 100,000 KB. You can now configure a policy exception to this policy that states that members
of your creative services team have a higher email size limit, as they often have a legitimate
requirement to send very large files via email.
Benefits of using policy exceptions

By configuring policy exceptions within McAfee Email Gateway, you can use a small number of
standardized policies, and create exceptions that enable the policies to behave slightly differently in
specific circumstances.
If you do not use policy exceptions, you must create new policies for each different behavior, creating
a complex set of policies that becomes difficult to maintain. By using policy exceptions, you need to
maintain fewer policies, as you can handle different requirements using the policy exceptions. These
exceptions make it much easier if you need to update your global policies, as you will need to make
changes to only a small number of policies.
Policy exceptions can be used for most email scanning policies used within McAfee Email Gateway.
When you configure a policy exception, you cannot configure any inheritance of settings from the
original policy. In order to configure different settings for a policy exception to those in the underlying
policy, inheritance is automatically broken for the policy exception.
Product Guide
141

Email Policies
Task - Configure a policy exception to allow email messages containing

blacklisted URLs to be received by members of Human Resources
You can create exceptions for almost any setting within a policy. This discussion uses URL Reputation
Settings as an example.
You might have added the URLs to your competitors' job vacancy web sites into the URL Reputation
Blacklists in your general policy, so that your workforce cannot receive these links in email messages.
However, you might want to allow your Human Resources team to receive email messages containing
links to these web sites so that they can keep abreast of the current positions and salaries within your
industry. This goal is achieved by creating a policy exception for all members of the Human Resources
team. A policy exception for all members of the Human Resources team has the blacklisted URLs
removed.
Task Add a policy exception

Create policy exceptions to modify the way specific policies apply. This example shows how to add an
exception to URL reputation scanning for Human Resources.
Task
1
Select Email | Email Policies | Compliance.
Click the URL reputation link.
In the exceptions box, click Add Exception.
Type the initial information about the exception:

a
Type a name for this policy exception.

Example: Type HR Exception1
[Optional] Type a description for the exception.

Example: Exception to allow HR to view competitors job/vacancy sites
Select the required option to configure the match logic.

Example: Select Match one or more of the following rules.
Add at least one rule to the exception.

a
Click Add Rule in the Scanning Policies New Policy Exception window.
In the Rule type list, select the proper entity.

Example: Select Recipient email address.
In the Match list, select the proper logic.

Example: Select is like.
In the Value field, type the information that identifies the selected entity.
Example: *@hr.example.com.
e
6
Click OK.
Click OK.
The Scanning Policies New Policy Exception window closes, and the new exception appears in the
exceptions box. An exceptions icon is displayed to the left of the policy area to which it applies.
142
Product Guide

Email Policies
Task - Add a rule to a policy exception

You must add at least one rule to a policy exception to complete it. You can also add rules to existing
exceptions.
Before you begin
You must create an exception before adding rules.
This example shows how to add a rule to an exception to URL reputation settings.
Task
1
Select Email | Email Policies | Compliance | URL Reputation.
In the exceptions box, click the button for the exception to which you want to add a rule.
Click Add Rule.
In the Match list, select the required matching logic.
In the Value field, type the information that identifies the selected entity.
Click OK.
Click OK.
Task Change the policy settings only within the exception

So that these changes only apply to a specific scenario, make changes to the policy settings only
within the exception you have created.
Task
1
Navigate to the portion of the policy you want to change.

Example: Select Email | Email Policies | Compliance | URL Reputation.
In the exceptions box, click the button for the exception you want to change.
The configuration page for the policy shows the settings that apply to the exception.
Make the required change to the policy settings.

Be sure to highlight the exception, not the original policy.
Example: From the URL Reputation Settings page, select Blacklists and Whitelists. Remove the URLs you
want excluded from the blacklist.
5
Click OK.
Human Resources are allowed to see links to competitor's employment opportunities without other
departments receiving this information within their email messages.
Product Guide
143

Email Policies
Task Edit an existing policy exception

You can change the exception logic, and add, change, or delete rules as needed.
Task
1
In the exceptions box, click the button for the exception you want to edit.
The Scanning Policies Edit Policy Exception Details window opens.
Make the changes you want.
Change the exception name or the optional description.
Change the match logic.
Add, edit, or delete rules.
Change the order of rules.
Click OK.
[Optional] To delete an exception:

a
Select the exception in the exceptions box.

An X appears beside the exception name.
Click the X. Click OK to delete the exception.
Custom Notifications
McAfee Email Gateway allows you to create your own custom notification email messages for any rule
that allows secondary actions.
Custom notifications allow you to send different messages to specific individuals or groups when an
email message triggers the associated rule. You can use custom notification templates along with the
pre-configured templates. You can also have more than one custom notification template for each rule,
and use any of the available templates in combination.
Benefits of using custom notifications

Custom notifications permit administrators to set up specialized email messages to be sent to select
individuals and groups when a message triggers a particular rule.
Email notifications generated by Email Gateway are based on templates. The system already includes
basic, pre-configured templates. Any custom templates you create become available on the template
list.
Custom email notifications allow you to:
Specify the content and other attributes of your notifications.
Provide the most relevant information to different individuals about messages that trigger action.
Send multiple email notifications for one rule.
Examples Using custom notifications

Custom notifications are useful in a variety of circumstances. The following scenarios illustrate ways
you might apply them.
144
Product Guide

Email Policies
Issue In the default policy, you have enabled Compliance, and you created five compliance rules. By
default, all five rules use the default compliance notification. You want to send more detailed
notifications to two distinct groups when a message triggers specific rules: the Legal Department, and
a list of other individuals.
Solution You create two custom notification templates, one for each of these groups. Then you can
add the notifications to the actions for each rule you want, without affecting the actions for other
rules.
Issue You have created a policy that applies to inbound mail, and you have enabled Image Filtering.
You have created a rule that scans messages for objectionable images. You want to notify the intended
recipient about the message, and you want to inform Human Resources. The notification to Human
Resources contains unique content.
Solution You create a custom notification template for Human Resources, then apply it to the rule.
You also apply the preconfigured notification to the recipient.
Task Create a custom notification

You might want to notify an administrator or group of people if McAfee Email Gateway detects a
specific event. In many policy options, you can now define your own notification message templates.
Before you begin
Notifications result from messages that trigger specific rules. You must have configured a
rule before you can generate notification email messages.
Use the wizard from the Manage Templates page to create a custom notification.
Task
1
Select Email | Email Policies. In the scanner column of your choice, select the link for a rule.
Select the option to enable the rule.
Set thresholds or other parameters for the rule if required.
Under Take the following action, select the main action for the rule.
Under And also, scroll to Notification email options and select the check box to Send one or more notification
emails.
Select the Manage templates link.
On the Notification Templates page, click Add.
Use the Add Notification Template wizard to create the custom notification template.
When you have completed the wizard, click Finish
10 On the Notification Templates page, click OK.

11 On the options page for the rule you chose, select the new custom notification template from the
list of available templates.
Messages that trigger the rule will generate the custom email notifications.
Product Guide
145

Email Policies
Email Policies
Use this page as a single point where you can access the pages and dialog boxes you need to set up
and configure your policies.
Email | Email Policies | Scanning Policies

Policy settings specify how the appliance handles threats to groups of users or devices. For example, a
policy can apply to all computers on the same subnet, or all users in a department.
Benefits of using the Scanning Policies page

Use this information to gain an understanding of the benefits of using Scanning Policies to configure
your Email Gateway.
The Scanning Policies page enables you to access all the forms you need to configure and manage your
policies for the SMTP and POP3 protocols and for McAfee Secure Web Mail policies.
The user interface provides an overview of your policy settings, giving you information about each
policy such as the action taken when a virus is detected. The page to configure these settings is
displayed when you click the relevant information.
Some of the options described on this help page do not apply to POP3 or McAfee Secure Web Mail
scanning policies. Where options only apply to one protocol, this is highlighted.
Option definitions Email scanning policies

Learn about the options present within the user interface for configuring email scanning policies.
The following information and controls are available to configure this feature:
Option
Definition
Select a
protocol:
Use the drop-down list to display, create, or edit your policies for:
SMTP
POP3
McAfee Secure Web Mail
Order
Policies are used in a "top-down" order. When more than one policy has been created,
you can select the order in which they are applied.
Policy Name
Displays the name of each policy.

The appliance always has a default policy, which applies to everything in the network.
You can change the default policy, but you cannot delete it.
To see the users or devices that are affected by a policy, move the cursor over the
policy name and wait for a yellow box to appear.
To change any details of the policy, click the blue link to open another window.
146
Applies to inbound email traffic (SMTP protocol only)

Applies to outbound email traffic (SMTP protocol only)
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Anti-Virus
Definition
Displays brief details about the Anti-Virus options settings.
Click any link within the Anti-Virus area of the relevant policy to open the Anti-Virus Settings
page.
From the Anti-Virus Settings page you can access:
Basic Options, including McAfee GTI file reputation
McAfee Anti-Spyware
Packers
Custom Malware Options
Spam
Displays brief details about the Spam settings.

Each link within the Spam area of each policy opens a separate page containing the
features and options you need to configure your policy.
Anti-Spam Settings including:
Basic Options
Spam Rules
Advanced Options
Spam Terms
Blacklists and Whitelists

Anti-Phish Settings
Sender Authentication Settings (SMTP protocol only), including:
Message Reputation
You can enable this option for a higher detection threshold, a lower detection
threshold, or both, based on GTI Message Reputation levels.
RBL Configuration
SPF, Sender ID, DKIM and FCrDNS
Cumulative Score and Other Options
Compliance
Displays brief details about the Compliance settings.

Each link within the Compliance area of each policy opens a separate page containing the
features and options you need to configure your policy. You can configure:
File Filtering Settings (SMTP protocol only)
Data Loss Prevention Settings (SMTP protocol only)
Mail Size Filtering Settings, including information on:
Mail Size Filtering Settings -- Message Size
Mail Size Filtering Settings -- Attachment Size
Mail Size Filtering Settings -- Attachment Count
Compliance Settings
Image filtering
URL reputation
Product Guide
147

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Policy Options
Displays brief details about the Policy Options settings.

Each link within the Policy Options area of each policy opens a separate page containing
the features and options you need to configure your policy. You can configure:
Scanning Limits, including information on maximum file size, maximum nesting depth
and maximum scan time.
Alert Settings
Content Handling, including information on:
Content Handling Settings Email Options
Basic Options
Text and binary MIME types
Advanced options
Character sets
Missing / Empty Headers

Content Handling Settings HTML Options
Content Handling Settings Corrupt or Unreadable Content
Corrupt content
Protected files
Partial / external messages
Unscannable Content
Policy based action
Notification and Routing (SMTP protocol only), including information on:
Notification and Routing Notification Emails
Notification and Routing Audit Copies
Notification and Routing Routing
Notification and Routing SMTP Relays
Notification and Routing Email Recipients
McAfee GTI feedback
Encryption Options, including information on:
Encryption Settings
On-box Encryption Options
On-box Decryption Options
Move
Use the arrow icons to move your policies higher or lower in priority order.
Move the policy up
Move the policy down

The default policy always appears at the bottom of the list of policies. You cannot change
its position.
148
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Delete
After creating policies, you can choose to delete any that you no longer require, by
clicking
.
You cannot delete the default policy.
When clicked, opens the Scanning Options New Policy dialog box where you can create new
policies, user groups, and network groups.
Add Policy
Task Delete a scanning policy

Use this task to understand how to delete a scanning policy that is no longer needed.
You cannot delete the default scanning policy.
To delete a previously created policy:

Task
1
Click Email | Email Policies | Scanning Policies.
Identify the policy to be deleted.
3
4
Click
Confirm that you intend to delete the policy.
The identified policy is deleted.
Task View policies for SMTP, POP3 or McAfee Secure Web Mail
View the scanning policies that exist for SMTP, POP3 or McAfee Secure Web Mail.
You use this page to create, and manage your SMTP, POP3 or McAfee Secure Web Mail email scanning
policies.
The POP3 protocol limits some of the scanning actions that can be applied to email messages. Options
not available to scan POP3 email messages are hidden from the POP3 protocol view.
Task
1
Select either SMTP, POP3 or McAfee Secure Web Mail from the Select a protocol: drop-down list.
The Email | Email Policies | Scanning Policies page refreshes to show the policies that have been defined for
the selected protocol.
Task Change the scanning order of my policies

Use this task to change the order in which your policies are used to scan email traffic.
The appliance uses the order of the policies to evaluate the email messages being scanned. A message
will first be evaluated against the rule with the Order value of 1, and if this does not trigger, it is then
evaluated against policy 2 and so on until it is evaluated by the default scanning policy.
Product Guide
149

Email Policies
If you have created more than two scanning policies, you can change the order that your appliance
uses the policies to evaluate email traffic. This is achieved by moving the relevant policies up or down
the policy list.
The default policy always appears at the bottom of the list of policies. You cannot change its position.
Task
1
Identify the policy to move in the evaluation order.
In the Move column, click
or
to move the policy one step.
If the identified policy is either at the top of the evaluation order, or is next to the default policy,
then one or other of the icons will not be available for selection.
Task Turn on GTI message reputation for all users in the HR group
defined in LDAP
Use this task to enable GTI message reputation checks for all users in the Human Resources group
defined in LDAP.
Before you begin
Before completing this task, you must do the following:
Configure an LDAP server and at least one query (Email | Group Management | Directory Services
Define a user group for Human Resources (Email | Group Management | Network Groups
Task
1
Go to Email | Email Policies.
Within the desired protocol, click Add Policy.

The Scanning Policies - New Policy dialog box opens.
Type a name for the new policy, and add a description if desired.
Select the policy from which this policy will inherit settings.
Indicate the email direction for messages treated with this policy.
Select the match logic to use for this policy.
Select Add Rule.

The Add Rule dialog box opens.
In the Add Rule dialog box, select the LDAP Query rule type and click OK.
The Add Rule dialog box closes.
On the New Policies dialog box, click OK.

The new policy appears on the Policies list.
10 In the Spam section for the new policy (or for the Default policy if you selected that), click the link
for GTI message reputation.
The Sender Authentication Settings dialog box opens.
150
Product Guide

Email Policies
11 Enable message reputation, then click OK.

12 Select the green check mark icon in the upper portion of the window to save and apply your
configuration.
Task Re-write the Subject of all messages matching a policy

Configure McAfee Email Gateway to re-write the Subject line of all email messages that match a
specific policy. To configure your policy to re-write the Subject line of email messages requires that
you follow each of the steps given within this task.
Tasks
Task Create a compliance dictionary to match all subject lines on page 151
Create a compliance dictionary that matches all email messages with a valid subject line.
Task Create a compliance dictionary to match subject lines that have already been
modified on page 152
To prevent the subject line of a message being re-written each time any other process
modifies the subject, create a new compliance dictionary.
Task Configure a policy to use the new compliance dictionaries on page 153
Link the new compliance dictionaries to a policy, so that your McAfee Email Gateway can
re-write the subject of email messages matching the compliance dictionary, unless the
subject line has already been modified.
Task Create a compliance dictionary to match all subject lines

Create a compliance dictionary that matches all email messages with a valid subject line.
Before you can configure a policy to match all email messages with a valid subject line, create a
compliance dictionary.
Task
1
Browse to Email | DLP and Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries.
Under Dictionary List, click Add Dictionary.
Type a name for the new category. For example, type All Subjects in the Name field.
Type a description for the new dictionary.
Select Regular expressions from Match type.
Click OK.
Under Dictionary details for 'All Subjects', a New term is added.
Click the Everything link from within Dictionary details for 'All Subjects'.
Unselect Everything.
The File categories and Subcategories areas are enabled.
Select E-Mail Messages from within File categories.
10 Select Subject line from within Subcategories

11 Click OK.
The new dictionary, All Subjects, now is applied only to email messages with a valid Subject line.
12
From the New term row of the Dictionary details for 'All Subjects' table, click the edit
icon.
Product Guide
151

Email Policies
13 In the Term field, type .*.

14 Click OK.
15 Apply the new configuration.
The new compliance dictionary is created, and is configured to match any email message with a valid
subject line.
Task Create a compliance dictionary to match subject lines that have

already been modified
To prevent the subject line of a message being re-written each time any other process modifies the
subject, create a new compliance dictionary.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have already created the compliance dictionary for the initial subject
re-write, and have configured your policies to successfully re-write subject lines for emails
that match the policies.
Task
1
Type a name for the new category. For example, type Previously Modified Subjects in the Name
field.
Click OK.
Under Dictionary details for 'Previously Modified Subjects', a New term is added.
Click the Everything link form within Dictionary details for 'Previously Modified Subjects'.

11 Click OK.
The new dictionary, Previously Modified Subjects, now is applied only to email messages with a valid
Subject line.
12
From the New term row of the Dictionary details for 'Previously Modified Subjects' table, click the edit
13 In the Term field, type ^((re|fw):\s*)*policy match:.

Repeat this step for any other modification patterns that you do not want to be re-applied.
14 Click OK.
152
Product Guide
icon.

Email Policies
The new compliance dictionary is created, and is configured to match any email message with a
subject line that includes re: or fw:
This rule is not case sensitive, so it will match re: Re: RE: fw: Fw: or FW:
Task Configure a policy to use the new compliance dictionaries

Link the new compliance dictionaries to a policy, so that your McAfee Email Gateway can re-write the
subject of email messages matching the compliance dictionary, unless the subject line has already
been modified.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have created the new compliance dictionaries before following this task.
You can edit an existing policy to use the new compliance dictionaries, or you can create a new policy.
Task
1
Create a new policy, or select the policy to be edited.
Click the Compliance link within the Compliance column.
Ensure that Compliance is enabled (Select Yes at the top of the dialog box.)
Click Create new rule.

You will need to create a new rule for the "All Subjects" compliance dictionary and another new rule
for the "Previously Modified Subjects" compliance dictionary.
Type a name for the new rule: (for example:)
Match all messages for the All Subjects rule.
Previously Modified Subjects for the rule to prevent multiple subject re-writes.
Click Next.
Search for and select the compliance dictionaries you previously created (in the example, this was
"All Subjects", and "Previously Modified Subjects".)
Click Next.
Click Next.
10 From the If the compliance rule is triggered drop-down list, select Allow Through (Monitor).
11 From And also, select Modify subject from the Other actions sub-category.
12 Click Manage templates.
13 Click Add from the Subject Templates dialog box.
14 Select or edit the required Subject templates:
For the "All Subjects" rule, edit the subject template by adding the text you want to be
displayed in the subject line for email messages matching this policy. For example, type "Policy
Match: " before the %SUBJECT% token.
For the "Previously Modified Subjects" rule, select the %SUBJECT% option, and make sure that
it has a higher priority than the "Policy Match: %SUBJECT%" template (by moving this to the
top of the list).
Product Guide
153

Email Policies
15 Click OK.
16 Click OK.
17 Select the modified subject from the Select a template drop-down list.
18 Click Finish.
19 Click OK.
20 Apply the changes.
The subject line of all email messages matching this policy are re-written, unless the subject lines
have already been modified.
Task Modify the headers of all messages matching a policy

Configure McAfee Email Gateway to modify the headers of all email messages that match a specific
policy.
Tasks
Task Create a compliance dictionary to match all messages on page 154

Create a compliance dictionary that matches all email messages. One way to achieve this is
to match email messages with a valid subject line.
Task Configure a policy to use the new compliance dictionaries on page 155
Link the new compliance dictionary to a policy, so that your McAfee Email Gateway can add
a custom header to email messages matching the compliance dictionary.
Task Create a compliance dictionary to match all messages

Create a compliance dictionary that matches all email messages. One way to achieve this is to match
email messages with a valid subject line.
Before you can configure a policy to match all email messages, create a compliance dictionary.
Task
1
Type a name for the new category. For example, type All Subjects in the Name field.
Click OK.
Under Dictionary details for 'All Subjects', a New term is added.
Click the Everything link from within Dictionary details for 'All Subjects'.
154
Product Guide

Email Policies
11 Click OK.
The new dictionary, All Subjects, now is applied only to email messages with a valid Subject line.
12
From the New term row of the Dictionary details for 'All Subjects' table, click the edit
icon.
13 In the Term field, type .*.

14 Click OK.
The new compliance dictionary is created, and is configured to match any email message with a valid
subject line.
Task Configure a policy to use the new compliance dictionaries

Link the new compliance dictionary to a policy, so that your McAfee Email Gateway can add a custom
header to email messages matching the compliance dictionary.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have created the new compliance dictionary before following this task.
You can edit an existing policy to use the new compliance dictionary, or you can create a new policy.
Task
1
Create a new policy, or select the policy to be edited.
Click the Compliance link within the Compliance column.
Ensure that Compliance is enabled (Select Yes at the top of the dialog box.)
Click Create new rule.

You will need to create a new rule for the "All Subjects" compliance dictionary.
Type a name for the new rule: (for example:) Match all messages for the All Subjects rule.
Click Next.
Search for and select the compliance dictionary you previously created (in the example, this was
"All Subjects".)
Click Next.
Click Next.
10 From the If the compliance rule is triggered drop-down list, select Allow Through (Monitor).
11 From And also, select Modify headers from the Other actions sub-category.
12 Click Manage templates.
13 Click Add from the Header Modification Templates dialog box.
14 Select or edit the required header templates, including defining the name for each header and
specifying the tokens applicable to each header.
To prevent multiple copies of a defined header being added to a message, select Remove Existing.
Product Guide
155

Email Policies
15 Click OK.
16 Click OK.
17 Select one or more Header Modification Templates from the list of currently configured templates.
18 Click Finish.
19 Click OK.
Email Policies - Add Policy

Specify a new policy, including defining the group of users or devices to which you can apply the
policy.
Email | Email Policies | Add Policy...

The Add Policy page enables you to specify parameters that define the policy. You also specify the users,
user groups, and network groups to which the policy applies.
Option definitions Scanning Policies | New Policy

This information describes the options available on this dialog box.
Option definitions New Policy dialog box

Option
Definition
Add user group
Click to open the Add User Group dialog box.
Add network group
Click to open the Add Network Group dialog box
Policy name
Type the name of the new policy.
Description
Optionally add a description of the new policy to facilitate identification.
Inherit settings from
Select the policy from which you want this policy to inherit its settings.
Email direction
Choose whether you want the policy to apply to inbound or outbound email traffic
only. By default, policies apply to both inbound and outbound traffic.
Match logic
Choose whether you want the match to be made on one or more of the rules, or all
of the rules in the list.
Add Rule
Opens a new dialog box where you can specify the type and match for the rule
that you want to create, and specify the value.
The network group and user group and LDAP query rules are not available until you
create the items.
Move
Use the arrows to move the rules up and down the list.
The rules are actions from the top of the list downwards.
Delete Selected Rules Click to remove a rule from the list.

Reset
156
Resets the window to the default state.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option definitions Add User Group dialog box

Option
Definition
Group name
Type the name of the group
Selected or
unselected
Select a group and click Edit or Delete Selected Rules as appropriate. Use the arrow
icons to move the rules up and down the list.
Rule type
Choose from:
Sender email address
Recipient email address
Sender user group
Recipient user group
LDAP Query (if configured)
The LDAP query and user group options become available only when a user
group or LDAP server has been created.
Match
Choose from:
is
is not
is like
is not like
Value
Type the value that you want to associate with Match.
Add Rule
Click to add a new rule to the list.
Option definitions Add Network Group dialog box

Option
Definition
Group name
Type the name of the network group
Rule type
Choose from:
IP address
VLAN identifier
Network connection
Host name
Match
Choose from:
is
is not
is in
is not in
Value
Type the value associated with the type of rule that you chose
Move
Use the arrows to move the rules up and down the list
The rules are actions from the top of the list downwards.
Add Rule / Delete Selected Rules
Click to add a new rule to the list
Reset
Click Reset to clear all data from this form.
Product Guide
157

Email Policies
Task Create a new scanning policy

Learn how to create a new scanning policy.
Your appliance uses the policies you create to scan the email messages sent through the appliance.
You can create multiple policies to control the way different users use email, or to specify different
actions based on specific circumstances.
Task
1
Select Email | Email Policies | Scanning Policies.
Select the required protocol using steps in Task View policies for SMTP, POP3 or McAfee Secure
Web Mail.
Click Add policy.
In the Scanning Policies New Policy page, enter the following information:
a
Name for the policy.
Write an optional description for the new policy.
Specify where the new policy inherits its settings from.

If you have a similar policy already set up, select this to allow its settings to be inherited by the
new policy.
Choose if the policy is to apply to inbound or outbound email traffic. (SMTP only)
Select the required Match logic for the policy.
Select the type of rule, how it should match, and the value that the rule tests against.
If required, add additional rules, and use the
and
buttons to correctly order the rules.
Click OK.
The new policy is added to the top of the list of policies.
Task - add a user group

Use this task to create a user group that can be used in policy selection.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have a valid connection to a Generic LDAP Server, and its queries are
providing output.
Task
1
Go to Email | Group Management | Email Senders and Recipients.
Click Add and type a name for the group.
Click Add Rule.
In Rule type, select LDAP Query.

The Values field is populated with the name of the LDAP group you selected.
158
Click OK to close the dialog box.
Go to Email | Email Policies | Add Policy....
Product Guide

Email Policies
Click Add Rule. In Rule type, select User group.
In Value, select the user group you created, and click OK.
Task Create a policy using a network group

Use this task to create an email policy using a network group of internal email servers. This allows
easy management of your internal network groups without having to change scanning policies.
Task
1
Go to Email | Group Management | Network Groups.
Click Add, and type a name for the network group such as Internal Email Servers.
Click Add Rule.
In Rule type, select IP address.
In Match, select is, and type the IP address of one of your mail servers.
In Value, type the IP address of one of your email servers, and click OK.
Repeat steps 3 through 6 to add the IP address of another email server.
Click Email | Email Policies | Add Policy..., and type a name for the policy.
If the network group that you want to use for the policy is not already created, click Add network group.
Configure the policy:
Select the policy from which you want to inherit settings
Select the email direction
Set the match logic.
10 Click Add Rule.

11 In Rule type, select Source network group, and in Value, select the Internal mail servers group.
12 Click OK.
Option definitions Add rule or Edit rule dialog

Use these options to configure or edit the types of rules you want the policy to apply.
The available options vary with the selected rule type.
Product Guide
159

Email Policies
Table 4-28
Rule type
Option definitions available options

Explanation
Source IP address Use this rule to enforce a policy based on the IP address of
the incoming network connection.
The source IP address is usually the IP address of the
Senders MTA or of the Firewall/NAT in front of the MTA.
This rule works with proxy or transparent connections.
Destination IP
address
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on the IP address of

the outgoing network connection.
The destination IP address is usually the IP address of the
Recipients MTA or of the Firewall/NAT in front of the MTA.
This rule only works with transparent connections.
Supported match
options
is
is not
is in
is not in
is
is not
is in
is not in
Sender email
address
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on the email address

of the sender. The rule uses the information in the MAIL
FROM envelope of the SMTP conversation.
is
is not
is like
is not like
Masqueraded
sender email
address
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on an email address

after address masquerading is carried out.
is
is not
is like
is not like
The email address to evaluate is taken from 'MAIL FROM' of

the SMTP conversation, after address masquerading has
been applied. If the email address has not been
masqueraded the original Sender email address is used.
This rule applies regardless of masquerading success or
failure.
160
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-28
Option definitions available options (continued)
Rule type
Explanation
Recipient email
address
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on the email address

of the recipient of the email. The rule uses Information in
the 'RCPT TO' envelope of the SMTP conversation.
Since an email may be addressed to more than one
recipient, the application of this rule differs between
transparent and proxy connections:
Supported match
options
is
is not
is like
is not like
Proxy connections application of this rule causes the

message to be split if a single policy does not match all of
the recipients of the email (as specified by the Recipient
email address or Aliased recipient email address). The
message will be scanned using each of policies for the
recipients that match that policy. It is possible that
recipients who match different policies will receive a
different mail to other recipients, if policy settings cause
modification of the mail.
The number of times a message may be split is configured
in Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Protocol
Settings (SMTP) | Message processing | Advanced options
| Maximum number of policies per email. If the message is
split more that the configured number of times, no
message split is performed and the message is scanned
with the highest order common policy.
Transparent connections by default a policy with this
rule is only triggered if all recipients match the rules for
the policy (as specified by the Recipient email address or
Aliased recipient email address).
When a message has multiple recipients and multiple
policies would have matched, the highest order policy that
matched all rules up to the RCPT TO phase of the policy
will be used for scanning. This behavior may be overridden
in Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Protocol
Settings (SMTP) | Transparency options (router and bridge
mode only) | Advanced options | Allow multiple policies
per email.
Overriding this behavior will cause the original
connection to the onward server to be ended, and a new
mail delivered for each policy.
A policy will never trigger, if 'Recipient email address' rule
type has been used more than once in the policy with
'Match all of the following rules' match logic.
Recipient email
address list
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on the email

addresses of the complete set of recipients included in the
email delivery.
This rule is evaluated after the complete set of recipients has
been received at the 'RCPT TO' phase of the SMTP
conversation. It will not cause the message to be split for
different policies.
contains
does not contain
contains values like
does not contain
values like
This rule may be used to trigger a policy when you need to

consider whether multiple recipients have been sent a
message.
Product Guide
161

Email Policies
Table 4-28
Rule type
Explanation
Aliased recipient
email address
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on the aliased email

address of the recipient.
Supported match
options
is
is not
is like
is not like
Aliased recipient
email address list
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on a recipient email

address list after the recipient aliasing is carried out.
Once the policy is enforced based on the email address list it
will stop evaluating the policies later in the order for that
email.
VLAN identifier
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on a VLAN identifier

which uniquely identifies the VLAN to which the frame
belongs. You can use a value between 0 4095.
contains
does not contain
contains values like
does not contain
values like
is
is not
This rule applies to transparent connections only.
162
Incoming network Use this rule to enforce a policy based on a specific network
connection
connector (NIC) for incoming connections.
is
Outgoing network Use this rule to enforce a policy based on a specific network
connection
connector (NIC) for outgoing connections.
is
Source host name Use this rule to enforce a policy based on the domain name
for the origin or the message.
is
is not
is like
is not like
Destination host
name
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on the domain name

for the recipient of the message.
is
is not
is like
is not like
Source network
group
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on a specific,

identifiable network group.
is
is not
Destination
network group

identifiable network group.
is
is not
User group

identifiable user group.
is
is not
LDAP query
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on a selected LDAP

query.
Query and Value

Retrieve button
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-28
Rule type
Explanation
Email subject
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on specific values of

the Subject header of the message.
Supported match
options
matches
does not match
is
is
is
is
is
is
is
is
Email header
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on specific values in a

Header of the message.
The UI provides a drop down list of standard headers, as
well as headers used by McAfee Data Loss Prevention
(X-RCIS-Action) and McAfee Outlook Add-in for sending
encrypted outbound messages (X-MFE-Encrypt). You can
choose any of these, or specify a custom header, such as
XMyHeader.
not
like
not like
empty
not empty
present
not present
matches
does not match
is empty
is not empty
is present
is not present
All whitespace in the header value, including continuation

lines, is collapsed and normalized to one SPACE (ASCII
0x20) character. To match any whitespace use either ' ' or
\s.
Multiline headers are collapsed into a single line.
MIME-encoded header values containing non-ASCII
characters are decoded. The pattern matching uses the
Unicode values of the characters in the string.
Policy rules
Use this rule to enforce a policy based on configured policy

based rules.
N/A
Other configuration options

Operator
This option is only available when you select the rule type.
Match
Available LDAP querymatch options vary with the rule type you choose. The match
logic options table below shows the permitted matches for each rule type.
Value
Enter or select the value associated with the type of rule that you chose.
Product Guide
163

Email Policies
Option definitions match logic options

Understand the options for the matching logic available within rules.
Table 4-29 Option definitions match logic options
Option
Definition
Explanation
is
The rule type you select is an exact

match for the value you enter.
Supported values vary according to rule

type, and may include:
IP address
Network
connection
Network IP
address
VLAN identifier
Email address
Host name
Domain name
is not
The rule type you select does not

match the value you enter.

IP address
Network
connection
Network IP
address
VLAN identifier
Email address
Host name
Domain name
is like
The rule type you select matches the

pattern of the value you enter.

IP address
Network
connection
Network IP
address
VLAN identifier
Email address
Host name
Domain name
is not like

match the pattern of the value you
enter.

IP address
Network
connection
Network IP
address
VLAN identifier
Email address
Host name
Domain name
164
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-29 Option definitions match logic options (continued)

Option
Definition
Explanation
contains
The rule type you select contains the

specific value you enter.

IP address
Network
connection
Network IP
address
VLAN identifier
Email address
Host name
Domain name
does not contain

contain the specific value you enter.

IP address
Network
connection
Network IP
address
VLAN identifier
Email address
Host name
Domain name
contains values
like
The rule type you select includes

values that match the pattern of the
value you enter.

IP address
Network
connection
Network IP
address
VLAN identifier
Email address
Host name
Domain name
does not contain
values like

include values that match the pattern
of the value you enter.

IP address
Network
connection
Network IP
address
VLAN identifier
Email address
Host name
Domain name
is empty
The rule type you select exists, but it

contains no values.
N/A
is not empty
The rule type you select exists, and

contains unspecified values.
N/A
is present
The rule type you select exists.
N/A
is not present

exist.
N/A
Product Guide
165

Email Policies
Table 4-29 Option definitions match logic options (continued)

Option
Definition
Explanation
matches
The rule type you select matches the

regular expression you enter.
Create a regular expression.
does not match

match the regular expression you
enter.
Create a regular expression.
Option Definitions Scanning Policies New Policy Exception

Create policy exceptions to exempt specified individuals or groups from configured policies.
Exceptions apply whether you enable the underlying policy or not.
Table 4-30
Option definitions New Policy Exception
Option
Definition
Exception name
Specifies name for the exception.
Description (optional)
Specifies a description that helps to identify the exception, if desired.
Use this exception when

scanning email
(Only visible when editing an existing policy exception)
Match logic
Select the required option to determine how the system applies policy
exception rules.
Rule type
Displays the type of the rule, based on the parameters set when you
created the rule.
Move
Clicking the relevant arrow moves a rule up or down in the list of rules.
Rule priority is determined by the position within the list, with the rules at
the top of the list having a higher priority than those lower down.
Edit
Opens the edit window for the specific rule.
Add user group
Opens the page to allow you to create a new user group.
Add network group
Opens the page to allow you to create a new network group.
By default, this checkbox is selected, enabling the selected policy exception

within your email scanning. Deselect to disable the policy exception.
Table 4-31 Option definitions Add Rule

Option
Definition
Rule type
Drop-down list displays the available entity types. The rule applies this type.
Match
The drop down selections determine how the rule applies to the entity.
Value
Specifies the data to identify the specific entity.
Option definitions Scanning Policies | New Policy | Add user

group
166
Option
Definition
Group name
Type the name of the group.
Selected or
unselected
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option
Definition
Rule type
Choose from:

Sender user group
Choose from:
Match
is
is not
is like
is not like
Value
Add Rule
Click to add a new rule to the list.
Task - add a user group

Before you begin
providing output.
Task
1
Click Add Rule.

Product Guide
167

Email Policies
Option definitions Scanning Policies | New Policy | Add

network group
Option
Definition
Group name
Type the name of the network group.
Rule type
Choose from:
IP address
VLAN identifier
Network connection
Host name
Choose from:
Match
is
is not
is in
is not in
Value
Type the value associated with the type of rule that you chose.
Move
Use the arrows to move the rules up and down the list.
Add Rule / Delete Selected Rules Click to add a new rule to the list.
Use the Reset button to clear the entries you have made in this dialog box.
Reset
Option definitions Subject Templates

Create or edit Subject templates for the subject re-write action used by McAfee Email Gateway
features.
Option
Definition
Template
Shows the text or tokens that will be used to re-write the subject line.
Priority
Shows the priority of the available templates.
Move
Use the arrow icons to move your subject template higher or lower in priority order.
Move the template up
Move the template down
Edit
Click to make changes to the text that is used to re-write the subject line.
Delete
Click to remove the template.

You cannot delete a template that is currently being used by a policy.
168
Add
Create a new template at the bottom of the template list.
Insert
Create a new template above the currently selected template.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option definitions Header Modification Templates

Create or edit header templates for the modify headers action used by Email Gateway features.
Option
Definition
Header Name
Shows the name of the header being added or modified within the email message.
Header Value
Shows the tokens that provide information used to modify the email headers.
Remove Existing
When selected, Email Gateway removes existing headers with the same name.
Edit
Click to make changes to the header template.
Delete

You cannot delete a template that is currently being used by a policy.
Add
Create a new template at the bottom of the template list.
Option definitions Notification Templates

Use the notification templates page to view details about each available notification template, and to
manage the customized notification templates.
Option
Definition
Template Name Lists the names for all the pre-defined and custom notification templates.
Email Content
Provides an overview of the content of the notification emails generated from each
notification template.
Sender
Lists the purported sender for the notification email message.
Recipients
Lists the recipients that will receive notifications when each notification template is used
to generate a notification email message.
Subject
View the subject that is added to notification email messages.
Edit
Click to make changes to the settings contained within custom notifications.

You cannot edit the pre-defined notification templates.
Delete

You cannot delete the pre-defined notification templates, or any templates that are
currently being used by a policy.
Add
Create a new notification template. The new template is added at the bottom of the
template list.
Option definitions Add/Edit Notification Template

Create or edit notification templates as part of the customized notifications feature.
The Add Notification Template pages take the form of a wizard, with the following pages:
Email Content
Subject
Sender
Other options
Recipients
When editing a pre-configured customized notification template, these same pages are available from
tabs accessed from the Edit Notification Template link.
Product Guide
169

Email Policies
Table 4-33 Option definitions Add/Edit Notification Template Email Content

Option
Definition
Template name
Add or edit the name for the template. This name is reflected in the first column of
the Notification Templates dialog box.
Predefined content To use predefined content within the notification, select one of the options:
Send a default notification email
Forward the original email
Send an annotated email
Forward the modified email
Send a scanner alert

Selecting either of the forward options does not allow the use of custom subjects, or
allow the forwarding of any attachments contained within the email message.
Custom content
To create a custom notification, choose either:

Send a custom HTML notification, or
Send a custom plain text notification
Editing area
When creating custom notification content, use the editing area to create the
notification. Select from the drop down list of available tokens to have McAfee Email
Gateway add the required information at the time the notification is sent. Type any
other message for the intended recipients of the notification.
Table 4-34 Option definitions Add/Edit Notification Template Sender

Option
Definition
Predefined sender Select from the list of available, predefined senders.

Custom sender
To have notification emails appear to be from a specific, custom sender, enter the
required email address.
Table 4-35 Option definitions Add/Edit Notification Template Recipients

Option
Definition
Predefined recipients
Select from either the recipient (or recipients) for the original email message, or
the sender of the original email message.
Custom recipient
To have notification emails sent to another recipient, enter the required email
address.
Configured recipient lists To have the notification messages sent to a list of recipients, enable One or more
recipient lists, and then select the required list or lists.
Table 4-36 Option definitions Add/Edit Notification Template Subject
Option
Definition
Predefined subject Select from the list of available subject options.

Custom subject
Create a custom subject to be used by notification messages generated using this

template. Custom subjects can include tokens selected from the drop-down list that
are populated with data from the McAfee Email Gateway at the time the notification
is generated.
Table 4-37 Option definitions Add/Edit Notification Template Other options

Option
Definition
Attachments
You can choose to attach the original email message, the

modified email message when available, both types of message
or no messages.
Miscellaneous options
170
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-37 Option definitions Add/Edit Notification Template Other options (continued)
Option
Definition
Only generate the notification when the email

is delivered
Select this check box to send notifications only when the

appliance does not block the message.
Do not generate a bounce email if the

notification cannot be delivered
Select this check box to prevent sending bounce emails when a

notification cannot be delivered.
Allow viral content to be forwarded or

included as an attachment
Select this check box to permit forwarding viral content or

including it as an attachment.
To detect viral content, enable anti-virus scanning.
Option definitions Add/Edit Header Modification Template

Create or edit header modification templates as part of the header modifications feature.
Option
Definition
Header name Add or edit the header name.

To ensure that only one header exists with a given name, select Remove existing headers with
the same name.
Header value Select the required header tokens from the drop-down list. You can add multiple tokens.
To remove headers, leave the Header value field empty.
Anti-Virus policy settings

Use the Anti-Virus policy settings to specify the files you want to scan and the actions you want to take
when a threat is detected, and create detection policies for viruses, spyware, packers, and malware
threats such as worms and mass mailers.
Anti-virus features
The anti-virus protection within Email Gateway provides many ways to protect your network and
users.
Email | Email Policies | Anti-Virus

The anti-virus software:
Detects and cleans viruses.
Protects your network from potentially unwanted programs (PUPs). The appliance can be
configured to:
Enable or disable detection of potentially unwanted programs.
Detect specific types of potentially unwanted programs, such as mass mailers and Trojan
horses.
Detect named malware.
Take specific actions when malware is detected.
Protects your network from named packers. You can add and remove packer names from the list of
packers that will be detected.
Product Guide
171

Email Policies
Packers compress files and can effectively disguise executable programs. They can also compress
Trojan horses and make them harder to detect. The appliance can be configured to:
Detect named packers.
Exclude named packers from detection.
Take specific actions when a packer is detected.
Protects your network from PUPs. A cautious user might want to be informed of PUPs, and might
want to remove them.
McAfee anti-spyware software detects and, with your permission, removes potentially unwanted
programs. Some purchased or intentionally downloaded programs act as hosts for other potentially
unwanted programs. Removing these potentially unwanted programs may prevent their hosts from
working. Review the license agreement for these host programs for further details. McAfee does not
encourage nor condone breaking any license agreements. Read the details of license agreements
and privacy policies carefully before downloading or installing any software.
Automatically scans within compressed files.
Automatically decompresses and scans files compressed in the packages that include PKZip, LHA,
and ARJ.
Detects macro viruses.
Detects polymorphic viruses.
Detects new viruses in executable files and OLE compound documents, using a technique called
heuristic analysis.
Upgrades easily to new anti-virus technology.
Settings for scanning viruses and similar threats

The anti-virus settings in a policy protect the network and its users.
Email | Email Policies | Anti-Virus

Threats to your network and users may be from:
Viruses
Spyware
Adware
Various kinds of malware (malicious software) and other potentially unwanted software.
Spyware can steal information and passwords. This category includes potentially unwanted programs
(PUPs), which are any software that a cautious network administrator might want to be informed of,
and possibly remove, such as password crackers. Adware, too is among these nuisances, because it
distracts employees from their normal work.
What is a potentially unwanted program (PUP)?

Potentially unwanted programs (PUPs) are not considered to be malware like viruses and Trojan
horses.
Email | Email Policies | Anti-Virus | McAfee Anti-Spyware
172
Product Guide

Email Policies
Some software programs written by legitimate companies might alter the security or privacy of the
computer where they are installed. This software can include spyware, adware, and dialers, and might
be downloaded unwittingly with a program that the user wants. Cautious users prefer to know about
such programs, and in some cases, remove them.
Customized anti-virus settings

Besides giving you the levels of scanning (such as default file types, which scans only the most
susceptible files), Email Gateway also allows you to specify various options when scanning for viruses.
Email | Email Policies | Anti-Virus | Basic Options

Although more options can provide greater security, scanning will take longer. The scanning
capabilities are:
Detect possible new viruses in programs and documents.

Documents that carry a virus often have distinctive features such as a common technique for
replicating themselves. Using heuristics, the scanner analyzes the document to detect these kinds
of computer instructions. Program file heuristics scans program files and identifies potential new
file viruses. Macro heuristics scans for macros in the attachments (such as those used by Microsoft
Word, Microsoft Excel, and Microsoft Office) and identifies potential new macro viruses.
Scan inside archive files.

By default, the scanner does not scan inside file archives such as .zip or .lzh files because any
infected file inside them cannot become active until it has been extracted.
Scan default file types.

Normally, the scanner examines only the default file types it scans only those files that are
susceptible to infection. For example, many popular text and graphic formats are not affected by
viruses. Currently, the scanner examines over 100 file types by default, including .exe and .com.
Scan all files.

This option ensures that every file is scanned. Some operating systems, such as Microsoft
Windows, use the extension names of files to identify their type. For example, files with the
extension .exe are programs. However, if an infected file is renamed with a harmless extension
such as .txt, it can escape detection and the operating system can run the file as a program if it is
renamed later.
Scan files according to file name extension.

You can specify the types of files you want to scan according to their file name extensions.
Treat all macros as viruses.

Macros inside documents are a popular target for virus writers. Therefore, for added security,
consider scanning all files for macro viruses, and optionally removing any macros found, regardless
of whether they are infected.
Scan compressed program files.

This is used to scan compressed files such as those compressed using PKLITE. If you are scanning
selected file extensions only, add the appropriate compressed file extensions to the list.
Special actions against packers and PUPs

The appliance handles most detections according to the actions that you specify on the Basic Options
tab.
Email | Email Policies | Anti-Virus | Custom Malware Options
Product Guide
173

Email Policies
To specify that a scanner on the appliance handles some packers and PUPs differently, use the Custom
Malware Options tab.
Problems with alerts for mass mailers

Normally, the appliance handles all potentially unwanted programs in the same way. However you can
specify that certain types are handled differently.

For example, you can configure the appliance to inform the sender, the recipient and an administrator
with an alert message whenever a virus is detected in an email message. This feature is useful
because it shows that the anti-virus detection is working correctly, but it can become a nuisance if a
mass-mailer virus is encountered.
Mass-mailer viruses (for example Melissa and Bubbleboy) propagate themselves rapidly using email.
Numerous alerts are generated, and these can be as annoying as the surge of detected email
messages that has been blocked.
The appliance can handle any mass-mailer virus separately from other types of virus. You example,
you can choose to discard the detected document immediately, and thereby suppress any alert
messages that will otherwise be generated.
Configuring basic Anti-Virus settings

Use the following information to understand the benefits and procedures to configure basic Anti-Virus
settings.

The Anti-Virus | Basic Options page enables you to configure options such as the types of files that are
scanned for viruses, the actions to take if a virus is identified, and what to do if an infected file cannot
be cleaned.
Contents
Benefits of configuring basic Anti-Virus options
Benefits of using McAfee Global Threat Intelligence file detection
Option definitions Anti-Virus Basic Options
Task Enabling McAfee Global Threat Intelligence file reputation
Benefits of configuring basic Anti-Virus options

This information describes the benefits associated with setting up the basic Anti-Virus options.
To provide the best combination of performance and detection of viruses, the Anti-Virus | Basic Options
page has settings to enable you to select the types of files that are scanned for viral content, and the
actions to be taken when a viral detection is made.
This page also give you the option of enabling McAfee Global Threat Intelligence file reputation.
174
Product Guide

Email Policies
Benefits of using McAfee Global Threat Intelligence file detection

This technique reduces the delay between McAfee's detection of a new malware threat and when a
customer receives and installs a detection definitions (DAT) file. The delay can be 24 - 72 hours.

Using McAfee Global Threat Intelligence file reputation enables your Email Gateway to provide
protection against new threats, before they are included in detection definition (DAT) files.
1
The appliance scans each file, comparing its code against the information (or signatures) in the
current detection definitions (DAT) file.
If the code is not recognized and is suspicious, for example, the file is packed or encrypted, the
appliance sends a small definition (or fingerprint) of that code to McAfee Global Threat Intelligence
an automated analysis system at McAfee. Millions of other computers with McAfee software also
contribute fingerprints.
McAfee compares the fingerprint against a database of fingerprints collected worldwide, and
informs the appliance of the likely risk within seconds. Based on settings in the scanning
policies, the appliance can then block, quarantine, or try to clean the threat.
If McAfee later determines that the code is malicious, a DAT file is published as usual.
Option definitions Anti-Virus Basic Options

Use this page to specify basic options for anti-virus scanning.
Table 4-38 Option definitions Enable anti-virus scanning for "policy name"
Option
Definition
Enable anti-virus scanning
When selected, enables anti-virus scanning of email messages.
Table 4-39 Option definitions Policy exceptions

Option
Definition
Number of exceptions
Displays the number of exceptions configured for the specific policy. If no

exceptions exist, the box displays No exceptions.
Policy name
Displays the name of the policy you select.
Exception name
Displays the name of the exception. If more than one exception is

configured, each exception has its own tab. To view or edit the exception,
click the relevant exception tab.
Opens the Scanning Policies New Policy Exception window, enabling you to
create a policy exception.
Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
Edit exception properties
When you have two or more policy exceptions, you can change the
priority in which they are used by using the
and
buttons. The
exception at the top of the list is given the highest priority.
Click to open the Scanning Policies Edit Policy Exception Details window to edit
the properties of the selected policy exception.
Click to delete the selected policy exception.
Delete exception
Product Guide
175

Email Policies
Table 4-40 Option definitions Specify which files to scan

Option
Definition
Specify which files to Scan all files Offers the highest security. However, scanning takes longer and
scan
might affect performance.
Some operating systems such as Microsoft Windows use the extension name of a
file to identify its type. For example, files with the extension .exe are programs.
However, if an infected file is renamed with a harmless extension such as .txt, it
can escape detection. The operating system cannot run the file as a program
unless it is renamed later. This option ensures that every file is scanned.
Default file types The scanner examines only the default file types in other
words, it concentrates its efforts on scanning those files that are susceptible to
viruses.
For example, many popular text and graphic formats are not affected by viruses.
Currently the scanner examines over 100 types by default, which includes .exe
and .com file types.
Defined file types Scans only the types in the list.
Using this option, you can specify the types of files that you want scanned.
Scan archive files
(ZIP, ARJ, RAR ...)
By default, the scanner does not scan inside file archives such as .zip or .lzh files
because any virus-infected file inside them cannot become active until it has been
extracted.
When selected, Email Gateway scans these types of files.
However, scanning takes longer and might affect performance. As the contents of
these files are harmful only when files inside are extracted, they can be scanned by
the on-access scanners on individual computers in your network.
Find unknown file

viruses
An anti-virus scanner typically detects viruses by looking for the virus signature,
which is a binary pattern that is found in a virus-infected file. However, this
approach cannot detect a new virus because its signature is not yet known,
therefore the scanner uses another technique: heuristic analysis. Program file
heuristics scans program files and identify potential new file viruses. Macro
heuristics scans for macros in the attachments (such as those used by Microsoft
Word, Microsoft Excel, and Microsoft Office) and identify potential new macro
viruses.
When selected, does extra analysis to find any virus-like behavior.
Find unknown macro Macros inside documents are a popular target for virus writers.
viruses to Remove When selected, take actions against macros in documents. Macros inside
all macros from
documents are a popular target for virus writers.
document files
Enable McAfee
Global Threat
Intelligence file
reputation with
Sensitivity level
Enables McAfee Global Threat Intelligence file reputation on your appliance.

McAfee Global Threat Intelligence file reputation complements the DAT-based
signatures by providing the appliances access to millions of cloud-based
signatures. This reduces the delay between McAfee detecting a new malware
threat and its inclusion in DAT files, providing broader coverage.
The sensitivity levels enable you to balance the risk of missing potentially harmful
content (low settings) with the risk of false positive detections (high settings).
For gateway appliances, the recommended sensitivity level is Medium.
176
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-41 Option definitions Actions

Option
Definition
Attempt to clean
When selected, the infection inside the item is removed, if possible. When
deselected, the entire item is removed.
If cleaning
succeeds
Specify the secondary actions to take if the appliance successfully cleans the
infection.
Quarantine options
Quarantine original Select to have the original message added to the Quarantine
database.
Quarantine modified Select to have the modified message added to the Quarantine
database.
If you are using off-box quarantine, you can also select the quarantine queue into
which the email message is placed. This selection can include custom quarantine
queues that you have created.

Send one or more notification emails Use notification templates to customize the
notifications send. Click Manage templates to make changes to the notification options.
Annotate and deliver original to sender Deliver the original email message to the
sender, with annotations added.
Deliver a notification email to 'Notification Email List' Deliver a notification email to all
addresses defined within the notification email list.
Deliver a notification email to the original recipient(s) Deliver a notification email to all the
recipients on the original email message.
Deliver a notification email to the sender Deliver a notification email to the sender of
the email message.
Deliver an audit copy to 'Auditing Email List' Deliver a copy of the original email
message for auditing purposes to all addresses defined within the auditing email
list.
Deliver the modified email to the sender Deliver the email message to the sender, with
modifications made by McAfee Email Gateway included.
Show selected/Show all To help manage the options shown, you can hide
unselected notification templates.
In addition to the pre-defined templates shown above, this list will also include any
custom notification templates that you create.
Other actions
Modify subject McAfee Email Gateway rewrites the subject of the email message
using user-definable templates, and then delivers the message to the intended
recipients. Click Manage templates to change the way the subject is re-written.
Modify headers McAfee Email Gateway modifies the email message headers using
user-definable templates, and then delivers the message to the intended
recipients. You can select multiple header modification templates. Click Manage
templates to change the way the headers are re-written.
When triggered, adds a header, and removes pre-existing headers of the

same name.
Product Guide
177

Email Policies
Table 4-41 Option definitions Actions (continued)

Option
Definition
Notification and
annotated email
options
When clicked, opens another window where you can specify who the appliance will
notify when a threat is detected.
If cleaning fails
Specify the primary action to take if the appliance cannot clean the infection.
Deny connection (Block)
Replace detected item with an alert (Modify)
Refuse the data and return an error code

(Block)
Allow Through (Monitor)
Accept and then drop the data (Block)
178
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition
And also
Specify the secondary actions to take if the appliance cannot clean the infection.
Quarantine options
database.
database.

the email message.
list.
Other actions

same name.
Product Guide
179

Email Policies

Option
Definition
If a file is zero
bytes after
cleaning
Provides an action against a file that is now empty. Zero-byte files cannot carry
threats, but you might prefer to remove the files if they confuse users.
Keep zero byte file
Remove zero byte file
Treat as a failure to clean
Table 4-42 Option definitions Obfuscated content

Option
Definition
Make deobfuscated content available to other

scanners
When selected, provides extra protection against unwanted

content. The techniques that detect hidden viruses and
malware are made available to content scanning.
Table 4-43 Option definitions Additional anti-virus engine

Option
Definition
Enable Commtouch
Command anti-virus
When selected, enables the Commtouch Command anti-virus engine within your
policies.
Scanning optimization Select how the Commtouch Command anti-virus engine is used:
Perform optimized scanning Objects are not passed to the Commtouch Command
anti-virus engine if the McAfee anti-virus engine makes a detection that is then
either replaced with an alert message, or that causes the email message to be
dropped.
Depending on the actions configured for the McAfee anti-virus engine, the
additional anti-virus engine might not be used to scan an email message.
Perform exhaustive scanning Objects are always passed to the Commtouch

Command anti-virus engine after the McAfee engine completes its scan.
Exhaustive scanning might result in your McAfee Email Gateway reporting

multiple detections for a single email message.
Task Enabling McAfee Global Threat Intelligence file reputation

Use this task to enable McAfee Global Threat Intelligence file reputation on your McAfee Email
Gateway.
Task
180
Select Email | Email Policies | Anti-Virus | Basic Options.
From within Specify which files to scan, select Enable McAfee Global Threat Intelligence file reputation.
Select your required Sensitivity level. A low setting means that the McAfee Email Gateway may miss
some potentially harmful content, whereas a high setting means that the McAfee Email Gateway
may detect some harmless files and wrongly label them as potentially harmful.
Click OK.
Click Apply.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Using McAfee Advanced Threat Defense

Learn how to configure McAfee Email Gateway so that it works with McAfee Advanced Threat Defense
to provide further levels of protection to your email traffic.
Email | Email Policies | Anti-Virus | Advanced Threat Defense
Benefits of integrating McAfee Advanced Threat Defense and Email Gateway

By using a layered approach, greater accuracy of detection of malware samples is achieved.
Traditional approaches to the detection of malware rely on samples of the unwanted software having
been previously identified and signatures created to compare incoming files against. However, if the
dangerous software has not previously been identified, this approach does not work.
Several McAfee products, including Email Gateway, interact with McAfee Advanced Threat Defense to
provide in-depth, layered protection.
By using Email Gateway at the gateway, and configuring it to forward suspect content onto your
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers for further, advanced analysis, detection rates for malware
are improved.
By running content in a secure sandbox area within the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense server, and
using multiple detection methods, McAfee Advanced Threat Defense searches for evidence that
malware is present. This method is used to detect new, zeroday malware that traditional detection
methods cannot yet know about.
Using McAfee Advanced Threat Defense

This example illustrates a situation where you might use McAfee Advanced Threat Defense.
Issue A new, zeroday malware targeted at your industry sector has been released onto the
Internet, and is using email to transmit the malware content to your users. As this malware has only
just appeared "in-the-wild", none of the anti-virus vendors have yet seen or analyzed a sample of this
malware, so cannot identify and neutralize it using traditional definition methods.
Solution Configuring Email Gateway to send potentially dangerous content to your McAfee
Advanced Threat Defense servers before delivery allows multiple advanced detection methods to be
applied to the sample. These methods ascertain if the sample exhibits malware characteristics when
activated and run within a secured sandbox within the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense server. If
Product Guide
181

Email Policies
found to be malicious, McAfee Advanced Threat Defense reports the threat level to your Email
Gateway, which then takes the actions on the original email message that you have configured within
the user policy for the reported threat level.
Figure 4-2 McAfee Advanced Threat Defense flow
Step Description
1
Email message sent to a user from outside your organization.
McAfee Email Gateway scans the email message.
Any attachments contained within the message are sent to McAfee Advanced Threat Defense
for further advanced analysis.
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense carries out the advanced analysis on the attachments and
components of the message.
On completion of the advanced analysis, McAfee Advanced Threat Defense reports to McAfee
Email Gateway, which takes the configured actions within the user policy for the reported
threat level.
If both Email Gateway and McAfee Advanced Threat Defense finds no issue with the message,
it is delivered to the intended recipients.
About McAfee Advanced Threat Defense virtual machine profiles

To allow McAfee Advanced Threat Defense to perform advanced analysis on samples, select the virtual
machine profile to be used to analyze the samples.
There can be situations where you require McAfee Advanced Threat Defense to use different virtual
machine profiles.
Issue You have a new acquisition that is using Microsoft Windows XP as their computing platform.
The rest of your organization is using Microsoft Windows 7 Professional.
Solution Perform the following steps:
182
Product Guide

Email Policies
Install Microsoft Windows XP virtual machine profiles on some McAfee Advanced Threat Defense
servers, with Microsoft Windows 7 Professional virtual machine profiles on the remaining McAfee
Advanced Threat Defense servers.
Configure Email Gateway to use a policy exception so that all email messages going to employees
of the new acquisition are analyzed using McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers with the
Microsoft Windows XP virtual machine profiles installed.
For messages going to your other users, configure your policy to use the McAfee Advanced Threat
Defense servers that include the Microsoft Windows 7 Professional virtual machine profiles.
Setting up McAfee Advanced Threat Defense with McAfee Email Gateway

The procedure to set up McAfee Advanced Threat Defense and Email Gateway to provide enhanced,
multi-layer scanning is:
Install and configure one or more McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers within your network.
Create suitable virtual machine profiles within your McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers.
Configure Email Gateway to use your selected McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers. (Navigate
to System | ATD Servers | McAfee Advanced Threat Defense Server Configuration.)
Test the connections to the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers.
Create policies that include the enabled McAfee Advanced Threat Defense configuration. (Navigate
to Email | Email Policies | Anti-Virus | Advanced Threat Defense.)
Option definitions McAfee Advanced Threat Defense

Use this page to specify the policy options for sending content to McAfee Advanced Threat Defense for
further analysis.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Product Guide
183

Email Policies
Table 4-45 Option definitions McAfee Advanced Threat Defense

Option
Definition
Enable Advanced Threat Defense
Click to enable McAfee Advanced Threat Defense.
Select which virtual machine profile to use to

scan emails
Select the virtual machine profile on the McAfee Advanced

Threat Defense servers to be used for scanning the McAfee
Email Gateway traffic.
Configure Advanced Threat Defense servers
Jump to the page where you can configure the McAfee

Advanced Threat Defense servers to use.

Option
Definition
If the report returned

Select the threshold for the threat level. When the selected threshold is reached,
from the server indicates the configured Actions are triggered for the message.
a threat level of
The possible threat levels that McAfee Advanced Threat Defense returns are:
Action
Informational
Medium
Very Low
High
Low
Very High
Select the main action to take. The available options are:

Replace the content with an alert (Modify)

(Block)
184
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition
And also
Specify the secondary actions to take.

Quarantine options
Quarantine original Select to have the original message added to the
Quarantine database.
If you are using off-box quarantine, you can also select the quarantine queue
into which the email message is placed. This selection can include custom
quarantine queues that you have created.

notifications send. Click Manage templates to make changes to the notification
options.
Deliver a notification email to the original recipient(s) Deliver a notification email to all
the recipients on the original email message.
Deliver a notification email to the sender Deliver a notification email to the sender
of the email message.
message for auditing purposes to all addresses defined within the auditing
email list.
Deliver the modified email to the sender Deliver the email message to the sender,
with modifications made by McAfee Email Gateway included.
In addition to the pre-defined templates shown above, this list will also include
any custom notification templates that you create.
Other actions
Modify subject McAfee Email Gateway rewrites the subject of the email
message using user-definable templates, and then delivers the message to the
intended recipients. Click Manage templates to change the way the subject is
re-written.
Modify headers McAfee Email Gateway modifies the email message headers
When triggered, adds a header, and removes pre-existing headers of

the same name.
When triggered, adds a header without removing any pre-existing

headers.
Product Guide
185

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Additional configuration
for notification emails
When clicked, open another window where you can specify who the appliance
notifies when a threat is detected.
If an action results in an
alert
Select to use the default alert.

Click change the default alert text to view or change this alert message.
Table 4-47 Option definitions Timeout Actions

Option
Definition
If the time spent waiting to Select a timeout value in minutes, after which the configured Timeout Action is
send an email to the
taken. This value is the time in which McAfee Email Gateway expects to receive
server and process it
the scan results from the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense server.
exceeds
Action
Provides a main action to take. The available options are:


(Block)
186
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-47 Option definitions Timeout Actions (continued)

Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options

options.
Deliver a notification email to 'Notification Email List' Deliver a notification email to
all addresses defined within the notification email list.
Deliver a notification email to the original recipient(s) Deliver a notification email to
all the recipients on the original email message.
email list.
In addition to the pre-defined templates shown above, this list will also
include any custom notification templates that you create.
Other actions
message using user-definable templates, and then delivers the message to
Product Guide
187

Email Policies
Table 4-47 Option definitions Timeout Actions (continued)

Option
Definition
the intended recipients. Click Manage templates to change the way the subject is
re-written.
using user-definable templates, and then delivers the message to the
intended recipients. You can select multiple header modification templates.
Click Manage templates to change the way the headers are re-written.

the same name.

headers.
Deliver message using encryption Attempt delivery of the message using your
configured encryption settings.
alert

Table 4-48 Option definitions Queue Size Exceeded Actions

Option
Definition
If the number of emails

waiting to be processed
exceeds
Define the queue size that results in alternative actions being taken.
Action
Select the main action to take when the configured number of waiting emails
are exceeded. The available options are:

(Block)
188
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-48 Option definitions Queue Size Exceeded Actions (continued)

Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options

options.
email list.
Other actions
Product Guide
189

Email Policies
Table 4-48 Option definitions Queue Size Exceeded Actions (continued)

Option
Definition
re-written.

the same name.

headers.
alert

Task Configure Advanced Threat Defense policies

Set the options to configure your anti-virus policies to use Advanced Threat Defense.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have configured Email Gateway to communicate with your Advanced
Threat Defense server before configuring your Advanced Threat Defense policies. Use the
Configure Advanced Threat Defense servers link to move to the System | ATD Servers | McAfee Advanced
Threat Defense Server Configuration page.
If you want Email Gateway to send attachments through Advanced Threat Defense, ensure
that feature is enabled.
Task
1
Select Email | Email Policies | Anti-Virus | Advanced Threat Defense and select Enable Advanced Threat Defense.
Select which of the available virtual machine profiles are to be used by this policy to analyze traffic
from your Email Gateway.
Within Actions, select the threat level threshold to use.

Balance the risks of your selection:
A low threshold can lead to threats bypassing Advanced Threat Defense.
A high threshold can increase the load on your Advanced Threat Defense servers.
too low a level, leading to threats bypassing Advanced Threat Defense, with increased load on your
Advanced Threat Defense servers if a more severe threshold is chosen.
190
Product Guide

Email Policies
Configure the actions you want Email Gateway to take when Advanced Threat Defense is triggered.
a
Select the primary action from the drop-down list.
Select any secondary actions from the scrolling And also menu.
Click the Additional configuration for notification email link to set options on the Notification Emails page.
Specify the use of the default alert text by selecting the Use default text checkbox.
If you want to change the text of the alert, click the Change the default alert text link.
From Timeout Actions, select the timeout period in minutes.

If this timeout period is exceeded, Email Gateway triggers the configured Timeout actions.
Configure the actions you want Email Gateway to take if Advanced Threat Defense fails to return
the scan result within the configured Timeout period.
a
Select the primary action from the drop-down list.
Select any secondary action or actions from the scrolling And also menu.
Click the Additional configuration for notification email link to set options on the Notification Emails page.
Specify the use of the default alert text by selecting the Use default text checkbox.
Click OK.
Apply the changes.
See also
Option definitions Attachment identification on page 101
Troubleshooting McAfee Email Gateway and McAfee Advanced Threat Defense

McAfee Email Gateway and McAfee Advanced Threat Defense include several features to help you
resolve any issues relating to Advanced Threat Defense.
Use the following to help resolve any issues with the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense feature:
From McAfee Email Gateway
Check the status of the connected McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers, from the Dashboard |
Advanced Threat Defense portlet.
Check the Queued For ATD counters on the Dashboard | Inbound Email Summary and Dashboard | Outbound Email
Summary portlets.
Test the connections to your McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers, using the Troubleshoot | Tests.
View the conversation log for the specific email message from within Reports | Message search.
SMTP conversation logging must be enabled from Email | Email Configuration | Protocol Configuration | Connection
Settings (SMTP) | SMTP conversation logging to use this feature.
Define conversation events from System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP | Logging Configuration.
Product Guide
191

Email Policies
Configuring McAfee Anti-Spyware

Use the following information to understand the benefits and procedures to configure McAfee
Anti-Spyware.
Email | Email Policies | Anti-Virus | McAfee Anti-Spyware

The Anti-Virus | McAfee Anti-Spyware page enables you to configure McAfee Anti-Spyware to detect and take
action against certain types of potentially unwanted programs being transmitted within email
messages.
Contents
Benefits of using McAfee Anti-Spyware
Option definitions Default Anti-Virus Settings McAfee Anti-Spyware
Benefits of using McAfee Anti-Spyware

This information describes the benefits associated with setting up the McAfee Anti-Spyware options.
Several types of software programs can be transmitted using email. Some of these programs may be
classed as potentially unwanted programs (PUPs).
You can configure your Email Gateway to scan for potentially unwanted programs.
A PUP (potentially unwanted program) is any program that may be unwanted, even though the user
consented to downloading and installing the software. This may be because the user did not read the
terms and conditions relating to the software, or because it was downloaded in conjunction with
another piece of software that the user did want to install.
Potentially unwanted programs can include spyware, adware, and dialers. To learn more about
potentially unwanted programs, visit McAfee Labs Threat Library(http://vil.nai.com/vil/default.aspx).
Options on the user interface enable you to select the categories of unwanted programs the appliance
should detect.
You can also specify the actions to use when a potentially unwanted program is detected, and some
optional additional actions.
Option definitions Default Anti-Virus Settings McAfee Anti-Spyware

Use this page to specify the McAfee Anti-Spyware settings for anti-virus scanning.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
192
Move
and
buttons. The
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-49 Option definitions Policy exceptions (continued)

Option
Definition
Delete exception
Table 4-50 Option definitions Potentially Unwanted Program (PUP) detection
Option
Definition
Enable anti-virus scanning When selected, scans for viruses and other threats such as worms and
spyware. The option is normally set to Yes. Select No only if you have anti-virus
protection elsewhere in your network.
Enable detection
Select to enable potentially unwanted program (PUP) detection.

Read the disclaimer text before enabling PUP detection.
Spyware to Other PUPs
Select the types of potentially unwanted programs detected.
Exclude and Include
Build a list of names of programs to scan or ignore.
Product Guide
193

Email Policies

Option
Definition
If detected


(Block)

And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.

Deliver a notification email to the sender Deliver a notification email to the sender of the
email message.
Deliver an audit copy to 'Auditing Email List' Deliver a copy of the original email message
for auditing purposes to all addresses defined within the auditing email list.
Other actions
user-definable templates, and then delivers the message to the intended recipients.
You can select multiple header modification templates. Click Manage templates to
change the way the headers are re-written.
194
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition
If an action
results in an alert

same name.

Configuring packer detection

Use this information to understand the threat posed by packers, and how you can configure your Email
Gateway to deal with this threat.
Email | Email Policies | Anti-Virus | Packers

The Anti-Virus | Packers page enables you to configure Email Gateway to detect and take action against
types of packers.
Packers compress files, which changes the binary signature of the executable. Packers can compress
Trojan-horse programs and make them harder to detect.
Contents
Benefits of using Packer detection
Option definitions - Default Anti-Virus Settings - Packers
Benefits of using Packer detection

This information describes the benefits associated with setting up the packer detection options.
Packers compress files, which changes the binary signature of the executable. This can make it harder
to detect Trojan-horse or other potentially unwanted programs, as their true binary signatures are
hidden.
Enabling Packer detection helps defend against this type of threat, by scanning within the compressed
files to check the true binary signatures of the files contained within.
Option definitions - Default Anti-Virus Settings - Packers

Use this page to specify the actions to take against packers.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Product Guide
195

Email Policies

Option
Move up and
down
Definition
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-53 Option definitions Packer detections
196
Option
Definition
Enable detection
Select to enable detection of packers by the appliance.
Exclude specified names and Include only

specified names
Allows you to build a list of names of packers to scan or

ignore.
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition
If detected


(Block)

And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.

Deliver a notification email to the sender Deliver a notification email to the sender of the
email message.
Deliver an audit copy to 'Auditing Email List' Deliver a copy of the original email message
for auditing purposes to all addresses defined within the auditing email list.
Other actions
user-definable templates, and then delivers the message to the intended recipients.
You can select multiple header modification templates. Click Manage templates to
change the way the headers are re-written.
Product Guide
197

Email Policies

Option
Definition
If an action
results in an alert

same name.

Configuring Custom Malware Options

Use the following information to understand the benefits and procedures to configure customer
malware options within Email Gateway.

The Anti-Virus | Custom Malware Options page enables you to configure Email Gateway to take different
actions when certain types of malware are detected.
Contents
Benefits of using the Custom Malware options
Option definitions Default Anti-Virus Settings Custom Malware Options
Benefits of using the Custom Malware options

This information describes the benefits associated with using the custom malware options.
The custom malware options enable you to select different actions for certain types of malware to
those that you have selected for other detection types.
Option definitions Default Anti-Virus Settings Custom Malware Options

Use this page to specify the actions to take when some types of malicious software (malware) are
detected.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
198
Move
and
buttons. The
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Delete exception
Table 4-56 Option definitions Apply different actions to certain detection types
Option
Definition
Mass mailers to Trojan horses
When selected, applies the specified action to this type of malware.

If the option is not selected, the malware is handled as described by
the basic options.
Specific detection name
When selected, allows you to add names of specific detections. You

can use * and ? to represent multiple and single characters in
the malware names.
Do not perform custom malware check

if the object has already been cleaned.
Enable this to prevent the appliance carrying out the custom

malware checks if the object has already been successfully cleaned.
Product Guide
199

Email Policies
Table 4-57 Option definitions Custom actions

Option
Definition
If detected


(Block)

And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.

the email message.
list.
Other actions
200
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-57 Option definitions Custom actions (continued)

Option
Definition
If a custom
malware action
results in an alert

same name.

Handling hybrid scan results
When an email message triggers an action during the scan by the cloud-based McAfee Email
Protection Service, the results of that scan are communicated to your Email Gateway appliance.
You can configure the way hybrid scanning responds when actions are triggered.
Benefits of hybrid scanning

Hybrid scanning reduces the workload for the Email Gateway appliances within your network.
Hybrid scanning processes your inbound email messages in the cloud, leaving your appliances free to
scan outbound traffic. You maintain control over the way scan results are used, because you can
configure policies for hybrid scanning like you can for scanning by your Email Gateway appliances.
Option definitions - Hybrid scanning

Use this page to enable and configure hybrid scanning.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-59
Option definitions - Hybrid Scanning
Option
Definition
Hybrid scanning options

Enable hybrid anti-virus
scanning
Enables or disables anti-virus scanning by the SaaS Email Protection Service.
Product Guide
201

Email Policies
Table 4-59
Option definitions - Hybrid Scanning (continued)
Option
Definition
Re-scan the email locally Enables or disables additional scanning by the Email Gateway appliance for any
if it is NOT found to be
email that passes through the SaaS Email Protection Service without triggering
infected
an action.
Actions
If a virus is detected
Sets the action to be taken by the Email Protection Service if it detects a virus.
Options are:
Replace with an alert (Modify)

(Block)
Allow through (Monitor)
202
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-59
Option
Definition
And also
Sets additional actions to be taken by the Email Protection Service for emails
that were not blocked as the primary action. Options are:
Quarantine options
Quarantine modified Select to have the modified message added to the

options.
email list.
Other actions
Product Guide
203

Email Policies
Table 4-59
Option
Definition
re-written.

the same name.

headers.
Notification and
annotated email options
Link that opens the Notification Emails page where you can set options.
alert
Enables or disables use of the default text for virus alerts. If the default is
disabled, the system uses alert text provided by the user.
Change the default alert

text
Opens the Alert Editor page for anti-virus detection alerts.
If a potentially unwanted Sets the action to be taken by the Email Protection Service if it detects a
program is detected
potentially unwanted program. Options are:
Refuse the data and return an error code (Block)
Replace with an alert (Modify)
204
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-59
Option
Definition
And also
Sets additional actions to be taken by the Email Protection Service for emails
that were not blocked as the primary action. Options are:
Quarantine options

options.
email list.
Other actions
Product Guide
205

Email Policies
Table 4-59
Option
Definition
re-written.

the same name.

headers.
Notification and
Link that opens the Notification Emails page where you can set options.
alert
Enables or disables use of the default text for potentially unwanted program
alerts. If the default is disabled, the system uses alert text provided by the user.
Change the default alert

text
Opens the Alert Editor page for potentially unwanted program alerts.
Task - Configure scanning policy

Follow this process to enable and configure hybrid anti-virus scanning policy.
Before you begin
You should register your appliance with McAfee SaaS Email Protection Service (SaaS) and
configure the domains for which email traffic is to be scanned in the cloud.
Task
1
Select Email | Email Policies, then in the Anti-Virus column, click the Viruses: Clean or Replace link.
The Default Anti-Virus Settings (SMTP) page opens.
Select the Hybrid Scanning tab.

The Hybrid scanning options tab opens.
206
In the Hybrid scanning options section of the page, select the checkbox to enable hybrid scanning.
If you want your Email Gateway appliance to scan any email that passes through the hybrid scan
without triggering an action, select the Rescan the mail locally checkbox.
Configure the actions you want the Email Protection Service to take when it detects a virus.
a
Select the primary action for virus detection from the drop-down list.
Click the Notification and annotated email options link to set options on the Notification Emails page.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Specify the use of the default alert text for anti-virus alerts by selecting the Use default text
checkbox.
If you want to change the text of the anti-virus alert, click the Change the default alert text link.
Configure the actions you want the Email Protection Service to take when it detects a potentially
unwanted program (PUP).
a
Select the primary action for PUP detection from the drop-down list.
Click the Notification and annotated email options link to set options on the Notification Emails page.
Specify the use of the default alert text for PUP alerts by selecting the Use default text checkbox.
Anti-spam policy settings

Use the Spam policies to manage spam and phish detection, and configure any sender authentication
settings you want to apply.
Anti-spam features
The anti-spam protection within Email Gateway provides many ways to protect your users from
unsolicited email messages.
The anti-spam features include:
score-based spam reporting
ability to add prefixes to the subject line of emails identified as being unsolicited
customizable message size options
ability to add custom headers to the identified email messages
the use of blacklists and whitelists
spam rules that can be disabled if they are incorrectly identifying legitimate emails as spam
In addition, Email Gateway provides protection against phishing emails. Phishing emails are messages
that purport to come from a users bank or other institution, but, in fact are aimed at tricking the user
into disclosing sensitive financial data about their account and PIN numbers.
Another method of reducing the amount of unsolicited email is to use Sender Authentication to check that
the email messages have actually been sent from the source that it appears to have been sent.
Configuing basic anti-spam options

Use the following information to understand the benefits and procedures to configure basic anti-spam
options.
Email | Email Policies | Spam | Basic Options

Contents
Benefits of using basic Anti-Spam options
Option definitions Default Anti-Spam Settings Basic Options
Product Guide
207

Email Policies
Benefits of using basic Anti-Spam options

This information describes the benefits associated with setting up the basic Anti-Spam options.
The basic options available within the Default Anti-Spam Settings page allow you to specify settings such as
the spam reporting threshold for messages. This is the accumulated score at which your Email
Gateway marks messages as possibly being spam.
From this dialog box, you can also choose how you want to inform your users that a message could
possibly be spam. You can add a prefix to the subject line of emails suspected of being spam, and can
edit the text that appears within the subject.
You can also configure further spam-based options, including defining stricter actions (monitor, block
or reroute) for messages gaining a higher spam score.
Option definitions Default Anti-Spam Settings Basic Options

Use this page to specify how to handle spam email messages.
Table 4-60 Enable anti-spam scanning for "policy name"
Option
Definition
Enable anti-spam scanning
When selected, enables anti-spam scanning of email messages.

Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move

and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-62 Option definitions Reporting options
Option
Definition
Spam reporting threshold
Specifies a spam threshold. Messages that have a spam score below the
threshold are not treated as spam.
Typically, a spam score of 5 or more indicates spam. You need only change
this threshold if its default value is not effective. You can enter numbers with
decimal fractions, for example 6.25.
Default value is 5.
Add a prefix to the subject

When selected, adds some text that helps users to find suspicious messages
line of spam messages and in their email inbox.
Prefix text
Default value is [spam].
208
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-62 Option definitions Reporting options (continued)

Option
Definition
Add a spam score indicator

and Indicator text
When selected, adds an indicator to each message's Internet headers. For

example, a message that has a spam score between 6 and 7 can be given an
indicator of six asterisks. This information is useful for later analysis.
Default value is *.
Attach a spam report
When selected, adds a report to the messages, showing the names of the
anti-spam rules that have triggered.
We recommend that you select a spam report for initial testing only, because
it can affect your server's performance. When you have collected the
information, deselect the option.
Verbose reporting
When selected, adds descriptions of the anti-spam rules.
Product Guide
209

Email Policies
Table 4-63 Option definitions Additional score-based actions

Option
Definition
When the spam

score is at least
Specify the actions to take when the spam score exceeds a user-specified value.
The available actions are:
Route to an alternative relay (reroute)

(Block)

If the action to take against email is Route to an alternate relay, you can click a Manage the
list of relays link to a list of other devices that will handle the email instead.
And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.
options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
210
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-63 Option definitions Additional score-based actions (continued)

Option
Definition

same name.
Notification and
annotated email
options
Table 4-64
Alert settings
Option
Definition
Use the default alert
Select whether to use the default alert text when an anti-spam action triggers.
You can edit the alert text by clicking either:
change the default alert text, or
customize the alert text
Configuring advanced Anti-Spam options

Use the following information to understand the benefits and procedures to configure advanced
Anti-Spam options.
Email | Email Policies | Spam | Advanced Options

Contents
Benefits of using the anti-spam Advanced Options
Option definitions Anti-Spam Settings Advanced Options
Benefits of using the anti-spam Advanced Options

This information describes the benefits associated with setting up the advanced anti-spam options.
Scan emails using anti-spam cloud lookup

By sending incoming email messages to McAfee data centers for real-time analysis, you benefit from
up-to-date detections of spam within your email traffic. Also, you are helping ensure that McAfee
systems detect the latest types of spam.
Issue McAfee adds new anti-spam engines and technologies to the McAfee data center servers.
These engines and technologies improve spam detection rates, and provide protection against specific
spam campaigns.
Product Guide
211

Email Policies
Solution You do not have to update the software on your appliances to take advantage of the
improved spam detection available using anti-spam cloud lookup. Simply enable Anti-Spam Cloud Lookup
within your Email Gateway appliances, to benefit from these features.
Figure 4-3 Email flow using anti-spam cloud lookup
Specify limits
The advanced options tab allows you to configure limits that apply to the anti-spam scanning.
These limits include:
Maximum message size
Maximum width of spam headers
Maximum number of reported rules
By configuring these settings, you can tune the spam scanning and reporting from your Email
Gateway appliances.
Add a custom header

You can add custom headers to email messages, so that you can more easily track messages that
have been categorized as potential spam.
You can specify:
212
Product Guide

Email Policies
Header name
Header value
You can also specify if the custom headers are never added, are added only to spam messages, only
to non-spam messages or to all messages.
Option definitions Anti-Spam Settings Advanced Options

Use this page to specify advanced settings against spam email. You do not need to change these
settings often.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move

and
buttons. The

Delete exception
Scan emails using anti-spam cloud lookup

Option
Definition
Enable anti-spam
cloud Lookup
Select to allow your Email Gateway to send information about your incoming email
messages to McAfee data centers for real-time spam analysis.
Policy exceptions do not apply to anti-spam cloud lookups, as these lookups are
made at the protocol level.
Use default proxy

settings
Select this option to use the currently configured proxy settings, or click (configure
defaults) to move to System | Appliance Management | Default Server Settings, where you can
change these settings.
Specify limits
Option
Definition
Use the default maximum Select to use the default message size limits.
message size
The currently installed anti-spam engine sets the default message size.
Deselect to set a custom Maximum message size.
Maximum message size
Specifies the maximum size of the email message. Spam messages are
typically small.
Product Guide
213

Email Policies
Option
Definition
Maximum width of spam

headers
Specifies the maximum width of headers that the appliance adds to email
messages.
We do not recommend that you decrease the value. For example, Verbose
reporting creates header lines, each with the name and description of a rule. A
reduced width truncates the rule descriptions, making them more difficult to
read.
Default value is 76 bytes.
Maximum number of
reported rules
Specifies the maximum number of anti-spam rule names that can be included
in a spam report.
Add a custom header

Option
Definition
Header name and Header

value
Specifies the name and value of an extra email header, that can be used for
later processing.
Add the header
Specifies the type of email message to which to add the email header. For
example, you can add the customized email header to spam messages only.
Default value is Never.
Use alternative header names

when a mail is not spam
If selected, appends the text - Checked to the normal spam header names
when the email message did not contain spam. This option can be useful to
other devices that handle the same email message later.
Configuring Blacklists and Whitelists

Use the following information to understand the benefits and procedures to configure Blacklists and
Whitelists on your Email Gateway.
Email | Email Policies | Spam | Blacklists and Whitelists

Contents
Benefits of using Blacklists and Whitelists
Option definitions Blacklisted Senders
Option definitions Blacklisted Recipients
Option definitions Whitelisted Senders
Option definitions Whitelisted Recipients
Option definitions User Submitted
Benefits of using Blacklists and Whitelists

This information describes the benefits associated with using the blacklists and whitelists to help block
spam email messages from reaching your users.
Blacklists and whitelists are useful tools in helping keep your user inboxes free from unsolicited
(spam) email messages.
During email "spam" campaigns, high volumes of email messages can be generated in a short period
of time. If each of these spam emails that reach your email servers have to be individually scanned to
check the content, this can consume scanning resources on your Email Gateway.
Using blacklists, you can block all emails from a specific address, thereby removing the requirement to
scan each of the emails individually.
214
Product Guide

Email Policies
If you find that people that send legitimate email messages into your organization have their
messagse erroneously tagged as being spam, adding their addresses to the whitelists can prevent the
messages being tagged as spam.
Option definitions Blacklisted Senders

Use this information to make lists of email addresses that regularly send spam to your organization.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Option
Definition
Email Address
Use this to make a list of email addresses that often send spam.
Specifies each email address. You can use wildcards, for example: user_?
@example.*
Add Address
Click to add a new row to the list of email addresses that often send spam. Type
the email address that you want added to the list.
Delete Selected
Addresses
If you find that legitimate email sender addresses have been added to the
Blacklisted Senders list, select each legitimate address, and click Delete Selected Addresses.
Option definitions Blacklisted Recipients

Use this information to make lists of email addresses that regularly receive spam email messages.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Product Guide
215

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Delete exception
Option
Definition
Email Address
Use this to make a list of email addressses that often receive spam.
@example.*
Add Address
Click to add a new row to the list of email addresses that often receive spam. Type
the email address that you want added to the list.
Delete Selected
Addresses
If you find that legitimate email addresses have been added to the Blacklisted
Recipients list, select each legitimate address, and click Delete Selected Addresses.
Option definitions Whitelisted Senders

Use this information to make lists of email addresses that are allowed to send email from within to
your organization.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Option
Definition
Email Address
Use this to make a list of users who want to send email messages that the
appliance normally treats as spam.
@example.*
216
Add Address
Click to add a new row to the list of email addresses that are to be allowed to send
email. Type the email address that you want added to the list.
Delete Selected
Addresses
If you find that illegal email sender addresses have been added to the Whitelisted
Senders list, select each illegal address, and click Delete Selected Addresses.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option definitions Whitelisted Recipients

Use this information to make lists of users who want to receive email messages that are normally
identified as spam.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Option
Definition
Email Address
Use this page to make a list of users who want to receive email messages that
are normally identified as spam.
@example.*
Add Address
Click to add a new row to the list of email addresses that are to be allowed to
receive email messages. Type the email address that you want added to the list.
Delete Selected
Addresses
If you find that illegal email recipient addresses have been added to the Whitelisted
Recipients list, select each illegal address, and click Delete Selected Addresses.
Option definitions User Submitted

Use this information to understand how to allow your users to blacklist or whitelist individual senders,
and how to view and manage those lists.
Use this to view and manage lists of blacklists and whitelists that have been submitted by users
through quarantine digests.
If the appliance is configured to use the McAfee Quarantine Manager, you can only view the lists.

Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Product Guide
217

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Add exception
Move up and
down
Move

and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Option
Definition
View
Click to view the lists of user-submitted blacklists and whitelists.
Refresh and Clear
Click to either refresh the information shown on screen, or to clear all

information from the screen.
Filter
Specify the information that you want to filter the list by. Click Apply.
The lists are filtered to only show those entries that match the entered filter
string.
Modify, Add and Delete Use these buttons to add, remove or edit entries within the user-submitted lists.
Import Lists
Take a previously exported list of blacklisted and whitelisted email addresses,

and import them onto your Email Gateway.
Export Lists
Create a list of the user submitted blacklisted and whitelisted email addresses,
and export them as an xml file.
Configuring Spam Rules

Use the following information to understand the benefits and procedures available to configure Spam
Rules.
Email | Email Policies | Spam | Spam Rules

Contents
Benefits of configuring spam rules
Option definitions Spam Rules
Option definitions - Editable spam rules
Task Configure spam rules
Task Edit a spam score
Benefits of configuring spam rules

Use the following information to understand the benefits of configuring spam rules.
McAfee Email Gateway uses several methods to catch unsolicited (spam) email messages and prevent
them from reaching your users.
One of these methods is to use a set of regularly updated rules to detect specific spam campaign
messages.
218
Product Guide

Email Policies
However, on occasion, one of these rules might wrongly detect legitimate email messages as spam - a
false positive detection. In this situation, you can disable just the rule that is causing the false positive
detections. You can also edit the spam score for any rule with a name that begins with EDT_.
Using editable spam scores

Editing the spam score for a rule allows you to reduce false positive detections, or create stricter
detection rules if spam messages are not being caught. Increasing the score makes detection more
sensitive because the rule contributes a higher number to the overall spam score. Decreasing the
score makes detection less sensitive, since the rule contributes a lower number to the score.
Only messages that trigger the editable rules experience improved false positive or false negative rates.
The score for an individual rule is only part of the total spam score. The accumulated score for all
triggered rules determines the possible presence of spam.
Issue McAfee Email Gateway generates excessive false positive detections caused by messages
that trigger rule EDT_ SDHA_HMS_FRM. The current spam score is set to 1.0 (the number contributed
to the total spam score).
Solution Edit the spam score for the rule to a lower value. Save your changes, and monitor the
results.
Issue You notice several email messages being delivered, where the email addresses in the 821
header and 822 header do not agree. The spam rule EDT_SDHA_ADR_FRG should trigger for these
messages. The current spam score for this rule to 0.2.
Solution Edit the spam score for this rule to a higher value. Save the changes, and monitor the
results.
Managing editable spam scores with ePO

Specific conditions apply when you manage editable spam scores with McAfee ePO.
If the editable spam rules do not appear in the list, you must add them manually.
The rules will appear automatically only if they existed in the imported Email Gateway configuration.
You can enable or disable the added rules for all rules.
The default value for all added rules is 0.
You cannot edit scores for spam rules that do not begin with EDT_.
You can edit scores for any spam rules that begin with EDT_.
Spam rules can be filtered using the Filter option.
See also
Task Edit a spam score on page 221
Benefits of using basic Anti-Spam options on page 208
Option definitions Spam Rules

Use this page to remove any spam rules that are causing some email to be wrongly detected as spam.
It is unlikely that you need to change this list. Make changes only if you understand the implications.
Product Guide
219

Email Policies

Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move

and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-74 Option definitions Anti-spam settings
Option
Definition
Rule Name
Displays the rule name that is seen in the spam report.
Rule Score
Displays the rule score, which is typically 15. You can edit the spam score for any
rule with a name that begins with EDT_.
EDT_ rules support scores ranging from -999.99 to 999.99.
Enabled
Specifies whether a rule is active. To disable a rule, deselect its checkbox.
Apply and Filter When Apply is clicked, the table shows only those numbers specified by Filter. You can
type a regular expression here, for example:
ÂA Find all terms that begin with AA.
BB$ Find all terms that end with BB.
CC Find all terms that contain CC.
To see the full list again, clear Filter and click Apply.
Option definitions - Editable spam rules

You can edit specific anti-spam rules from the user interface. All editable rule names begin with EDT_.
The following list shows examples of editable rules.
Table 4-75
Editable spam rules
Rule name
Trigger condition
EDT_ SDHA_SMP_HMS_FRM Null sender
220
Description
This rule triggers when the MAIL FROM has a null
sender.
EDT_ SDHA_HMS_FRM
Header From missing This rule triggers when the header From is missing or
empty.
EDT_SDHA_FRM_INV
Header From invalid
This rule triggers when the 822 header is an invalid

email address.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-75
Editable spam rules (continued)
Rule name
Trigger condition
Description
EDT_SDHA_ADR_FRG
Address forged
This rule triggers when there is a mismatch in either

the local or the domain part of the email address
between 821 and 822 headers.
EDT_SDHA_DMN_FRG
Domain forged
This rule triggers when there is a mismatch in the

domain part of the email address between 821 and 822
headers.
Task Configure spam rules

You can enable or disable individual spam rules for any Email Gateway policy.
Before you begin
You must have at least one policy defined before you can configure spam rules.
Task
1
From the Email Gateway opening screen, select the Email tab.
The screen defaults to the Email Policies screen,
Select a protocol.
You can choose SMTP, POP3, or McAfee Secure Web Mail.
In the Policy List screen, click the Spam: link.

The Default Anti-Spam Settings window opens.
Select Spam Rules.
Select Yes to enable anti-spam scanning.
Enable or disable individual spam rule by selecting or deselecting the Enabled checkbox.
Click Okay, then save your changes.
Task Edit a spam score

You can edit the spam score for specific anti-spam rules.
You can change the point score for spam rules that begin with EDT_.
Task
1
Select Email | Email Policies | Spam.

The Default Anti-Spam Settings (SMTP) window opens.
Click the Spam Rules tab to see the list of existing rules.
Select any editable rule.

Spam rules that begin with the prefix EDT_ can be changed from their default scores.
Find these editable rules by typing EDT_ in the Filter field and selecting Apply.
Change the current spam score, then click OK.

The new score is saved.
When an email message triggers this rule, Email Gateway applies the edited score.
Product Guide
221

Email Policies
See also
Option definitions Spam Rules on page 219
Option definitions - Editable spam rules on page 220
Sender Authentication Settings McAfee Global Threat Intelligence message reputation on
page 227
Configuring spam terms

Use spam terms to prevent unsolicited email messages from reaching your users.
Email | Email Policies | Spam | Spam Terms

Contents
Benefits of scoring spam terms
Option definitions Spam terms
Task Create a dictionary of spam terms
Task Create a dictionary of spam term exclusions
Task Use the spam terms and spam term exclusions dictionaries to modify spam scores
Benefits of scoring spam terms

McAfee Email Gateway uses several methods to catch unsolicited (spam) email messages to prevent
them from reaching your users. One of these methods is to measure the "spam score" of a message,
and to take appropriate actions based on that score.
McAfee Email Gateway can search incoming email messages for terms that appear within either
predefined or custom dictionaries, and then to add to the spam score for that message.
Option definitions Spam terms

You can specify which dictionaries to use to modify the spam score for incoming messages.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
222
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-77 Option definitions Anti-Spam Terms

Option
Definition
Dictionaries Lists the dictionaries that are used to match terms within email messages and to modify
the spam scores for that message.
If you have configured your McAfee Email Gateway to scan for Graymail, the predefined
Graymail dictionary is automatically added to this list. If you have not configured Graymail
from the Setup Wizard, you can manually add this dictionary to the Dictionaries list.
Exclusions
Use a custom dictionary to define a list of terms that cause the email message containing
the terms defined within the configured Dictionaries to be whitelisted.
Score
The value used to modify the total spam score for the message.
For terms to be considered as spam, add a positive value in this field.
For terms to not be considered as spam, add a negative value.
Add Term
Opens a window to define further dictionaries that are used to modify spam scores.
Task Create a dictionary of spam terms

Create a dictionary for terms that you find in spam messages that your users are receiving.
Task
1
Select Email | DLP and Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries.
At the bottom of the Dictionaries list, click Add Dictionary.
Enter a name for the dictionary; for example, Spam Terms.

Optionally, enter a description for this dictionary.
Define whether to use simple string matching or regular expressions for this dictionary.
Click OK.
An empty dictionary is created.
Use the Add OR condition, Add AND Condition, and Insert Term buttons to define the terms to be added to
the new dictionary and to configure the relationships between the terms.
Click OK.
Apply the changes.
Task Create a dictionary of spam term exclusions

Create a dictionary of terms that, when discovered in a message, are used to whitelist that message.
Task
1
Select Email | DLP and Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries.
At the bottom of the Dictionaries list, click Add Dictionary.
Enter a name for the dictionary; for example, Spam Term Exclusions.
Optionally, enter a description for this dictionary.
Define whether to use simple string matching, or regular expressions for this dictionary.
Click OK.
An empty dictionary is created.
Product Guide
223

Email Policies
Use the Add OR condition, Add AND Condition, and Insert Term buttons to define the exclusion terms to be
added to the new dictionary and to configure the relationships between the terms.
Click OK.
Apply the changes.
Task Use the spam terms and spam term exclusions dictionaries to modify spam
scores
Use the dictionaries containing the spam terms and spam term exclusions to modify the spam scores
for the email messages.
Before you begin
Before attempting this task, ensure that you have created suitable dictionaries containing
spam terms and spam term exclusions.
Task
1
Select Email | Email Policies | Spam | Spam Terms.
Click Add Term.
Click Select a dictionary.
Search for the dictionaries containing the required spam terms (in the example, this was Spam
Terms).
Select the required dictionaries, then click OK.
If needed, in the Exclusions column, click No exclusions.

Exclusions are used to negate the impact of finding a spam term in a message if a further term, that
is included within the exclusions list, is also found.
Search for the dictionaries containing the required spam term exclusions .
Select the required dictionaries, then click OK.
In the Score field, enter the score to be added to the total spam score for each message.
10 Click OK.
11 Apply your changes.
Configuring Anti-Phish settings

Use this information to understand how to configure your Email gateway to protect your users from
Phishing emails.
Email | Email Policies | Spam | Phish

Contents
Benefits of Anti-Phish scanning
Option definitions Anti-Phish
224
Product Guide

Email Policies
Benefits of Anti-Phish scanning

Learn about the benefits of enabling Anti-Phish scanning on your Email Gateway.
Phishing is the illegal activity of using spoofed email messages to persuade unsuspecting users to
disclose personal identity and financial information. Criminals can use the stolen identity to
fraudulently obtain goods and services and to steal directly from bank accounts.
Configuring the anti-phish settings within your appliance helps to protect your users and your
organization from the illegal phishing activities.
Option definitions Anti-Phish

Use this page to specify how to handle phishing email.
Enable anti-phish scanning for "policy name"

Option
Definition
Enable anti-phish scanning
When selected, enables anti-phish scanning of email messages.

Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move

and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Reporting options
Option
Definition
Add a prefix to the subject

line of phishing messages
When selected, adds a prefix to help users to see phishing messages in their
email inbox quickly.
Specifies text for the prefix.
We recommend that you do not use characters from multi-byte (extended)
character sets here unless the re-encoding is UTF-8.
Default value is ****Possible Phish****.

Add a phish indicator header
to messages
When selected, adds an indicator in the email X-header, which enables other
software to process or analyze the message further.
Attach a phish report
When selected, attaches a report to the email message, which explains why
the email message was marked as phish.
Verbose reporting
When selected, provides a fuller report, providing descriptions of the names

of the rules that have triggered.
Product Guide
225

Email Policies
Actions
Option
Definition
If a phishing attempt Provides a main action to take against the phish message. The options available
is detected
are:

(Block)
Route to an alternate relay (Reroute)
If the action to take against email is Route to an alternate relay, you can click a Manage the
list of relays link to a list of other devices that will handle the email instead.
And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.
options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
226
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option
Definition

same name.
Notification and
annotated email
options
If an anti-phishing
action results in an
alert
Enables you to use the default anti-phish alert message, or to change the text to
create your own message.
You can also choose the following options:
Do not attach the original message
Attach the original message in RFC822 format
Attach the original message in plain text format
Sender Authentication Settings McAfee Global Threat Intelligence

message reputation
Use this page to specify the actions to take against known senders of spam.
The appliance uses McAfee Global Threat Intelligence message reputation to identify senders of spam
email messages.
Sender authentication checks are made at different times during the email conversation. For example,
Real-time Blackhole List checks are made during the CONNECT phase of the conversation, BATV and
SPF checks are made during the EHLO/MAIL FROM phase and McAfee Global Threat Intelligence
message reputation takes place during the DATA phase.
McAfee Global Threat Intelligence message reputation is based on sender details, for example, Source
IP address or Sender email address. Message reputation does not work at the SMTP protocol level.
Product Guide
227

Email Policies
Table 4-79 Option definitions Higher Detection Threshold

Option
Definition
Enable McAfee GTI

Message Reputation at
the higher detection
threshold
The feature is enabled by default.
Detection threshold
Select an appropriate detection threshold for the higher detections. The available
options are:
Highly suspect
Suspect
Custom
The default threshold is Highly Suspect.
When Custom is selected, you also need to enter the appropriate Threshold value.
If the sender fails the

check
Provides actions to take. For example:

Allow Through (Monitor) Lets the message pass to its intended recipients, but
information is retained within the logs and reports.
Tarpit - Delays the response to the email message. By default, the delay is 5
seconds, and is configurable from the Default Sender Authentication Settings | Cumulative
score and other options tab.
Accept and Drop the data (Block) Accepts the connection, but blocks the message
from being delivered, returning a 250 SMTP code to the sending MTA.
Reject (Block) Blocks the message from being delivered, and returns the
appropriate code to the sending MTA.
Reject and close (Block) Blocks the message from being delivered, returns
appropriate code to the sending MTA and the closes the connection.
Reject, close and deny (Block) - Kernel Mode Blocking. This is an effective method of
combating spam, as it deals with the message itself (reject), the connection
(close) and adds the sending server to the deny list.
The default action is Reject, close and deny (Block)
Whenever you choose Add to score as your action, you have the option to edit the current score if
necessary. Change the score in the data field.
228
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-80 Option definitions Lower Detection Threshold

Option
Definition
Enable McAfee GTI

The feature is disabled by default.
Message Reputation at
the lower detection
threshold
Detection threshold
Select an appropriate detection threshold for the lower detections. The available
options are:
Highly suspect
Suspect
Custom
The default threshold is Highly Suspect.
When Custom is selected, you also need to enter the appropriate Threshold value. This
value should be lower than the value set for the Higher Detection Threshold.

check

The default action is Accept and drop (Block)
Whenever you choose Add to score as your action, you have the option to edit the current score if
necessary. Change the score in the data field.
Sender Authentication Settings RBL Configuration

Use this page to specify the locations of lists of IP addresses that are known to send spam.
By default the appliance is configured to use the McAfee Blackhole list, cidr.bl.mcafee.com.
You are able to add as many RBL servers as you require. The appliance will query each server in the
order they are shown in the user interface until a match is found, when it will take the specified
action. McAfee recommends that you place the RBL servers in the order that they are most likely to
trigger to reduce the number of lookups the appliance carries out for each incoming connection.
Product Guide
229

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Enable RBL lookup The feature is enabled by default.

Domain name
Specifies locations of servers that maintain real-time blackhole lists.
If the sender fails

the check

Accept and Drop the data (Block) Accepts the connection, but blocks the message from
being delivered, returning a 250 SMTP code to the sending MTA.
The default action is Reject, close and deny (Block)
Sender Authentication Settings SPF, Sender ID and DKIM

Use this page to specify settings for techniques that determine whether the sender of an email
message is genuine.
These techniques reduce the workload for the appliance, because they reject suspicious email without
the need for scanning.
The appliance can take various actions according to whether the email passes or fails each check. You
can use each type of authentication separately or combine the techniques by using scoring (or
"weighting").
Option
Definition
Enable SPF or Enable

sender ID
When selected, enables Sender Policy Framework (SPF) or Sender ID on the

appliance.
Add an SPF header to

email, Add a sender ID
header to email, Add a
verification result header
to emails or Add a
FCrDNS header to emails
After verifying an email message, the appliance attaches its own header to the
email message, which indicates to other mail servers in your organization that
the email message has been verified.
If selected, adds an extra header line to the email message.
The headers include:

Received-SPF header
Received-PRA header
X-NAI_DKIM_Results header
230
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition

check

seconds, and is configurable from the Default Sender Authentication Settings |
Cumulative score and other options tab.
Add to score Combines the results of several methods of sender
authentication.
Reject, close and deny (Block) - Kernel Mode Blocking. This is an effective method
of combating spam, as it deals with the message itself (reject), the
connection (close) and adds the sending server to the deny list.
If the sender passes the

check

Allow through (Monitor) - lets the message move to the next stage.
Add to score - combines the results of several methods of sender authentication.
Enable DKIM verification
Select to enable DomainKeys Identified Mail (DKIM) verification of email

messages.
Enable FCrDNS
Select to enable Forward-Confirmed reverse DNS lookups to provide weak

verification of email messages.
Sender Authentication Settings Cumulative Score and Other Options

Use this page to specify various options, including scoring techniques for authenticating senders.
If no method is entirely effective against untrusted senders, or some methods work better than others
in your network, you can associate scores to each method to refine the overall detection. To ensure
scoring works correctly, select Add to score as the action for every method that is in use.
Option
Definition
Check the total added score, Score

threshold, If this threshold is reached
Uses scores from several methods of sender authentication to

determine the action to take against an email message when its
sender cannot be authenticated.
Delay period when tarpitting
Specifies a delay when acknowledging the sending of an email. The

default value of 5 seconds is often effective in deterring a
denial-of-service attack.
Parse the email headers for sender

address if behind an MTA and Number
of hops to the MTA
If the appliance is preceded by Mail Transfer Agents (MTAs), specify

the number of hops from the appliance to the MTA. The appliance
can then parse the email headers to find the original sender and
check against that IP address.
Product Guide
231

Email Policies
Task Apply Sender Policy Framework checks to sub-policies

Configure McAfee Email Gateway to apply Sender Policy Framework (SPF) checks to sub-policies.
If you create sub-policies that include Sender/Recipient Address, Sender Policy Framework (SPF) is by
default, triggered by the default policy rather than by the sub-policy.
This is because SPF checks are performed during the Mail From phase of the SMTP conversation. To
change this default behavior, you need to force the SPF checks to be carried out after the DATA phase
of the SMTP conversion starts.
Task
1
Navigate to Email | Email Policies | Spam | Sender Authentication | Cumulative Score and Other Options.
Cumulative Score and Other Options is available from the drop-down list on the Default Sender Authentication
Settings (SMTP) window tab bar.
Select Parse the email headers for sender address if behind an MTA.
Click OK.
Apply changes.
SPF checks are now carried out after the DATA phase of the SMTP conversation starts.
Benefits of adding sender authentication results to spam scores

Adding sender authentication results to spam scores allows better control over possible actions.
You can add sender authentication scores to the spam scores for specific editable spam rules. Editable
rules begin with EDT_.
Adding sender authentication results to the spam score

These examples illustrate how you might configure sender authentication scores as part of the overall
spam scores.
Issue You have enabled McAfee Global Threat Intelligence message reputation, but would like to
exempt a set of recipients.
Solution Configure McAfee GTI message reputation to add to spam score and create a policy
exception in the anti-spam settings of the corresponding policy for the wanted recipients.
Issue You have enabled McAfee GTI message reputation and would like to send out a notification
whenever Email Gateway takes a block action.
Solution Configure McAfee GTI message reputation to add to spam score and choose the wanted
notification email option in the anti-spam settings of the corresponding policy.
Issue You have enabled Sender Policy Framework (SPF) and would like the soft fail condition to
contribute to the overall spam score, rather than just blocking or allowing the mail through.
Solution Configure SPF to add to spam score and choose a score-based action in the anti-spam
settings of the corresponding policy
See also
Benefits of configuring spam rules on page 218
Task - Add sender authentication results to a spam score on page 233
Task Exempt a recipient from a McAfee GTI reputation check on page 233
Task Send a notification when a McAfee GTI check blocks a message on page 234
Task Add to spam score when SPF results in a soft fail on page 234
232
Product Guide

Email Policies
Task - Add sender authentication results to a spam score

Adding sender authentication scores to the spam score permits flexibility in detecting spam.
After you add sender authentication results to the spam score, the final action Email Gateway takes
depends on the overall spam score and the score-based actions configuration. Each individual sender
authentication result can contribute to a score, and action can be taken if this cumulative score
exceeds a threshold.
Task
1
Select Email | Email Policies | Sender Authentication.

The Default Sender Authentication Settings (SMTP) window opens.
Select Yes to enable sender authentication.
Select Message Reputation, then select the checkbox to Enable McAfee GTI Message Reputation at the higher
detection threshold.
For If the sender fails the check, select the action Add to score, a then type the value you want to add.
Click OK.
The Default Sender Authentication Settings (SMTP) window closes.
Select Email | Email Policies | Spam.

Select Yes to enable anti-spam scanning.
Select Spam Rules.

The list of currently configured spam rules populates.
Select a rule you want to configure, then type the score that triggers the rule.
10 Click OK.
The Default Anti-Spam Settings (SMTP) window closes.
11 Select Spam.
12 Configure any Additional score-based actions you want.
13 Click OK.
The Default Anti-Spam Settings (SMTP) window closes.
14 Click the green checkmark icon to apply your changes.
See also
Spam rules that support adding sender authorization scores on page 235
Task Exempt a recipient from a McAfee GTI reputation check

Create policy exceptions to refine the way McAfee Email Gateway applies your policies.
Before you begin
This task assumes that you have configured adding McAfee GTI reputation scores to the
spam score.
Product Guide
233

Email Policies
You must be familiar with policy exceptions in McAfee Email Gateway.

Task
1
Select Email | Email Policies (SMTP).
For the policy you want to configure, select Spam.

The Anti-Spam Settings window opens.
Configure an Anti-Spam policy exception for the required recipient. Disable Anti-Spam.
Click OK, then save your changes.
The messages for the specific recipient are exempt from McAfee GTI reputation checks, and do not
add authentication scores to the spam score.
Task Send a notification when a McAfee GTI check blocks a message

Configure notifications to alert individuals or groups when a reputation check blocks a message.
Before you begin
Before you can configure this option, you must configure Global Threat Intelligence
message reputation checks.
Task
1
For the policy you want to configure, select Spam.

Configure the desired notifications in the anti-spam settings.
Select Spam Rules.

The list of configured rules populates.
Ensure that the score for the EDT rule you are applying exceeds the configured threshold.
Click OK, and save your changes.
Task Add to spam score when SPF results in a soft fail

You can add authentication results to the spam score when Sender Policy Framework detects a soft
failure.
Before you begin
To configure this action, you must first configure McAfee Email Gateway to add sender
authentication results to the spam score.
Task
1
In the Spam column, select Sender Authentication.

The Sender Authentication window opens.
234
Select SPF, Sender ID, DKIM and FCrDNS.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Enable SPF, then select Allow through (Monitor) as the action for If the sender fails the check.
Click OK.
The Sender Authentication window closes.
Select Spam.
Select Spam Rules, then select the EDT_SA_SP_SOFT_FAIL rule.
Type the score that triggers the rule, then click OK.
The Anti-Spam Settings window closes.
Save your changes.
Spam rules that support adding sender authorization scores

Certain editable spam rules support adding sender authentication results to the total spam score.
Table 4-84
Spam rules that support sender authentication scores
Editable spam rule
Description
EDT_SA_AU_FAIL
Triggers when the overall sender authentication score exceeds the

configured sender authentication cumulative score threshold
EDT_SA_AU_PASS
Triggers when the overall sender authentication score does not exceed
the configured sender authentication cumulative score threshold
EDT_SA_BV_FAIL
Triggers when BATV check fails
EDT_SA_BV_PASS
Triggers when BATV check passes
EDT_SA_DK_FAIL
Triggers when DKIM check results in a fail action
EDT_SA_DK_NEUTRAL
Triggers when DKIM check results in a neutral action
EDT_SA_DK_NONE
Triggers when DKIM check results in a none action
EDT_SA_DK_PASS
Triggers when DKIM check results in a pass action
EDT_SA_DK_PERM_ERROR Triggers when DKIM check results in a perm error action

EDT_SA_DK_SOFT_FAIL
Triggers when DKIM check results in a soft fail action
EDT_SA_DK_TEMP_ERROR Triggers when DKIM check results in a temp error action

EDT_SA_DN_FAIL
Triggers when Deny List check results in a fail action
EDT_SA_DN_PASS
Triggers when Deny List check results in a pass action
EDT_SA_FD_FAIL
Triggers when FCrDNS check results in a fail action
EDT_SA_FD_PASS
Triggers when FCrDNS check results in a pass action
EDT_SA_PR_FAIL
Triggers when Permitted recipient check results in a fail action
EDT_SA_PR_PASS
Triggers when Permitted recipient check results in a pass action
EDT_SA_RB_FAIL
Triggers when Real-Time Black hole lists (RBL) check results in a fail
action
EDT_SA_RB_NONE
Triggers when Real-Time Black hole lists (RBL) check results in a none
action
EDT_SA_RB_PASS
Triggers when Real-Time Black hole lists (RBL) check results in a pass
action
EDT_SA_SI_HARD_FAIL
Triggers when Sender ID check results in a hard fail action
EDT_SA_SI_NEUTRAL
Triggers when Sender ID check results in a neutral action
Product Guide
235

Email Policies
Table 4-84
Spam rules that support sender authentication scores (continued)
Editable spam rule
Description
EDT_SA_SI_NONE
Triggers when Sender ID check results in a none action
EDT_SA_SI_PASS
Triggers when Sender ID check results in a pass action
EDT_SA_SI_PERM_ERROR
Triggers when Sender ID check results in a perm error action
EDT_SA_SI_SOFT_FAIL
Triggers when Sender ID check results in a soft fail action
EDT_SA_SI_TEMP_ERROR
Triggers when Sender ID check results in a temp error action
EDT_SA_SP_HARD_FAIL
Triggers when SPF check results in a hard fail action
EDT_SA_SP_NEUTRAL
Triggers when SPF check results in a neutral action
EDT_SA_SP_NONE
Triggers when SPF check results in a none action
EDT_SA_SP_PASS
Triggers when SPF check results in a pass action
EDT_SA_SP_PERM_ERROR Triggers when SPF check results in a perm error action

EDT_SA_SP_SOFT_FAIL
Triggers when SPF check results in a soft fail action
EDT_SA_SP_TEMP_ERROR Triggers when SPF check results in a temp error action

EDT_SA_TS_FAIL
Triggers when McAfee GTI message reputation check results in a fail

action
EDT_SA_TS_NONE
Triggers when McAfee GTI message reputation check results in a none

action
EDT_SA_TS_PASS
Triggers when McAfee GTI message reputation check results in a pass

action
EDT_SA_TS_TEMP_ERROR Triggers when McAfee GTI message reputation check results in a temp
error action
EDT_SA_TS_TIMEOUT
Triggers when McAfee GTI message reputation check query times out
Compliance policy settings

Use the Compliance policies to manage file and mail size filtering, configure data loss prevention
settings, ensure message compliance through the use of compliance dictionaries, and detect possible
pornographic images using Image filtering or to specify settings for handling signed or encrypted
content.
File Filtering
Use this page to specify actions against different types of files. This is known as file filtering.
Email | Email Policies | Compliance | File filtering

The default policy values are normally suitable, but you might need another policy to allow the
occasional transfer of large, deeply nested files, or to investigate possible attacks.
236
Product Guide

Email Policies
Benefits of file filtering

Use this topic to gain a better understanding of file filtering.
You can use filters to restrict the use of certain file types. For example:
File format If your organization's valuable information is in databases or other special files, it is
important to control the movement of these files. The appliance examines files based on their true
content.
Any file can be made to masquerade as another. A person with malicious intent might rename the
important database file customers.mdb to notes.txt, attempting to transfer that file undetected.
Fortunately, you can configure the appliance to examine each file based on its content or file
format, and not on its file name extension alone.
You can also define the types of file that are sent to your Advanced Threat Defense appliances (if
applicable) by selecting the categories and subcategories of files. Also, you can create rules to, for
example, prevent small graphics files being sent for further scanning by Advanced Threat Defense,
while still sending larger files of the same formats for advanced scanning.
File name Some graphic file formats such as bitmap (.bmp) use large amounts of computer
memory and can affect network speed when transferred. You might prefer that users work with
other more compact formats such as .gif, .png, or .jpeg.
If your organization produces computer software, you might see executable (.exe) files moving
around the network. Within another organization, those files might be games or illegal copies of
software. Similarly, unless your organization regularly handles movie files (MPEG or MPG), they are
probably for entertainment only. A file filtering rule that examines the file extension name can
restrict the movement of these files.
Financial information might have file names like Year2008.xls or 2008Results. A file filter that
matches the text 2008 can detect the movement of these files.
File protection status You can create a rule to take a configured action on all files that have a
protected status, such as files that are password-protected.
File size Although you might allow graphic files to be moved around your network, you can
restrict their size to prevent the service running too slowly for other users.
When you create settings to control the use of any file, remember that some departments within your
organization might need fewer constraints. For example, a marketing department might need large
graphic files for advertising.
This feature is not available to the POP3 protocol.
File filtering rules and Advanced Threat Defense

For the Advanced Threat Defense - Supported formats options within your file filtering rules to have effect, you
must have:
One or more Advanced Threat Defense appliances configured within your network
Configured Email Gateway to communicate with your Advanced Threat Defense appliances
Enabled Advanced Threat Defense scanning within your Email Gateway
Example file filtering rule

Issue Your company email templates include a small graphic of your corporate logo. However,
when you receive reply messages that include original email messages from within your company,
these graphics are getting sent to your Advanced Threat Defense appliances for further analysis, tying
up bandwidth and resources.
Product Guide
237

Email Policies
Solution Create a file filtering rule that excludes your corporate logo file from Advanced Threat
Defense scanning, as long as the file name matches and is below a certain size.
See also
Task Configure Email Gateway to communicate with your Advanced Threat Defense
appliances on page 476
Task Configure Advanced Threat Defense policies on page 190
Option definitions Default File Filtering Settings (SMTP)

Use this page to configure and manage SMTP file filters.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-86 Option definitions File Filtering Rules
Option
Definition
Order
Displays the order in which the filters are applied. To change the order,
click icons in the Move column.
Rule Name
Displays the rule name.
If Triggered
Displays the action to take. Click the link to change the primary and
secondary actions associated with the rule.
Add Rule
Opens a further window where you can specify the types of file you want
to detect.
If a file filtering action results in

an alert
Select to use the default alert message, or click Change the default alert text to
open a further window where you can change the alert message that is
issued after a detection.
Task Exclude logo files from ATD scans

To prevent multiple copies of your corporate logo graphics file being sent for advanced scanning,
create a file filtering rule to exclude it from being sent to Advanced Threat Defense.
Before you begin
You must have:
238
Product Guide

Email Policies
One or more Advanced Threat Defense appliances configured within your network
Configured Email Gateway to communicate with your Advanced Threat Defense

appliances
Enabled Advanced Threat Defense scanning within your Email Gateway
Configured Advanced Threat Defense to scan graphics files found within email messages
The Do not scan the attachment with Advanced Threat Defense option is only available when the primary action is set
to Allow through.
Task
1
Navigate to Email | Email Policies | Compliance | File filtering.

The Default File Filtering Settings (SMTP) dialog box is displayed.
Select Yes to enable file filtering.
Click Add Rule.

The New Rule dialog box is displayed.
Enter a name for this rule, for example, Exclude Logo from ATD.
Select Continue scanning if rule triggers so that other attachments may be scanned.
Click Clear selections to deselect all categories and subcategories.
Within Advanced Threat Defense - Supported formats, select Graphics/Presentation: Portable Network Graphics Format or
other appropriate file subcategory.
This ensures only .png files are impacted by this rule.
Select Naming Filtering and click Enable file name filtering.
Enter the name of the file to be excluded from Advanced Threat Defense scanning, for example,
companylogo.png. Click OK.
The new file filtering rule is created.
10 Click the If Triggered link for the new rule.

The Actions dialog box is displayed.
11 From And also | Other actions, select Do not scan the attachment with Advanced Threat Defense.
12 Click OK.
13 Click OK and apply your changes.
When a reply email is received that contains your corporate logo within the original message body, the
file is excluded from being sent to your Advanced Threat Defense appliances. For a further level of
protection, you can also configure the rule so that the filename must match, and the file must be
below a configured size. This prevents someone renaming another, larger file to match your corporate
logo file, and then bypassing your Advanced Threat Defense scans.
Product Guide
239

Email Policies
Data Loss Prevention settings

Use this page to create a policy that assigns data loss prevention actions against the registered
document categories.
Email | Email Policies | Compliance | Data Loss Prevention
Benefits of using Data Loss Prevention (DLP)

You can choose to restrict the flow of sensitive information sent in email messages by SMTP through
the appliance using the Data Loss Prevention feature. For example, by blocking the transmission of a
sensitive document such as a financial report that is to be sent outside of your organization. Detection
occurs whether the original document is sent as an email attachment, or even as just a section of text
taken from the original document.
Configuring DLP takes place in two phases:
Registering the documents that you want to protect
Setting the DLP policy to action, and control the detection (this topic)
If an uploaded registered document contains embedded documents, their content is also fingerprinted
so the combined content is used when calculating the percentage match at scan time. To have
embedded documents treated individually, they must be registered separately.
Option definitions Data Loss Prevention

Use this information to understand the controls available from within the Data Loss Prevention dialog
box.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
240
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option
Definition
Yes, No, or Use the

same settings as the
default policy
Select to activate the Data Loss Prevention policy settings
Document match
percentage
The percentage of the original registered document which must be seen in order
to trigger DLP. For example, if you register two documents; one with 100 pages
of content, and another with 10 pages, a setting of 30% would require 30 pages
to match the document with 100 pages, and just 3 pages to match the document
of 10 pages.
The algorithm involved in DLP is sophisticated and involves text normalization,
common word removal, and signature generation. These figures offer a guideline
only.
Number of consecutive Set the number of sequential signatures which will cause a trigger. For example,
signatures (advanced): if you register two documents; one with 100 pages of content, and another with
10 pages, use this feature to detect a small section of the original content,
irrespective of its original size.
The algorithm involved in DLP is sophisticated and involves text normalization,
common word removal, and signature generation. An approximate guide is that 1
signature represents 8 words of text after common words have been removed.
Rules
Select the box to show or hide the list of existing DLP rules.
Create new rule
This list is empty until you set up categories for registered documents. Click the
link to create a new data loss prevention rule based on the categories that you
set in Registered Documents.
This opens a dialog box to allow you to select one or more DLP categories.
Exclusions
Select the box to show or hide the list of existing document exclusions.
Create document
exclusion
This list is empty until you register documents. Click the link to specify registered
documents to exclude from this policy.
This opens a dialog box to allow you to select one or more documents to be
excluded from the rule.
If a Data Loss
Prevention action
results in an alert
When selected, issues the default alert upon detection. When deselected, allows
you to click the link, then change the text of the alert.
Task Prevent a sensitive document from being leaked

Use this task to block sensitive financial documents from being sent outside your organization.
Before you begin
This example assumes that you have already created a Finance category.
Task
1
Select Email | Email Policies | Compliance | Data Loss Prevention.
In the Default Data Loss Prevention Settings dialog box, click Yes to enable the policy.
Click Create new rule, select the Finance category, and click OK to have the category appear in the Rules
list.
Product Guide
241

Email Policies
Select the action associated with the category, change the primary action to Deny connection (Block),
and click OK.
Click OK again, and apply the changes.
Task Block a section of the document

Use this task to block just a small section of the document from being sent outside your organization.
Task
1
Enable the consecutive signatures setting, and type the number of consecutive signatures against
which the DLP policy will trigger a detection. The level is set to 10 by default.
Click Create new rule, select the Finance category, and click OK to have the category appear in the
Rules list.
Select the action associated with the category, change the primary action to Deny connection (Block),
and click OK.
Task Exclude a specific document for a policy

Use this task to prevent a specific financial document from triggering the DLP policy settings.
Task
1
Click Create document exclusion, select the document you want to ignore for this policy, and click OK.
Mail Size Filtering Settings

Use the Mail Size Filtering Settings to specify maximum message size, attachment size, and number of
attachments that can be scanned in any one message.
Email | Email Policies | Compliance | Mail size filtering
Benefits of filtering messages based on their size or attachments

Scanning messages based on their size or attachments can help to alert you to potential
denial-of-service attacks entering your email gateway.
This policy contains the following options:
242
Message Size
Attachment Size
Product Guide

Email Policies
Attachment Count
Options
occasional transfer of large numbers of large email messages, or the occasional transfer of large
attachments within email messages, or the number of attachments within email messages, or to
investigate possible attacks.
Option definitions Mail Size Filtering Settings | Message Size

Use this page to specify how to handle large email messages.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Option
Definition
If the message size

exceeds
Specifies the limit. The default values are:

Message size - 100000KB (100MB).
Use the message size only as a guide. When encoded, a message can become up to
33% larger. To use the actual size of the message, select Decode email parts for the
purposes of size calculation from the Options tab.
(Menu)


(Block)
Product Guide
243

Email Policies
Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.

options.
the email message.
list.
Other actions
244

same name.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option
Definition
Notification and
annotated email
options
Follow the link to configure the options for notification messages and annotated
email messages.
If attachments are
replaced with an
alert

Option definitions Mail Size Filtering Settings | Attachment Size

Use this page to specify how to handle large attachments within email messages.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-90 Option definitions Specify a maximum attachment size
Option
Definition
If an attachment size
exceeds

Attachment size - 32000KB (32MB).
Use the attachment size only as a guide. When encoded as an attachment, a file
can become up to 33% larger. To use the actual size of the attachments, select
Decode email parts for the purposes of size calculation from the Options tab.
(Menu)


(Block)
Product Guide
245

Email Policies
Table 4-90 Option definitions Specify a maximum attachment size (continued)

Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
246

same name.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-90 Option definitions Specify a maximum attachment size (continued)

Option
Definition
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.
If attachments are
replaced with an alert

Table 4-91 Option definitions Specify the maximum size of all attachments
Option
Definition
If the size of all

attachments exceeds
Specifies the limit for the combined size of all attachments. The default values
are:
Size of all attachments - 64000KB (64MB).
Use the attachment size only as a guide. When encoded as an attachment, a file
can become up to 33% larger. To use the actual size of the attachments, select
Decode email parts for the purposes of size calculation from the Options tab.
(Menu)

Replace all attachments with a single alert (Modify)
Remove all attachments (Modify)
Product Guide
247

Email Policies
Table 4-91 Option definitions Specify the maximum size of all attachments (continued)
Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
248

same name.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-91 Option definitions Specify the maximum size of all attachments (continued)
Option
Definition
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.
If attachments are
replaced with an alert

Option definitions Mail Size Filtering Settings | Attachment Count

Use this page to specify how to handle large numbers of attachments within email messages.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Option
Definition
If the attachment
count exceeds
(Menu)
Attachment count - 500.

Replace all attachments with a single alert (Modify)
Remove all attachments (Modify)
Product Guide
249

Email Policies
Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
250

same name.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option
Definition
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.
If attachments are
replaced with an
alert

Option definitions Mail Size Filtering Settings | Options

Specify options relating to Mail Size Filtering.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-94 Option definitions Options
Option
Definition
Decode email parts for the purposes of size

calculation
When selected, McAfee Email Gateway decodes the

attachments and other parts within email messages so that
their actual size can be calculated.
Compliance Settings
Use this page to create and manage compliance rules.
Email | Email Policies | Compliance | Compliance
Benefits of the compliance settings

Use compliance scanning to assist with conformance to regulatory compliance and corporate operating
compliance. You can choose from a library of predefined compliance rules, or create your own rules
and dictionaries specific to your organization.
Product Guide
251

Email Policies
Compliance rules can vary in complexity from a straightforward trigger when an individual term within
a dictionary is detected, to building on and combining score-based dictionaries which will only trigger
when a certain threshold is reached. Using the advanced features of compliance rules, dictionaries can
be combined using logical operations of any of, all of, or except.
Option definitions Default Compliance Settings (SMTP)

This information describes the options available on this page.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Option
Definition
Enable compliance
Select to activate the Compliance policy settings.
Rules
Lists the configured compliance rules.
Create new rule
Click to open a wizard that creates a new compliance rule.
Create new rule from template
Click to open a wizard that lists the predefined compliance rules.
If a compliance action results in an alert When selected, issues the default alert upon detection. When
deselected, allows you to click the link, then change the text of the
alert.
Task Block messages that violate a policy

Use this to task to block messages that violate a threatening language policy.
Task
252
In the Default Compliance Settings dialog box, click Yes to enable the policy.
Click Create new rule from template to open the Rule Creation Wizard.
Select the Acceptable Use - Threatening Language policy, and click Next.
Optionally change the name of the rule, and click Next.
Change the primary action to Deny connection (Block), and click Finish.
Click OK and apply the changes.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Task Create a simple custom rule

Use this task to create a simple custom rule that blocks messages that contain social security
numbers.
Task
1
Click Create new rule to open the Rule Creation Wizard.
Type a name for the rule, and click Next.
In the Search field, type social.
Select the Social Security Number dictionary, and click Next twice.
Select the Deny connection (Block) action, and click Finish.
Task Create a complex custom rule

Use this task to create a complex rule that triggers when both Dictionary A and Dictionary B are
detected, except when Dictionary C is also detected.
Task
1
Select Email | Email Policies | Scanning Policies and select Compliance.
Click Create new rule to open the Rule Creation Wizard.
Type a name for the rule, and click Next.
Select two dictionaries to include in the rule, and click Next.
Select a dictionary that you want to exclude from the rule in the exclusion list.
Select the action that you want to take place if the rule triggers.
From the And conditionally drop-down list, select All, and click Finish.
Task Add a dictionary to a rule

Use this task to add a new dictionary to an existing rule.
Task
1
Expand the rule that you want to edit.
Select Add dictionaries.
Select the new dictionary that you want to include, and click OK.
Task Create a rule to monitor or block at a threshold

For score-based dictionaries you might want to monitor triggers that reach a low threshold, and only
block the email when a high threshold is achieved.
Product Guide
253

Email Policies
Task
1
Click Create new rule, type a name for it such as Discontent - Low, and click Next.
Select the Discontent dictionary, and in Threshold, type 20.
Click Next, and Next again.
In If the compliance rule is triggered, accept the default action.
Click Finish.
Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create another new rule but name it Discontent - High and assign it
a threshold of 40.
In If the compliance rule is triggered, select Deny connection (Block).
Click Finish.
10 Click OK and apply the changes.
Task Edit the threshold associated with an existing rule

Use this task to edit the threshold associated with an existing rule.
Before you begin
This task assumes that your rule includes a dictionary which triggers the action based on a
threshold, such as the Compensation and Benefits dictionary.
Task
1
Expand the rule that you want to edit, then select the Edit icon next to the dictionary whose score
you want to change.
In dictionary threshold, type the score on which you want the rule to trigger, and click OK.
Task Restrict the score contribution of a dictionary term

Use this task to restrict the score contribution of a dictionary term.
Before you begin
This task assumes that your rule includes a dictionary which triggers the action based on a
threshold score, such as the Compensation and Benefits dictionary.
You can restrict how many times a term can contribute to the overall score.
For example, if testterm within a dictionary has a score of 10 and is seen five times within an email,
it will add 50 to the overall score. Alternatively you can restrict this, for example to contribute only
twice by setting Maximum term count to 2.
254
Product Guide

Email Policies
Task
1
Expand the rule that you want to edit, then click the Edit icon next to the dictionary whose score
you want to change.
In Maximum term count, type the maximum number of times that you want a term to contribute to the
score.
Image Filtering
The Image Filtering scanner analyzes images to determine attributes that indicate the image may be of a
pornographic nature.
Email | Email Policies | Compliance | Image filtering

The Image Filtering feature uses sophisticated, analytical processes that consist of thousands of
algorithms. These include eleven different detection methods to provide enough information to reliably
distinguish between pornographic and non-pornographic images.
The feature use the following techniques:
Converts Image to BGR format
Multi-layer detection algorithms
Advance surface luminosity curvature analysis
Negative Curvature Rejection reduces false positives
Face detection and body part composition analysis
Benefits of image filtering

This information describes the benefits associated with setting up image filtering on the appliance.
Detecting potential pornographic material enables you, as an administrator, to enforce acceptable use
policies around image content leaving and entering your company, and be able to monitor and block
any deliberate or inadvertent infractions of your policy.
Option definitions Image Filtering

This information describes the options available in the Image Filtering policy.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Product Guide
255

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Delete exception
Table 4-97 Option definitions Higher Image Detection Threshold
Option
Definition
Detection threshold
Choose from Highly Suspect, Suspect, and Custom. Set to Highly Suspect by default.
Select Custom to set the Confidence level.
Confidence level
In %, the level of confidence that an image is pornographic against each detection.

Set to 75% by default.
Take the following

action
Provides a main action to take. The options are:


(Block)
256
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-97 Option definitions Higher Image Detection Threshold (continued)

Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions

same name.
Product Guide
257

Email Policies
Table 4-97 Option definitions Higher Image Detection Threshold (continued)

Option
Definition
Notification and
annotated email
options
Table 4-98 Option definitions Lower Image Detection Threshold

Option
Definition
Detection threshold
Choose from Highly Suspect, Suspect, and Custom. Set to Suspect by default.
Select Custom to set the Confidence level %.
Confidence level
In %, the level of confidence that an image is pornographic against each detection.

Set to 50% by default.
Take the following

action
Provides a main action to take. The options are:


(Block)
258
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-98 Option definitions Lower Image Detection Threshold (continued)

Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
Notification and
annotated email
options
Table 4-99 Option definitions Alert Settings

Option
Definition
If an action results in an alert
Select to specify whether to use the default alert text or not.
Change the default alert text
Click to open the Alert Editor.
Product Guide
259

Email Policies
Task Block and quarantine highly suspicious images

Use this task to block and quarantine highly suspicious images.
Task
1
In the Compliance policy section, select Image Filtering.
Click Yes to enable the Image Filtering policy.
In the Higher Image Detection Threshold section, select the Accept and then drop the data (Block) action.
In And also, select Quarantine.
Quarantined messages can be viewed in the Message Search feature (Reports | Message Search), in the Image
Filtering category.
Task Monitor suspicious images and notify an administrator

Use this task to monitor suspicious images and notify an administrator.
Task
1
In the Compliance policy section, select Image Filtering.
Click Yes to enable the Image Filtering policy.
In the Lower Image Detection threshold section, select the Allow Through (Monitor) action.
In And also, select the Forward modified to... notification email option.
The message is sent to any email lists you have created.
a
To change the email recipients who will receive the forwarded message, click Edit.
The Email Recipients dialog box opens.
b
6
Select the lists that you want to receive the message and click OK.
Click OK to activate the policy.

Specify how you want McAfee Email Gateway to handle content that is either signed or encrypted, or
signed and encrypted, or in plain text.
Email | Email Policies | Compliance | Signed or encrypted content
Benefits of the Encrypted Content Settings options

Find out more about the type of signed or encrypted content settings, and actions that you can take
when that type of content is detected.
The Encrypted Content Settings options are divided into the following categories:
260
Signed Content
Encrypted Content
Product Guide

Email Policies
Signed and Encrypted Content
Plaintext Content
For each category, you can choose a primary action to take when that type of content is detected, and
optionally choose a secondary action. Additionally, you can set notification and alert actions too.
Option definitions Signed or encrypted content

Define how you want the encryption settings to work when signed or encrypted content is detected.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Product Guide
261

Email Policies
Table 4-101 Option definitions Signed Content

Option
Definition
When content that is Select the primary action that you want the appliance to take in this circumstance.
signed but not
encrypted is
detected
Allow the changes to break the signed email (Monitor)
Do not allow the changes to break the signed email (Monitor)
Reroute to an alternative relay (Reroute)
And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
262
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-101 Option definitions Signed Content (continued)

Option
Definition

same name.
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.
Alert Settings
Select to use the default alert, or follow the link to make changes to the alert text.
Product Guide
263

Email Policies
Table 4-102 Option definitions Encrypted Content link

Option
Definition
When content that is

encrypted but not
signed is detected
Select the primary action that you want the appliance to take in this circumstance.
And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
264
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-102 Option definitions Encrypted Content link (continued)

Option
Definition

same name.
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.
Alert Settings
Product Guide
265

Email Policies
Table 4-103 Option definitions Signed and Encrypted Content

Option
Definition
When content that is Select the primary action that you want the appliance to take in this circumstance.
both signed and
encrypted is detected
Allow the changes to break the signed email (Monitor)
Do not allow the changes to break the signed email (Monitor)
And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
266
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-103 Option definitions Signed and Encrypted Content (continued)

Option
Definition

same name.
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.
Alert Settings
Product Guide
267

Email Policies
Table 4-104 Option definitions Plaintext Content

Option
Definition
When content that is

neither signed nor
encrypted is detected
Select the primary action that you want the appliance to take in this circumstance.
And also

(Block)

Quarantine options
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
268
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-104 Option definitions Plaintext Content (continued)

Option
Definition

same name.
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.
Alert Settings
Classifying embedded URLs
McAfee Global Threat Intelligence (McAfee GTI)(McAfee GTI) performs lookups on URLs that are
embedded in email messages.
Email | Email Policies | Compliance | URL Reputation

McAfee GTI provides reputation scores to the URL reputation database. Use the reputation scores to
configure actions for suspected security risks. The URL blacklists and whitelists have an impact on the
URL reputation scans.
The URL reputation score has no appreciable effect on the overall score for the message.
Benefits of classifying embedded URLs

Classifying any embedded URLs within email messages sent into your organization helps prevent your
users visiting internet sites that may host malware or other undesirable content.
Email messages can contain links to embedded URLs. Some of these links may be to sites with low
reputation scores. By using your McAfee Email Gateway to classify these URLs, you help protect your
organization from the effects of people following these links.
You can enable URL reputation scanning when you run the Setup Wizard, or you can do it after initial
setup. The URL database is not available until you enable URL reputation scans.
URL scanning appears as a component of the Compliance features on the Email Policies page. The
database appears under System | Component Management | Update Status.
Product Guide
269

Email Policies
Option definitions - Default URL properties settings

Configure the properties settings to determine how McAfee Email Gateway processes URL reputation
scans.
Table 4-105
URL reputation options
Option
Definition
Enable URL reputation
Select the proper radio button to enable or disable URL scanning.

Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-107
URL reputation options
Option
Definition
Higher URL reputation threshold

Detection threshold
Select threshold level. Options are:

Highly suspect
Suspect
Custom
Confidence level
This field is pre-populated with the proper score to trigger the

higher threshold.
Take the following action
Select the preferred action from the drop down list.
And also
If necessary, select one or more secondary actions from the scrolling

menu.
Notification and annotated email options Click this link to configure default notifications and alerts.
Lower URL reputation threshold
Detection threshold
Select threshold level. Options are:

Highly suspect
Suspect
Custom
270
Confidence level
This field is pre-populated with the proper score to trigger the lower
threshold.
Take the following action
Select the preferred action from the drop down list.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-107
URL reputation options (continued)
Option
Definition
And also
If necessary, select one or more secondary actions from the scrolling

menu.
Notification and annotated email options Click this link to configure default notifications and alerts.
Alert settings
Select the checkbox to generate the default alert.
(change the default alert text)
Click this link to change the text in the default alert.
Task - Configure URL reputation settings

Use this page to set up parameters for detecting embedded URLs and taking action on them.
Before you begin
To detect embedded URLs in messages, enable URL reputation scanning.
Task
1
Navigate to Email | Email Policies.

The Email Policies page opens, showing all currently configured policies and the evaluation order.
Select your protocol from the drop down list.
Under the Compliance column, select the URL reputations link.

The Default URL Reputation Settings page opens.
If URL reputation scanning is not already enabled, click the Yes radio button.
Select the URL Reputation tab.
Configure the Higher URL Threshold.
Select the threshold designation from the drop down list.
Verify the confidence level.
Select the primary action for URLs that trigger the higher threshold.
Select any secondary actions, if required.
Set notification and alert options associated with the higher threshold.
Configure the Lower URL Threshold.

a
Select the threshold designation from the drop down list.
Verify the confidence level.
Select the primary action for URLs that trigger the lower threshold.
Select any secondary actions, if required.
Set notification and alert options associated with the lower threshold.
[Optional] Enable Alert Settings.
Click OK.
The Default URL Reputation Settings page closes, and the URL reputations link shows the primary action.
Product Guide
271

Email Policies
URL reputation Blacklists and Whitelists

Configuring blacklists and whitelists for URL classification enables you to fine-tune how McAfee Email
Gateway handles different URLs.
Email | Email Policies | Compliance | URL Reputation | Blacklists and Whitelists
Benefits of using URL reputation blacklists and whitelists

The blacklists and whitelists feature provides a method for handling specific URLs. Whitelisting allows
through URLs that would otherwise be blocked by the URL reputation service. Blacklisting blocks URLs
regardless of their reputation scores.
If you know that a particular URL is not trustworthy, add it to the blacklist. When a URL reputation
scan detects this URL, it will take your specified action immediately. On the other hand, if you know
specific URLs that are always trusted, add them to the whitelist. The URL scan will not take action. In
both cases, URL scans execute more efficiently.
Blacklisting takes precedence over whitelisting.
Parts of the URL

A URL consists of a number of characteristic parts.
The following table reflects these sample URLs:
http://user:1234@www.mydomain.com:10443/index.php?id=5678#para1
ftp://user:1234@ftp.domain.com:2021/docs/data.rtf;type=a
Table 4-108 URL format

Part
Format
Example
Parsing string
Scheme
Protocol
http://
Ends at '*://'
ftp://
Credentials
User name and password
user:1234
Starts after '*://'

Ends at "@"
Host
Consists of one of the

following:
www.mydomain.com:
10443
Starts after '*://', '@' or

nothing
Domain name
ftp.domain.com:2021
Ends at '/', '?', '#' or

end of string
index.php
Starts after '*/'
docs/data,rtf
Ends at '?' or '#' or end

of string
type=a
Starts after path, begins

with ';'
IPv4 address
IPv6 address
Square brackets are
required.
Can also include TCP port

Path
Type (only for

FTP URLs)
Transfer type (added to

path)
Ends at end of string
272
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-108 URL format (continued)

Part
Format
Example
Parsing string
Query (not valid

for FTP URLs)
id=5678
Starts after '?'
Anchor (not valid Specifies a location within

for FTP URLs)
the document
para1
Ends at '#' or end of

string
Starts after '#'
Ends at end of string
Using expressions
Global Threat Intelligence tests URLs found in emails against regular expressions to determine if the
URL is allowed or forbidden to enter the system.
Email Gateway permits the user to specify patterns for the individual parts of the URL and then
compile these parts into a regular expression that will match a complete URL. If the user does not
enter a value for a part, the compiled expression matches anything or nothing for that part.
You must enter a value for the Host part. A recognizable URL must have, at a minimum, a host name.
You can specify parts as either simple DOS patterns or as regular expressions.
Simple patterns
Simple patterns allow you to enter much less information than regular expressions, but offer much
less flexibility. You can use simple wildcards:
'?' match single character
'*' match any characters
Certain matches are not possible with simple patterns. For example:
In the Host field, '*' does not match '.' by design. This prevents possible unwanted matches.
The pattern 'www.mcafee.*' matches www.mcafee.com and www.mcafee.fr, but not

www.mcafee.co.uk.
You cannot match alternates, such as port 8080 or 8443.
You cannot match just IPv4 addresses.
Matching patterns like these requires regular expressions.
Regular expressions
The ability to specify the URL parts of interest as regular expressions overcomes any restrictions of
simple patterns:
www\.mcafee\.(?:com|co\.uk)
8080|8443
(?:[12]?\d{1,2}\.){3}[12]?\d{1,2}
On the URL Expression Builder, each text field is a separate regular expression that follows Perl-compatible
regular expression (PCRE) syntax, and is validated as a regular expression. Regular expressions offer
greater flexibility, but they are more complex than simple patterns. You are allowed to enter nothing
for all fields, resulting in a generated regex that matches anything that sufficiently resembles a URL.
You must remember to escape characters that have significant meaning in a regular expression.
These characters are: \.-[]{}()^$|+?*
Product Guide
273

Email Policies
You must not use positional matches, otherwise known as anchors, in regular repressions.
Examples of anchors are: '^', '$', '\A' and '\z'.
Anyone who wants to use regular expressions in this feature should already be comfortable with regular
expressions, due to their complexity.
If you want to specify a regular expression that matches any number or character, avoid using '.* and
'.+' as the expression. Either of these choices is likely to match more characters than you desire and
will result in less efficient pattern matching. Use one of these combinations to 'match any character'
based on the part you want to specify:
Credentials '[^@]' (match anything apart from '@' )
Host '[^:/\?#]' (match anything apart from ':', '/', '?' and '#')
Path '[^\?#]' (match anything apart from '?' and '#' )
Query string '[^#]' (match anything apart from '#' )
When you use these patterns, the matches stop at the next part of the URL.
The best approach when constructing regular expressions is to use the URL parser tool which is
regex-aware and will do the necessary escaping for you.
Option definitions URL reputation blacklists and whitelists

Blacklists and whitelists enable you to fine-tune the list of URLs that are blocked or allowed by McAfee
Email Gateway.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move

and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-110
274
Blacklist and whitelist options
Option
Definition
URLs that should always be

blocked
The upper table shows all URLs currently configured to be blacklisted.
Search
Type any portions of the URL as search parameters. Applies to the Description
and Pattern columns.
Type
Simple pattern or regular expression
Description
Any descriptive text that identifies the URL.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-110
Blacklist and whitelist options (continued)
Option
Definition
Pattern
The entire regular expression (all fields concatenated).

Simple patterns show '*' for any unspecified parts. Regular expressions show
the entire pattern.
Match Case
Indicates whether the regular expression should evaluate the URL on a

case-sensitive basis.
Edit
Clicking this link opens the URL Expression Builder where you can edit this URL .
Add Simple Pattern
Click this button to open the URL Expression Builder to add a URL by entering a
simple DOS pattern.
Add Regular Expression
regular expression.
Delete Selected Patterns
Click this button to delete any patterns you have checked in this table.

allowed
The lower table shows all URLs currently configured to be whitelisted.
Search
Type
Description
Pattern

the entire pattern.
Match Case

Edit
Add Simple Pattern
simple DOS pattern.
regular expression.
Task - Configure blacklists and whitelists

Follow this process to configure blacklists and whitelists for embedded URLs.
Before you begin
To use URL blacklisting and whitelisting, enable McAfee Global Threat Intelligence.
Task
1
Navigate to Email | Email Policies.

The Email Policies page opens, showing all currently configured policies and the evaluation order.
Select your protocol from the drop down list.
Under the Compliance column, select the URL reputations link.

If URL reputation scanning is not already enabled, click the Yes radio button.
Product Guide
275

Email Policies
Select the Blacklists and Whitelists tab.

The page displays tables of URLs that should always be blocked, or always be allowed.
To add a URL to either list:

a
Click the Add Simple Pattern button or the Add Regular Expression button.
The URL Expression Builder page appears.
In the data fields, type the required information.
Repeat until you have added all desired URLs.
To delete a URL from either list, select the Delete check box associated with the URL.
[Optional] To parse a URL into its component parts:

a
Click the Parse a URL link on the URL Expression Builder page.
The URL Parser dialog box opens.
Type or paste the URL into the data field, then click OK.
The URL Parser closes, and the component parts of the URL populate the URL Expression Builder.
9
[Optional] To encode or decode a URL:

a
Click the URL encode/decode link on the URL Expression Builder page.
The URL Encode/Decode dialog box opens.
Type or paste a URL fragment into the data field.

Encode only individual path segments and individual terms. Do not encode the entire path or
multiple segments at the same time.
To encode the fragment to its canonical representation (%-encoded sequence), click the Encode
button.
The encoded fragment appears in the data field.
To decode a %-encoded fragment into readable form, click the Decode button.
The decoded fragment appears in the data field.
To convert an improperly or partially encoded sequence into its canonical representation, click
the Canonicalize button.
The canonical representation of the sequence appears in the data field.
Close the dialog box.

You return to the URL Expression Builder.
10 Click OK.
The URL Expression Builder closes, returning you to Default URL Reputation Settings page which shows the
results of your additions, edits, or deletions.
11 Save your changes before you log off.
12 Click OK.
276
Product Guide

Email Policies
ClickProtect
The ClickProtect feature in McAfee Email Gateway scans email messages for embedded links to protect
the enterprise and its users from malware and phishing attempts.
Email | Email Policies | Compliance | URL Reputation | ClickProtect

ClickProtect uses URL reputation to perform the initial McAfee Global Threat Intelligence (McAfee GTI)
scan of email messages. This initial scan checks the incoming messages for any URLs, and performs a
URL reputation lookup for each one, providing a numerical reputation score.
If your policies accept the email, the embedded URLs are rewritten to allow further scanning at click
time.
When the user clicks a URL contained within the email message, ClickProtect uses the information in
the rewritten URL to handle the request. The request is forwarded to the cloud-based McAfee Email
Protection service. This service performs the second, real-time malware scan of the remote content to
identify the risk level of the webpage.
The full ClickProtect features require your McAfee Email Gateway to be provisioned to use the
cloud-based McAfee Email Protection service. If hybrid scanning is not configured, ClickProtect can
remove or replace non-whitelisted URLs.
You can configure a preview of the webpage and a summary of its content to be presented to the user.
McAfee Email Gateway does not support the scanning of embedded URLs contained within email
attachments.
Benefits of using ClickProtect

ClickProtect protects against malicious content being added to linked websites between the time an
email is received, and when the user clicks links within it (click time).
This secondary assessment of the linked websites provides greater confidence that the website is safe.
Also, ClickProtect unmasks any obscured URLs, making it easier for your users to identify the actual
website they are about to visit.
ClickProtect allows you to determine the action to take at click-time, based on the categorized threat
level of the URL. By default:
URLs categorized as low-risk load the original website as it appears in the message.
URLs categorized as unverified or medium-risk trigger a warning page where the content of the
website is summarized.
URLs categorized as high-risk are denied with an alert.
You can configure whether users can access web hyperlinks or not.
ClickProtect uses the hybrid scanning feature. Hybrid scanning must be enabled for ClickProtect to
provide real-time malware scanning. However, you do not have to route your email flow to the
cloud-based McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service.
Whitelisted URLs bypass ClickProtect. ClickProtect does not protect whitelisted URLs. Whitelist any local
or intranet URLs (including IP address based URLs) to allow users to click them directly.
ClickProtect protects users who access their email accounts and click URLs inside or outside the
corporate network.
Product Guide
277

Email Policies
Using ClickProtect
This example illustrates a situation where you might use ClickProtect.
Issue On a Friday evening, spammers start a spam campaign, sending email messages containing
links to websites that have a good reputation, and contain no malware. Over the weekend, the
spammers then "infect" the website with malicious content. On their return to work, your users are
presented with links within their email messages pointing to websites now containing malicious
content.
Solution By enabling URL reputation scanning, Email Gateway ensures that when email messages
are received, only URLs that point to websites with a good reputation are allowed. Enabling
ClickProtect ensures that at the time that users click those links (click time), the content of the
website is still safe for your users to visit.
How ClickProtect works

The diagram illustrates the high-level work flow for ClickProtect.
Figure 4-4 ClickProtect flow
Step Description
278
A sender directs an email message that contains a web link toward an internal user.
MEG initiates a McAfee Global Threat Intelligence (McAfee GTI) scan to check the link for any
threats.
McAfee GTI returns the scan results.
If the message has an acceptable URL reputation score, ClickProtect rewrites the URL and
delivers the message.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Step Description
5
When the user clicks the link, ClickProtect initiates a cloud-based McAfee Email Protection
(Hybrid) service scan to ensure that no threats have been added.
McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service returns the scan results.

If a threat appears, ClickProtect notifies the user and, if so configured, presents a safe view of
the webpage. The user determines if the real webpage is the one expected.
Option definitions - ClickProtect

Use these options to determine how ClickProtect functions.
Option definitions ClickProtect options

If McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) is not enabled from within Email | Hybrid Configuration, only the
ClickProtect URL Replacement Actions are available on this page.
.
Option
Definition
Enable ClickProtect
Selecting this option enables the ClickProtect service.

To enable the full ClickProtect service, the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid)
service must be enabled and configured.
Take the following

actions when a user
clicks on
From the drop-down list for each URL risk level, select the appropriate action:
Risk levels:
A high risk URL Specifies a URL that exhibits detrimental behavior. For
example, the site is known to host malware. By default, ClickProtect denies
the message and sends an alert.
A medium risk URL Specifies a URL that exhibits questionable behavior that
might be detrimental to the user. By default, ClickProtect issues a warning.
An unverified URL Specifies a URL for which no reputation information has
been calculated. By default, ClickProtect issues a warning.
A low risk URL Specifies a URL that exhibits appropriate behavior or that is
verified as trusted. By default, ClickProtect re-writes the URL, and, at click
time, McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) redirects the user to the original
website.
Actions:
Deny Denies the connection.
Warn Warns the user about risks.
Allow Allows the connection.
When the action is

Selecting the checkbox causes the system to send a preview of the potentially
"Warn", display a preview risky page to the user with the warning.
of the page the user is
attempting to visit
Product Guide
279

Email Policies
Option definitions ClickProtect URL Replacement Actions

Option
Definition
HTML
message
actions
Select the actions to take when McAfee Email Gateway detects a URL within an
HTML-based message.
Clickable URLs URLs that include the information allowing users to click the link and be
taken to the linked website.
Visible URLs any text that is formatted to look like a URL, but that does not contain
hypertext information.
Actions:
Leave original URL do not make any changes to the way that clickable URLs are
displayed.
Use the ClickProtect URL replace the original URL with the URL that includes the click
protected information.
If McAfee Email Gateway is not provisioned to use the cloud-based McAfee Email
Protection (Hybrid) service, you cannot select this option.
Remove the URL remove the URL without substituting any text.
Replace with custom text remove the URL and substitute it with the text defined in the
text box to the right.
Plain text
message
actions
Select the action to take when McAfee Email Gateway detects a URL within a plain text
message.
Actions:
Leave original URL do not make any changes to the way that visible URLs are displayed.
Use the ClickProtect URL replace the original URL with the URL that includes the click
protected information.
If McAfee Email Gateway is not provisioned to use the cloud-based McAfee Email
Protection (Hybrid) service, you cannot select this option.
Remove the URL remove the URL without substituting any text.
Replace with custom text remove the URL and substitute it with the text defined in the
text box to the right.
Option definitions ClickProtect Actions

Option
Definition
If URL rewriting is not

possible
From the scrolling list, specify the primary action to take.

ClickProtect rewrites detected URLs to redirect them to ClickProtect when the
user clicks them. The system cannot rewrite URLs contained in TNEF-format
emails.
Transport Neutral Encapsulation Format (TNEF) is a proprietary Rich Text email
attachment format used by Microsoft Outlook and Microsoft Exchange. Most
email clients cannot decipher TNEF blocks.
And also
From the scrolling list, specify the secondary action to take.
alert
Select the checkbox to enable the default alert.

Click the link to create or change the text for the default alert.
280
Product Guide

Email Policies
Task - Configure ClickProtect

Set up ClickProtect by following this process.
Before you begin
Before you configure ClickProtect, enable Hybrid processing from within Email | Hybrid
Configuration.
Task
1

Enable URL reputation.

The other tabs on the page become available.
Click the ClickProtect tab.
Enable ClickProtect.
Under ClickProtect Options, set options for each threat level.
Enable the preview page option, if wanted.
Under ClickProtect URL Replacement Actions, set options for replacement of URLs.
Some of these options can be configured without requiring McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) to be
enabled.
Under ClickProtect Actions, select the action to take if URL rewriting is not possible.
Under And also, configure secondary actions.
10 Enable or disable Use the default alert, as required.

11 Click OK.
Option definitions URL Count

The URL Count page enables you to fine-tune the way email messages containing large numbers of
URLs are handled by McAfee Email Gateway.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Product Guide
281

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Delete exception
Table 4-112 Option definitions URL Count
Option
Definition
Maximum number of URLs per email
Typing a number in the text field sets the maximum number of URLs
in one email. If the URLs exceed the number, the system takes the
configured action.
If this threshold is exceeded
The scrolling list allows selection of the proper primary action
And also
The list allows selection of secondary actions.
Notification and annotated email options This link opens the Default Notification and Routing Settings page.
Selecting the check box enables use of the default text. Clicking the
associated link permits editing the default text.
Option definitions - URL Expression Builder

Use this page to add a URL by entering either a simple DOS pattern or a regular expression. Specify
only the parts you want to match.
Table 4-113
URL expression options
Option
Description
Description
Text that helps to define or identify the URL (optional)
Scheme
Protocol
Credentials
User name and password
Host
Consists of one of the following:

Domain name
IPv4 address
IPv6 address
Square brackets are required.
Port
TCP port
Path
Query string
Supplies parameters to the server. Not relevant for FTP URLs.
Named anchor
Specifies a location within the document. Not relevant for FTP URLs.
Match the credentials, path, query Selecting the check box causes McAfee GTI to match the URL
string and named anchor
case-sensitively.
case-sensitively.
If you leave this unchecked, whatever you type in the text fields is
converted to lower case when you click OK.
Compiled regular expression
282
This dynamic table shows the regular expression you create as you enter
one or more parts.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-113
URL expression options (continued)
Option
Description
Test a URL
Data field where you can type or paste a URL to test it against the
regular expression. Icons indicate whether the URL matches or not.
Tools: Parse a URL
Link opens an additional dialog box where you can paste or type a URL
and have it parsed into its component parts. If you click OK in this dialog,
the URL will populate the fields in the URL Expression Builder.
The URL is not validated.
Parsing URLs
The URL Expression Builder includes a link that allows you to parse a URL into its component parts.
The parsed URL populates the appropriate fields on the page.
URL normalization
Certain characters, such as /', ? and #, serve as delimiters in the URL. Other characters, such as
control codes, are not printable. These characters must be escaped by encoding them as % followed
by their hexadecimal ASCII value when they are used in the Credentials, Path, or Query string, or in the
named Anchor field. For example, = must be represented by %3B so it will not be misinterpreted as a
key-value separator in the Query string.
The ASCII characters A-Z, a-z, 0-9 and -._~ never need to be escaped. Characters outside the ASCII
range must be represented by the %-encoding of their UTF-8 byte values. For example, a character
is encoded as %E2%82%AC.
Attackers can manipulate the %-encoding rules to obfuscate the URL. Manipulations include:
Escaping characters that do not need to be escaped to make part of the URL unreadable to
humans. An example of this would be the sequence %2E%2E%2F/ in the path.
Not escaping characters that should be escaped. For example, the glyph for the Unicode character
U+2215, DIVISION SLASH, looks identical to an ASCII / character. If used in un-escaped form in
the path, it would look indistinguishable from a regular path separator. This is called a homograph
attack.
To overcome any issues from ambiguous representation, URLs found in emails are normalized by
decoding the individual parts and reapplying the %-encoding so that it is in strict compliance with the
encoding rules in RFC 3986, Uniform Resource Identifier (URI): Generic Syntax. The path is further
normalized so that . (current directory) and .. (directory above the current directory) sequences are
removed. For example /a/b/../c is normalized to the equivalent /a/c.
Address normalization
Instead of a domain name in the host field, a URL may contain an IP address.
An IPv4 address may be represented in many different ways, all of which offer an attacker
opportunities to obscure the host that a URL points to. As well as the familiar a.b.c.d format where a,
b, c and d represent base-10 numbers in the range 0-255, an IPv4 address may be represented by 1
to 4 numbers, each of which may be represented using base 10, octal (base 8) and hexadecimal (base
16). For example, it is not at all obvious that the following URLs point to the same resource:
Product Guide
283

Email Policies
http://7763631671/
http://235396898359/
http://206.057717067/
When testing URLs found in emails, all variant representations of IPv4 addresses are normalized to the
a.b.c.d format.
IPv6 addresses have stricter rules for representation within a URL. However, the same address can
vary in its representation depending on how empty quads are displayed and how many leading zeroes
are used. Therefore, IPv6 addresses are normalized to their most compact form with hexadecimal
values in uppercase. For example, http://[2001:ea75:0000:0:00:000:0:0001]/ is normalized to
http://[2001:EA75::1]/.
International Domain Names (IDNs)

Some domain registrars allow Unicode characters in domain names that are registered with them.
These domain names are presented to humans in human-readable form but must be encoded into
ASCII form when, for example, they are resolved through DNS. The domain name normalization rules
and ASCII-encoding algorithm are specified in RFC 3490, Internationalizing Domain Names in
Applications (IDNA). An example of an IDN is mxico.icom.museum and its ASCII-encoding is xn-mxico-bsa.icom.museum. The xn-- ACE (ASCII Compatible Encoding) label denotes an encoded IDN.
When an IDN in its encoded form is encountered, it is decoded to its human-readable, Unicode form.
This decoding may fail if the encoded URL fails a TLD check. Top Level Domain (TLD) registrars who
accept IDNs limit the Unicode characters that they will allow. For example, the .no (Norway) TLD will
only allow Unicode characters that are part of the Norwegian alphabet. If the decoding fails, the
domain name is left in its encoded form with a warning message stating why the decoding failed.
If an IDN is encountered in its Unicode form, it is normalized. Without normalization, IDNs are subject
to homograph attacks. For example, if the URL http://www..gr were blacklisted, an attacker
might try to circumvent this by replacing (U+03BC, GREEK SMALL LETTER MU) with (U+00B5,
MICRO SIGN). According to IDN rules these domain names are identical and encode to the same
ASCII form: www.xn--hxakkrmio1b.gr. However, a simple string match would not detect that the URLs
were identical. Therefore, Unicode names are normalized by applying the RFC 3490 Nameprep
algorithm which disambiguates visually identical string values.
URL encoding and decoding

Because URLs are canonicalized before they are checked against the blacklists and whitelists, it may
be unclear what you should use to match a given value.
The URL encode/decode tool provides a text field that you can paste a string into and either encode it
to give its canonical representation or decode it so that you can see what a %-encoded sequence
actually matches. Clicking Canonicalize will turn an improperly or partially encoded sequence into its
canonical representation.
Keep the following information in mind when you use the encode/decode tool:
284
Product Guide

Email Policies
The encoded sequences %00 - %1F and %7F are control characters any may render unpredictably
when decoded. Two-byte sequences starting with %C2 followed by %80 - %A0 are also control
characters.
Do not use the URL encode tool to encode, for example, the entire path. This will result in a
non-canonical encoding. Encoding a/b will result in the string a%2Fb which will no longer match
a/b in the path. Only encode individual path segments and individual terms (the keys and values
in key-value pairs) in the Query string.
Option definitions Create new rule (DLP Categories)

Option
Definition
Name
The name of the DLP category.
Documents
Any documents associated with that category.
Option definitions Create new rule

Option
Definition
Name
The name of the DLP categories available
Documents
The number of documents contained in the category
Option definitions Create document exclusion

Option
Definition
Search
Search by name for documents that you want to exclude from the policy.
Name
The name of the document.
Size
The size of the document.
Trained on
The date on which the document was trained.
Option definitions New Rule dialog box

Use these options to create a new rule.
Option definitions Category Filtering tab

Option
Definition
Rule name
Type the name of the rule.
Continue scanning if rule

triggers
With most Email Gateway rules, scanning stops and the configured actions are
taken if the rule triggers. Select this option to take the configured actions, but
to continue the scan when the rule triggers.
Select this option when using file filtering to define the files sent to Advanced
Threat Defense and when using file filtering for other purposes, such as Image
filtering.
Enable file category

filtering
Select to open the list of file categories and subcategories.
Product Guide
285

Email Policies
Option
Definition
Take action when the file

category is
File categories Select the file categories to which you want the rule to apply.
Categories include:
Advanced Threat Defense - Supported
formats
Archive/Compressed files
Common document formats
E-Mail messages
Documents
HTML content
Databases
UUE and BASE64 encoded files
Spreadsheets
McAfee virus definition file
Multimedia
Other specific formats
Graphics/Presentation
General text formats
Subcategories By default, selecting a file category selects all subcategories

within it.
The Clear selections link resets the list of selected subcategories to none.
Extend this rule to
unrecognized file
categories
Select this option to enable this rule to be used for file categories that are
unrecognized.
Table 4-114 Files within some of the file type subcategories

Category Subcategory Types of file in the subcategory
Multimedia
MP3
MPEG Layer3 ID3 v1.x

MPEG Layer3 ID3 v2.x
MPEG-1 audio - Layer 3
MPEG
MPEG-1 video
MPEG-2 video
MPEG-4 file
MPEG-7 file

Windows Sound
Windows Sound (WAV file)

Windows Media Audio (WMA file)
Windows Video
Windows Video (AVI file)

Windows Media Video (WMV file)
Microsoft Digital Video Recording (DVR file)
Option definitions Name Filtering tab
286
Option
Definition
Enable file name filtering
Enable filtering based on the name of the file.
Take action when the file name matches
Add the file name to match against when filtering.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option definitions Protected File Filtering tab

Option
Definition
Enable protected file filtering
Enable filtering based on the protected status of the file.
Take action when the file is:
Select either:
Protected
Unprotected
Option definitions Size Filtering tab

Option
Definition
Enable file size filtering
Enable filtering based on the size of the file.
Take action when the file size is Select to take the configured actions when a file is either less than or
greater than the configured file size.
Option definitions Actions

Option
Definition
If the file filtering rule is

triggered
Select the primary action to take when the rule triggers. Choose from:
And also
Select the secondary actions to take when the rule triggers on the original
message, and set notification and ecryption options as necessary.
Notification and annotated

email options
When clicked, takes you to the Default Notification and Routing Settings
(SMTP) set of options.
Rule Creation Wizard

Use this wizard to set the dictionaries that you want the rule to use, and the actions that you want the
appliance to take when the rule triggers.
Option definitions Customize the name for this rule

This information describes the options available on this page of the wizard.
Option
Definition
Rule name
Type the name of the rule that you want to create.
Option definitions Dictionaries to include

Option
Definition
Search
Search the list of dictionaries for the ones that you want to include in the rule.
Name
Displays the dictionary name as it appears in the Compliance Dictionaries list (Email | DLP and
Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries).
Product Guide
287

Email Policies
Option
Definition
Threshold
Displays the threshold that will trigger a score-based dictionary. To enable score-based
detection for a dictionary, go to Email | DLP and Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries.
Max Term Count Displays the maximum number of times that terms in that dictionary can contribute
towards a threshold score.
Option definitions Dictionaries to be excluded

Option
Definition
Search
Search the list of dictionaries for the ones that you want to exclude from the rule
Name
Displays the dictionary name as it appears in the Compliance Dictionaries list (Email | DLP and
Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries).
Threshold
Displays the threshold that will trigger a score-based dictionary. To enable score-based
detection for a dictionary, go to Email | DLP and Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries.
Max Term Count Displays the maximum number of times that terms in that dictionary can contribute
towards a threshold score.
Option definitions If the compliance rule is triggered

Option
Definition
If the compliance rule is

triggered
Select the primary type of action from the drop-down list that you want the
appliance to take when it triggers a compliance detection.
And also
Optionally, select secondary actions that can be applied to the detection, such
as quarantining the original or modified message, notifying the sender, and
sending the message to other people. The options displayed differ according to
the primary action that you select.

email options
Opens the Default Notification and Routing Settings pages. See Email | Email Policies |
Policy Options | Notifications and routing.
And conditionally
Specify whether you want the actions to take place when Any or All of the
dictionaries in the rule trigger a match.
Rule Creation Wizard

Use the wizard to create a new compliance rule based on settings from an existing rule, and the
actions that you want the appliance to take when the rule triggers.
Option definitions Select a predefined rule to configure

Option
Definition
Select a predefined rule to

configure
Expand the rule that contains the settings on which to base the new rule.
Search
Search the list of dictionaries for the rule on which you want to base your
new rule.
Option definitions Customize the name for this rule

288
Option
Definition
Rule name
Edit the name of the rule.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option definitions If the compliance rule is triggered

Option
Definition
If the compliance rule is

triggered
Select the primary type of action from the drop-down list that you want the
appliance to take when it triggers a compliance detection.
And also
Optionally, select secondary actions that can be applied to the detection, such
as quarantining the original or modified message, notifying the sender, and
sending the message to other people. The options displayed differ according to
the primary action that you select.
Notification and annotated Opens the Default Notification and Routing Settings pages. See Email | Email Policies |
email options
Policy Options | Notifications and routing | Routing.
Specify whether you want the actions to take place when Any or All of the
dictionaries in the rule trigger a match.
And conditionally
Policy Options settings

Use the Policy Options settings to configure scanning limits and how to handle corrupt or unreadable
content, and specify alert settings.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options
Scanner Limits
Use this page to set limits on scanning to prevent attacks and other performance issues.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Scanning limits

occasional transfer of large, deeply nested files, or to investigate possible attacks.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Product Guide
289

Email Policies
Table 4-116 Option definitions Maximum file size

Option
Definition
If expanded file size

exceeds
Specifies the limit. The default value is: File size 500MB
(menu)

Replace all attachments with an alert

(Modify)

(Block)
290
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-116 Option definitions Maximum file size (continued)

Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options
database.

options.
email list.
Other actions
re-written.

the same name.
Product Guide
291

Email Policies
Table 4-116 Option definitions Maximum file size (continued)

Option
Definition

headers.
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.
If a denial of service
alert
Select to use the default alert, or follow the link to make changes to the alert
text.
Table 4-117 Option definitions Maximum nesting depth

Option
Definition
If nesting depth
exceeds
Specifies the limit. The default value is:
(menu)
Nesting depth 100

(Modify)

(Block)
292
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-117 Option definitions Maximum nesting depth (continued)

Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options
database.

options.
email list.
Other actions
re-written.

the same name.
Product Guide
293

Email Policies
Table 4-117 Option definitions Maximum nesting depth (continued)

Option
Definition

headers.
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.
alert
text.
Table 4-118 Option definitions Maximum scan time

Option
Definition
If the scan time

exceeds
Specifies the limit. The default value is:
(menu)
Scanning time 8 minutes

(Modify)

(Block)
294
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-118 Option definitions Maximum scan time (continued)

Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options
database.

options.
email list.
Other actions
re-written.

the same name.
Product Guide
295

Email Policies
Table 4-118 Option definitions Maximum scan time (continued)

Option
Definition

headers.
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.
alert
text.
Alert settings
Use this page to control the format and appearance of the alert message that users receive when the
appliance detects a threat.
Email | Email Policies | Scanning Policies [Scanner Options] -- Alert settings
Benefits of configuring Alert Settings

Understand the benefits of configuring the alert settings.
The Alert Settings page enables you to configure extra text (a header and footer), which appears around
the alert text. For example, you can include your companys name or logo, a legal statement, or
contact information. You might need several alert settings for different groups in your network.
Option definitions Alert Settings

Understand the options presented on the Alert Settings page.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
296
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option
Definition
Alert format
Provides a choice of formats.
Header text
Specifies the text for the top of each alert message.
Show
Shows the header text as HTML source (showing tags such as <p>) or as users see
the text (WYSIWYG). This option is not applicable for text alerts.
Footer text
Specifies the text for the bottom of each alert message.
Show
Shows the footer text as HTML source (showing tags such as <p>) or as users see
the text (WYSIWYG). This option is not applicable for text alerts.
Restore Defaults
When clicked, displays the original text of the alert.
Character encoding Offers a choice of encoding for the alert text.

Numeric character references enables the use of special characters for alerts in HTML
format.
Big 5 to UTF-8 provides character encoding for plain texts.
Default value is Numeric character references.
Alert filename
Specifies the name of the file that contains the alert. Default value is warning.htm or
warning.txt.
Option definitions Alert Editor

This information describes the options available in each policy's Alert Editor to create and view the
policy's alert notification message.
Option
Definition
Style / Font / Size Select the paragraph style, size, and font that you want to apply to the text.
Tokens
Select the token variables that you want to appear in the message, such as the name
of the attachment and the policy that it infringed.
Show
Choose how you want to view the notification text in the Alert Editor.
Use Default
Select to have the notification appear in the default format.
Content Handling Settings Email Options Basic Options

Use this page to specify some basic settings when handling email.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Content handling | Email Options | Basic Options
To cater for the needs of various departments, you might need several policies, each with its own
disclaimer. Alternatively, you can configure policy exceptions, to reduce the total number of policies
you need to maintain.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Product Guide
297

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-121 Option definitions Content Handling Settings Email Options Basic
Options
Option
Definition
Add a prefix to the subject of

modified emails
Specifies a prefix that the appliance adds to the subject line after a major
modification to the message, for example when an alert message replaces
an infected item.
If this prefix is added to the subject line, it precedes other prefixes such as
those that indicate spam or phish detections. If you add a disclaimer to a
message, its subject line is not affected.
Enable the use of disclaimers
When selected, adds extra text to each email message.

The appliance cannot add a disclaimer to an email message that contains
unsupported character sets, such as the Hebrew character set,
ISO-8859-8-I.
Disclaimer text
Specifies the text, which can be a legal disclaimer, or an advertisement, or

general information such as addresses and telephone numbers.
For the HTML disclaimer to appear in an email, the email must be received
in HTML format.
If you refer to an image (using <img>), the recipient will see the image
only if it is publicly available. In other words, the image must be accessible
via the Internet, with a full path such as http://www.example.com/abc.gif.
Placement
Offers a choice of location for the attachment text.
When re-encoding
attachments
Offers a choice of re-encoding if the message was cleaned.
When re-encoding modified

subject lines
Offers a choice of re-encoding.
If there's an error re-encoding Offers a choice of re-encoding.

a modified subject line
Content Handling Settings Email Options Advanced Options

Use this page to specify advanced settings for handling email.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Content handling | Email Options | Advanced Options
298
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-123 Option definitions Content Handling Settings Email Options Advanced
Options
Option
Definition
Preferred transfer encoding for text
Offers a choice of encoding:

8-bit - for SMTP servers that support the transport SMTP extension,
8BITMIME.
Base64 for non-text data and for messages that do not have
much ASCII text.
Quoted-printable for messages that contain mainly ASCII
characters and also some byte values outside that range.
But do not encode if the text is already When selected, prevents encoding of 7-bit data.
7-bit
Default decode character set
Offers a set to use if one is not specified in the MIME headers. To

specify further sets, see the Character Sets tab.
Maximum number of MIME parts
Specifies a maximum, which can help prevent denial-of-service

attacks.
Treat corrupt message headers the

same as corrupt content
If selected, the email message is handled according to the action that

the policy applies to any corrupt content.
Treat NULL characters in message

headers the same as corrupt content
When selected, acts on NULL characters.
Remove any Received-From headers

to obscure..
Select this to obscure any network information displayed in the

Received headers. The Last Received header, added by your
appliance, is not removed.
Enabling Header Stripping prevents emails being blocked due to the
Maximum number of hops, as the Received headers are used to find the
number of hops the email message has taken.
Product Guide
299

Email Policies
Content Handling Settings Email Options Missing/Empty Headers

Use this page to specify how the appliance handles an email message that has empty or missing
headers.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Content handling | Email Options | Missing / Empty Headers
In spam and spoofed email, headers are sometimes altered to hide the identity of the sender.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move

and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-125 Option definitions Content Handling Settings Email Options Missing/
Empty Headers
Option
Definition
Take action under the

following circumstances
Never Select this option if you do not need the feature.

When one or more email headers have no value Select this option to detect any
suspicious headers.
When one or more of the following headers are missing or empty Select this option to
specify the headers, such as From, Sender, and Reply-to. For a full list of
headers, see RFC 2822.
Action


(Modify)

(Block)
300
Product Guide

Email Policies
Empty Headers (continued)
Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options

options.
email list.
Other actions
Product Guide
301

Email Policies
Empty Headers (continued)
Option
Definition
re-written.

the same name.

headers.
Notification and
email messages.
If either of the above

actions results in an alert
text.
Content Handling Settings Email Options Text and binary MIME types
Use this page to specify special MIME types as text or binary to improve the efficiency of the scanning.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Content handling | Email Options | Text and binary MIME types
The appliance handles common MIME types. You need only specify any new or unusual MIME types
here.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
302
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-127 Option definitions Content Handling Settings Email Options Text and
binary MIME types
Option
Definition
Treat the following MIME types as text attachments
Allows you to build a list of text MIME types.
Treat the following MIME types as binary attachments
Allows you to build a list of binary MIME types.
About MIME formats

Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) is a communications standard that enables the transfer
of non-ASCII formats over protocols, like SMTP, that support only 7-bit ASCII characters.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Content handling | Email Options | Text and binary MIME types
Examples of non-ASCII formats, include:
8-bit audio
Video files
Character sets of many non-English languages
MIME defines different ways of encoding the non-ASCII formats so that they can be represented using
characters in the 7-bit ASCII character set.
MIME also defines extra email headers that contain further information:
Version of MIME used.
Type of content in the MIME message.
Type of encoding method used.
Content part identifier for multi-part MIME messages.
The resulting MIME message can be "decoded" or "re-encoded" after transmission. We say
"re-encoded", because the MIME messages can be converted into a different character set from the
original message.
Content Handling Settings Email Options Character sets

Use this page to specify one or more alternative character sets to try if you have problems decoding
email messages in the given character set.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Content handling | Email Options | Character sets
You can select a fixed mapping (always use the alternative character set) or a list of alternatives to be
used only if decoding fails.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Product Guide
303

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-129 Option definitions Email Options Character sets
Option
Definition
Character sets
Specifies the original character set in the email message.
Fixed
If selected, you can choose one alternative character set.

If deselected, provides any number of choices.
To select several items, use Ctrl-click, or click and Shift-click.
Specifies the alternative character encodings.
Alternatives
Content Handling Settings HTML Options

Use this page to specify how the appliance handles certain elements and components embedded in
HTML data.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Content handling | HTML Options

Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
304
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-131 Option definitions HTML Options

Option
Definition
Script elements to ActiveX components When selected, the item is removed.

Flash objects are ActiveX objects, so you can choose to keep them.
Comments to Raw HTML
When selected, the items are scanned for inappropriate content.
Content Handling Settings Corrupt or Unreadable Content Corrupt

content
Use this page to specify how to handle corrupt content.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Content handling | Corrupt or Unreadable Content | Corrupt content
Scanners and other applications can have difficulty reading corrupt content. You can specify the action
to take when the appliance detects corrupt content in:
Email messages
Archives
Documents

Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Product Guide
305

Email Policies
Option
Definition
If corrupt content is
detected

Replace all attachments with an alert (Modify)

(Block)

And also

Quarantine options
database.
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
306
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option
Definition

same name.
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.

actions results in an
alert
Content Handling Settings Corrupt or Unreadable Content Protected

files
Use this page to specify what action to take against files that are protected in some way.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Content handling | Corrupt or Unreadable Content | Protected files
You can specify the action to take when the appliance is unable to scan into an email attachment
(either archive or document) or a file that is being requested from a website, because it has been
password protected. If the content is protected by password, the appliance cannot examine the
contents because they are encrypted.
If you choose to allow such files into your network, you must ensure that their contents can be
scanned later for any threats by an on-access scanner.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Product Guide
307

Email Policies

Option
Definition
If a read protected document Provides a main action to take. The available options are:
is detected
(Modify)
(Block)

The action associated with read protected documents will only trigger when
compliance scanning is enabled, and the contents of the document can not be
extracted.
And also

Quarantine options

options.
Annotate and deliver original to sender Deliver the original email message to
the sender, with annotations added.
Deliver a notification email to the sender Deliver a notification email to the
sender of the email message.
message for auditing purposes to all addresses defined within the
auditing email list.
Deliver the modified email to the sender Deliver the email message to the
sender, with modifications made by McAfee Email Gateway included.
Other actions
308
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition
the intended recipients. Click Manage templates to change the way the subject
is re-written.

the same name.

headers.

email options
Follow the link to configure the options for notification messages and
annotated email messages.
alert
text.
If a password-protected
archive file is detected


(Modify)

(Block)
Product Guide
309

Email Policies

Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options

options.
Annotate and deliver original to sender Deliver the original email message to
the sender, with annotations added.
Deliver a notification email to the sender Deliver a notification email to the
sender of the email message.
message for auditing purposes to all addresses defined within the
auditing email list.
Deliver the modified email to the sender Deliver the email message to the
sender, with modifications made by McAfee Email Gateway included.
Other actions
310
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition
the intended recipients. Click Manage templates to change the way the subject
is re-written.

the same name.

headers.

email options
Follow the link to configure the options for notification messages and
annotated email messages.
alert
text.
Content Handling Settings Corrupt or Unreadable Content Partial/

external messages
Use this page to specify the action to take against two types of message that can be difficult to scan.
Email | Email Policies | Scanning Policies | Scanner Options | Content Handling | Corrupt or Unreadable Content
A partial message. If a message has been divided into smaller parts for sending as several separate
email messages, each part is called a partial message.
An external-body message. The message contains a reference to an external resource and the
scheme (usually FTP) that retrieves that resource.

Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Product Guide
311

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Delete exception
312
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition
If a message/partial
type is encountered


(Modify)

(Block)

And also

Quarantine options
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
Other actions
Product Guide
313

Email Policies

Option
Definition

same name.
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.
If a message/
external-body type is
encountered


(Modify)

(Block)
314
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition
And also

Quarantine options
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions

same name.
Product Guide
315

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.

actions results in an
alert
text.
Content handling Corrupt or Unreadable Content Unscannable Content

Use this page to specify what action to take against files that cannot be scanned.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Content handling | Corrupt or Unreadable Content | Unscannable Content
You can specify the action to take when the appliance finds a file that is unscannable.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move
and
buttons. The
Delete exception
316
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition
If unscannable content Provides a main action to take. The available options are:
is detected
(Block)

And also

Quarantine options
database.

options.
the email message.
email list.
Other actions
Product Guide
317

Email Policies

Option
Definition

same name.
Notification and
annotated email
options
email messages.
If the action results in

an alert
text.
Policy-based actions
Policy-based actions execute when an email message matches a configured policy, without needing a
scan to trigger the selected action.
Contents
Benefits of fine-tuning scanning with policy-based actions
Option definitions Policy based actions
Scenario - Configure Policy based actions
Applying policy exceptions to Policy based actions
Task - Add an exception to a policy based action
Benefits of fine-tuning scanning with policy-based actions

A policy is a group of settings that tell the appliance how to scan or process an email. Policy-based
actions provide increased flexibility for administrators when applying policies. You can use
policy-based actions for such things as applying policies to messages that would not trigger an action,
or turning off all scanners for specific messages.
Policy-based actions enable you, for example, to apply policies to messages that would not trigger a
scanner action. For example, you could rewrite the subjects of all messages to a particular recipient or
group. The messages might not require any other action.
Option definitions Policy based actions

Use these options to configure the default actions triggered by specific policies.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
318
Move
and
buttons. The
Product Guide

Email Policies

Option
Definition
Delete exception
Product Guide
319

Email Policies
Table 4-140 Option definitions Policy based actions

Option
Definition
If an email matches Drop-down list displays possible primary actions.

this policy
Select one of the following:
Route to an alternative relay (Reroute)
Skip scanning This action turns off all scanners for specific messages.
Using this setting can allow viruses and other undesirable content to pass through.
And also

The available secondary actions depend on the selected primary action.
Quarantine options
database.
database.

options.
the email message.
list.
320
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-140 Option definitions Policy based actions (continued)

Option
Definition
Other actions

same name.
In the options, n represents the number of lists you select for each related action.
Notification and
annotated email
options
Opens the Default Notification and Routing Settings page.
Exceptions
Click the Exceptions tab at the left side of the Policy Based Action Settings window to show
or hide the policy exceptions options.
With Exceptions showing, you can configure or edit exceptions and set the actions for
them.
Scenario - Configure Policy based actions

You can configure Policy based actions for inbound or outbound messages. The messages can still proceed
through configured scanners, if you want them to.
Policy based actions apply to all messages that do not match any other policies. Policy based actions also apply
to matching policies that do not override the settings for Policy based actions.
Scenario Encrypt all messages sent by the Legal Department

Since messages from the Legal Department usually contain confidential information, using encryption
ensures the security of sensitive content.
Before you begin
If necessary, create a group that includes proper members of the Legal Department with a
rule type of Sender email address. The following exercise then applies policy based actions to
the Legal Department user group.
You can configure McAfee Email Gateway to scan the messages with any settings you prefer. For this
example, no scanning is needed.
Product Guide
321

Email Policies
Task
1
Log on to McAfee Email Gateway and select Email | Email Polices.
Click Add Policy.

The Scanning Policies New Policy window appears.
Create the new policy.

a
Type a policy name, such as Legal Outbound.
[Optional] Type a policy description.

A description is useful for explaining the purpose for the policy.
From the drop-down list, select the policy from which the new policy inherits settings. In this
case, select Default policy.
To set the email direction, select the Outbound option.
To set the Match logic, select Match one or more of the following rules.
Click Add Rule.

The Add Rule window appears.
For Rule type, select User Group.
For Match, select is.
For Value, select Legal Department.
Click OK.
The Add Rule window closes and the new rule appears on the Scanning Policies New Policy window.
Click OK.
The Scanning Policies New Policy window closes, and the new policy appears at the top of the list on
the Email Policies page.
Within the new policy, select the Policy Options | Policy based action link.
Be sure you select options within the new policy, rather than the default or any other configured
policies!
The Policy Based Action Settings window appears.

6
Configure the desired policy-based actions.

a
Ensure that Use the same settings as the default policy is not selected.
For the primary action, select Skip scanning from the drop-down list.
For the secondary action, select Other Actions | Deliver message using encryption.
Click OK.
The Policy Based Action Settings window closes, and the policy-based actions appear under Policy
Options.
Confirm your settings are correct, then apply the changes.
Outbound messages from the Legal Department are encrypted, and are not scanned.
322
Product Guide

Email Policies
Scenario Review all messages received from a specific sender

Review all messages from a particular competitor, XYZ Corp.
Email Gateway performs configured scans on all messages.
Task
1
Log on to McAfee Email Gateway and select Email | Email Polices.
Click Add Policy.

The Scanning Policies New Policy window appears.
Create the new policy.

a
Type a policy name, such as Competitor inquiries.
[Optional] Type a policy description.

A description is useful for explaining the purpose for the policy.
From the drop-down list, select the policy from which the new policy inherits settings. In this
case, select Default policy.
To set the email direction, select the Inbound option.
To set the Match logic, select Match one or more of the following rules.
Click Add Rule.

The Add Rule window appears.
For Rule type, select Sender email address.
For Match, select is like.
For Value, type *@xyzcorp.com.
Click OK.
The Add Rule window closes and the new rule appears on the Scanning Policies New Policy window.
Click OK.
The Scanning Policies New Policy window closes, and the new policy appears at the top of the list on
the Email Policies page.
Within the new policy, select the Policy Options | Policy based action link.
Be sure you select options within the new policy, rather than the default or any other configured
policies!
The Policy Based Action Settings window appears.

6
Configure the desired policy-based actions.

a
Ensure that Use the same settings as the default policy is not checked.
For the primary action, select Allow through (Monitor) from the drop-down list.
For the secondary action, check Original email options | Forward original to n lists.
Click the Edit link associated with the secondary action.

The Email Recipients window appears.
Product Guide
323

Email Policies
Select one or more recipient lists.

The Email Recipients window closes.
Click OK.
The Policy Based Action Settings window closes, and the policy-based actions appear under Policy
Options.
Confirm your settings are correct, then apply the changes.
A designated reviewer receives original email messages from XYZ Corp. and can take further action.
Applying policy exceptions to Policy based actions

You can apply exceptions to Policy based actions just as you can to most other features and feature
settings.
Policy exceptions allow you to configure processing for special circumstances without adding new
policies.
Examples using policy exceptions

The following examples illustrate how you might use policy exceptions with Policy based actions, based on
your configured default policy and another policy for outbound mail. You would like to use exceptions
to resolve specific situations.
Issue Your default policy includes a policy-based action to send a notification to the original sender
for email messages addressed to customer support. Your outbound policy includes a policy-based
action to encrypt all outbound messages from customer support. You have a customer who reports
some unusual issues. First, due to the nature of the issues, you want the research group to follow the
case, while customer support helps the customer. Second, you want an administrator to monitor
outbound messages to the customer.
Solution 1 Create a policy exception to send audit copies of any messages from the specific
customer to the research group.
Solution 2 Create another policy exception, for your outbound mail, to send audit copies of
messages addressed to the customer to the administrator.
To configure this exception, you might need to create a custom notification template for sending audit
copies.
Issue You have to send audit copies of email messages to specific auditors, based on either the
sender or the recipient of the message. You want to do this using your default policy, rather than
creating policies to meet the requirement. For example, you might want to send the legal group audit
copies of messages addressed to tax accounting. You might also want to send sales management
copies of messages from field representatives.
Solution Without changing your default policy, add a policy exception to send audit copies of
messages destined for anyone in tax accounting to the legal team. Then create another exception to
send copies of messages from field representatives to sales management.
Creating user groups for members of tax accounting, field representatives, and sales managers might
be helpful.
324
Product Guide

Email Policies
Task - Add an exception to a policy based action

Policy exceptions allow you to configure processing for special circumstances without adding new
policies.
You can configure only one policy based action for any feature setting, but you can configure multiple
exceptions.
Task
1
Log on to Email Gateway and select Email | Email Polices.
In policies table, for the policy where you want to add an exception, select Policy based actions.
The Policy Based Action Settings window opens.
Select the Exceptions tab to display an Exceptions list.

The list displays the name of the policy for which you want to add an exception, plus any previously
configured exceptions.
Click the Add exception icon at the bottom of the list.

The Scanning Policies - New Policy Exception window opens.
Configure the exception.

a
Type an exception name for the new exception.
[Optional] Add a description.
Select the proper match logic for this exception.
Select Add Rule.

The Add Rule window opens.
Configure the parameters for the new rule.
Click OK, then click OK again.

The new exception appears in the Exceptions list.
Click OK in the Policy Based Action Settings window.
The new exception applies to the selected policy.
Notification and Routing Settings Notification Emails

Specify the email addresses for messages from the appliance to users and to administrators.
For example, the appliance can send a notification email if it detects a threat in an email message or it
cannot deliver a message.
Product Guide
325

Email Policies
Table 4-141 Option definitions Notification emails

Option
Definition
Sender
Specifies the From address that the appliance uses when sending a
response to the sender of email that contained a threat.
Subject
Define the subject line to be used in notification emails
Display (including Edit the

alert text and Name:)
Decide how the notification will be displayed:

As an attachment
Inline (default)
Click Edit the alert text to make changes to the alert text to be used.
When you select As an attachment, you can also specify the Name: of the
attachment.
Table 4-142 Option definitions Annotated emails

Option
Definition
Sender
Specifies the From address that the appliance uses when sending a response to
the sender of email that contained a threat.
Subject
Define the subject line to be used in annotated emails.
Content
Decide the content of the notification to be displayed:

Notification alert text
Scanner-specific alert
Click Show example to see examples of the currently selected notification.
Display (including
Name:)
Decide how the notification will be displayed:

As an attachment
Inline (default)
Click Edit the alert text to make changes to the alert text to be used.
When you select As an attachment, you can also specify the Name: of the
attachment.
Table 4-143 Option definitions Bounce messages

Option Definition
Sender
Specifies the From address that the appliance uses when sending a response to the sender
bounce email messages.
Subject
Define the subject line to be used in bounced messages.
Table 4-144 Option definitions Modified messages returned to the sender

Option Definition
326
Sender
Specifies the From address that the appliance uses when sending a response to the modified
email messages being returned to the sender.
Subject
Define the subject line to be used in modified email messages being returned to the sender.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Table 4-145 Option definitions Forwarded emails

Option Definition
Sender
Select the sender from whom forwarded emails appear to come from. The options are:
Original sender (default)
Notification email sender
Table 4-146 Option definitions Audit copies

Option
Definition
Sender address Add a sender address for audit copies of messages.

To use the sender information from the original email message, leave this field empty.
Notification and Routing Settings Routing

Select a device to which the appliance can redirect email.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Notifications and routing | Routing

Option
Definition
Route the email to an alternative SMTP relay Selects the relay from the list on the SMTP Relays page.
Manage the list of relays
When clicked, opens a window where you can make a list of SMTP
relays.
Notification and Routing Settings SMTP Relays

Make a list of alternative relays for redirected email.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Notifications and routing | SMTP Relays
Option
Definition
Relay List
Specifies the relays. To edit the list, click the blue link to open the Edit List window.
Notification and Routing Settings Encryption Servers

Make a list of encryption servers to use.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Notifications and routing | Encryption Servers
Option
Definition
Server Group Specifies the name of the list of encryption servers. To edit the list, click the blue link to
open the Edit List window.
Product Guide
327

Email Policies
Notification and Routing Settings Email Recipients

Build a list of recipients for email that the appliance generates automatically.
Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Notifications and routing | Email Recipients
For example, you can make lists of email addresses for administration and auditing. The lists are used
by several pages in the interface, for example: Email | Email Policies | Scanning Policies [Scanner Options] |
Notification and routing | Audit Copies
Option Definition
Email List Specifies the name of the list. To edit the list, click the blue link to open the Edit List window.
McAfee Global Threat Intelligence (GTI) feedback settings

Use this page to submit threat detection feedback, and usage statistics from your product to McAfee.
Email | Email Policies | Scanning Policies | Scanner Options | McAfee GTI feedback
System | Setup Wizard
Dashboard | Services
Encryption settings
Define the encryption settings for this policy.
Benefits of configuring email encryption

This information describes the benefits associated with configuring email encryption.
These options allow you to configure, for this policy, whether a message should be encrypted, and the
encryption method that you want to use.
Option definitions Encryption Settings (SMTP)

Encryption Settings
Option
Definition
Encryption server / server group
Selects where encryption occurs, either on the appliance, or externally.

Click Manage the server groups to add other encryption servers.
328
Manage the server groups
Click to open the Encryption Servers dialog box where you add lists of
encryption servers.
Prioritize encryption over reroute

actions
If a message triggers a reroute action, you can choose to override the

reroute with the encryption action.
Product Guide

Email Policies
On-box Encryption Options

Option
Definition
Encrypt the message

using one of
Choose from:
S/MIME
PGP
Secure Web Mail
If more than one encryption option is chosen, the encryption methods are
attempted in the order that you see here until one is successful.
Prioritize TLS over

content encryption
If selected, Email Gateway attempts to use TLS to secure the link. If TLS is
established, the content of the email message is not encrypted.
However, if TLS cannot be established, then the email message content is
encrypted using your chosen encryption methods.
If none of the selected If the selected encryption method(s) fail, specify the action that you want to
encryption methods are take:
possible
Attempt delivery using TLS and send an NDR if that is not possible TLS is enforced for
delivery subject to your TLS settings
Send an NDR without attempting delivery using TLS the email is not delivered, and a
report is sent to the sender.
On-box Decryption Options

Option
Definition
Attempt to decrypt S/MIME-encrypted Enable this to configure your appliance to attempt the decryption of
emails
email messages encrypted using S/MIME.
By default, this option is disabled.
Attempt to decrypt PGP-encrypted
emails
Enable this to configure your appliance to attempt the decryption of

email messages encrypted using PGP.
By default, this option is disabled.
The decryption settings are based on the highest-order policy that applies to all recipients. Decryption
cannot be configured for policies that only apply to a sub-set of users.
If these options are left disabled, or the appliance is unable to decrypt the message, the
Encrypted Content settings are used.
Task Enabling Secure Web Mail

Enable Secure Web Mail on your McAfee Email Gateway.
Before you begin
If you are using port 443 for management traffic to your McAfee Email Gateway, you
cannot enable Secure Web Mail. If you have the management port set to 443, the user
interface provides a link to System | Appliance Management | Remote Access, where you can change
this.
Product Guide
329

Email Policies
Task
1
Navigate to Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Encryption.
In On-box Encryption Options, select Secure Web Mail.
If required, select Send an NDR if message encryption is not possible.
Click OK.
Apply the changes.
Once you have enabled Secure Web Mail, you will need to configure your Email Policies to use this feature.
Option definitions Email Recipients

Use this dialog box to create lists of recipients who will receive notification messages.
Option Definition
Email List Displays the lists of email recipients. three lists come with the appliance by default:
Administration Email List, Notification Email List, and Auditing Email List. The default lists cannot be
removed from the list, even if they are empty.
Add
Click to open the Edit List dialog box where you can create a new notification list.
Reset
Click reset to remove the information within all fields in the dialog box .
Option definitions Edit List

Use this dialog box to edit a list of recipients who will receive notification of a detection.
Option
Definition
List name
Displays the name of the list - either Administration Email List, Notification Email List, or
Auditing Email List, or a list that you created yourself.
Email address A list of email addresses that belong to the list. Use the trashcan icon to remove a
selected address from the list. The trashcan icon becomes active only when more than
one address exists in the list.
Add
Click to open the Edit Email Address dialog box where you can either type or use a template
to add a new email address to the list.
Delete
Deletes the selected user-created notification lists.

You cannot delete the built-in lists provided with the appliance.
Option definitions Edit Email Address

Use this dialog box to create an email address that will receive notification of a detection.
330
Option
Definition
Standard
Type in the email address that you want to use.
Template
Use the template fields to create the email address.
Reset
Click to remove all information from the fields in this dialog box.
Product Guide

Email Policies
Option definitions URL reputation blacklists and whitelists

Blacklists and whitelists enable you to fine-tune the list of URLs that are blocked or allowed by McAfee
Email Gateway.
Option
Definition

Policy name
Exception name

Add exception
Move up and
down
Move

and
buttons. The
Delete exception
Table 4-152
Blacklist and whitelist options
Option
Definition

blocked
The upper table shows all URLs currently configured to be blacklisted.
Search
Type
Description
Pattern

the entire pattern.
Match Case

Edit
Add Simple Pattern
simple DOS pattern.
regular expression.

allowed
The lower table shows all URLs currently configured to be whitelisted.
Search
Type
Description
Product Guide
331

Table 4-152
Blacklist and whitelist options (continued)
Option
Definition
Pattern

the entire pattern.
Match Case

Edit
Add Simple Pattern
simple DOS pattern.
regular expression.

The DLP and Dictionaries pages enable you to register documents that you want to prevent from data loss,
create content categories, and set up the compliance dictionaries that you want to adhere to.
Email | DLP and Dictionaries

Contents
Registered Documents
Compliance Dictionaries
Option definitions Add Dictionary Details
Option definitions Applicable File Formats
Option definitions OR Condition
Option definitions AND Condition
Option definitions Edit Regular Expression
Use this page to register documents for inclusion in the Data Loss Prevention policies.
Email | DLP and Dictionaries | Registered Documents
Benefits of Data Loss Prevention (DLP)

Use this information to understand the benefits of using Data Loss Prevention with your Email
Gateway.
You can restrict the flow of sensitive information sent by email through the appliance. For example,
block the transmission of a sensitive document such as a financial report that is to be sent outside of
your organization. Detection occurs whether the original document is sent as an email attachment, or
even as just a section of text taken from the original document.
Configuring DLP takes place in two phases:
332
Product Guide

Registering the documents that you want to protect (this topic)
Setting the DLP policy to action, and control the detection
Sensitive documents can be uploaded where the content is then transformed into a set of signatures
representing the original content. Note that only the signatures are permanently stored on the
appliance, not the original contents. Once the policy is set, these signatures are compared against all
content sent by email through the appliance to prevent data leakage occurring.
If a document is used by a data loss prevention policy, you cannot delete either the document, or any
categories that the document belongs to. To delete either the category, or the document, the document
must first be removed from any associated policies. Hover the cursor over the Used by column to see
the policies that use either the category, or the document.
Option definitions DLP Registered Documents

Use this information to understand the options available on the DLP Registered Documents pages of
the user interface.
Option
Definition
Categories
Groups of registered documents. Contains the Excluded Content category by default.

Excluded Content is a system category for uploaded standard corporate text (boilerplate
text), and corporate templates that you want the appliance to ignore in its data loss
prevention checks.
Documents in the Excluded Content category have a higher number of signatures than
those in other categories. A document in the Excluded Content category can be copied to
other categories, but retains its higher number of signatures.
Status
shows that there are two possible states, with appropriate tool tips:
The category has been modified (renamed)
Documents have been added or removed from the category
indicates that the category is new and does not exist in the Data Loss Prevention
database. This status disappears as soon as the configuration is applied.
indicates that everything is normal
Used by
Displays the number of data loss policies that use this category.
Documents
Displays the number of documents to which this content category applies.
Add
Create a content category.
Clear Selection Click to not have any category selected.
Product Guide
333

Option definitions Documents

Use this information to understand the options available on the Documents pages of the user
interface.
Option
Definition
Copy selected documents to another category. When you select this option, it opens the
Search feature which will look for categories without that document.
Documents from other categories cannot be copied into the Excluded Content category.
However, you can upload documents from other categories to the Excluded Content
category.
When you upload a document from another category to the Excluded Content category, the
document's signatures increase. The version of the document in the other category has
the same higher number of signatures as the version in the Excluded Content category.
Look for documents by name in all categories, or just a selected category.

Click on Clear Selection first, to select a document in all the categories, or select a category
to search for a document only in that category.
Delete multiple documents by name. When you select this option, it opens the Search
feature which looks for documents by name in all categories or just a selected category.
To delete documents from all the categories click on Clear Selection first. If no category is
selected, the selected documents are deleted in every category so that the document is
removed entirely from the registered documents database.
File Name
Lists all the documents associated with the selected document category.
Status
indicates that there is an error in the document. See the tooltip to see the reason,
either:
an error in the database
an error occurred while uploading the document
an error occurred during document training
indicates that there are modifications that have not yet been applied.
indicates that the document is new. Documents are trained when they are
uploaded.
indicates that the document is normal, either:
the document is unchanged.
the uploaded document was trained successfully.
Digest
A unique identifier for a file.
Size
The size of a file.
Excluded by
The number of policies that have this file in the exclusion list.
Referenced by The number of categories that contain this document.
334
Signatures
The number of signatures representing this document.
Trained on
The date the document was registered.
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Upload
Click to register documents against this category, either individually or within an archive.
Supported archive formats are:
Zip (*.zip)
Tar (*.tar)
Gzip (*.gz)
gzipped tar (*.tar.gz, *.tgz)
Bzip2 (*.bz2, *.bz)
bzipped tar (*.tar.bz2, *.tar.bz,

*.tbz2, *.tbz)
The Character Encoding drop-down list allows you to specify the character set used for
filenames.
To upload files in .TXT format, McAfee recommends that you save them using Unicode or
UTF-8 formats.
Copy existing Click to copy an existing document from other categories into the selected category.
When you select this option, it opens the Search feature which will look for documents
that are not currently linked to the selected category, but that exist in other categories.
Documents and Categories behavior

Use this information to understand the behavior of documents and categories used by your Email
Gateway.
You might sometimes find that you are unable to edit or remove a content category, or remove a
document within that category, and the icon appears unavailable. This is because the category or
document is in use by a policy, or the category contains a document that is excluded by a policy. Hold
your cursor over the icon to see why it is unavailable. See the following table to find out what you can
do to edit or remove the category or document.
Tooltip text/reason
Solution
Cannot delete Document because it's

excluded by policy
Identify the policy by hovering over the value in the Excluded by

column, and remove the document from the policies listed in the
tooltip.
Cannot edit/delete Category because it's

non-editable default
This is the default exclusion list.
Cannot edit/delete Category because it's

in use by a policy
Identify the policy by hovering over the value in the Used by column,
and remove the category from the policies listed in the tooltip.
Cannot edit/delete Category because it

contains a document that is excluded by
a policy
1 Select the category to load the documents.

2 Sort the documents in descending order by clicking the column
name.
3 For each document excluded by one or more policies, hover over
the value in the Excluded by column, and remove the document
from the policies listed in the tooltip.
Task Register a document for the Finance group

Understand how to register a document for the Finance group.
Task
1
Go to Email | DLP and Dictionaries | Registered Documents.
Click Add, and type Finance.
Select the Finance category, and click Upload.
Product Guide
335

Browse to the file that you want to register in the Finance category, and click OK.
Apply the changes.
Task Register multiple documents at the same time

Understand how to register many documents at a time.
Before you begin
Create a zip file that contains several files that you want to register.
Task
1
Go to Email | Email Policies | Registered Documents.
Either select a pre-defined category from the list, or create a new one.
Select the category, and click Upload.
Browse to the zip file that you created, and click OK.
Apply the changes.
Task Ignore corporate template text in registered documents

Configure your Email Gateway to ignore corporate template text when scanning registered documents.
Task
1
Select the Excluded Content category, and click Upload.
Browse to the template file that you want to ignore, and click OK.
Apply the changes.
Task Put a single document in multiple categories

Register a single document within multiple categories.
Task
1
In the Documents section, select the document, and click the Copy icon.
Select the categories to which you want the document to be associated, and click OK.
Apply the changes.
Task Remove a document that is excluded by a policy

Remove a document that has been excluded by a policy.
Task
336
In the document list, locate the file that you want to remove as registered document, and try to
click the Delete icon.
Hover the mouse cursor over the Excluded by entry for that document to find out which policy
excludes that document.
Product Guide

Go to Policy Catalog | McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.4 | Email Policies and click Edit Settings.
In the Compliance area, select the Data Loss Prevention policy.
Expand the policy that contains the excluded document.
Click the Delete icon next to the appropriate document in the Exclusions list.
Compliance Dictionaries
Use this page to view and edit compliance dictionaries.
Email | DLP and Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries

The compliance dictionaries contain words and phrases that might offend some readers.
Benefits of using compliance dictionaries

Use this information to understand the benefits of using compliance dictionaries.
Use Compliance scanning to assist with conformance to regulatory compliance and corporate operating
compliance. You can choose from a library of predefined compliance rules, or create your own rules
and dictionaries specific to your organization.
Compliance rules can vary in complexity from a straightforward trigger when an individual term within
a dictionary is detected, to building on and combining score-based dictionaries which will only trigger
when a certain threshold is reached. Using the advanced features of compliance rules, dictionaries can
be combined using logical operations of "any of", "all of", or "except".
To get information about using dictionaries, see Compliance Settings.
Option definitions Dictionary list

Use this information to understand the options available from within the user interface for the
Dictionaries.
Option
Definition
Language
Filters the dictionaries by locale.

Selecting a language selects all dictionaries available in that language, and any
language-neutral dictionaries.
Dictionary
Displays the name of the dictionary and a symbol to indicate its type:
Red book: Non score-based
Blue book: Score-based
Green book: User-defined
Open book: Currently selected item
Category
Dictionaries are grouped into related categories. For example, Profanity and Sex are
in the Acceptable Use category.
Used by
Displays the number of policies that use the dictionary.
Edit
When the icon is clicked, a window opens where you can change the dictionary name
and description.
Delete
When the icon is clicked, the dictionary on that row is removed.
Product Guide
337

Option
Definition
Add dictionary
When clicked, adds a new dictionary. Type a name and description for your
dictionary, and select whether the dictionary will match on regular expressions, or
simple strings.
A new row for your dictionary appears at the bottom of the list of dictionaries. You
can add words to the new dictionary later.
Import dictionaries When clicked, imports a file to replace your existing dictionaries.
Export dictionaries When clicked, exports the dictionaries as an XML file. You can send the file to other
appliances, ensuring that content scanning is consistent.
Option definitions New Condition

Use this dialog box to enter new terms into a dictionary.
Email | DLP and Compliance | Compliance Dictionaries | Dictionary | Add Condition

Option
Definition
Match type
Select how the appliance matches terms within this dictionary.
Applies to
Select what the term applies to.

Click the link and select from the available options.
Term
Enter the term that you want the appliance to search for.
List of terms for selected dictionary

Use this information to understand the supporting information given when you select a dictionary.
Click a row within the dictionary list to display the contents of that dictionary.
Option
Definition
Opens a Locate a term window, where you can type text to locate in the terms of the
currently selected dictionary.
You can type a regular expression here using Boost Perl Regular Expression Syntax.
Regular expressions are case sensitive; to make a pattern case insensitive, start it with
(?I).
Copy the listed terms within the selected dictionary
Paste the copied terms into the selected dictionary.
Open a window where you can change the description for the currently selected
dictionary. You cannot change the name of dictionaries supplied by McAfee.
Deletes the selected term.
Conditions
(OR)
For dictionaries that are not score-based, you can view lists of terms that are combined
using the logical OR operator. The dictionary will trigger when 'any of' the term lists
trigger.
Individual term lists can apply to different contexts. For example, one term list might
look for terms within message bodies whilst another might look for terms within the
subject line.
338
Product Guide


Option
Definition
Term lists
For dictionaries that are score-based, you can view the individual lists of terms in the
selected dictionary.
subject line.
Applies to
Click the link to specify the category and subcategory against which the terms will be
searched for, such as looking for terms within an email message subject line.
Term
Displays the trigger word or phrase. The icon before the term indicates whether it is a
regular expression, simple string or complex term.
Hover your mouse cursor over the icon to see the term type.
Score
Displays the score attributed to the term. To make the dictionary score-based, click Add.
To find out more about using thresholds and scores, see the tasks in Compliance
Settings.
Case sensitive
If selected, the appliance responds only to text that matches the term exactly in letter
case.
Example: If the term is Abc, the appliance responds to the word Abc. However, the
appliance ignores abc or ABC.
Wildcard
When selected, allows the use of ? and * in the term to represent unknown single or
multiple characters.
Example: If the term is ab?, the appliance responds to the word abc or abd. If the term
is ab*f, the appliance responds to the word abcdef or abcf.
Starts with
When selected, matches the term when it appears at the start of a word.
Example: If the term is bc, the appliance responds to the words bc, bcd or bcdef.
However, the appliance ignores abc or abcd.
Ends with
When selected, matches the term when it appears at the end of a word.
Example: If the term is bc, the appliance responds to the words bc or abc. However, the
appliance ignores bcd or abcd.
When used together, Starts with and Ends with match the term when it appears as a whole
word.
Example: If the term is bc, the appliance responds to the words bc. However, the
appliance ignores bcd or abc.
Edit
When clicked, opens a window that allows you to change the basic term properties, or
create a complex term.
Term details Edit the basic term properties including the actual text that you are
looking for, as well as case sensitive, wildcard, and starts with and ends with as
defined above.
Contextual matching (advanced) Set triggers for terms based on proximity to other terms.
To set these details, click Add Word or Phrase:
Display string Sets the display name for the term in the list of dictionary terms.
Enable near matching Enable or disable triggers based on proximity.
Condition Specify the conditions under which you want the term to trigger.
Within a block Set the proximity within which the terms must be found.
Word or phrase The list of terms.
Product Guide
339


Option
Delete
Add OR
condition
Definition
Removes the term from the dictionary.
For dictionaries that are not score-based, click to add new lists that are combined using
the logical OR operator using the following settings:
Name The name that you want to apply to the list of terms.
Description A unique description for the list.
Match type Specify whether the list contains regular expressions, or simple strings.
Applies to Click the link to specify the category and subcategory against which the
terms will be applied, such as looking for terms within an email message subject line.
Term Provide the first term in the list.
The dictionary will trigger when 'any of' the term lists trigger.
subject line.
Add AND
condition
For dictionaries that are not score-based, click to add new lists that are combined using
the logical AND operator using the following settings:
The dictionary will trigger when 'all of' the conditions trigger.
subject line.
340
Product Guide


Option
Definition
Add Term List
For dictionaries that are score-based, click to add a list of terms in the selected
dictionary, using the following settings:
Name The name that you want to apply to the list of terms.
Description A unique description for the list.
subject line.
Insert term
When clicked, opens a window where you can add a new term using the following
settings:
Term details Specify the basic term properties including the actual text that you are
looking for, as well as case sensitive, wildcard, and starts with and ends with as
defined above.
Contextual matching (advanced) Set triggers for terms based on proximity to other terms.
To set these details, click Add Word or Phrase:
Display string Set the display name for the term in the list of dictionary terms.
Enable near matching Enable or disable triggers based on proximity.
Condition Specify the conditions under which you want the term to trigger.
Within a block Set the proximity within which the terms must be found.
Word or phrase The list of terms.
This feature assumes that you have selected a dictionary and one of its terms. When
you click OK in the Term Details window, the appliance adds the term to the dictionary and
next to the selected term. Both terms have the same condition.
Introduction to regular expressions

Use this information to understand how your McAfee Email Gateway responds to regular expressions
used when defining rules and dictionary entries.
A regular expression (abbreviated regex or regexp) is a sequence of characters that forms a
search pattern, mainly for use in pattern matching with strings, or string matching. In McAfee Email
Gateway, a regex can be used to specify a set of strings required for a particular purpose, such as
detecting specific strings within an email header, or defining terms for a compliance dictionary.
Construct regular expressions only if you have a firm understanding of how they work. Use the
information in this section as a reminder or quick reference.
For more information, browse the web pages or books that explain regular expressions in detail.
Each character in a regular expression is either a metacharacter with its special meaning, or a
regular character with its literal meaning. Together, they can identify textual material of a given
pattern, or process a number of instances of it that can vary from a precise equality to a very general
similarity of the pattern. All regular expressions follow the same basic structure: expression plus flag.
Product Guide
341

Characters
A regular expression that contains no special characters ($()*+.?[^|) will match exactly what is
contained within the expression. Literal characters match themselves, so a simple regular expression
will produce results. However, special characters allow for more specific searches.
Metacharacters provide additional control to the matches a regex produces. The characters .[{()*?|^$
are metacharacters. For example,
. matches any character except for new line
\. matches a literal "." character
\\ matches a literal "\" character
(string1|string2) matches either string1 or string2
Anchors require that an expression is found in a particular place within a string, but do not match any
characters (zero width assertions):
\b matches a word boundary (start or end of a word)
^ matches the start of a line
$ matches the end of a line
Character classes match a particular type of character:
\s matches any whitespace character
\w matches any word character (a-z, A-Z, 0-9 and "_")
\d matches any digit
[abc] matches any one character a, b or c
You can also use the complements of these classes:
\S any non-whitespace character
\W any non-word character
\D any non-numeric character
[âbc] any character that isn't a, b or c
Quantifiers apply to the previous term:
* matches 0 or more of the previous term
+ matches 1 or more of the previous term
For example:
342
âa matches lines that start with aa
bb$ matches lines that end with bb
cc matches ccd, acc, and accd
ab*c matches ac, abc and abbc
a\d+b matches a2b and a23456b, but not ab
a.c matches abc, but not ac or abbc
a.*c matches ac, abc and adefghb
Product Guide

a[bcd]e matches abe, ace and ade, but not abcde
It is (lunch|dinner) time matches "It is lunch time" or "It is dinner time"
Benefits of using validation algorithms

Validation algorithms enhance the effectiveness of regular expressions applied to specific kinds of
email content.
In McAfee Email Gateway, a regex can be used to specify a set of strings required for a particular
purpose. For instance, a regex can detect specific strings within an email header, or define terms for a
compliance dictionary. Validation algorithms refine the detection.
Example A bank uses a rule to detect credit card numbers in outgoing email messages. If the rule
triggers, Email Gateway quarantines the message.
Using a validation algorithm

This use case illustrates how you can use validation algorithms to improve the accuracy of detection
rules.
Issue You have configured a compliance rule to detect credit card numbers in email messages. You
get many false positive detections where series of numbers are mistaken for credit card numbers.
Solution Add the Luhn10 (Credit Card, IMEI etc.) validation algorithm to your rule. The algorithm ensures
that a detected series of 16 numbers is a valid credit card number.
This algorithm determines whether a group of digits that are the same length as a credit card number is
actually a valid card number. Otherwise, it is an unrelated group of digits that happen to be the same
length. If you create content rules to look for credit card, this algorithm can help avoid false positives.
Task Validate formats for credit card numbers

Use the Luhn10 (Credit Card, IMEI etc.) validation algorithm to verify the validity of credit card
numbers that appear in email messages.
Using the Luhn10 (Credit Card, IMEI etc.) algorithm with any regular expression identifies potential
credit card numbers. This action verifies that they are real credit card numbers, not a sequence of 16
numbers that looks like a credit card number.
Task
1
Select Email | DLP and Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries..
In the Dictionary List section of the page, scroll down and select Credit Card Number as the dictionary to
use.
The Dictionary section of the page populates with any configured conditions and regular expressions.
In the Dictionary section, select the regular expression to validate the credit card number.
Select the Edit icon for that regular expression.

The Edit Regular Expression dialog box opens.
In the Validation Algorithm drop-down list, select Luhn10 (Credit Card, IMEI etc.) as the validation
algorithm.
For any regular expression dictionary, users can choose a type of validation algorithm that best suits
their purpose. None is the default.
Product Guide
343

(Optional) Select Test to validate your selection.

The Regular Expression Test Interface dialog opens, showing the test results.
Click OK to close the test box.
On the Edit Regular Expression dialog, click OK to complete your selection.
Click the green checkmark icon to save your changes.
Introduction to Graymail
Graymail is bulk email that does not meet the definition of spam.
Graymail messages could be considered either spam or legitimate email, depending upon the opinion
of the recipient.
Characteristics of Graymail
Graymail is email sent to a large number of recipients, but it differs from spam in several ways:
The user, at one time or another, requested to receive the messages, by such things as supplying
an email address.
Graymail messages come from reputable sources who want a relationship with the recipient, such
as a customer or client relationship.
Graymail messages usually offer an unsubscribe option.
Graymail typically contains content that might be of value to the recipients, and that might appeal
to their interests.
Graymail often includes an element of timeliness, such as an expiration date for an offer of goods
or services.
Requested or solicited email messages become graymail when the recipient becomes less interested in
receiving them.
The Graymail dictionary

In the spam policy settings of the Default policy, McAfee Email Gateway includes the Graymail
dictionary.
The dictionary contains a static list of terms, and is read-only. It cannot be edited. You can copy terms
from the Graymail dictionary to be used in a new dictionary if necessary. You can find it in the list at
Email | DLP and Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries.
Using the Graymail dictionary

When you enable Spam (Email | Email Policies | Spam), the Graymail dictionary is available to be included
in your policies. Treat it as you would any other dictionary. You can enable it in the Default policy, or
create a new policy to apply it.
You can also enable or disable the Graymail feature through the Setup Wizard.
Graymail detections show in reports as Spam detections triggered against the Graymail rule group,
along with the term that triggered the detection.
Task - Configure Graymail in the Setup Wizard

You can enable or disable Graymail protection as part of setting up your appliance.
You can enable Graymail protection in your original setup, or return to the Setup Wizard to enable or
disable it.
344
Product Guide

Task
1
Navigate to the Setup Wizard (System | Setup Wizard).

The Setup Wizard opens to the first page.
Complete the steps, or click Next for each step to leave them unchanged, to step 6, Email Configuration.
Click the Enable Graymail Protection check box.
If you check the box, Graymail is enabled.
If you do not check the box, Graymail is disabled.
If you leave the check box unchanged from the way you found it, the Graymail configuration is
not updated.
Complete the Setup Wizard to the Summary page.

If you have modified the Graymail action from the default setting to another setting through policy
management, and have left the check box unchanged, the Summary shows one of four status
messages:
Graymail is enabled - you checked the check box.
Graymail is already configured - you did not check the box, but it was already checked.
Graymail is enabled, but it is not using the default action - the box was already checked, but the action has
previously been modified from the default action.
You can navigate back to the Email Configuration page in the Setup Wizard and uncheck then
recheck the checkbox to enable Graymail protection with the default action.
Graymail is disabled - you unchecked the box, or it was already unchecked.
Review the Summary, then click Finish.

The Setup Wizard completes and the appliance reconfigures.
Graymail protection is configured.
Task Adding a new dictionary

Use this task to add a new dictionary for compliance terms.
Task
1
Go to Email | DLP and Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries.
Click Add Dictionary and specify its details:
Type the name of the dictionary
Optionally provide a description
Select whether you want to match simple strings or regular expressions
Click OK.
The dictionary appears selected in the dictionary list, and its term list appears at the bottom of the
page.
Click the edit icon next to the default term new term, replace it with the text you want to trigger
on, and click OK.
Product Guide
345

Click Insert Term to add new terms to the dictionary.
Apply the changes.
Task Adjust the scores associated with the Discontent dictionary

Use this task to fine-tune the scores associated with a specific dictionary.
Task
1
Select the Discontent dictionary.
In the Term List, select the term you want to adjust, and change its score.
Apply changes.
Task Test the social security number regular expressions

Use this task to check that the Email gateway is correctly interpreting the regular expressions used to
identify social security numbers.
Task
1
Select the Social Security Number dictionary.
Select the first regular expression, click the edit icon, and click Test.
Type This is a social security number, and click OK.

The Matches area shows the text that matches the regular expression. Click OK or Cancel twice.
Select the second regular expression, click the edit icon, and click Test.
Type Here is the number 111-22-3333, and click OK.

The Matches area shows the text that matches the regular expression. Click OK or Cancel twice.
Task Add a complex term to find the word Poker only when it is close to
the word Game
Use this task to add a complex term to the dictionary. A complex term is a word or phrase that had a
dependancy on another word or phrase.
Task
346
Either create a new or select an existing non-score-based dictionary (indicated by a red book).
In the Term List, click Insert Term, and type poker.
Select Contextual matching (advanced), and click Add Word or Phrase.
Type Game. In Display string, type Poker near Game.
In Within a block, change the value to 10.
Product Guide

Option definitions Add Dictionary Details

Use this dialog box to enter or change details about a dictionary list.
Email | DLP and Compliance | Compliance Dictionaries | Email dictionary list | Add Dictionary
Option
Definition
Name
Enter a name to identify the dictionary list by.
Description
If required, add a description for the dictionary list.
Language
Define the language for the content of the list.
Match type
Select how the appliance matches terms within this dictionary.
Option definitions Applicable File Formats

Option
Definition
Everything
De-select this to specify specific file categories and subcategories, or leave selected for
all file types to be scanned.
File categories With the Everything check-box de-selected, choose the categories of files to be added into
the DLP Compliance Dictionaries.
Subcategories Within the selected category of files, select the sub-categories that you want included
within each chosen category.
Option definitions OR Condition

Option
Definition
Name
The name of the dictionary to which this condition applies.
Description An optional text field to enable you to enter descriptive information about this condition
and the categories/subcategories it contains.
Match type Choose from:
Simple strings
Regular expressions
Applies to
Set to Everything by default. Click to open the Applicable File Formats dialog box to choose the
categories and subcategories to which you want the condition to apply.
Term
The term that you want to use for the condition.
Product Guide
347

Encryption
Option definitions AND Condition

Option
Definition
Match type Choose from:

Simple strings
Regular expressions
Applies to Set to Everything by default. Click to open the Applicable File Formats dialog box to choose the
categories and subcategories to which you want the condition to apply.
The term that you want to use for the condition.
Term
Option definitions Edit Regular Expression

Table 4-154 Option definitions Edit Regular Expression
Option
Definition
Term
Enter the regular expression to be used to match content within the searched
documents.
Test
Click the Test button to launch the Regular Expression Test Interface (see separate table
below)
Case sensitive Select to make the regular expression search case sensitive.
Description
Enter optional descriptive text for this regular expression.
Table 4-155 Option definitions Regular Expression Test Interface

Option
Definition
Regular Expression
The regular expression entered in the Edit Regular Expression dialog box
is displayed.
Case sensitive
Select to make the matching case sensitive.
Input text to test the Regular

Expression
Copy and paste, or type in some text that you want to be detected
by the regular expression.
Matches
Information about the way the regular expression finds matches

within the inputted test text is given.
Encryption
The Encryption pages enable you to set up McAfee Email Gateway to use the supported encryption
methods to securely deliver your email messages.
Email | Encryption
The McAfee Email Gateway includes several encryption methodologies, and can be set up to provide
encryption services to the other scanning features, or can be set up as an encryption-only server used
just to encrypt email messages.
Contents
Types of Encryption
Secure Web Mail
S/MIME
348
Product Guide

Encryption
PGP encryption
TLS
Secure Web Mail Branding
Task Encrypt all email that triggers against the HIPAA compliance dictionaries
Task Use S/MIME to encrypt all email to a specific target domain
Task Deliver all email from a specific customer using S/MIME encryption
Task Use PGP to encrypt all email messages
Task Deliver all email from a specific customer using PGP encryption
Types of Encryption
Information about the types of encryption methods that are available on the McAfee Email Gateway.
McAfee Email Gateway includes several different encryption methods to enable you to configure your
appliance to best match your existing email and network topography. These can be divided into the
following groups:
Server-to-server encryption
Server-to-server encryption, as its name suggests uses encryption to secure the transmission of email
messages between email servers. Many different methods of securing the server-to-server traffic are
available. McAfee Email Gateway can be configured to use the following methods to secure the
server-to-server link:
Transport Layer Security
S/MIME
PGP
Secure Web Mail

You cannot always guarantee that the email messages being sent from within your organization will be
going to a secure destination email server.
In this circumstance, you can still send secure messages by using the Secure Web Mail options built
into McAfee Email Gateway.
You can use two methods of Secure Web Mail; push delivery and pull delivery.
Pull delivery
With pull delivery, the secure email message is stored on the McAfee Email Gateway, and, after
receiving a notification, the end user must log into their Secure Web Mail account and "pull" the
message from the McAfee Email Gateway.
Advantages of Pull delivery include:
Good access to the message from hand-held devices.
Works well with low-bandwidth connections.
Can be used to transmit files that are larger than many email server limits.
Messages only cross the network once.
Disadvantages of Pull delivery include:
The McAfee Email Gateway has limited storage space, so the longevity of the message is limited.
Messages cannot be accessed if the McAfee Email Gateway is offline.
Product Guide
349

Encryption
Push delivery
With push delivery, the end user is sent a notification that contains the encrypted message as an
attachment the encrypted message is "pushed" to the end users' email system.
To read the message, the user needs to log onto the McAfee Email Gateway. During this process, the
encrypted message is returned to the McAfee Email Gateway where it is decrypted. The decrypted
message is then viewed by the end user in a secure browser.
Advantages of Push delivery include:
As the encrypted messages are stored on the end users' email system, the longevity of the
message is unlimited.
The McAfee Email Gateway handles all the encryption key and certificate generation for each
recipient.
The message is secure, as only the McAfee Email Gateway can decrypt the message.
Disadvantages of Push delivery include:
Push delivery of secure email messages does not work well on handheld devices.
Messages must cross the network three times to be read.
Does not work well on low-bandwidth connections.
With a large number of end users concurrently accessing their secure messages, the CPU load on
the McAfee Email Gateway can be high.
Messages cannot be accessed if the McAfee Email Gateway is offline.
Secure Web Mail

Use this information to understand Secure Web Mail, and to know how to configure your McAfee Email
Gateway to deliver messages securely.
When a secure server-to-server connection cannot be made, it is still possible to deliver email
messages securely. This can be particularly useful when sending confidential information to end users
that may not be using secure email servers.
McAfee Email Gateway can be configured to use both push and pull delivery methods to securely
deliver email messages.
Contents
Supported browsers for Secure Web Mail
Secure Web Mail Basic Settings
Secure Web Mail User Account Settings
Secure Web Mail User Management
Secure Web Mail Password Management
Message Management
Certificates
Supported browsers for Secure Web Mail

Discover the browsers that are supported by the Secure Web Mail Client within McAfee Email
Gateway.
Within McAfee Email Gateway, the Secure Web Mail Client supports sending Secure Web Mail to end
users accessing their secure email from several desktop browsers and mobile operating systems
350
Product Guide

Encryption
Table 4-156 Compatible desktop browsers for Secure Web Mail

Browser
Version
Microsoft Internet Explorer
7, 8, 9
Mozilla Firefox
3.6, 4, 5, 6
Apple Safari
4, 5
Table 4-157 Compatible operating systems for accessing Secure Web Mail using mobile
devices
Operating System
Version
Android
2.1, 2.2, 2.3
Apple iOS
iPhone 3GS/ iPhone 4
Blackberry OS
webOS
1.4
Symbian S60
5th Edition
Windows Phone
Secure Web Mail Basic Settings

Use this information to understand the basic settings needed to configure Secure Web Mail.
Email | Encryption | Secure Web Mail | Basic Settings
Benefits of configuring Secure Web Mail

Learn about the benefits of configuring your McAfee Email Gateway to allow the Secure Web Mail of
email messages.
Depending on the industry in which you engage, you may be bound by particular laws and rules about
the transmitting of private information.
One example of this is the Privacy rule within the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act
(HIPAA) in the United States of America. This rule contains regulations relating to the use and
disclosure of Private Health Information (PHI), and care must be taken not to violate this rule by
sending PHI above that required for the specific need, or to send information in a format that could be
easily intercepted and read by unauthorized persons.
McAfee Email Gateway assists you by enabling compliance policies that meet the requirements of
many of the laws and rules requiring the safeguarding of data. Having scanned your outgoing email
messages against the in-built compliance libraries to identify if the content of your email message
breaches any of the relevant libraries, the McAfee Email Gateway can take specified actions, such as
using a secure delivery method to attempt the delivery of the message.
Most methods for the secure delivery of email messages rely on both the sending and the receiving
email servers using the same encryption methods, such as S/MIME, PGP or SSL/TLS encryption.
Although your McAfee Email Gateway can be configured to use these encryption methods, these
settings are of no use if the receiving email server is not configured to also use encryption.
In this circumstance, McAfee Email Gateway uses Secure Web Mail to notify the recipient that an
encrypted message has been sent to them, and provides the information that they need in order to
set up a secure connection to the McAfee Email Gateway so that they can retrieve the message using
Secure Web Mail.
Using Secure Web Mail also gives other benefits, including:
Product Guide
351

Encryption
The messages are formatted so that they can be easily read on handheld devices.
The messages are delivered using low bandwidth connections.
Large messages can be delivered without hitting the typical email server size limitations.
Option Definitions for Basic Settings

Understand the options available for configuring the basic settings for Secure Web Mail.
Option definitions Enabled

Option
Definition
Enable the Secure Web Mail

Client
Select this to enable the Secure Web Mail Client on your McAfee Email Gateway.
After enabling the Secure Web Mail Client, configure your Email Policies to set
the triggers for using this feature.
Scan messages composed in

the Secure Web Mail Client
Select to force all messages composed from within the Secure Web Mail Client to
be scanned for malicious content.
Secure Web Mail host name
Enter the hostname for the appliance.

When configuring a cluster of appliances, or when configuring a blade
server, ensure that you use the DNS host name associated with the virtual
IP address that is shared by the master and failover devices.
Option definitions Locale

Option
Definition
Default locale Select the default language that is to be displayed within the email notifications.
Once the end user receives their Secure Web Mail: Welcome message and clicks to activate
their account, they are able to select their own preferred language.
Option definitions Contact Details

Option
Definition
Postmaster name
Use this field to define the email address that is added to the notification
messages received by the end user.
User the postmaster

address as the support
contact
By default, the end user will request support using the postmaster address
details.
Support contact address
If you choose to define a separate support contact for your end users, enter
the Support contact address that the end users will see.
Support contact name
If you choose to define a separate support contact for your end users, enter
the Support contact name that the end users will see.
By de-selecting this option, you can then define a Support contact address and
Support contact name.
Option definitions Branding

Within Secure Web Mail, you can create themes and notifications based around your company style and
logo, so that the recipients of the email messages are aware of your organization.
352
Product Guide

Encryption
Option
Definition
Theme
Select the theme that the und users will see when logging into Secure Web Mail.
Create themes in Email | Encryption | Branding to add them to this drop-down list.
Notification
messages
Select the notification branding that the und users will see when they receive a
Secure Web Mail notification.
Create customized notifications in Email | Encryption | Branding to add them to this
drop-down list.
Secure Web Mail User Account Settings

Understand the user account settings needed to configure Secure Web Mail.
Email | Encryption | Secure Web Mail | User Account Settings
Benefits of setting up encryption user accounts

This information describes the benefits of creating encryption user accounts.
To provide secure delivery of email messages using the Secure Web Mail Client, you must first
configure the user account settings within your McAfee Email Gateway. These options enable you to
specify if your McAfee Email Gateway digitally signs the notification emails, and if users are allowed to
auto-login to the Secure Web Mail Client.
You can specify parameters relating to both the PULL and PUSH methods of delivering email
messages, including configuring the maximum message sizes and other method-specific parameters.
Additionally, you can configure how you allow the end users to read and compose email messages
using the Secure Web Mail Client.
Option Definitions for Secure Web Mail User Account Settings

Option definitions Enrollment and Notification

Option
Definition
Enable auto-enrollment
With Enable auto-enrollment selected, a user will automatically have a Secure

Web Mail account created on the McAfee Email Gateway if an email is
delivered to them through the McAfee Email Gateway that triggers a rule
that enforced encryption.
Selected by default.
Digitally sign outgoing

notifications
By default, all outgoing Secure Web mail notifications are digitally signed
by the McAfee Email Gateway.
Use HTML rather than plain

text for notifications
By default, all Secure Web Mail notifications are sent in HTML format.
However, to conserve bandwidth, you can deselect this option to form plain
text notifications.
Product Guide
353

Encryption
Option definitions Message Encryption PULL Messages

Option
Definition
Allow messages to be
stored on the gateway
(PULL messages)
Set message parameters for messages stored on the gateway:

Maximum message size. Messages that exceed this size cannot be sent using the
PULL mechanism.
Expiry time for read messages. Set the time that each message will be stored on the
appliance after it has been read.
Expiry time for unread messages. Set the time that each message will be stored on the
appliance in its unread state.
Warning period for expiring messages. Configure when a warning will be sent to the
user informing them that the message is about to expire.
Notify recipients of
unread PULL
messages
Choose whether to notify recipients of unread messages sent using the PULL
method of encryption delivery.
When selected, you can also configure the Interval between notifications in days.
You can also specify a time period between unread message notifications.
Option definitions Message Encryption PUSH Messages

Option
Definition
Allow messages to be stored on

end users' systems (PUSH
messages)
Set message parameters for messages stored on end users' systems:

Maximum message size. Messages that exceed this size cannot be sent using
the PUSH mechanism.
Follow the link to configure the encryption and escrow certificates to use
for PUSH messages.
Option definitions Reading and Composing Email

Option
Definition
Allow the user to
Set the actions that the user can take on encrypted messages:
Print messages
Reply to messages
Compose new messages
Bcc messages
Forward messages
Maximum message size (including
attachments)
Set to 1MB by default.
Restrict the generated Secure Web Mail notifications to plain text rather than
HTML
Use this task to send notification messages in plain text.
Task
1
Click Email | Encryption | Secure Web Mail | User Account Settings.
Deselect Use HTML rather than plain text for notifications.
Apply the changes.
All Secure Web Mail notification messages are sent in plain text.
354
Product Guide

Encryption
Task Restrict Secure Web Mail encryption to be push only

Use this task to have encrypted messages to be stored on end user's systems.
Task
1
Click Email | Encryption | Secure Web Mail | User Account Settings.
In Message Encryption - PULL Messages, deselect Allow messages to be stored on the gateway.
In Message Encryption - PUSH Messages, select Allow messages to be stored on end users' systems.
Apply the changes.
Secure Web Mail User Management

Manage the Secure Web Mail end-users accounts on your McAfee Email Gateway.
Email | Encryption | Secure Web Mail | User Management
Benefits of managing end user accounts

Understand the benefits of managing the end user accounts on your McAfee Email Gateway.
When using Secure Web Mail to ensure that your end users can securely receive encrypted messages,
you will need to create, lock, unlock or delete these end user accounts from your McAfee Email
Gateway.
Some of the situations where you need to use these features include:
Infrequent users of the Secure Web Mail system forgetting their passwords, and contacting the
configured support email address requesting help.
Users who have expired passwords, needing to have their accounts reactivated.
End users that request that their accounts are removed from your servers.
Option definitions User Management

Manage the Secure Web Mail end user accounts on your McAfee Email Gateway.
User Search
Option
Definition
Email address
To search for a particular Secure Web Mail end user, enter a full or partial email
address, and click Search.
All user accounts matching your search are displayed in the User Search table.
You can refine your search using the options in the Status drop-down menu.
For the selected

users
Reset account Sends an Email notification to the recipient so that they can reset
their password and unlock their account
Lock Account Prevents the user from accessing their account
Delete Account Deletes the account and all the user's messages
Domain
Displays all unique domains that use Secure Web Mail.
Refresh
Refreshes the domain list.
Product Guide
355

Encryption
User Creation
Option
Definition
Email address Enter the email address for the end user account you are creating.
Create
After entering and confirming the email address for the end user account, click Create.
The new user account information is displayed in the User Search table.
Task Manage specific Secure Web Mail user accounts

Use this task to .
Task
1
In User Search, add the email address of the user whose account you wish to lock, such as
user@example.domain.com and click Search.
Displays the status of the account, including information such as the number of read and unread
messages, and the last time that user logged in, and provides a status of the account. The number
of read and unread messages is updated every 15 minutes.
Select the email address, and in For the selected users, select Lock account, then click Perform action.
The next time you search for this user, the account shows its Status as Locked.
To unlock the account, select it, and click Reset account.
Secure Web Mail Password Management

Configure your end-user password management settings for Secure Web Mail.
Benefits of using passwords to get encrypted messages

Understand why correctly setting the end user password complexity, frequency of change and the
change process is important in maintaining the security of Secure Web Mail.
To ensure that the email messages sent using the Secure Web Mail Client software are only read by
the intended recipient, the end user needs to set up an account on the McAfee Email Gateway. As with
many accounts administered over the internet, this requires that the end user has a username (the
email address) and a password set up.
Using a suitable password ensures that encrypted messages cannot be read by people other than the
intended recipient.
McAfee Email Gateway allows you to define a suitable end user password policy, which includes
specifying how complex you require the chosen passwords to be, how long each password is valid for
and the process required to update existing passwords.
A complex password is more secure than a very simple one, but is more likely to create a greater
volume of "forgotten password" reset requests from your end users. Therefore, you need to decide the
balance between complex passwords that are likely to generate lots of reset requests, and simpler
passwords that will require less maintenance.
356
Product Guide

Encryption
Option Definitions for Secure Web Mail Password Management

Option definitions Password Complexity

Option
Definition
Minimum length
Select the minimum length that you will allow for end-user passwords. Longer
passwords are more secure, but may result in more calls to your support address as
end users find them more difficult to remember.
Minimum number of Specify the minimum number of alphabetical characters to be used within the end
ALPHA characters
users' passwords.
To increase security, you can also Require a mixture of upper and lowercase characters to be
used.
Minimum number of The more different types of characters that may be used within an end users'
DIGIT characters
password, the more secure that password can be made.
Forcing your end users to use numbers within their passwords improves the
security of the passwords.
Minimum number of The more different types of characters that may be used within an end users'
SPECIAL characters password, the more secure that password can be made.
Forcing your end users to use special characters within their passwords improves
the security of the passwords.
Special characters are non-alphanumeric characters such as underscores (_),
hyphens (-) and other punctuation.
Option definitions Password Change Control

Option
Definition
Enable password expiry
Decide whether your end users will need to periodically renew their
passwords.
Specify the Password lifetime in days, and also the Grace period they are allowed
before the Password lifetime, during which they are allowed to still log into the
Secure Web Mail system, but are then forced to change their password.
Enable password expiry

reminders
Choose if you want your end users to be notified that their passwords are due
to expire. Also, select the required Interval between reminders.
Number of recent
passwords to disallow
Use this field to prevent end users from re-entering their previous passwords.
Minimum interval between

password changes
Specify any limits you want to place on the frequency with which end users
can change their passwords.
Product Guide
357

Encryption
Option definitions Challenge / Response

Option
Definition
Enable challenge / response
Choose whether you want users to reset passwords without going through
any security questions.
Number of answers held

against a user
Set the number of potential answers a user must provide to set up their
challenge response questions.
To provide secure password changing, McAfee recommends at least 5
challenge response questions are used.
Number of questions to ask a When challenge response is enabled, set how many questions each user
user
must answer correctly to pass the security check.
To provide secure password changing, McAfee recommends at least 2
challenge response questions are asked of the end-user.
Message Management
The Message Management options provide information about the number of messages stored on your
system, and the disk space you have available so you can remove some if necessary.
Email | Encryption | Secure Web Mail | Message Management

The page is divided into these sections:
Statistics
Purge Messages
Benefits of Message Management

Use the Message Management options to find out how many messages are stored and remove any if
necessary.
Messages are categorized into Read, Unread, and Draft, and the amount of available disk space is
shown, allowing you to choose whether you need to remove some messages. Messages can removed
dependent on their type, or their age.
358
Product Guide

Encryption
Option definitions Message Management

See the number of messages stored by type, and choose any that you want to remove.
Option
Definition
Statistics
Shows the number of read, unread, and draft messages and the amount of available
disk space.
Purge Messages Choose the messages that you want to remove:

Messages to delete:
All
One or more of
Read messages
Unread messages
Draft messsages
Older than x number of:
Days
Weeks
Months
Certificates
Use this page to specify the contents of a self-signed digital certificate for the appliance.
Email | Encryption | Secure Web Mail | Certificates

To create a certificate that is signed by a Certification Authority, generate a Certificate Signing
Request, and import the signed certificate.
Useful web sites
ISO 3166: http://www.iso.org/iso/country_codes.htm
Benefits of using certificates with the appliance

This information describes the benefits of using certificates on your McAfee Email Gateway to transfer
email securely.
Certificates allow the traffic from your McAfee Email Gateway to be trusted by other systems. They
typically have a lifetime of several months or years, so they do not need to be managed often.
Option definitions Certificates

View information about certificates stored on your McAfee Email Gateway.
The following information applies to the Web Client HTTPS Certificate and the Notification Signing Certificate.
Option
Definition
Country [C]
Specifies a two-letter code such CN, DE, ES, FR, JP, KR. (See ISO 3166)
Default value is US.
State or province [ST]

Town or city [L]
Specifies the location of your organization. Give a full name rather than an
abbreviation.
Product Guide
359

Encryption
Option
Definition
Organization [O]
Specifies the name of your organization such as Example, Inc.
Organizational unit [OU]
Default value is Email Gateway.
Common name [CN]
Displays the domain name of your appliance such as server1.example.com
Email address [ea]
Specifies an email address, for example aaa@mcafee.com
View
Click to view the certificate details.
Import
When clicked, opens a window where you can specify the file.
To import a password-protected certificate, type the passphrase to unlock the
private key. The appliance stores the decrypted certificate in a secure internal
location.
The appliance only verifies the certificate, and makes it available to use, after
you click the icon to apply your changes:
Export
When clicked, opens a window where you can specify a passphrase, then
download a file. The file name extension is CRT (base-64 encoded) or P12
(PKCS#12). The certificate is in PEM format.
Generate Certificate
Signing Request
When clicked, opens a window where you can request that the Certificate
Signing Request is signed by a Certificate Authority on the appliance or by an
external Certificate Authority. The file name extension is CSR.
Regenerate
When clicked, you are prompted to confirm that you want to regenerate the
certificate and private key.
Entries in the Option fields determine the information that appears in a subsequent certificate signing
request (CSR).
For internally self-signed certificates, the information is used to regenerate the certificates.
Subsequent viewing of these certificates reflect the changes, along with new valid to and valid
from dates.
For externally signed certificates, changing the option settings has no immediate effect on the
viewable certificate details. You must regenerate the CSR, have it externally signed, and then
import it in order to see the changed information.
The View link opens the Certificate Details window, containing the detailed information about the
certificate.
S/MIME
Understand how McAfee Email Gateway uses S/MIME to provide encrypted delivery of email messages.
Email | Encryption | S/MIME

Contents
S/MIME S/MIME Encryption Certificate
S/MIME Sending Email
360
Product Guide

Encryption
S/MIME S/MIME Encryption Certificate

Use this information to understand the settings needed to configure your S/MIME Encryption
Certificate.
Email | Encryption | S/MIME | S/MIME Encryption Certificate
Benefits of using S/MIME certificates

Use S/MIME certificates to send and receive server-based messages when the receiving server will not
accommodate a secure session.
Using S/MIME certificates, McAfee Email Gateway checks each incoming message to see if it is an S/
MIME message. If it is, Email Gateway checks for a key to decrypt the message. If the key exists, the
message is decrypted; if not, it is treated as a normal message.
Before you can use the S/MIME features, you must obtain and install your individual S/MIME certificate.
You can obtain it from either your in-house certificate authority (CA) or a public CA.
Option definitions S/MIME Encryption Certificate

Information about the encryption certificates used for S/MIME transmission of email messages.
Option
Definition
Country [C]
Town or city [L]
abbreviation.
Organization [O]
Common name [CN]
Email address [ea]
Import

location.
Export
Signing Request
S/MIME Sending Email

Understand the settings needed to configure your S/MIME Sending Email options.
Email | Encryption | S/MIME | Sending Email
Product Guide
361

Encryption
Option Definitions Sending Email

Specify and view the S/MIME information needed for sending email using S/MIME.
Option
Definition
Escrow certificate
Select from the available certificates.

When you have selected a certificate, click View certificate to see the
information within it.
Message encryption
algorithm
Select from the available algorithms.

Selecting a larger key size is more secure, but will be slower each time the
algorithm is used.
S/MIME Encryption
Certificates for External
Domains
See the currently stored S/MIME Encryption Certificates for External Domains.
You can add or delete domains from this list , or view the certificates
provided by each domain.
Use Filter to help find a particular certificate
Domain
Lists the domain to which each S/MIME encryption certificate applies.
S/MIME Certificate
Shows detail about the S/MIME encryption certificate.
Add Domain
Add a new external domain to the list.
View Certificate
View information about the selected S/MIME encryption certificate.
Delete Selected Domains
Delete the selected domains and their S/MIME encryption certificates.
Manage S/MIME Encryption

Certificate
Click to move to Email | Certificate Management | Certificates | S/MIME Encryption

Certificates.
PGP encryption
Understand how McAfee Email Gateway uses PGP to provide encrypted delivery of email messages.
Email | Encryption | PGP

Contents
PGP PGP Encryption Key
PGP Sending Email

Understand the options available for the PGP encryption keys.
Email | Encryption | PGP | PGP Encryption Key
Benefits of using PGP encryption

PGP encryption is a data encryption/decryption system that provides cryptographic privacy and
authentication for data communication.
PGP is used by many companies to sign, encrypt and decrypt email messages. PGP encryption uses
combinations of methods of cryptography, file compression and other operations, each of which can
use a variety of different algorithms. PGP includes the use of public key encryption, bound to a user
name and/or an email address, and private key encryption, maintained in secret, to encrypt outgoing
messages and decrypt incoming messages.
362
Product Guide

Encryption
Option definitions PGP Encryption Key

Information about the PGP encryption keys.
Option
Definition
Displayable name A user-editable field, allowing you to choose the name that is displayed for this
encryption key.
Comment
A user-editable field, allowing you to choose a comment for this encryption key.
Email address
The email address associated with this encryption key.
View
Click to display the content of the encryption key.
Import
Click to open the Import Certificate and Key dialog box where you an upload a certificate to
the appliance, and add a passphrase to open a private key.
Export
Click to open the Certificate and Key Export dialog box where you can choose whether you
want to export with no private key, or export a complete chain, and the format of key
that you want to export.
Regenerate
Click to regenerate the PGP public and private keys, using the information on this
page.
PGP Sending Email

Understand the options available for PGP sending email.
Email | Encryption | PGP | Sending Email
Benefits of using PGP Sending Email

You can manage the PGP Encryption Keys from external domains that are installed on your McAfee
Email Gateway.
Manage the PGP Encryption Keys stored on your McAfee Email Gateway.
Option definitions Sending Email

Manage installed PGP keys.
Option
Definition
Escrow key
Select from the available keys.

When you have selected a key, click View key to see the information within it.
PGP Encryption Keys for

External Domains
See the currently stored PGP Encryption Keys for External Domains.
Use Filter to help find a particular key.
Domain
Lists the domain to which each PGP encryption key applies.
PGP Key
Shows detail about the PGP key.
Add Domain
View Key
View information about the selected PGP key.
Delete the selected domains and their PGP Encryption Keys.
Manage PGP keys
Click to move to Email | Certificate Management | Certificates | PGP Encryption Keys
Product Guide
363

Encryption
TLS
Use this page to specify how devices use encrypted communications and to manage their digital
certificates.
Email | Encryption | TLS

Import the trusted Certificates Authorities and certificates from the participating organizations before
you begin this configuration. RSA keys can be used both for encryption and for signing. DSA keys can
be used for signing only.
How Transport Layer Security (TLS) works

Use this information to understand how Transport Layer Security (TLS) works.
Transport Layer Security works by communicating a set of parameters known as the handshake
at the start of the connection process. Once these parameters have been defined, the communications
that follow within that session are secure, in that they cannot be decoded by servers that did not
partake in the handshake conversation. The process includes steps to discuss the ciphers to be used
during the communications, and also authentication steps to prove the identity of the servers taking
part in the communications.
The handshake process includes the following main steps:
The McAfee Email Gateway requests a secure connection to the receiving email server and presents
a list of cipher suites to the receiving email server.
The receiving email server then selects the strongest supported cipher from that list, and then
notifies the McAfee Email Gateway of the chosen cipher.
The servers then use Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) to establish their authenticity. This is achieved
by the exchanging of digital certificates. On occasions, these digital certificates may be validated
against the Certificate Authority (CA) that issued the certificates.
Using the server's public key, McAfee Email Gateway generates a random number as a session key,
and sends it to the receiving email server. The receiving server then decrypts this session key using
its private key.
Both the McAfee Email Gateway and the receiving email server then use this encrypted session key
to set up communications, completing the handshake process.
Once the handshake has been completed, the secure connection is used to transfer the email
messages. The connection remains secure until the connection is closed.
Enforcing inbound TLS using the sender address

The Email Gateway appliance can act as the server for inbound email, supporting forced and
opportunistic TLS security. To avoid using the ehlo domain to enforce TLS, configure TLS to user the
sender's envelope address to determine if TLS should be enforced. Select the TLS enforcement option
under TLS Options (Advanced).
364
Product Guide

Encryption
TLS Connections
Use this area to define hosts that use TLS encryption.
Table 4-158 Option definitions When receiving email (gateway is acting as server)
Option
Definition
Client Domain /
Subnet
Displays the details, such as:

192.168.200.254/24
192.168.200.254/255.255.255.0
server1.example.net
*.example.net
Use TLS
Always rejects email from participating organizations if their communication does

not try to start encryption.
Never configure connections to the source server to never use TLS encryption.
When available if available, the connection uses TLS encryption.
Authenticate Client
Specifies whether the other device must also authenticate.
Server Certificate
Selects the certificate to use for this TLS Connection.

The name is one of the certificate IDs from the Certificate Management section .
Add Domain
Enables you to specify new domains that are to use TLS.
View Certificate
View the TLS certificate for the selected domains.
Delete Selected
Domains
Remove the selected domains from the list.
Import
Import full information about hosts that are configured to use TLS.
Example The following is an extract from an imported full list of hosts:
Import Domain List
Import a list of domains that use TLS. Use the dialog boxes to define the TLS
settings to be applied to all entries in the list.
Example The following is an extract from an imported list of domains:
Export
Export the list of configured domains, for backup or for import into other McAfee
Product Guide
365

Encryption
Table 4-159 Option definitions When sending email (gateway is acting as a client)
Option
Definition
Server Domain /
Subnet
Displays the details, such as:

192.168.200.254/24
192.168.200.254/255.255.255.0
server1.example.net
*.example.net
Use TLS
Always rejects email from participating organizations if their communication

does not try to start encryption.
Never configure connections to the source server to never use TLS encryption.
When available if available, the connection uses TLS encryption.
Authenticate Self
Specifies whether the client must verify itself to the recipient before sending
email. The client then needs its own certificate.
Client Certificate
Selects the certificate to use for this TLS Connection.

The name is one of the certificate IDs from the Certificate Management section.
Add Domain
Enables you to specify new domains that are to use TLS.
View Certificate
View the TLS certificate for the selected domains.
Delete Selected
Domains
Remove the selected domains from the list.
Import
Import full information about hosts that are configured to use TLS.
Example The following is an extract from an imported full list of hosts:
Import Domain List
Import a list of domains that use TLS. Use the dialog boxes to define the TLS
settings to be applied to all entries in the list.
Example The following is an extract from an imported list of domains:
366
Export
Export the list of configured domains, for backup or for import into other McAfee
Manage TLS
certificates and keys
Click to jump to Email | Certificate Management | Certificates | TLS Certificates and Keys.
Product Guide

Encryption
TLS options (advanced)

Use this area to specify the type of ciphers for TLS encryption.
Option
Definition
Cipher strength
Provides a choice of cipher strengths.

By default, ciphers with a full range of strengths are supported. If necessary,
the range of supported cipher strengths can be limited to 128-bit or greater.
Allow no encryption
If selected, ciphers without encryption are supported. McAfee does not

recommend using unencrypted TLS connections, so this setting is disabled by
default.
Allow anonymous key

exchange
If selected, ciphers without authentication are supported. McAfee does not

recommend using unauthenticated TLS connections, so this setting is disabled
by default.
When unauthenticated ciphers are supported, some destination servers might
choose these ciphers in preference to authenticated ciphers.
Enable TLS v1.2 cipher

suites
By default, McAfee Email Gateway allows the use of TLS v1.2 cipher suites. If
you experience interoperability issues with other mail servers, you can disable
the use of these cipher suites.
TLS enforcement
If selected, the appliance will enforce TLS using the sender's envelope address
rather than the ehlo address for inbound email.
Secure Web Mail Branding

Understand how to configure the branding for the Secure Web Mail features.
Email | Encryption | Branding
Benefits of the Secure Web Mail branding settings

Use the Branding page to define the content and appearance of notification messages and the
appearance of the Secure Web Mail Client user interface.
The default theme cannot be edited. Click Copy Item to to create a customized theme or notification based
on the currently active item.
Specify images that appear as the logo for the desktop client, logo for the mobile client, and the
favorites icon icon.
View real time changes to the branding that you make in the previews available.
Customize the product name that's displayed, or that is presented to the user as either a text
string, or an image.
Edit notification messages and view your changes immediately within the right hand screen.
Product Guide
367

Encryption
Description of tokens used in Secure Web Mail notifications

When you configure Secure Web Mail, notification messages are sent to customers. Within these
notification messages, tokens are used to provide relevant information.
Table 4-161
Tokens used in Secure Web Mail notifications
Notification
Token
Description
Welcome
GATEWAY
The fully qualified DNS name of the appliance.
ACTIVATE_LINK
URL link used to activate the account.
GATEWAY
LOGIN_LINK
URL link used to sign into the account.
SUBJECT
The original subject of the message.
SENDER
The email address of the sender of the message.
GATEWAY
PULL_MESSAGE
A section inserted if this is a PULL (or PUSH/PULL)

message.
PUSH_MESSAGE
A section inserted if this is a PUSH (or PUSH/

PULL) message.
(PULL_MESSAGE
token)
PULL_LINK
URL link used to read a specific "PULL" message.
(PULL_MESSAGE
token)
DAYS_LEFT
The days left for which a PULL message will be

held on the appliance, before being aged out.
(PUSH_MESSAGE
token)
PUSH_FILE
The name of the attached HTML file which is used

to POST the encrypted PUSH message back to the
appliance for reading. This file name is
SecureMessage.html.
Message read
RECIPIENT
The email address of the original message

recipient.
SUBJECT
The original subject of the message.
DATE_SENT
A localized string containing the date and time the

message was sent.
DATE_READ
A localized string containing the date and time the

message was read by the recipient.
REPORT_FILE
The name of the attached report text file. This file

name is report.txt.
GATEWAY
NUM_MESSAGES
Numeric count of the number of unread PULL

messages held on the appliance.
GATEWAY
Account activated
Message received
Unread messages
UNREAD_MESSAGE_LIST Inserts a table of unread message details.

Password reset
requested
GATEWAY
REQUEST_EMAIL
The email address of the person who has

requested the resetting of the password. (either
the account owner or the support contact)
PASSWORD_RESET_LINK URL link used to reset the account password.

Password reset
Password expiring
368
GATEWAY
LOGIN_LINK
GATEWAY
Product Guide

Encryption
Table 4-161
Tokens used in Secure Web Mail notifications (continued)
Notification
Token
Description
LOGIN_LINK
DAYS_LEFT
Numeric count of the number of days left before

the account gets locked.
Account locked
GATEWAY
Disclaimer text
<none>
Support contact
SUPPORT_EMAIL
Footnote
<none>
Copyright notice
YEAR
Offline notice
<none>
The email address of the support contact.

(configured in email - encryption - basic settings)
The current year as per the appliance's clock.
Option definitions Branding

Define the appearance and content of notification messages that users receive regarding their Secure
Web Mail Client account.
The default theme cannot be edited or removed.
Edits are saved when you change selection.

Option
Definition
Name
The name of the theme.
Usage
Displays the number of times a theme or notification message is used.
Notification
messages
Displays the notification messages that you have created. Click Default notification set to
view all default messages.
Click on the notification on the left to get an expanded palette of all the notification
messages, and other available components such as disclaimers. The notification
contains a text area to edit content and a drop down list that allows you to insert
tokens. Some messages contain tokens that can be edited.
On the right hand screen, the content is updated to reflect your current selection. Also
on the right is a language picker to choose a different language. The language is one
of the basic settings of the virtual host. To change language, go to virtual host to
change the language that users will see.
Edits are saved when you change selection.
Copy Item
Click to create a new notification theme based on the currently active theme.
Delete Item
Remove an unused theme.
Desktop
Preview /
Mobile Preview
View the notification as it appears on a user's desktop or through a mobile phone.
Images
Import the logo that you want to use on the notification, and view how it appears on
the desktop, mobile, and through a browser.
Upload new images through a form submission. Supported file formats for logos and
the favorites icon are .JPEG, .PNG, and .BMP. The .ICO format is also supported for the
favorites icon.
Images are scaled to the appropriate size, and converted to .PNG format for the logos,
and .ICO format for the favorites icon.
The favorites icon should be the same height and width.
Product Guide
369

Encryption
Option
Definition
Product Name
Set whether you want to use text or an image to display the product name.
If you choose to use an image to display the product name, the same upload rules and
supported formats apply as those that apply to Images.
Color Palette
Define the appearance of the notification header and text.

Click on a colored square in the palette to edit a color. Using a color picker, you can
choose from a selection of standard colors, or you can specify the standard color as a
six character HTML hexadecimal string, or as a red/green/blue triplet.
Most recently used custom colors are added to a color palette at the bottom.
Task Encrypt all email that triggers against the HIPAA

compliance dictionaries
A common use of the encryption features is to configure a policy to only use encryption in particular
circumstances.
This group of tasks show how to configure your McAfee Email Gateway so that email messages are
only sent using encryption when they trigger against the HIPPA complinace dictionaries.
Task Configure the encryption settings

Configure your McAfee Email Gateway to use encryption.
Task
1
Select Email | Encryption | Secure Web Mail | Basic Settings.
Select Enable the Secure Web Mail Client.
Select Email | Encryption | Secure Web Mail | User Account Settings.

Recipients are automatically enrolled, and receive a digitally signed notification in HTML format. The
administrator chooses whether to do push and/or pull encryption.
Select Email | Encryption | Secure Web Mail | Password Management.

The minimum password length is eight characters. The password expires after 365 days.
Task Enable Encryption for messages matching a compliance rule

Enable the required encryption features on your McAfee Email Gateway for messages that match a
compliance rule.
In this example, email messages that match the HIPAA Compliance rules will be encrypted.
Task
370
Click Enable compliance, and select Create new rule from template.
Search for the HIPAA Compliance rule and select it.
Click Next to progress through the wizard.
Select the primary action to Allow Through (Monitor).
In And also, select Deliver message using encryption.
Click Finish, and click OK to close the dialog box.
Product Guide

Encryption
Select Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Encryption.
In When to Encrypt, select Only when triggered from a scanner action.
10 In On-box Encryption Options, select Secure Web Mail, and click OK.
Task Use S/MIME to encrypt all email to a specific target

domain
only sent using S/MIME encryption to a specific target domain, and set up encryption certificates.
Task Set up encryption certificates

Use this information to
Task
1
Click Email | Certificate Management | Certificates | CA Certificates.
Import any required certificate.
Click Email | Certificate Management | Certificates | S/MIME Encryption Certificates.
Import your S/MIME certificate, such as example.<domainname>.com.
Click Email | Encryption | S/MIME | Sending Email
Click Add Domain, and type example.<domainname>.com.
In S/MIME Certificate, select the certificate for example.<domainname>.com that you just imported.
Task Encrypt all email using S/MIME to a specific target domain

Use this task to set up a policy that uses S/MIME encryption certificates.
Task
1
Click Email | Email Policies | Add Policy....
In Policy name, type the name of the policy, such as Recipients for example.domainname.com.
Click Add Rule.
Select Recipient email address in Rule type.
In Match select Is like. In Value, type *@example.<domainname>.com and click OK.
In Email direction, select Outbound and click OK.

The policy is created.
In the new policy, select Encryption.
Deselect Use the same settings as the default policy.
In When to Encrypt, select Always.
10 In On-box Encryption Options, select S/MIME and click OK.

Product Guide
371

Encryption
Task Deliver all email from a specific customer using S/MIME

encryption
Create a policy to deliver all email received from a particular customer using S/MIME encryption.
Before you begin
Ensure that customer <abc> can use S/MIME to encrypt all email messages to your
organization. Let them know that you will be generating an S/MIME encryption certificate
that they will need to install on their email gateway.
Task
1
Click Email | Encryption | S/MIME | S/MIME Encryption Certificate.
Click Export.
Select Export the certificate only (no private key).
Click Next.
This will generate a self signed certificate.
Save the file smime_encryptor_<machinename>.crt by right clicking on the link.
Click Finish.
Click Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Encryption.
Select Attempt to decrypt S/MIME-encrypted emails in On-box Decryption Options.
Send the certificate smime_encryptor_<machinename>.crt to customer <abc>, to use for

encrypting all of their email messages to your organization.
Once the customer successfully configures their email system to use S/MIME encryption with the
certificate you provided, McAfee Email Gateway will automatically decrypt all of the incoming S/MIME
emails from this customer using the private key.
Task Use PGP to encrypt all email messages

Import a PGP key, and use PGP encryption to encrypt all outbound email messages.
only sent using S/PGP encryption to a specific target domain, and set up encryption certificates.
Task Import the PGP key

Use this task to import a PGP for a specific target domain..
Task
372
Click Email | Certificate Management | Certificates | PGP Encryption Keys and import your PGP key, such as
example.<domainname>.com.
Click Email | Encryption | PGP | Sending Email
Click Add Domain, and type example.<domainname>.com.
In PGP Key, select the key for example.<domainname>.com that you just imported.
Product Guide

Encryption
Specify when to encrypt outgoing email messages to a target domain with

PGP
Use this task to add a policy that encrypts all messages going a to a specific external domain.
Task
1
Click Email --> Email Policies --> Add Policy....
In Policy name, type the name of the policy, such as Recipients for example.domainname.com.
Click Add Rule. Select Recipient email address in Rule type.
In Match, select Is like. In Value, type *@example.<domainname>.com and click OK.
In Email direction, select Outbound and click OK.

The policy is created.
In the new policy, select Encryption.
Deselect Use the same settings as the default policy.
In When to Encrypt, select Always.
In On-box Encryption Options, select PGP and click OK.
Task Deliver all email from a specific customer using PGP

encryption
Create a policy to deliver all email received from a particular customer using PGP encryption.
Before you begin
Ensure that customer <abc> can use PGP to encrypt all email messages sent to your
organization. Let them know that you will be generating an PGP encryption key that they
will need to install on their email gateway.
Task
1
Click Email | Encryption | PGP | PGP Encryption Key.
Click Export.
Select Export the public key only (no private key).
Click Next.
This will generate a PGP public key.
Save the file pgp_encryptor_<machinename>.asc by right clicking on the link.
Click Finish.
Click Email | Email Policies | Policy Options | Encryption.
Select Attempt to decrypt PGP-encrypted emails in On-box Decryption Options.
Send the public key pgp_encryptor_<machinename>.asc to customer <abc>, to use for encrypting
all of their email messages to your organization.
Product Guide
373

Once the customer successfully configures their email system to use PGP encryption with the public
key you provided, McAfee Email Gateway will automatically decrypt all of the incoming PGP emails
from this customer using its private key.
The Certificate Management pages enable you to configure and view certificates for use with your
appliance.
Email | Certificate Management

Contents
Certificates
Option definitions Certificate Details dialog box
Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs)
Certificates
Use the linked pages to view and change important information about the certificates relating to your
appliance.
Email | Certificate Management | Certificates

Contents
CA certificates
TLS certificates and keys
S/MIME
PGP encryption
CA certificates
Use this page to manage digital certificates from Certification Authorities.
Email | Certificate Management | Certificates | CA Certificates

If a yellow exclamation point appears next to the certificate after you click the green checkmark to
apply the change, the certificate is not currently trusted. Import the associated CA certificate before you
use the new certificate.
Description of the icons

Icon
Description
Certificate is valid
Certificate is invalid. For example, the certificate has expired.
374
Product Guide

Benefits of using CA certificates

This information describes the benefits to using CA certificates to transfer email securely.
Certificates allow the traffic from your appliance to be trusted by other systems. They are needed for
the secure transfer of email. Over 100 popular certificates from certificate authorities such as Thawte
and Verisign are available. Certificates typically have a lifetime of several months or years, so they do
not need to be managed often.
RSA keys can be used both for encryption and for signing. DSA keys can be used for signing only.
Option definitions - CA Certificates

Option
Definition
Certificate ID
Displays the name of the certificate.
Trusted
Specifies whether a certificate is valid. For example, this option is deselected if

the certificate has expired.
Subject
Displays details about the certificate.
Issuer
Displays the certificate-issuing authority, such as Thawte and Verisign.
Expires
Displays the certificate's expiry date, such as May 15 2010 12:15:00. If this date
has passed, the certificate is not valid.
Delete
When clicked, deletes the selected certificate.
View
When clicked, displays details of the selected certificate.
Export Selected or
Export All
When clicked, opens a browser for saving a file. If you export a single certificate,
the file name includes the certificate ID. The file name extension is crt (for
Base64, PEM) or p7b (for PKCS#7).
Mark All Certificates

As Untrusted
Defines all listed certificates as untrusted.
Import CA Certificate
When clicked, opens another window where you can select a file. The imported
certificate can be in one of these formats:
Binary (or DER-encoded) certificate file
PEM (Base64) encoded certificates
Binary PKCS#7 file
PEM-encoded PKCS#7 file
The appliance can accept certificate chains and certificates with
password-protected private keys.
The appliance only verifies the certificate, and makes it available to use, after you
click the icon to apply your changes:
Product Guide
375


Use this page to manage digital certificates and keys for the secure transfer of email using Transport
Layer Security (TLS).
Email | Certificate Management | Certificates | TLS Certificates and Keys

When requesting your TLS certificates, McAfee recommends that you include the host name and the IP
address for the appliance used to decrypt the TLS-encrypted email. With clustered appliances in either
Transparent Router or Explicit Proxy mode, include the virtual host name and virtual IP address for the
cluster, rather than the physical IP addresses.
Import the trusted certificates authorities and certificates from the participating organizations before
you begin TLS configuration. RSA keys can be used both for encryption and for signing. DSA keys can
be used for signing only.
Description of the icons

Icon Description
Certificate is valid.
Certificate cannot be verified. Import the associated CA certificate before you use the new TLS
certificate.
Certificate is invalid. For example, the certificate has expired.
Benefits of using TLS certificates and keys

Certificates allow other systems to trust the traffic from your Email Gateway appliances.
These certificates are typically long-lived, with a lifetime of several months or years, requiring only
infrequent management.
Using McAfee ePO to manage TLS certificates

From within your Email Gateway appliance, you can create a TLS certificate package containing all TLS
certificates and keys on the appliance. When creating this package, you have the option of specifying
a passphrase to encrypt the package.
When you have created the TLS certificate package, you can import it into your McAfee ePO server.
You cannot view the details of the certificates or change them from within McAfee ePO.
Once imported into McAfee ePO, you can push and install these TLS certificates and keys to other
Email Gateway appliances being managed from your McAfee ePO server. This feature provides central
management of the TLS certificates used by your Email Gateway appliances, rather than having to
manage the certificates on each appliance individually.
Option definitions - TLS Certificates and Keys

376
Option
Definition
Certificate ID
Subject
Issuer
Displays the certificate-issuing authority such as Thawte or Verisign.
Expires
Displays the certificate's expiry date, such as May 05 2010 12:15:00.
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Delete
Deletes the selected certificate.
View
Displays details of the selected certificate, such as its version, issuer, and public
key.
Export
Opens another window, where you can choose to export the certificate or a
complete certificate chain, and specify the certificate format. The file name
extension is typically CRT.
Import Certificate
and Key
Opens another window where you can select a file. The imported certificate can be
in one of these formats:
Binary (or DER-encoded) certificate file
PEM (Base64) encoded certificates
Binary PKCS#12 file
PEM-encoded PKCS#12 file
You can also import a .zip archive containing multiple certificates.
location.
The appliance only verifies the certificate, and makes it available to use, after you
click to apply your changes:
Configure TLS for

SMTP
Click to jump to Email | Encryption | TLS.
Task Import a TLS package into McAfee ePO

Import a package of TLS certificates into your McAfee ePO server.
Before you begin
From an Email Gateway appliance, ensure that you have exported the required TLS
certificates and keys in a TLS package, and that you can access that file. If encrypted with
a passphrase, make sure you know this phrase before attempting to import the certificate
package.
Task
1
From the McAfee ePO user interface, select Menu | Gateway Protection | MEG 7.6.4 Common Settings |
Certificates | TLS Certificates and Keys.
Click Import TLS Package.
Click Browse and locate the required certificate package.

Importing a certificate package overwrites any existing TLS certificates stored on your McAfee ePO
server.
Click OK.
All certificates included within the TLS certificate package are displayed.
Product Guide
377

Task Push TLS certificates to Email Gateway appliances

After being imported into McAfee ePO, the TLS certificates and keys are automatically pushed to all
your Email Gateway appliances controlled by McAfee ePO. This automatic policy push occurs at the
next agent-server communication interval (ASCI).
Before you begin
Make sure your Email Gateway appliances are managed by McAfee ePO, and you have
imported the required TLS package into McAfee ePO.
To immediately push the TLS certificates to your managed Email Gateway appliances:
Task
1
From within McAfee ePO, drill down the System Tree and select the Email Gateway appliances to
receive the TLS certificates and keys.
From Actions | Agent, select Wake Up Agents.
The TLS certificates and keys, and all other Email Gateway policy settings are pushed to the selected
S/MIME
Understand how McAfee Email Gateway uses S/MIME to provide encrypted delivery of email messages.
Email | Encryption | S/MIME
Benefits of using S/MIME certificates

Use S/MIME certificates to send and receive server-based messages when the receiving server will not
accommodate a secure session.
Using S/MIME certificates, McAfee Email Gateway checks each incoming message to see if it is an S/
MIME message. If it is, Email Gateway checks for a key to decrypt the message. If the key exists, the
message is decrypted; if not, it is treated as a normal message.
Before you can use the S/MIME features, you must obtain and install your individual S/MIME certificate.
You can obtain it from either your in-house certificate authority (CA) or a public CA.
Option definitions S/MIME Encryption Certificates

378
Option
Definition
Certificate ID
Subject
Issuer
Displays the certificate-issuing authority such as Thawte or Verisign.
Expires
Displays the certificate's expiry date, such as May 05 2010 12:15:00.
Delete
When clicked, deletes the selected certificate.
View
When clicked, displays details of the selected certificate, such as its version, issuer,
and public key.
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Export
When clicked, opens another window, where you can choose to export the certificate
or a complete certificate chain, and specify the certificate format. The file name
extension is typically CRT.
Import Certificate When clicked, opens another window where you can select a file. The imported
certificate can be in one of these formats:
Binary or base-64 (PEM) encoded certificate
Binary PKCS#7 file
You can choose to import any CA certificates in the file.
You can also import a zip archive containing multiple certificates.

The appliance only verifies the certificate, and makes it available to use, after you click
to apply your changes:
PGP encryption
Understand how McAfee Email Gateway uses PGP to provide encrypted delivery of email messages.
Email | Encryption | PGP

Contents
PGP Sending Email

Understand the options available for the PGP encryption keys.
Email | Encryption | PGP | PGP Encryption Key

Benefits of using PGP Encryption
PGP encryption is a data encryption/decryption system that provides cryptographic privacy and
authentication for data communication.
PGP is used by many companies to sign, encrypt and decrypt email messages. PGP encryption uses
combinations of methods of cryptography, file compression and other operations, each of which can
use a variety of different algorithms. PGP includes the use of public key encryption, bound to a user
name and/or an email address, and private key encryption, maintained in secret, to encrypt outgoing
messages and decrypt incoming messages.
Option definitions PGP Encryption Key
Information about the PGP encryption keys.
Option
Definition
Displayable name A user-editable field, allowing you to choose the name that is displayed for this
encryption key.
Comment
A user-editable field, allowing you to choose a comment for this encryption key.
Email address
The email address associated with this encryption key.
View
Click to display the content of the encryption key.
Product Guide
379

Option
Definition
Import
Click to open the Import Certificate and Key dialog box where you an upload a certificate to
the appliance, and add a passphrase to open a private key.
Export
Click to open the Certificate and Key Export dialog box where you can choose whether you
want to export with no private key, or export a complete chain, and the format of key
that you want to export.
PGP Sending Email

Understand the options available for PGP sending email.
Email | Encryption | PGP | Sending Email

Benefits of using PGP Sending Email
You can manage the PGP Encryption Keys from external domains that are installed on your McAfee
Email Gateway.
Manage the PGP Encryption Keys stored on your McAfee Email Gateway.
Option definitions Sending Email
Manage installed PGP keys.
Option
Definition
Escrow key
Select from the available keys.

When you have selected a key, click View key to see the information within it.
PGP Encryption Keys for

External Domains
See the currently stored PGP Encryption Keys for External Domains.
Use Filter to help find a particular key.
Domain
Lists the domain to which each PGP encryption key applies.
PGP Key
Shows detail about the PGP key.
Add Domain
View Key
View information about the selected PGP key.
Delete the selected domains and their PGP Encryption Keys.
Manage PGP keys
Click to move to Email | Certificate Management | Certificates | PGP Encryption Keys
Option definitions Certificate Details dialog box

View detailed information about the certificates installed on your McAfee Email Gateway.
Option
Definition
Details
View the fully detailed information about the selected certificate.
Certification path
View information about the Certificate ID and the Subject of the certificate.
Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs)

Understand the Certificate Revocation Lists on your appliance.
Email | Certificate Management | Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs)
380
Product Guide

Contents
Installed CRLs
CRL Updates
Installed CRLs
Use this page to manage Certificates Revocation Lists.
Email | Certificate Management | Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs) | Installed CRLs
Benefits of using Certificate Revocation Lists

This information describes the benefits of using Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs)
CRLs typically have a lifetime of several months, so they do not need to be managed often.
Option definitions - Installed CRLs

Option
Definition
ID
Displays the name of the Certificate Authority.
Issuer
Displays the certificate-issuing authority, such as Thawte or Verisign.
Last Update and

Next Update
Displays applicable dates for the CRL.
Delete
When clicked, deletes the selected CRL.

You cannot delete a CRL that is still current. When you delete a certificate, its CRL
is deleted automatically.
When clicked, displays the contents of the selected CRL.
View
Some CRLs are large.
Export Selected
When clicked, opens a browser for saving a file. The file name extension is
typically CRL.
Import CRL
When clicked, opens a browser for selecting a file.

The appliance can fetch a local file or a file from a website.
The appliance only verifies the CRL, and makes it available to use, after you click
to apply your changes:
CRL Updates
Use this page to specify how often the appliance fetches updates to its Certificate Revocation Lists.
Email | Certificate Management | Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs) | CRL Updates
Product Guide
381

Benefits of the CRL Updates feature

This information describes the benefits of the CRL Updates features.
Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs) contain information about certificates that should no longer be
relied upon. This may be for one of many reasons, including:
The private key used by the certificate may have been compromised.
The certificate may have been superceded.
The certificate may contain an error.
Being able to regularly update the CRLs on your McAfee Email Gateway enables you to be confident
that the McAfee Email Gateway will not continue to use certificates that have been revoked.
Option definitions - CRL Updates

Option
Definition
Update now
Update the CRLs immediately.
Specify the frequency
Specifies how often the appliance will collect CRL updates. Choose a time
when your network is least busy.
If you do not want to use this feature, select Never.
Use the default proxy

settings
If you intend to use a HTTP proxy that is not specified on the Default Server
Settings page, deselect this checkbox.
Configure defaults
When clicked, opens the Default Server Settings page, where you can view or
change the default settings for the HTTP proxy.
To view proxy information at any other time, select System | Appliance Management
| Default Server Settings from the navigation bar.
Proxy server to Proxy

password
Specifies the proxy details.
Hybrid email scanning uses the McAfee Email Gateway to scan your outbound email traffic, and uses
the cloud-based McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) to scan your inbound email traffic.
Contents
Benefits of using hybrid email scanning
About the hybrid email registration and configuration process
Registration
Domain Management
Benefits of using hybrid email scanning

Hybrid email scanning uses the McAfee Email Gateway appliances within your network and the
cloud-based McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) to provide you with comprehensive email scanning.
When McAfee Email Gateway is configured to use hybrid email scanning, your inbound email traffic is
scanned by the cloud-based McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service, and your outbound email is
scanned by the McAfee Email Gateway appliance. Your inbound email traffic is scanned within the
cloud, providing a distributed scanning load and reduced bandwidth, as messages can be blocked in
the cloud before they enter your network.
382
Product Guide

Inbound email messages from trusted partners can be send directly to your McAfee Email Gateway for
scanning.
All communications between the cloud service and your McAfee Email Gateway are encrypted. You
configure and optimize the scanning of both inbound and outbound email traffic from a single location
the user interface of your McAfee Email Gateway.
Figure 4-5 Email flow using Hybrid scanning
When the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) makes detections within any email messages, information
about the email message and the detection is sent to your McAfee Email Gateway appliance.
Then, depending on your configuration, the McAfee Email Gateway can request the message data be
sent for further actions or for delivery. If the action is to quarantine the message, the inbound email
messages are quarantined alongside quarantined outbound email messages.
This allows you to use Message Search or other system logging options on your appliance to
investigate each message, regardless of whether it is scanned locally by your McAfee Email Gateway
or by McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid).
The communication between McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) and the appliance must not pass through
another MTA, as the communication uses a proprietary protocol and will not succeed if another SMTP
gateway is involved in the conversation.
Product Guide
383

About the hybrid email registration and configuration process

Understanding the end-to-end, purchase-to-final-configuration process will enable you to best set up
hybrid email scanning.
1
The process to register your McAfee Email Gateway appliance and the McAfee Email Protection
(Hybrid) service starts when you purchase hybrid email scanning from McAfee or a McAfee partner.
When you purchased your McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid), you were asked for information that is
used to set up a cloud-based account for you. As soon as this information has been entered, you
receive an email message containing the required links and credentials.
Install your McAfee Email Gateway appliance. When running through the Setup Wizard, select Use the
McAfee SaaS Email Protection Service to process inbound email on the Email Configuration page.
After applying the Setup Wizard configuration and re-loading the McAfee Email Gateway user
interface, the Email | Hybrid Configuration | Registration page is displayed.
Clicking the link in the Email | Hybrid Configuration | Registration page displays information that outlines
the registration process for your appliance and McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service.
Follow the information given to complete the registration, using the credentials provided by email
message.
After you have successfully completed registration, a new tab appears at
Configuration | Domain Management.
Email | Hybrid
Before inbound email traffic can be scanned by the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid), you must first
configure McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) to accept email for your domain(s), and then configure
your public MX records for those domain(s) to point to the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid)
servers.
Registration
To enable and configure hybrid email scanning, you must first register your McAfee Email Gateway
appliances with the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service.
Contents
Benefits of registering hybrid email scanning
Option definitions Registration
Task Register with the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service
Task Cancel your registration with the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service
Benefits of registering hybrid email scanning

Enabling communication between your McAfee Email Gateway appliances and McAfee Email
Protection (Hybrid) allows you to then configure settings for hybrid email scanning and benefit from
having your inbound email traffic scanned in the cloud.
With this information entered into the McAfee Email Gateway user interface, the initial communications
between your McAfee Email Gateway and the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) can start, allowing the
creation and exchange of the certificates and keys required to ensure secure communications between
your appliance and the cloud-based service.
384
Product Guide

Option definitions Registration

Use this page to register your McAfee Email Gateway appliances with the McAfee Email Protection
(Hybrid) so they can communicate.
Table 4-162 Option definitions Registration page
Option
Definition
User name
Enter the user name found in your welcome email.
Password
Specifies the password found in your welcome email.
Configure this appliance to handle email for Configures the appliance you are currently logged onto to act as
the initial domain
the initial McAfee Email Gateway for your McAfee Email Protection
(Hybrid).
Not displayed when your
appliance is ePO-managed.
Address
After an email message from your initial domain has been

scanned by the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service,
communication is initiated to the McAfee Email Gateway at this
address.
If your McAfee Email Gateway does not have a publicly
reachable IP address perhaps because it is behind a network
address translation (NAT) setup you must configure your
initial domain from the Email | Hybrid Configuration | Domain Management
page.
Specifies the port assigned to your initial McAfee Email Gateway.
Port
If the publicly exposed port of the McAfee Email Gateway is not

the same as the port the McAfee Email Gateway is listening on
perhaps if you are port mapping go to the Email | Hybrid
Configuration | Domain Management page.
Registers your McAfee Email Gateway with the McAfee Email

Protection (Hybrid).
Register
After registration, a new tab, Email | Hybrid Configuration | Domain

Management appears. Also, a new section, Cancel Registration, is
displayed on this page.
Table 4-163 Option definitions Cancel Registration
Option
Definition
Cancel Registration Disables your registration and prevents the use of the McAfee Email Protection
(Hybrid) to process your inbound email. You do not need to enter any credentials.
Before cancelling your registration, you should ensure that the MX records for your
managed domains no longer point to the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service.
Task Register with the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service

You need to register your McAfee Email Gateway appliances with the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid)
before you can benefit from using hybrid email scanning.
Before you can register with the service, you must have received your welcome email containing the
user name and password you will use.
Product Guide
385

Task
1
Select Email | Hybrid Configuration.

The hybrid configuration Registration page appears, and the system checks to ensure your appliance
can connect to the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid).
This is the only page available under Hybrid Configuration before registration is complete. Guidance for
completing your registration appears on the page.
Enter the user name and password from your welcome email in the appropriate data fields.
(Optional) Configure your initial appliance for inbound email, for use by the McAfee Email
Protection (Hybrid) service.
If your McAfee Email Gateway does not have a public IP address, use the Email | Hybrid Configuration |
Domain Management page.
Select the Configure this appliance to handle email for the initial domain checkbox.
Select the appliance domain name and IP address from the drop down list.
Select the port assigned to the appliance from the drop down list.
You should configure a virtual address for the receiving appliance when the appliance is the cluster
master.
4
Click Register.
Your appliance is registered with McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid), and the Domain Management tab
appears in the Hybrid Configuration window. The Registration window expands to show the Cancel Registration
information.
Task Cancel your registration with the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid)
service
You can stop using the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) at any time.
Before you begin
Before you cancel your service, ensure that the MX records for any managed domain no
longer point to the service.
Task
1
Select Email | Hybrid Configuration | Registration.

The Registration page appears.
Click Cancel Registration.

A confirmation dialog appears.
Click OK to confirm your intention to cancel registration.
Your registration is cancelled.

You can re-register with the protection service using your original credentials.
386
Product Guide

Domain Management
You can use the user interface to specify which domains you want scanned by McAfee Email Protection
(Hybrid).
Configure your domains after you have registered McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid).
The Email | Hybrid Configuration | Domain Management tab is only visible after you have registered to use Hybrid
Email scanning.
The Domain Management window shows the list of domains you have configured for McAfee Email
Protection (Hybrid), and their associated appliances. From this window, you can add domains, and edit
or delete existing domains.
Contents
Benefits of using domain management
Option definitions Domain Management page
Option definitions Add/Edit domains page
Task Manage your domains using Hybrid Email protection
Benefits of using domain management

Using hybrid email scanning allows you to enjoy the benefits of both a cloud-based email scanning
system, and an on-site, dedicated email scanning appliance.
The Domain Management page enables you to specify and manage the domains for which inbound email
traffic is to be scanned by the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid).
By using the Domain Management page, you can quickly specify the domains that are to have inbound
email traffic scanned "in the cloud" from within the McAfee Email Gateway user interface. You do not
need to go to separate interfaces to configure your inbound and outbound email scanning; both are
managed from the same user interface.
As the inbound email settings are transferred to the McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service when you
make any changes to this page, these settings are changed in real-time; you do not need to click the
Apply button to save the changes to the McAfee Email Gateway configuration.
Option definitions Domain Management page

Use this page to manage the domains that you want scanned by McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid)
service. The initial domain you registered for this service cannot be deleted.
Table 4-164 Domain Management option definitions
Option
Definition
Domain
Shows the fully qualified domain names of all domains protected by the McAfee
Email Protection (Hybrid) service.
McAfee Email Gateways Shows the IP addresses for the McAfee Email Gateway appliances associated with
each managed domain.
Edit
Opens a window for modifying or deleting this existing domain.
Add Domain
Opens the Edit Domain window, where you can add or modify domains where you
want email scanned.
Product Guide
387

Option definitions Add/Edit domains page

Use this page to add, edit, or delete domains you want scanned by the McAfee Email Protection
(Hybrid) service. The initial domain you registered for this service cannot be deleted.
Table 4-165
Edit Domain option definitions
Option
Definition
Domain name
Specifies the fully qualified domain name of the server you are adding or editing.
Public addresses of
Lists the McAfee Email Gateway appliances associated with the domain, showing:
McAfee Email Gateways
IP address or domain name (port optional)
Current status
Rank within the list of appliances for this domain
You can rank the appliances on your list to establish a preference order, with
the lowest number being tried first. The McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid)
service will try the appliances in rank order until it succeeds. If all appliances
are ranked equally, the service round-robins amongst them.
Add McAfee Email

Gateways
Opens a window for adding a McAfee Email Gateway to the list.
Test Connection
Tests if the selected host is accessible from McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid)
service. The test verifies:
A connection can be established to the service.
The McAfee Email Gateway has been registered with the McAfee Email
Protection (Hybrid) service.
The test button is active when you select a single appliance.
Delete
Deletes selected McAfee Email Gateway appliances from the list.
Task Manage your domains using Hybrid Email protection

The Domain Management page shows the list of protected domains and their associated appliances. McAfee
Email Protection (Hybrid) will process all inbound email traffic for these domains.
From this page, you can add, edit, or delete protected domains.
Task Add a managed domain

Add a domain that you want scanned by McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service.
The first domain on your list is the initial domain you entered when you registered your appliance with
the service. It cannot be deleted.
Task
1
From the Domain Management window, click Add Domain.

The Edit Domain window appears.
Enter the fully qualified domain name for the domain you want to add.
Click Add McAfee Email Gateways.

Data fields for the new domain appear in the Public addresses of McAfee Email Gateways portion of the
window.
388
Type the IP address or the fully qualified domain name for the appliance. Optionally, you can
include the port identification.
Product Guide

To indicate the status of the appliance, select or deselect the Active? checkbox. Click Add McAfee Email
Gateways again and repeat steps 4 and 5 if you want to add more than one appliance.
(Optional) If you add more than one appliance, you can indicate their rank (order) by typing a
number in the Rank data field.
(Optional) You can test the connection between any single appliance and the McAfee Email
Protection (Hybrid) service by clicking Test Connection.
When you have completed the information on this window, click OK.
Your domain appears on the list on the Domain Management page
Task Edit an existing domain

You can modify the settings of domains that are scanned by McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service.
The initial domain on your list is the domain you entered as part of your user name when you
registered your appliance with the service. This domain name appears in boldface type. You can edit
it, but you cannot change the domain name or delete it.
Task
1
On the Domain Management page, click the Edit icon for the domain you want to change.
The Edit Domain window appears, showing the current information about the selected domain.
Make your changes to the domain. You can change the domain name, add or delete appliances,
change the status, and for multiple appliances change the rank.
(Optional) To test the connection between any single appliance and the McAfee Email Protection
(Hybrid) service, click Test Connection.
When you have finished editing the domain, click OK.
The changes you made appear on the Domain Management page.
Task Delete an existing domain

You can remove a domain you no longer want scanned by McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service.
The first domain on your list is the initial domain you entered when you registered your appliance with
the service. You cannot delete it.
Task
1
On the Domain Management page, select the check boxes for one or more domains you want to delete.
The Delete Selected Domains button becomes active.
Click Delete Selected Domains.

A confirmation dialog appears.
Click OK to confirm your intention to delete the domain.
The domain or domains are removed from the Domain Management page.
Product Guide
389

Group Management
Group Management
The Group Management pages enable you to set up directory services to work with your LDAP servers,
and create network groups, and user groups who relay on the appliances.
Email | Group Management
Directory Services
Use this page to build a group of directory services to work with your LDAP servers.
Email | Group Management | Directory Services

Directory Services
Directory Synchronization
Benefits of the Directory Services options

This information describes the benefits to using the Directory Services features to connect to your
LDAP servers.
Add directory service servers using the Directory Service wizard to set up a connection between the
appliance and an LDAP server so that the attributes in the LDAP server define behavior in your email
flow. You can therefore define policies, and update your LDAP to change email behavior. You can
modify the following features in the appliance to work with LDAP:
Policy selection
Delivery routes
Custom queries can be created for use in policy selection using the Add Query option in the Add Directory
Service wizard.
The appliance supports the following types of LDAP servers:
Microsoft Active Directory
Lotus Domino
Novell NDS
Generic LDAP Server v3
Netscape/Sun iPlanet
Microsoft Exchange
You can set up groups of LDAP servers to ensure high availability by adding secondary servers to the
primary LDAP server.
The name that you give the primary server Service name in the Add Directory Service wizard is the name of the
group that you see when you come to select the LDAP group in the LDAP-related features in McAfee
Email Gateway, such as Address Masquerading.
Directory Synchronization.
Directory Synchronization is the mechanism to synchronize LDAP data on the appliance with remote
LDAP servers.
390
Product Guide

Group Management
Once LDAP data has been synchronized, the appliance no longer performs LDAP lookups on the
remote server and uses its own on-box database, minimizing loading on the remote LDAP servers.
To enable Directory synchronization, add the LDAP server to which you need to synchronize to the
Directory Services page.
You must also select the queries that need to be synchronized, by selecting Cache Result option on the
Directory Service Queries page of the Add Directory Service wizard.
The advantages of Directory synchronization are more apparent on cluster or blade server
environments because each scanner no longer performs LDAP lookups, but uses the on-box database.
The Master is responsible for synchronizing the database with the remote LDAP servers. Once the
synchronization is finished the database is synchronized with other members of the cluster and is then
used for LDAP checks.
Attributes on the LDAP server can be accessed in real time (allowing for the most up-to-date data to
be available), or be cached on the appliance (a faster option that causes less impact to your network)
by using the Cache Result checkbox in the Add Directory Services wizard.
Use the Synchronization schedule feature to schedule when to update the cache.
McAfee Email Gateway uses queries defined on the Directory Service Queries page to populate the local
LDAP database. The 'List of Groups' and 'Synchronization' queries are mandatory and cannot be
unselected, as they are used to get group and email address information from the LDAP server. You
can choose to cache all other queries. If you choose not to cache the results of any other query,
McAfee Email Gateway will carry out a real-time lookup when the SMTP features that use the query
are used.
By default LDAP caching is on for each query. When you apply configuration changes to the appliance,
the synchronization process updates the local LDAP cache database. If the database has not been
updated for a particular server, the LDAP lookup is done in real time. Additionally, if the query is missing
or has been modified for a particular server, the LDAP lookup is done in real time.
When you configure Directory Synchronization, the following information is stored in the on-box
database:
The LDAP queries that you have configured to run against the LDAP servers.
All the LDAP groups.
User information, stored as a BLOB. This information includes the email addresses of the users, the
group membership of each user and any extra information collected by the LDAP queries.
Running the LDAP synchronization

LDAP synchronization automatically starts when you apply configuration changes that include adding a
new LDAP server, or that include any changes to LDAP queries.
You can manually start the LDAP synchronization process by clicking Email | Group Management | Directory
Services | Directory Synchronization | Update Now. You can also schedule regular LDAP synchronization from
Email | Group Management | Directory Services | Directory Synchronization | Synchronization schedule.
You can check the current status of LDAP synchronization by looking at Email | Group Management |
Directory Services | Directory Synchronization | Update Information. You can also view the LDAP synchronization
data in the log files in /var/log/messages.
Any LDAP synchronization failures are logged and can be sent to administrators by SNMP, Email or
Syslog.
Product Guide
391

Group Management
Option definitions Directory Services

Directory Services
This information describes the settings of any LDAP server that you have set up. To add a connection
to an LDAP server, click Add Server.
Option
Definition
Name, Address and

Type
Displays information about each directory server such as a type like Domino or
Active Directory. Click Edit to open the Add Directory Service wizard to change a
server's settings.
Add Server
When clicked, starts the Add Directory Services wizard where you can add details
of a directory service.
The Service name that you give this server is what is shown when you set up features
in the appliance to work with LDAP.
The server at the top of the list is queried first. You can create groups of servers
by using the Add Secondary Server option.
Add Secondary
Server
Use this option to create groups of LDAP servers by adding secondary servers that
are queried should the primary server be unavailable, or not have the required
information. From the features that work with LDAP, you will not see secondary
servers listed, only the primary server in the group.
Delete Server
Remove primary, or secondary servers from the list.
Perform server
certificate verification
on secure
connections
Sets whether the appliance should attempt to validate a remote server certificate
that is used to encrypt a secure connection between the appliance and an LDAP
server.
You can manage the certificates required from Email | Certificate Management.
Directory Synchronization
This information describes the options available in the Directory Synchronization section of the page.
Option
Definition
Update information
Displays the status of the information in the on-box directory:
Information is available for query. The time and date shows when the
latest update occurred.
The on-box directory has no data, or is not up-to-date.
Update Now
When clicked, the appliance immediately copies directory information from the
servers under Directory Services to its own directory.
Synchronization
schedule
Specifies how often the appliance copies directory information from the LDAP
servers to which you have connected to its own directory.
Setting the schedule to Hourly can create a heavy load on your network.
Optimizing the directory synchronization queries

Correctly optimizing the queries improves the response between your McAfee Email Gateway and your
LDAP servers.
All queries against a particular server are accessed from the Directory Service Queries page.
Test each query using the Test button to confirm that it gives you the expected results.
392
Product Guide

Group Management
The queries should only take a few seconds to complete. If the queries do not quickly return a
response, check the following:
Make sure that your LDAP queries are valid.
Ensure all the LDAP attributes specified in the query are also available within the LDAP schemas on
the server being queried.
Make sure all LDAP attributes specified in the query are indexed on the remote LDAP server.
Network Groups
This page enables you to create network groups to use as a policy selection criteria.
Email | Group Management | Network Groups
Benefits of setting up network groups

Creating network groups allows you to apply policies to a group of individuals at one time.
You can define network groups based on any one of several parameters, such as IP addresses, host
names, and so forth. All individuals who share that parameter will be included in policies you define.
Network groups are not based directly on individual email addresses.
You can also define user groups based on sender email addresses, recipient email addresses, or LDAP
queries.
Option definitions Network Groups

Option
Definition
Group Name , In use?, and

Delete
Displays the name of the group, whether it is in use, and provides the
option to remove the group from the list.
Add
Click to open the Add Network Groups dialog box.
Option definitions Add Network Group

This information describes the options available in this dialog box.
Option
Definition
Group name
The name of the group.
Selected or unselected Defines whether the group is in use.

Use the arrow icons to move the rules up and down the list. The rules are
applied in a "top-down" order.
Rule type
Choose from:
IP address
VLAN identifier
Network connection
Host name
Product Guide
393

Group Management
Option
Definition
Match
Choose from:
is
is not
is in
is not in
Value
Add Rule / Delected

Selected Rules
Adds a new line to the list where you can specify the name, type, and values
to match on for a new network group.
Option definitions Add Rule

Provide information required to add a new Group Management rule.
This dialog box is used for both Add Network Groups | Add Rule and the Add User Groups | Add Rule.
Option
Definition
Rule Type
Define the type of rule.

For Add Network Groups, options include:
IP address (default)
VLAN identifier
Network connection
Host name
For Add User Groups, options include:
Sender email address (default)
Recipeint email address
LDAP query
Match
Specify how this rule matches. Options include:

is (default)
is not
is in
is not in
Value
Enter the Value for this rule.
Email Senders and Recipients

This page enables you to create groups of users who can relay messages on the appliance.
Email | Group Management | Email Senders and Recipients
Benefits of the Email Senders and Recipients options

The email senders and recipient (user group) options allow you to define groups of individuals to
whom you can apply policies at once.
You can define user groups based on several criteria:
394
Product Guide

Group Management
Sender or recipient email address
Pre-established sender or recipient user groups
LDAP authentication
Option definitions Email Senders and Recipients

Option
Definition
Group name , In use?, and

Delete
Displays the name of the group, whether it is in use, and provides the
option to remove the group from the list.
Add
Opens the Add User Group dialog box.
Option definitions Add User Group

This information describes the options available in this dialog box.
Option
Definition
Group name
Type the name of the group.
Selected or
unselected
Rule type
Choose from:
Sender user group

Choose from:
Match
is
is not
is like
is not like
Value
Add Rule
Adds a new rule to the list .
Task Add a user group

Before you begin
providing output.
Task
1
Product Guide
395

Click Add Rule.


Use this wizard to add a connection between the appliance and any LDAP servers that you have.
Attributes from the LDAP servers can be used by other features in the appliance such as Recipient
Authentication and Address Masquerading.
The appliance comes with a selection of queries already set up for you. Each query can be customized
and the results tested to ensure that they are what you expect. the following queries are available:
List of groups
Valid recipient
Group membership
Delivery MTA
Synchronization
Address masquerade
Use the Next > and < Back buttons to navigate through the screens. After you have successfully tested
the group and member queries, click Finish to complete the wizard.
Benefits of adding LDAP directory services

This information describes the benefits of adding directory services.
Use the Directory Service wizard to set up a connection between the appliance and an LDAP server so
that the attributes in the LDAP server define behavior in your email flow. You can therefore define
policies, and update your LDAP to change email behavior. You can modify the following features in the
appliance to work with LDAP:
Policy selection
Delivery routes
Custom queries can be created for use in policy selection using the Add Query option in the Add Directory
Service wizard.
The appliance supports the following types of LDAP servers:
396
Product Guide

Microsoft Active Directory
Lotus Domino
Novell NDS
Generic LDAP Server v3
Microsoft Exchange
You can set up groups of LDAP servers to ensure high availability by adding secondary servers to the
primary LDAP server.
The name that you give the primary server Service name in the Add Directory Service wizard will be the
name of the group that you see when you come to select the LDAP group in the features in Email
Gateway that you can use with LDAP, such as Address Masquerading.
Directory Synchronization offers a choice of access. The appliance can query an external directory server in
real-time, or its own ("on-box") cached directory.
Attributes on the LDAP server can be accessed in real time (allowing for the most up-to-date data to
be available), or be cached on the appliance (a faster option that causes less impact to your network)
by using the Cache Result checkbox in the Add Directory Services wizard.
Use the Synchronization schedule feature to schedule when to update the cache.
Option definitions Directory Service Details page

This information describes the options available on the Directory Service Details page of the wizard.
Option
Definition
Service name
Enter a name for the service you are adding. This name is displayed in the list of
Directory Services
Secure Communication Choose from:

Off not a secure connection. Data travels between the LDAP server and the
appliance in clear text.
Secure LDAP Encrypts the LDAP communication over SSL. By default this
occurs on port 636.
Use TLS Encrypts the LDAP communication over TLS. By default, this occurs
on port 389.
Server address
Enter the address for the server that hosts the directory service you are adding.
Server type
Select the type of LDAP server to which you want to connect:

Active directory
Domino
Novell NDS (eDirectory)
Generic LDAP Server v3 (RFC2251/RFC2307)
Exchange
Based on the server type you select, the default queries are modified to match
with the default attributes. Different server types have different attributes
associated with them depending on the schemas that you have specified.
Base DN
Enter the base distinguished name to be used by the directory service you are
adding.
Username
Enter the user name needed for the appliance to connect to the directory service.
Password
Enter the password needed for the appliance to connect to the directory service.
Product Guide
397

Option
Definition
Referrals
Select this to allow the appliance to follow LDAP referrals to other servers that
hold a part of the directory tree.
Page Size
Shows the number of results per page. Set to 1000 by default.
Option definitions Directory Service Queries page

This information describes the options available on the Directory Service Queries page of the wizard.
Query types
Query Name
Description
List of groups
Query to get a list of all groups used for selecting a policy.

When the primary server and the secondary server have different set of groups, and
if Stop on Result is selected on the primary server, only the groups from the primary
server appear on the policy creation page. To avoid this, deselect Stop On Result for
the List of Groups and Group membership queries.
Group membership
Query to get the list of groups that an email address belongs to.
When the primary server and the secondary server have different set of groups, and
if Stop on Result is selected on the primary server, only the groups from the primary
server appear on the policy creation page. To avoid this, deselect Stop On Result for
the List of Groups and Group membership queries.
Synchronization
Query to get all the email addresses on the LDAP server to synchronize to the
appliance.
Valid recipient
Query to find whether an email recipient is valid on your LDAP server.
Delivery MTA
Query to find the Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to which you want to deliver for a
particular email recipient.
Address masquerade Query to find the email address that you want to masquerade.
Directory Service Query options and actions

Each query has the following options and actions associated with it.
Option
Definition
Enabled
Enables or disables the query.
Cache Result
Specify whether you want to cache results on the appliance to reduce the time it takes
to run the query, and reduce network load. Deselecting this option queries the LDAP
server in real time.
Fail Open
Select to query a secondary LDAP server (if set up) if the primary LDAP server fails.
Stop On Result Select to stop a query on a secondary server when a successful result occurs.
When the primary server and the secondary server have different set of groups, and if
Stop on Result is selected on the primary server, only the groups from the primary server
appear on the policy creation page. To avoid this, deselect Stop On Result for the List of Groups
and Group membership queries.
398
Add Query
Click to open a new page of the wizard that allows you to create a new query in addition
to the queries already set up for you.
Edit Query
Select a query, then click Edit Query to open a new page of the wizard that allows you to
edit the query.
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Remove Query Delete the selected query. Default queries cannot be removed.
Test Query
Click to open a new page of the wizard that allows you to test whether the query
provides the results that you want before you apply the configuration to the appliance.
When the results are returned, click Next to return to this page.
Finish
Completes the wizard. The query becomes available to select in areas of the appliance
that can work with LDAP, such as:
Creating a new policy
Delivering Email
You must apply the changes to the appliance for the LDAP query to register and become
available to create a new policy.
Option definitions Directory Service Query page

Use this page of the wizard to add or edit directory service queries. It becomes available when you
click Add Query or Edit Query on the Directory Service Queries page.
Option
Definition
Full Query String Displays the default attributes associated with the query.
Query Name
The name of the query. Default query names cannot be edited.
Primary Query
Specify the settings for the primary query:

Filter displays the search filters that you want the query to use. Multiple search
filters can be specified to make a request of the LDAP server.
Identity attribute 1 through 4 contains the individual attributes that you want the query
to return.
Secondary Query If necessary, create a secondary query as a further query to the first. For example, if a
primary query in the Group membership query is to locate a specific user, you can create a
secondary query to discover which user group the user belongs to.
Option Definitions Test Directory Service Query page

This information describes the options available on the Test Directory Service Query page of the wizard. This
page becomes available when you click Test Query on the Directory Service Queries page.
To ensure that your query returns the results you want, the wizard provides you with the opportunity
to test the queries that you have defined.
Option
Definition
Query Name
The name of the query that you want to test.
Full Query String
Displays the search filters, and the attributes associated with them.
Perform LDAP Query
Click to have the query tested with the LDAP server.
Query Results
The results are displayed within the Query Results area.
Product Guide
399

Task Set up the appliance to use a Microsoft Exchange Server

as an LDAP server
Use this task to get user email attributes from a Microsoft Exchange server.
Before you begin
McAfee recommends that you set up an update interval that is suitable to the amount of
data transmitting. Choosing a too-frequent update interval can impact your network load.
Task
1
Go to Email | Group Management | Directory Services and click Add Server to open the Add Directory Service
wizard.
On the Directory Service Details page of the wizard, add the following data:
In Service name, type Exchange.
In Secure Communication, keep the setting to Off.
In Server address, type the IP address of the server to which you want to connect.
In Server port, keep the setting to 389.
In Server type, select Exchange.
In Base DN, where the domain name is test.dom, type dc=test, dc=dom.
Type the username and password of the server to which you are connecting, and click Next.
On the Directory Service Queries page of the wizard, ensure that the following queries have the
Enabled and Cache Results checkboxes selected:
List of groups
Group membership
Valid recipient
Delivery MTA
Address masquerade
Click Test to verify the query returns the information you want, then click Finish.
In the Directory Synchronization section of the page, set the frequency to Hourly.
In the Directory Services section of the page, select the service you created, then select Add
Secondary Server to open the Add Directory Service wizard again.
Specify the details of the secondary server that you want to add.
Task Create a sample LDAP query

This task describes how to create a sample LDAP query for use with a Generic LDAP Server v3 server.
Task
400
Go to Email | Group Management | Directory Services.
Click Add Server, and type the name of the service such as generic.
In Server address, add the server IP address of the LDAP server to which you are connecting.
Product Guide

In Server type, select the Generic LDAP Server v3.
In Base DN, where the domain name is test.dom, type dc=admin, dc=test, dc=dom.
Type the username and password of the server to which you are connecting.
Leave the other settings in their default state, and click Next.
Click Add Query and type a name for the query.
In Filter, add the query filter, such as mail=%email%.
10 In Identity attribute, type the attributes that you want to retrieve, such as cn and click Next.
11 On the Directory Service Queries page, select the query you created, and click Test Query.
12 In Identity for query, type the email address that you want to get the cn for, and click Perform LDAP Query.
The cn of the email address displays in the Query Results area.
The query will be available to that directory service.
Use this page to set your email quarantine configurations.
From within this page of the user interface, you can access the settings for the quarantine options,
quarantine digest options, the digest message content, and quarantine queue settings.
Contents
Quarantine Options
Quarantine Digest Options
Option definitions Digest Message Content
Quarantine Queue Settings
Quarantine Options
Use this page to configure your quarantine options.
Email | Quarantine Configuration | Quarantine Options
Product Guide
401

Option definitions Quarantine Options page

Use this information to gain an understanding of the options available from the Quarantine Options
page.
Table 4-166 Option definitions Quarantine Options page
Option
Definition
Use the on-box

quarantine
With this selected, the appliance uses its own database to hold quarantined email
messages.
Use an off-box McAfee

Quarantine Manager
(MQM) service
Select this to use a McAfee Quarantine Manager (MQM) service hosted on another
server.
When selected, the following fields are made active:
Appliance ID Usually, you would use the default ID
MQM server address The IP address of the server that is hosting your McAfee
Quarantine Manager service.
Listening port the port used by your McAfee Quarantine Manager service.
Use HTTPS to communicate with the MQM server When selected, forces secure
communications between the appliance and the McAfee Quarantine Manager
server.
Verify the MQM server certificate Configure the appliance so that it verifies the
MQM server certificate before sending quarantined email messages to the
McAfee Quarantine Manager server.
Enable user submitted blacklists and whitelists Allow your users to blacklist and
whitelist quarantined email messages from specific senders.
Update interval specify the time between updates between the appliance and
your McAfee Quarantine Manager service. The default value is 4 hours.
When you select Use an off-box McAfee Quarantine Manager (MQM) service, the Quarantine Digest
Options and Digest Message Content tabs are removed from the user interface.
The relationship between quarantine categories displayed in Message

Search and MQM
Use this information to understand the differences between the categories used by Message Search
within Email Gateway and McAfee Quarantine Manager.
The following table shows what you will see in the McAfee Quarantine Manager queue for each Email
Gateway category detection:
Table 4-167 The relationship between quarantine categories displayed in Message Search
and MQM
402
Message Search
McAfee Quarantine Manager
Anti-Phish
Phish
Anti-Spam
Spam
Anti-Virus
Viruses
Anti-Virus (Packer)
Potentially Unwanted Programs | Packers
Anti-Virus (PUP)
Potentially Unwanted Programs | Potentially Unwanted Programs
Compliance
Unwanted Content | Banned Content
Corrupt Content
Unwanted Content | Encrypted or Corrupted
Data Leakage Prevention
Product Guide

Table 4-167 The relationship between quarantine categories displayed in Message Search
and MQM (continued)
Message Search
Encrypted Content
Encryption Compliance
File Filtering
Unwanted Content | Banned File Type
Mail Filtering
Unwanted Content | Mail Format
Mail Size
Signed Content
Others
Image Filtering
Unwanted Content | Image Analysis
Denial of Service
Quarantine Digest Options

Use this page to specify how users will receive quarantine digests.
Email | Quarantine Configuration | Quarantine Digest Options
Option definitions Enable digests

Use this information to understand the options available to enable quarantine digests.
A quarantine digest is an email message that the appliance sends to an email user. The digest
describes email messages that have been quarantined for the user because the messages contain
unacceptable content or spam. The digest does not contain information about viruses and other
potentially unwanted program detections.
This page is only available when you have on-box quarantine selected.
Option
Definition
Enable digest messages Specifies whether to enable digest messages for the selected protocol preset.
and message
Protocol preset
Reminds you that digest messages are enabled for this protocol preset.
Allows you to make settings for any exception to the default setting. For
example, you can specify that some parts of the network do not use digest
messages.
Option definitions Digest message options

Use this information to understand the options available to configure your digest messages.
Option
Definition
or
and
message
Reminds you whether digest messages are enabled for this protocol preset.
Sender address for

digest messages
Specifies an email address for an administrator to handle any queries from

senders about the digest.
We recommend that you assign someone who reads email regularly. You can use
the name of a single user or a distribution list.
Product Guide
403

Option
Definition
Message format
Specifies the format of the digest message.

For interactive digests, choose HTML. You can then select:
Generate interactive messages When selected, makes each message interactive.
For example, users can release any of their messages that were incorrectly
quarantined as spam.
Add the digest as an email attachment When selected, attaches the digest to the
email message as an HTML file. Otherwise the digest is embedded in the email
message.
Message encoding
Specifies the character set encoding for the email message that contains the
digest.
Default value is UTF-8.
Allow users to create

and manage blacklists
and whitelists
To view the settings for user-submitted blacklists and whitelists, select Email |
Email Policies | Scanning Policies [Spam] | Blacklists and Whitelists | User Submitted in the
navigation bar.
To view how quarantine digest messages are displayed when alllowing users to
create and manage blacklists and whitelists, select Allow users to create and manage
blacklists and whitelists and then click Message Preview.
Interaction type
Specifies the type of interaction the user experiences:

HTML links Quarantine digests received by your users include links to Delete or
Release quarantined spam email messages.
HTML forms When selected, quarantine digests are sent as HTML forms, with
drop-down boxes allowing users to select the required options and an Apply
button to make the changes.
To view examples of the quarantine digest messages seen by your users, click
Message Preview.
Client-server
Specifies the communication method for interactive digests when using HTML
communication method forms:
HTTP POST Parameters are hidden, which means internal information is not
visible. However, the users do not receive a response from the appliance when
their requests are received.
HTTP GET Works with any mail client. A user can receive a response from the
appliance. However, information is displayed in the action URL, which means
internal information is visible.
Appliance IP address or Specifies an IP address or a domain name, to appear as the sending information
domain name to use in for the digest messages.
digest messages
For example,
192.168.254.200
example.com.
404
Use the appliance's

fully qualified domain
name
When selected, uses the (FQDN) format (as specified in the appliance's basic
settings) instead of an IP address.
Message Preview
When clicked, displays an example of the digest that users will see.
For example, appliance.example.com
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Send
When clicked, sends all digests that have not been sent since the last scheduled
time or since you last pressed the Send button.
Specify the frequency
Specifies how often to send the digests, for example Weekly on Monday at 12
o'clock. We recommend that you select a time when the network is less busy.
Default values are Daily at 3 a.m.
If you select Never, you can send the digests by clicking Send.
Quarantine digests might not be delivered exactly at your specified time. The
appliance staggers the delivery times to prevent overloading the mail servers.
Option definitions Digest Message Content

Use this page to design the appearance of quarantine digests and the responses to users' requests.
Email | Quarantine Configuration | Digest Message Content Options

Option
Definition
Message subject
Specifies the text of the subject line of the email message that carries the
digest.
Default value is Quarantine Summary Digest.
Use the default value

(Several occurrences)
When selected, uses the default value. To change any item such as the
subject line of the email message that carries the digest, deselect its
corresponding Use the default value checkbox.
Edit the stylesheet
When clicked, opens a window that displays the stylesheet that controls the
appearance of the digests when in HTML format. To edit the stylesheet, you
need some knowledge of CSS (Cascading Style Sheets).
Edit the digest report
When clicked, opens a window where you can edit the main text of the
digest.
Edit the body text
When clicked, opens a window where you can edit the first sentence of the
digest.
You can edit the HTML content directly or at source.
Column headings used in the

message body
When Use the default value is deselected, you can change the column headings
that the user sees in the digest.
Select a response type
Selects the type of message that the appliance sends in response to a

user's request. For example, a user can request a release of email that was
quarantined as spam, and will receive a message to acknowledge the
request.
Edit the response body
When clicked, opens a window where you can edit the text of the response
message, if it is in HTML format.
You can edit the HTML content directly or at source.
Quarantine Queue Settings

The Quarantine Queues page displays information about all the quarantine queues configured on your
McAfee Email Gateway appliance. When viewed from within McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator (McAfee
Product Guide
405

ePO) the queues for all managed McAfee Email Gateway appliances are displayed. The list includes the
default quarantine queues as well as any queues that have been added.
Benefits of using multiple quarantine queues

Use multiple quarantine queues to group quarantined messages for analysis.
When you install the Email Gateway software, the system already includes a set of default quarantine
queues:
Viruses
Other
Potentially Unwanted Programs (PUPs)
Phish
Compliance
Spam
All quarantined messages go to at least one of these queues. However, a message may trigger more
than one quarantine action, and be added to more than one quarantine queue.
Role Restrictions
Access to the quarantine queues is role-based, and each queue can have specific roles assigned. The
primary value of configuring multiple quarantine queues is to control the users that are permitted to
access each queue.
Custom quarantine queues

Using custom quarantine queues permits grouping quarantined messages to suit your organization's
needs.
Custom quarantine queues are available only for off-box quarantine, using McAfee Quarantine Manager.
You can add custom quarantine queues to your McAfee Email Gateway appliance. When an email
message triggers a quarantine action, you can direct the message to your custom queue. This action
allows you to track quarantined messages in a more granular manner. You can more easily research
the effectiveness of specific policies by isolating the results of the quarantine actions.
Configuring custom queues requires two components:
Creating the queue;
Configuring policies to quarantine messages to the queue.
Using custom quarantine queues

If you are using custom queues, then the newly added queue is available for selection in policies
straight away. You do not need to apply changes first.
When you create or edit a policy that includes the Quarantine action, select the queue where McAfee
Email Gateway quarantines messages. When you add a queue and apply your changes, the new queue
appears with the other configured queues.
When you create or edit a policy that includes the Quarantine action, select the queue where the McAfee
Email Gateway appliances quarantine the messages. When you add a queue and apply your changes,
the new queue appears with the other configured queues.
406
Product Guide

Option definitions - Quarantine queue settings

Use this page to define the settings for each of your configured quarantine queues.
Table 4-168
Quarantine queues settings
Option
Definition
Queue name
Lists the name of each configured quarantine queue.
Description
Explains the purpose or expected content for each queue.
Priority
Shows the queue order that determines where the system quarantines messages that
trigger multiple quarantine actions.
Permitted roles Shows all configured roles that are permitted access to each queue.
Permitted roles do not apply to custom quarantine queues.
Edit
This link allows you to change the properties for the selected queue.
You cannot edit the name of any queue.
Delete
This icon allows you to delete the associated queue.

You cannot delete any of the default queues delivered with McAfee Email Gateway, and
can only delete custom quarantine queues that are not currently in use.
Add
When McAfee Email Gateway is configured to use an off-box McAfee Quarantine

Manager (MQM) service, this button allows you to add a quarantine queue to the
bottom of the list.
Insert
When McAfee Email Gateway is configured to use an off-box McAfee Quarantine

Manager (MQM) service, this button allows you to add a quarantine queue and set the
desired priority at the same time.
Create a custom quarantine queue

Use this process to add a quarantine queue and set its priority.
Task
1
Navigate to Email | Quarantine Configuration | Quarantine Queue Settings.

The window shows the list of quarantine queues on your appliance.
At the lower left of the page, click Add.

The Queue Properties dialog appears.
Type the queue name and a brief description in the proper text fields.
You cannot configure permitted roles for a custom quarantine queue.
You cannot change the custom queue name after you have applied your changes.
Click OK.
The dialog closes and your new quarantine queue appears at the bottom of the Quarantine Queues
table. The queue is assigned the lowest priority.
If you want to change the assigned priority, use the arrows in the Move column to put the queue in
its proper place.
Apply your changes by clicking the green checkmark at the upper right of the page.
Product Guide
407

Your new quarantine queue is now ready to receive quarantined messages.

If you select an existing queue from the list and then click Insert instead of Add, you can create a
quarantine queue and set the desired priority.
If you have configured your appliances to quarantine messages to a McAfee Quarantine Manager, the
custom queue appears on the MQM after you apply the changes.
Change the permitted roles for a queue

Use this task to reconfigure the roles associated with a specific quarantine queue.
Before you begin
Completing this task assumes you have defined required roles and have included access to
quarantine configuration and Message Search in the appropriate roles.
Even if the defined roles have the ability to access quarantine configuration, they will not
be able to access the specific queues until permission is granted on this page.
Permitted Roles do not apply to custom quarantine queues.

If an email message has been quarantined to multiple quarantine queues, the user will be able to see
the message within Message Search. However, unless they have the relevant permissions for all queues to
which the message has been quarantined, they will not be able to view or download the message, or
perform any actions (delete, release, forward) on the message.
Task
1

The Role Restrictions list displays.
For the quarantine queue you wish to change, select the Edit link.
The Change Permitted Roles dialog displays, listing all configured roles that have access to Message Search.
The roles assigned to the specific queue are indicated by selection of the check box in the Permitted
column.
Make changes to the permitted roles by selecting or deselecting appropriate check boxes.
Click OK.
The Change Permitted Roles page closes.
Your reconfigured permissions now appear in the Permitted roles for Message Search on the Role Restrictions
list.
Delete a quarantine queue

When a specific quarantine queue is no longer useful, you can delete it.
You cannot delete any of the default queues included with the McAfee Email Gateway software. Only
custom quarantine queues that are not currently in use can be deleted.
Task
1

The window shows the list of quarantine queues on your appliance.
408
Product Guide

Find the user-defined quarantine queue you want to delete. Click the associated Delete icon to the
far right of the queue name.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
If the queue is in use by one or more policies, the icon is unavailable.
To confirm the deletion, click OK.

The selected queue disappears from the page.
Complete the deletion by applying your changes.
The quarantine queue is deleted.
Product Guide
409

410
Product Guide
This section of the online Help provides an overview of the System menu features and controls within
your McAfee Email Gateway appliances.
Figure 5-1 System
Contents
Appliance Management
System Administration
Users
Virtual Hosting
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense Server Configuration
Option definitions Add ATD Server
Logging, Alerting and SNMP
Component Management
Setup Wizard
The Appliance Management pages enable you to reset basic and network settings for the appliance,
and specify settings such as remote access, and DNS and Routing.
System | Appliance Management
Product Guide
411

Use these pages to define settings for the appliance, such as the domain name and default gateway.
General
Use this page to specify basic settings for the appliance like those you defined in the Setup Wizard.
The appliance can handle IP addresses in IPv4 and IPv6 formats.
System | Appliance Management | General

Basic Settings displays settings such as the default gateway and domain name.
Network Interface Settings displays the current network interface settings for NIC 1 and NIC 2.
Some sections are relevant only when the appliance is in the appropriate mode.
Benefits to the appliance settings

Use this page to specify basic settings for the appliance like those you defined in the Setup Wizard,
change the operating mode, and set up the IP address and adapter settings for NIC 1 and NIC 2.
The appliance can handle IP addresses in IPv4 and IPv6 formats.
Option definitions Basic Settings

This information describes each option in this section.
Table 5-1 Option definitions Basic Settings
Option
Definition
Appliance name
Specifies a name, such as appliance1.
Domain name
Specifies a name, such as domain.example.com
Default gateway (IPv4) Specifies an address, such as 198.168.254.1.

Next hop router (IPv6)
Specifies an address, such as FD4A:A1B2:C3D4::1.
Operational language
Selects the language that will be used for internal reporting and error messages.
Network Settings page

Use these options to view and configure the IP address and network speeds for the appliance. You can
use IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, separately or in combination.
To prevent duplication of IP addresses on your network and to deter hackers, give the appliance new
IP addresses, and disable the default IP addresses. The IP addresses must be unique and suitable for
your network. Specify as many IP addresses as you need.
412
Option
Definition
<mode>
The operating mode that you set during installation or in the Setup Wizard
Network Interface 1
Expands to show the IP address and netmask associated with Network Interface
1, the auto-negotiation state, and the size of the MTU.
Network Interface 2
2, the auto-negotiation state, and the size of the MTU
Change Network
Settings
Click to open the Network Interface Wizard to specify the IP address and adapter
settings for NIC 1 and NIC 2, and change the chosen operating mode.
Product Guide

Network Interfaces Wizard

Use the Network Interfaces Wizard to change the chosen operating mode, and specify the IP address
and adapter settings for NIC 1 and NIC 2.
The options you see in the Network Interfaces Wizard depend on the operating mode. On the first
page of the wizard, you can choose to change the operating mode for the appliance. You can change
the settings by clicking Change Network Settings to start a wizard. Click Next to progress through the wizard.
In Explicit Proxy mode, some network devices send traffic to the appliances. The appliance then
works as a proxy, processing traffic on behalf of the devices.
In Transparent Router or Transparent Bridge mode, other network devices, such as mail servers,
are unaware that the appliance has intercepted and scanned the email before forwarding it. The
appliance's operation is transparent to the devices.
If you have a standalone appliance running in transparent bridge mode, you will have the option to add
a bypass device in case the appliance fails.
If the appliance is operating in Transparent Bridge mode, and the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is
running on your network, make sure that the appliance is configured according to STP rules.
Additionally, you can set up a bypass device in transparent bridge mode.
To configure your McAfee Email Gateway Blade Server to failover from the management blade to the
failover management blade, you must specify at least one virtual IP address, shared between the
management and failover management blades.
Network Interfaces Wizard Explicit Proxy mode

This version of the Network Interfaces Wizard becomes available when you select the Explicit Proxy
mode.
Specify the details for Network Interface 1, then use the Next button to set details for Network Interface
2 as necessary.
Network Interface 1 or Network Interface 2 page

Option
Definition
IP Address
Specifies network addresses to enable the appliance to communicate with your

network. You can specify multiple IP addresses for the appliances network ports. The
IP address at the top of a list is the primary address. Any IP addresses below it are
aliases.
You must have at least one IP address in both Network Interface 1 and Network
Interface 2. However, you can deselect the Enabled option next to any IP addresses that
you do not wish to listen on.
Network Mask
Specifies the network mask. In IPv4, you can use a format such as 255.255.255.0, or
CIDR notation, such as 24. In IPv6, you must use the prefix length, for example, 64.
Enabled
When selected, the appliance accepts connections on the IP address.
Virtual
When selected, the appliance treats this IP address as a virtual address.

This option only appears in cluster configurations, or on a McAfee Content Security
Blade Server.
Product Guide
413

Option
Definition
New Address/
Delete Selected
Addresses
Add a new address, or remove a selected IP address.
NIC 1 Adapter
Options or NIC
2 Adapter
Options
Expand to set the following options:

MTU size specifies the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size. The MTU is the
maximum size (expressed in bytes) of a single unit of data (for example, an
Ethernet Frame) that can be sent over the connection. The default value is 1500
bytes.
Autonegotiation state either:
On allows the appliance to negotiate the speed and duplex state for
communicating with other network devices.
Off allows you to select the speed and duplex state.
Connection speed provides a range of speeds. Default value is 100MB.
This value is fixed at 1GB for fiber-connected systems.
Duplex state provides duplex states. Default value is Full duplex.

Enable IPv6 auto-configuration Select this option to allow the appliance to automatically
configure its IPv6 addresses and IPv6 default next-hop router, by receiving Router
Advertisement messages sent from your IPv6 router.
This option is unavailable by default if your appliance is running in transparent router
mode, or is part of a cluster configuration, or running as part of a Blade Server
installation.
Network Interfaces Wizard Transparent Router mode

Use the Network Interfaces Wizard to change the chosen operating mode, then specify the IP address
Network Interface 1 or Network Interface 2 pages
414
Option
Definition
IP Address

network. You can specify multiple IP addresses for the appliances ports. The IP
address at the top of a list is the primary address. Any IP addresses below it are
aliases.
Network Mask
Specifies the network mask, for example: 255.255.255.0. In IPv4, you can use a
format such as 255.255.255.0, or CIDR notation, such as 24. In IPv6, you must use
the prefix length, for example, 64.
Enabled
When selected, the appliance accepts connections on that IP address.
Virtual
When selected, the appliance treats this IP address as a virtual address. This option
only appears in cluster configurations, or on a McAfee Content Security Blade Server.
Product Guide

Option
Definition
New Address/
Delete Selected
Addresses
NIC 1 Adapter
Options or NIC
2 Adapter
Options

MTU size Specifies the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size. The MTU is the
bytes.

Enable IPv6 auto-configuration Select this option to allow the appliance automatically
installation.
Enable sending IPv6 router advertisements on this interface When enabled, allows IPv6 router
advertisements to be sent to machines on the sub-net that require a router
response to complete auto-configuration.
Network Interfaces Wizard Transparent Bridge mode

Specify the details for the Ethernet Bridge, then use the Next button to set details for the Spanning Tree
Protocol and Bypass Device as necessary.
Option definitions Ethernet Bridge page

Option
Definition
Select all
Click to select all the IP addresses.
IP Address

addresses are combined into one list for both ports. The IP address at the top of a list
is the primary address. Any IP addresses below it are aliases.
Use the Move links to reposition the addresses as necessary.
Network Mask
Enabled
Product Guide
415

Option
Definition
New Address/
Delete Selected
Addresses
NIC Adapter
Options

maximum size (expressed in bytes) of a single unit of data (for example, an Ethernet
Frame) that can be sent over the connection. The default value is 1500 bytes.

Enable IPv6 auto-configuration select this option to allow the appliance to automatically
installation.
Option definitions Spanning Tree Protocol Settings page

Option
Definition
Enable STP
STP is enabled by default.
Bridge priority
Sets the priority for the STP bridge. Lower numbers have a higher priority. The
maximum number that you can set is 65535.
Advanced parameters Expand to set the following options. Change the settings only if you understand
the possible effects, or you have consulted an expert:
Forwarding delay
Garbage collection interval (seconds)
Hello interval (seconds)
Ageing time (seconds)
Maximum age (seconds)
Option definitions Bypass Device Settings page

Option
Definition
The bypass device inherits settings from those you entered in NIC Adapter Options
416
Select bypass device
Choose from two supported devices.
Watchdog timeout
(seconds)
For the bypass device, the time, in seconds, that can elapse before the system
bypasses the appliance.
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Heartbeat interval
(seconds)
Set to monitor heartbeat by default.
Advanced parameters This option becomes active when you select a bypass device.
Mode choose to monitor the heartbeat or the heartbeat and the link activity.
Link activity timeout (seconds) becomes active when you select Monitor heartbeat and link
activity in Mode
Enable buzzer enabled by default. If the bypass device fails to detect the
heartbeat signal for the configured Watchdog timeout, the buzzer sounds.
DNS and Routing

Use this page to configure the appliances use of DNS and routing.
System | Appliance Management | DNS and Routing

DNS Servers
Routing
Benefits of specifying DNS servers and adding routes

Use this page to understand the benefits of using DNS and routing.
When you first log on to the appliance, the DNS and Routing page displays the servers and routes that you
specified in the Setup Wizard. Use this page to review the entries, add or remove routes and servers,
and change their priority.
Domain Name System (DNS) servers translate or map the names of network devices into IP
addresses. Use the arrows to move the servers up and down the list. The first server in the list must
be your nearest, or most reliable server. If the first server cannot resolve the request, the appliance
contacts the second server. If no servers in the list can resolve the request, the appliance forwards the
request to the DNS root name servers on the Internet.
You can set the appliance to use dynamic routing, if:
Product Guide
417

The appliance is in transparent router mode
Your network supports it

By default, the appliance uses the common dynamic routing protocol called Routing Information
Protocol (RIP).
Option definitions DNS Servers

Option
Definition
Server Address
Displays the IP addresses of the DNS servers. The first server in the list must be your
fastest or most reliable server. If the first server cannot resolve the request, the
appliance contacts the second server. If no servers in the list can resolve the request,
the appliance forwards the request to the DNS root name servers on the Internet.
If your firewall prevents DNS lookup (typically on port 53), specify the IP address of a
local device that provides name resolution
New Server/
Delete Selected
Servers
Adds a new server to the list, or removes one when, for example, you need to
decommission a server due to network changes. Use the arrows to move the servers
up and down the list.
Only send
Selected by default. McAfee recommends that you leave this option selected because it
queries to these might speed up DNS queries as the appliance sends the queries to the specified DNS
servers
servers only. If they don't know the address, they go to the root DNS servers on the
Internet. When they get a reply, the appliance receives it and caches the response so
that other servers that query that DNS server can get an answer more quickly.
If you deselect this option, the appliance first tries to resolve the requests, or might
query DNS servers outside your network.
Option definitions Routing

Option
Definition
Network Address
Type the network address of the route.
Mask
Specifies how many hosts are on your network, for example, 255.255.255.0.
Gateway
Specifies the IP address of the router used as the next hop out of the network. The
address 0.0.0.0 (IPv4), or :: (IPv6) means that the router has no default gateway.
Metric
Specifies the preference given to the route. A low number indicates a high
preference for that route.
New Route /
Delete Selected
Routes
Add a new route to the table, or remove one. Use the arrows to move the route up
and down the list. The routes are chosen based on their metric value.
Enable dynamic
routing
Use this option in transparent router mode only. When enabled, the appliance can:
receive broadcast routing information received over RIP (default) that it applies its
routing table so you don't have to duplicate routing information on the appliance
that is already present in the network.
broadcast routing information if static routes have been configured through the
user interface over RIP.
418
Product Guide

Setting up a list of DNS servers

Use this ask to set up a list of DNS servers.
Task
1
Click System | Appliance Management | DNS and Routing.
Click New Server and type the IP address. The appliance sends requests to DNS servers in the order
that they are listed.
If necessary, click Only send queries to these servers, and choose the servers.
Setting up a static route

Use this task to set up a static route.
Task
1
Go to System | Appliance Management | DNS and Routing.
Click New Route, and add the following information:
Network Address
Gateway
Metric
Apply the changes.
Time and Date

Use this page to configure time and date settings on the appliance.
System | Appliance Management | Time and Date
Useful websites
http://www.ntp.org
http://www.worldtimeserver.com/current_time_in_UTC.aspx (for current UTC time)
Benefits to setting the time and date options

This topic describes the benefits of the time and date settings.
Correct time settings are important to ensure the appliance keeps its logs, reports and schedules
accurate.
You can provide the details manually, or from your own computer, or via the Network Time Protocol
(NTP).
Product Guide
419

Option definitions Time and Date

This information describes each option on this page.
Option
Definition
Appliance Time
Zone
Specifies the time zone of the appliance. You might need to set this twice each year
if your region observes daylight saving time.
Appliance Time
(UTC)
Specifies the date and UTC time for the appliance. To select the date, click the
calendar icon. You can determine the UTC time from websites such as http://
www.worldtimeserver.com.
Set Now
When clicked, applies the date and UTC time that you specified in this row.
Client Time
Displays the time according to the client computer from which your browser is
currently connected to the appliance.
Synchronize
appliance with
client
When selected, the time in the Appliance Time (UTC) immediately takes its value from
Client Time. You can use this checkbox as an alternative to manual setting of Appliance
Time (UTC). The appliance calculates the UTC time based on the time zone that it finds
on the client's browser.
Ensure that the client computer is aware of any daylight savings adjustments. To find
the setting on Microsoft Windows, right-click the time display in the bottom right
corner of the screen.
Enable NTP
When selected, accepts NTP messages from a specified server or a network

broadcast. NTP synchronizes timekeeping among devices in a network. Some
Internet Service Providers (ISPs) provide a timekeeping service. Because NTP
messages are not sent often, they do not noticeably affect the appliance's
performance.
Enable NTP client

broadcasts
When selected, accepts NTP messages from network broadcasts only. This method
is useful on a busy network but must trust other devices in the network.
When deselected, accepts NTP messages only from servers specified in the list.
NTP Server
Displays the network address or a domain name of one or more NTP servers that
the appliance uses. For example, time.nist.gov.
If you specify several servers, the appliance examines each NTP message in turn to
determine the correct time.
New Server
Type the IP address of a new NTP Server.
Task Using an NTP Server to set the appliance date and time
Use this task to add an NTP server to manage the appliance time and date.
Task
1
Click System | Appliance Management | Time and Date.
Select Enable NTP and click New Server.
Type the IP address of the server that you wish to add.
Remote Access
Use this page to provide the methods of accessing the appliance remotely.
System | Appliance Management | Remote Access
420
Product Guide

Secure Shell Configuration
User Interface Access Configuration
Out of Band Management

You can still access the user interface using the IP address of the appliance itself.
Benefits of using the remote access feature

This topic describes the benefits of using the remote access feature.
This feature controls the access to the user interface and the secure shell, and provides an extra layer
of protection in addition to that provided by username and password authentication.
Use the out-of-band interface if you do not want the user interface or secure shell to be accessible on
the same network as the data traffic that is being scanned.
Product Guide
421

Option definitions Secure Shell Configuration

Option
Definition
Enable the
Click to enable the use of Secure Shell (SSH) to connect remotely to your appliance. By
secure shell default, when you enable the use of SSH, it allows all hosts or networks that can access
the appliance.
Click Allow permitted hosts / networks listed below, then select New Address to add only the specified
devices access.
You can use your SSH client to access the support account on the appliance. Use the
same password that you use to access the interface from a remote computer.
If you are using out-of-band management and have blocked port 22, change the SSH
configuration to allow Secure Shell access.
Permitted
Host /
Network
Displays details of devices that can access the appliance. By default, access is available to
ALL hosts or networks that can use Secure Shell (SSH).
The entries here are added to the /etc/hosts.allow file, and therefore must follow its
conventions. We recommend that you allow access to known domains or users initially.
Click New Address / Delete Selected Addresses to add or remove permitted hosts or networks
from the list.
To add a network use the following notation formats:
IPv4: 192.168.5.0/24 or 192.168.5.0/255.255.255.0 (allows every host with a
network address beginning 192.168.5 to access the secure shell)
IPv6: [3ffe:505:2:1::]/64 (allows every address in the range `3ffe:505:2:1::
through `3ffe:505:2:1:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff)
domain wildcards: *.example.com (allows all hosts in the example.com domain to
access the secure shell)
To add an individual host, use the following notation formats:
IPv4: 192.168.0.5 (only allows the particular IP address to access the secure shell)
IPv6: [2001:470:921b:7896::3c]. The [ ] must be typed.
hostname: host1.example.com (only allows host1 in the example.com domain to
To add individual hosts, netmasks can not be used.
Option definitions User Interface Access Configuration

Option
Definition
Management Port
This field allows you to specify the port used to access the User Interface.
When the McAfee Email Gateway is first installed, port 443 is used. However, during
the configuration process, this value is changed by default to 10443.
If you intend using any of the encryption features within McAfee Email Gateway, you
must change the management port to 10443 and apply these settings.
Allow all hosts/

networks
422
Allows anyone to connect to the user interface
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Allow permitted
hosts/networks
listed below
Displays details of devices that can access the appliance through its web-based
interface (IPv4 addresses only). Restricts access to the user interface to the hosts
or networks that you specify here. By default, access is available to ALL devices.
Click New Address / Delete Selected Addresses to add or remove permitted hosts or
networks from the list.
Type the IP addresses or domains carefully, otherwise the appliance can become
inaccessible.
To add a network use the following notation formats:

IPv4: 192.168.5.0/24 or 192.168.5.0/255.255.255.0 (allows every host with a
network address beginning 192.168.5 to access the secure shell)
domain wildcards: *.example.com (allows all hosts in the example.com domain to
To add an individual host, use the following notation formats:
IPv4: 192.168.0.5 (only allows the particular IP address to access the secure
shell)
hostname: host1.example.com (only allows host1 in the example.com domain to
Administrator's
Email Address
The email address of the main appliance administrator. This address appears if
someone tries to access an invalid page on the appliance user interface in the form
of the webmaster's email address.
Option definitions Out of Band Management

Normally, the commands you issue to the appliance are part of the network traffic. With out-of-band
management, your commands are directed to a third port on the appliance, and become separate (or
out-of-band) from the other network traffic.
Before enabling out-of-band management, make sure you have first connected the external
USB-Ethernet adapter to your appliance and to a suitable network. Some later appliances have inbuilt
out-of-band management already, and do not need to have it separately enabled. To find out whether
this applies to your appliance, see the Email Gateway Quick Start guide.
Option
Definition
Enable the out of

band interface
When selected, allows you to control the appliance through a direct connection.
Ethernet adapter
Offers a choice of Ethernet adapter, such as Belkin F5D5050 for a USB network
adapter, or Gb4(mb3) for in-built network adapter.
IP Address /
netmask
Specifies the IP address and network mask for the port.

You cannot type an IP address that is on the same subnet as the normal operational
ports.
Product Guide
423

Option
Definition
NIC Adapter Options Specifies various details for the out-of-band connection, which is effectively a third
NIC connection for the appliance.
MTU size the maximum size (expressed in bytes) of a single unit of data (for
example, an Ethernet Frame) that can be sent over the connection. Default value
is 1500 bytes.
Autonegotiation state on by default.
Connection speed 100Mbps by default.
Duplex state Full by default.
configure its IPv6 addresses and IPv6 default next-hop router, by receiving
Router Advertisement messages sent from your IPv6 router.
This option is grayed out by default if your appliance is running in transparent
router mode, or is part of a cluster configuration.
Enable in-band
management
Specifies ports to prevent any attempts to access the appliance via ports over the
main (non-management) interface.
New Port
Delete Selected Port
Option definitions Remote Access Card

In 3300 and 3400 versions of the appliance, there is a built-in remote access card installed. This
section of the interface will not appear on other appliance models.
Option
Definition
Enable remote access

card configuration
Select to have the appliance manage the remote access card through the user
interface.
Listening port
Set the listening port. Set to 443 by default.
Obtain an IP address
dynamically using DHCP
Select whether you want the appliance to obtain an IP address dynamically

using DHCP
IP address / netmask
Specifies the IP address and network mask for the port.

You cannot type an IP address that is on the same subnet as the normal
operational ports.
424
Product Guide

Option
Definition
DRAC Network Options
Expand this option to:

Specify the default gateway
Select whether you want the appliance to obtain DNS information dynamically
using DHCP
Add the primary and secondary DNS servers
DRAC Adapter Options
Expand this option to:

See the version of Firmware
Set the MAC address
Set the size of the MTU (1500 by default). That is, the maximum size
(expressed in bytes) of a single unit of data (for example, an Ethernet Frame)
that can be sent over the connection.
Use autonegotiation (on by default)
Check the connection speed (100 Mb by default)
Set the duplex state (Full by default)
Task To manage the appliance from a management network

Use this task to set up a management network to manage the appliance.
Task
1
Go to System | Appliance Management | Remote Access.
Click Enable the out of band interface.
Use the drop-down box to select the USB driver, or in-built ethernet adapter.
Type the IP address and netmask of the out-of-band interface.
Expand the NIC Adapter Options area (optional), and change any necessary information .
Apply the changes and log off the appliance.
Go to the IP address you specified earlier to access the user interface.
Task Restrict management access to the appliance to the management network

Use this task to restrict access to the appliance from the management network.
Task
1
Access the appliance through the out-of-band interface, and go to System | Appliance Management |
Remote Access.
Deselect Enable in-band management. By default, the user interface (port 443), the secure shell (port
22), and SNMP (port 161) are blocked on the appliance IP address.
Click New Port to add any new ports that you want to block on the main appliance IP address and
only access through the management network.
Apply the changes.

To monitor your appliance using mechanisms such as the off-box syslog feature, go to System |
Logging, Alerting and SNMP, and configure the remote server, ensuring that it can be routed through the
out-of-band network.
Product Guide
425

Email Gateway Certificate

Specify the certificate that is used to verify the administrator appliance login credentials, and the
default certificate that is used with TLS.
System | Appliance Management | Email Gateway Certificate
Benefits of Email Gateway Certificate

Email Gateway Certificates are used to verify the identity of your McAfee Email Gateway.
By verifying the identity of your McAfee Email Gateway, other email systems can be used to provide
secure communications to and from your system.
Option definitions Email Gateway Certificate

Option
Definition
Country [C]
Town or city [L]
abbreviation.
Organization [O]
Common name [CN]
Email address [ea]
Import

location.
426
Export
Signing Request
Regenerate
When clicked, you are prompted to confirm that you want to regenerate the
certificate and private key.
Product Guide

Certificate and Key Export wizard

Export the certificate and key from your McAfee Email Gateway.
Table 5-2 Certificate and Key Export wizard page 1
Option
Definition
Options
Select if you want to export the certificate only, without including your private keys.
Format
Select to export your certificate and keys in:

Base-64 encoding, or
as a PKCS#12 secure key file.
By default a Base-64 encoding is used.
This page only appears if you have not selected Export the certificate only (no private keys) on page 1 of this
wizard.

Option
Definition
Protect the private key with the following passphrase Password-protect the private key within the exported file.
Confirm the passphrase
Re-enter the password to ensure it matches your first

attempt.

Option
Definition
Download
To download the exported certificate, click the link provided.

Depending on your browser, you may need to right-click the link and select the option to save the file
locally.
When the file has been downloaded locally, click Finish to close this wizard.
UPS Settings
Understand how to configure your McAfee Email Gateway to work with third-party Uninterruptible
Power Supply (UPS) systems.
System | Appliance Management | UPS Settings
Benefits of specifying UPS

The appliance can monitor the status of any number of UPS systems, allowing a graceful shutdown if
the main power supply fails. The appliance can also notify other devices about the event.
Using a name and password, other devices (called "clients") can access information from the appliance
about the UPS systems, allowing the clients to respond to an imminent loss of power.
Product Guide
427

Option definitions UPS Device Configuration

Option
Definition
Delay before shutting

down the appliance
when switching to UPS
power
Specifies the number of minutes before the appliance shuts down. The default As
long as possible option means that the power stays on until the UPS signals that the
battery is low. If you set the minutes value to zero, the appliance shuts down
immediately.
Status
Displays the status of the device:

Operating normally.
Needs attention.
Needs immediate attention.
Devices and Driver
Displays the type (model) of the UPS device and driver.
Type
Displays the type of connection between the appliance and the UPS USB
Cable, Serial Cable, or Network.
New Device
When clicked, opens the Add UPS Device wizard where you can specify UPS settings
for the (master) appliance that connects to the UPS, or settings for one or more
appliances (slaves) that connect to the master appliance via the network.
Option definitions Accept UPS status requests from the following

addresses
This section appears when you add a new UPS device.
Option
Definition
Appliance Name or
Address
Displays the IP address of the monitoring device.
Type
Displays the status of the monitoring device. Every added device is defined as
Slave. This list always contains one Master entry.
New Client
When clicked, opens a window, where you can specify the address of the client,
and a user name and password that the client must specify to access the UPS
information. The user name and password are those specified when you set up the
master device.
Task Add a USB UPS device

Use this task to specify a USB UPS device.
Task
1
Connect the USB UPS to the appliance to ensure the list displays the UPS.
Go to System | Appliance Management | UPS Settings.
Click Enable UPS support, and click New Device.
Select USB Device, then click Next.
Select the appropriate values for Vendor Name, UPS Device Model, and Attached USB Device.
To begin with, you can keep the default Off delay and On delay settings.
428
Click Finish and apply the changes.
Product Guide

Click Edit, then click Next to change more configuration options.

These options appear when the UPS is working (shown by a green tick in the Status column).
Edit the settings for the following options as applicable for more information:
Remaining battery level when UPS switches to low battery
Remaining battery runtime when UPS switches to low battery
Interval to wait after shutdown with delay command
Interval to wait before (re)starting the load
Click Finish, then apply the changes.
Task Add a serial UPS device

Use this task to add a serial UPS device.
Task
1
Connect the serial UPS to the appliance using the serial cable supplied with the UPS.
Select Serial Device, then click Next.
Select appropriate values for Vendor Name, UPS Device Model, and Serial Port.
Click Edit to change the settings for the following options as applicable for more information:
Remaining battery level when UPS switches to low battery
Remaining battery runtime when UPS switches to low battery
Interval to wait after shutdown with delay command
Interval to wait before (re)starting the load

These options appear when the UPS is working (shown by a green checkmark in the Status column).
Task Configure your appliance to accept UPS status requests from other
appliances
Use this task to have the appliance accept UPS status requests from other appliances.
Task
1
Ensure that your UPS is working (a green checkmark shows in the Status column).
Select New Client.
In Client Address, type the IP address of the client that you wish to allow queries from.
Product Guide
429

Note the information in the Username and Password fields; you will need them later to enter into
the client machine.
Select OK.
Task Set up a client appliance to monitor a UPS on another appliance

Use this task to have a client appliance to monitor a UPS on another appliance.
Task
1
Complete the steps in Configure your appliance to accept UPS status requests from other
appliances.
Select Get Power status from another appliance and click Next.
Type in the name or IP address of the appliance that has the UPS connected to it.
Add the username and password displayed that you made a note of in Configure your appliance to
accept UPS status requests from other appliances.
Click Test Authentication to check that the communication is working, then click Finish and apply
changes.
Add UPS Device Wizard

Use this wizard to select the type of UPS device that you want to add, and specify its details.
System | Appliance Management | UPS Settings | New Device
Option definitions UPS Device Connection

Use this page of the wizard to specify how you are going to connect to the UPS device.
Option
Definition
USB device
This option is unavailable until you add a USB device
Serial device
Get power status from another appliance
The options you see in the wizard depend on the type of device that you choose.
Option definitions USB Device Details screen

Option
Definition
Vendor name
Lists supported vendors
UPS device model
Select from the list of supported USB models supplied by the vendor you chose
Attached USB device Details of the USB device
430
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Off delay
The length of time, in seconds, that the UPS waits before turning off the UPS after
it receives the "turn off" command
On delay
The length of time, in seconds, that the UPS waits before restoring power after the
mains power returns
Option definitions Serial Device Details screen

Option
Definition
Vendor name
Lists supported vendors
UPS device model Select from the list of supported USB models supplied by the vendor you chose
Serial port
Select the serial port that you want to use. COM1 is the built-in serial port on the
appliance
Option definitions Get power status from another appliance

Option
Definition
Appliance name or address The host name or IP address of the master appliance
User name
The username given to the master appliance
Password
The password assigned to the master appliance
Test Authentication
Click to test the connection between the appliance and the master device
defined above
Default Server Settings

Use this page to specify details of HTTP and FTP proxy servers, through which the appliance receives
updates, and to set up a remote backup server.
System | Appliance Management | Default Server Settings

Default HTTP proxy settings
Default FTP proxy settings
Default remote backup settings
There are three options to choose from to back up to a remote server:
FTP
SSH with password authentication
SSH with public key authentication
Benefits of configuring default server settings

This information describes the benefits of specifying a remote FTP or HTTP server to get updates, and
set up a remote backup server.
The default remote backup server that you specify here is used by the appliance as the default server
to:
Product Guide
431

get threat detection file updates (anti-virus, and anti-spam)
install package updates (patches and hotfixes)

You can set the appliance to use different servers for each of those actions in their related configuration
wizards.
Option definitions Default HTTP proxy settings

Option
Definition
Proxy server
Enter the proxy server address.
Proxy port
Enter the port used to transfer updates over HTTP.

By default, this is port 80.
Proxy username
Enter the username used to log onto the proxy server.
Proxy password
Enter the password used to log onto the proxy server.
Option definitions Default FTP proxy settings

Option
Definition
Proxy server
Enter the proxy server address.
Proxy port
Enter the port used to transfer updates over FTP

By default, this is port 21.
432
Proxy username
Enter the username used to log onto the proxy server.
Proxy password
Enter the password used to log onto the proxy server.
Product Guide

Option definitions Default remote backup settings

Option
Definition
Transfer to FTP
Server
Selected by default:
Server
Proxy server
Port
Proxy port
Directory
Proxy username
Username (default value is

anonymous)
Proxy password
Password (default value is

anonymous)
Transfer via SSH
Click to specify the settings to transfer the backup using SSH:

Server
Port
Directory
Username (default value is anonymous)
Password Authentication/Password (default value is anonymous)
Public Key Authentication/Public key (links to the public key)
If you use either FTP or SSH with password authentication, your passwords are stored in the appliance
configuration files, in plain text format. The most secure option is to use SSH with public key
authentication. To use this feature, you must click the link to generate a key file, which you must then
copy and paste into your authorized keys file so that the appliance can perform the backup.
The System Administration pages provide you with the features you need to enable you to set up and
maintain your McAfee Email Gateway.
System | System Administration

From these pages you can backup and restore your configurations, push configurations from one
appliance to others, and set up the cluster management for your groups of McAfee Email Gateway
appliances. You can also carry out database maintenance and access the rescue image features for
your appliance. Use the system administration pages to access the system commands for shutting
down and rebooting your McAfee Email Gateway.
Contents
Configuration Management
Configuration Push
Cluster Management
Option definitions MAC Addresses
Resilient Mode
Configure Automatic Configuration Backups wizard
Database Maintenance
Product Guide
433

Rescue Image
System Commands
Use this page to back up and restore the information about the appliances configuration.
System | System Administration | Configuration Management

The page contains these sections:
Backup Configuration
Restore Configuration
Configuration Report
Review Configuration Changes
Benefits of backing up and restoring configuration

Use this page to create immediate and automatic backups of a configuration file, and produce
configuration reports.
You can copy the configuration from one appliance to another, or use the backup copy to restore your
appliance to former settings.
Option definitions Configuration Management

Option
Definition
Backup Configuration
When clicked, puts all the appliances configuration settings into a file, and allows
you to download the file.
You can safely store configuration details about the appliance offline, and restore
that information later if the original appliance fails. The system configuration files
are saved to a .zip file, which contains mainly XML files and associated DTD files.
The .zip file size is typically less than 1MB.
Save the config
When clicked, allows you to download the configuration file.

The link is active only after the configuration file has been generated.
Include the Data Loss

Prevention database
When selected, automatically includes information in the backup file about any
DLP categories and file fingerprints. To find the contents of the DLP database, go
to Email | DLP and Dictionaries.
Selecting this option uses large amounts of disk space.
Include TLS
certificates and
private keys
When selected, includes information in the backup file about any digital
certificates and private keys that are stored on the appliance. You need to
consider the security of your private keys.
To find the certificates, go to Email | Certificate Management | Certificates | TLS Certificates
and Keys.
By default, the TLS certificates and private keys are not encrypted when stored in
the backup file.
434
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Encrypt private keys
When Include TLS certificates and private keys is selected, choose to encrypt the private
keys. You will need to specify the Passphrase.
Include Email Hybrid

configuration
When selected, includes information in the backup file about any digital
certificates and private keys relating to Email Hybrid implementation that are
stored on the appliance.
The Email Hybrid private key is not encrypted when stored in the backup file.
Include Secure Web

Mail user and system
data
When selected, includes information in the backup file about any public
certificates and private keys, as well as configuration details for each domain and
each user that are configured for Secure Web Mail.
Email messages are not included in the configuration backup.
When selected, configuration backups are made periodically and sent to a server
whose details you can specify. If no server is configured already, the Configure
Automatic Configuration Backups wizard starts. Otherwise, click the link next to
Backup Scheduled to specify the server.
Enable automatic
backup
When enabled, you can select the following options:

Include the Data Loss Prevention database
Include TLS certificates and private keys
Include Secure Web Mail user and system data
Include Email Hybrid configuration
Automatically backup when you apply configuration
Backup scheduled
Click to open the Configure Automatic Configuration Backups.
Table 5-6 Option definitions Restore Configuration

Option
Definition
Restore From File When clicked, imports configuration settings from a backup file.
You can choose which details you need. If the file came from an earlier version of the
software, some details are not available.
Table 5-7 Option definitions Configuration Report
Option
Definition
Produce Report Create an online report that details changes and settings in each area of the appliance
configuration and status pages.
View the report View the online report generated using the Produce Report button.
Product Guide
435

Table 5-8 Option definitions Review Configuration Changes

Option
Definition
Review Configuration
Changes
Displays details of changes made to the appliance.

Date The date and time that the configuration change was made.
Comment The comment is generated automatically by the appliance or is the
text typed at the Configuration change comment window seen after clicking the green
checkmark.
Client IP address The default value is 127.0.0. (or home).
User This is typically admin or other users. To see the list of users, select
System | Users | Users and Roles in the navigation bar.
Session A PID is a number that identifies a process.
Show Differences
Select more than one configuration change, and click to display the files that
have been changed. Select a file, and click Show Difference to display the
configuration differences in code view between them.
Rollback to Selected
Configuration
Select a configuration change, and click to select the values to restore. Secure
Web Mail user and system data configuration changes are not rolled back.
Configuration Push
Use this page to copy the settings on one appliance to other appliances.
System | System Administration | Configuration Push
Parameters that are not pushed to other appliances

The following configuration parameters are not pushed to the other appliances:
Network settings:
Hostname and domain name
Default routes
IP addresses
Ethernet settings such as MTU and duplex
Appliance operating mode; explicit proxy, transparent bridge, transparent router
Spanning tree protocol settings (transparent bridge mode only)
DNS server addresses
DHCP server settings (applies to cluster configurations)
Load-balancing settings
Static routes
Proxy settings
Remote Access Card settings:
436
IP address(es) assigned to DRAC
Product Guide

Management port settings:
Whether out-of-band management is enabled (IP address, driver)
Benefits of pushing a configuration

This information describes the benefits to pushing a configuration onto another appliance
If you manage multiple appliances, you can specify that all of your appliances have the same settings
by pushing configuration from one to another.
This can be further automated using one of the following methods:
Automatic configuration push
Scheduled configuration push
Support for manual updating of McAfee Email Gateway appliances

In some circumstances, you may not want or be able to update your McAfee Email Gateway appliances
using the in-built automatic updating features.
In these cases, you can update one of your appliances manually, and then push those updates to your
other McAfee Email Gateway appliances using the Managed Appliance List and the options available
within Push settings.
Option definitions Configuration Push

Table 5-9 Option definitions Managed Appliance List
Option
Definition
Hostname/ Address
Displays the IP address of this appliance.
Push enabled
Check this option to allow configurations to be pushed to this appliance

either automatically or via a schedule.
Platform
Displays information about the appliance.
Last Push
Displays when you last pushed a configuration file to another

appliance.
Update Progress
Displays the status of the configuration update and is updated every

two seconds.
Add Appliance / Remove Appliance
Add or remove an appliance from Managed Appliance List.
Refresh
Refresh the Managed Appliance List after adding or removing an appliance.
Apply Configuration to enabled

appliances
When clicked, sends the settings to the other appliances in the list that
have been enabled (see Push enabled above).
Apply Configuration to selected

appliances
When clicked, sends the settings to the appliances in the list that have
been selected.
Table 5-10 Option definitions Configuration push settings

Option
Definition
Username to use for push
Use this username when pushing configuration to the remote

appliances.
Password to use for push
Use this password when pushing configuration to the remote

appliances.
This password will be stored in plaintext within in the
configuration.
Product Guide
437

Table 5-10 Option definitions Configuration push settings (continued)

Option
Definition
Advanced settings
Push the configuration push setting and the managed appliance list Push the
managed appliance list and configuration push settings.
By changing the following, it is

possible to alter the settings
that will be pushed across to
the other appliances in the
Managed Appliance List. If the
checkbox is checked then the
settings will be pushed to the
remote appliances.
Do not use this option if you have chosen to automatically push

configuration changes.
Push Secure Web Mail user and system data If you have Secure Web
Mail configured select this option to push the user and system
data.
These options apply when

Push the SNMP monitor name Push appliance specific settings, for
performing a push by clicking
example, the SNMP monitor name.
the button in the user interface,
and when performing the
Push the MQM settings Push the Quarantine Manager system
automatic/scheduled
identifier.
configuration pushes.
Push the UPS settings Push the details of any UPS systems
attached to the appliance.
Push your TLS certificates and private keys Push the certificates and
private keys used for by your appliance to allow TLS connections.
Push Email Hybrid configuration Push configuration settings that
enable your McAfee Email Gateway to operate as a hybrid
solution with the SaaS Email service.
Automatic Configuration push
Check this to automatically push configurations to other appliances

each time you apply configuration changes to this appliance.
Scheduled Configuration push
Specify how often you want this appliance to carry out a scheduled
configuration push. The options are:
Never
Hourly
Daily
Weekly
Cluster Management
Use this page to specify the cluster and load-balancing requirements for the McAfee Email Gateway
when acting as part of a cluster.
System | System Administration | Cluster Management

When configuring a group of appliances or a McAfee Email Gateway Blade Server the current master
uses a "least used" algorithm to assign connections to the appliances or blades configured to scan
traffic. The scanning appliance or blade that is currently showing the least number of connections, at
that moment in time, is assigned the next connection.
For a cluster of appliances:
438
Product Guide

If you have only a master and a failover appliance, with both configured to scan traffic, the master
will send most connections to the failover appliance for scanning.
If you have scanning appliances, and scanning enabled on the master and failover, then the
scanning appliances will receive the most traffic to scan, then the failover, with the master
receiving the least. If you have more than three appliances in a cluster, McAfee recommends that
you do not enable scanning on the master appliance.
You cannot configure the master or the failover blades of the McAfee Email Gateway Blade Server to
scan traffic.
McAfee recommends that when using your appliance in a cluster environment, you use McAfee
Quarantine Manager to quarantine Email messages.
Benefits of configuring Cluster Management

This information describes the benefits of configuring Cluster Management.
By configuring Cluster Management, you enable a group of McAfee Email Gateway appliances, or the
individual blades within a McAfee Email Gateway Blade Server to function as a single scanning system.
Additionally, by setting the cluster features, you are also providing redundancy in the event of
hardware failure; by configuring a master and a failover master appliance, and also by having several
scanning appliances (or blades) your email traffic can still be scanned in the event of a single
appliance or blade failing.
Option definitions - Cluster Management

This information describes the options available in this section. The content of this page can vary.
Depending on the chosen cluster mode, some of the options are not available.
Option definitions Cluster Mode

Option
Definition
Cluster mode
Specifies the clustering mode of the appliance:

Off This is a standard appliance.
Cluster Scanner The appliance receives its scanning workload from a master
appliance.
Cluster Master The appliance controls the scanning workload for several other
appliances.
Cluster Failover If the master fails, this appliance controls the scanning workload
instead.
For a McAfee Email Gateway Blade Server, this specifies the type of blade as follows:
Cluster Master The master management blade controls the scanning workload for
several scanning blades.
Cluster Failover If the master management blade fails, this failover management
blade controls the scanning workload instead.
DHCP address
range (Content
Security
Blade Servers
only)
The management blade is responsible for issuing IP addresses to any attached

scanning blades via DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
Specify the range of address that will be issued to scanning blades. The DHCP range
is limited to a single subnet. The permissible range for the starting address is 1 - 253
while that for the ending address is 2 - 254.
Product Guide
439

Option definitions Cluster Configuration

Option
Definition
Cluster identifier
If you have more than one McAfee Email Gateway cluster or McAfee Email
Gateway Blade Server on the same subnet, assign each a different Cluster
identifier to ensure the clusters do not conflict.
The allowable range is 0-255.
Address to use for load

balancing
Specify the IP address used for load balancing within the cluster.
Enable scanning on this

appliance (Not
applicable on
Content Security
Blade Servers)
If not selected, this appliance distributes all scanning workload to the scanning
appliances.
Configure New
Management Device
(Content Security
Blade Server only)
Clicking this button allows you to configure another blade as a management

blade.
For a cluster of appliances, if you have only a master and a failover appliance,
with both configured to scan traffic, the master will send most connections to
the failover appliance for scanning.

Configure next device the next blade that is PXE booted will be imaged as a
management blade.
A device with the following MAC address when the blade with the MAC address you
specify is PXE booted, it will be imaged as a management blade.
Once the chosen blade is imaged as a management blade, this option is reset.
Option definitions Advanced scanning device settings

Use this area for fine-grained control of attached scanning devices. You can also configure the devices
to share hard disk space for the storage of Secure Web Mail Messages. Devices in a cluster are
identified by their MAC (Media Access Control) addresses. When you add a MAC address to the table
you may opt to disable it, meaning that scanning requests will not be sent to the device, and share
hard disk space.
Option
Definition
MAC Address
Specifies the device's Media Access Control (MAC) address as 12 hexadecimal

digits in the format: A1:B2:C3:D4:E5:F6.
Disabled
Select to remove this device from the pool of scanning devices.
Encryption Storage
If the scanning device is in a ready state, you can choose to include the device in
the Encryption Storage pool.
Add MAC Address
Click to add the MAC address of a new device.
Manage MAC Addresses Opens the MAC Addresses dialog box that enables you to manage the list of
available MAC addresses.
Although you can add the MAC addresses of management and failover devices to this table, they always
contribute hard disk space for Secure Web Mail messages and cannot be disabled.
Network Interfaces Wizard Cluster Management

Use the Network Interfaces Wizard to specify the IP addresses and adapter settings for setting up
clusters of appliances.
System | System Administration | Cluster Management | Network Interfaces Wizard
440
Product Guide

This wizard steps you through the process to configure the network interfaces when configuring your
appliance as part of a cluster.
The options that are displayed as you progress through the wizard depend on the operating mode and
other selections that you make. This means that you may not see all the controls and fields detailed in
this topic.
Table 5-11 Operating Mode Option definitions

Option
Definition
Select operating mode Select the mode of operation for the cluster of appliances, or for your McAfee
Content Security Blade Server.
When configuring a cluster in either explicit proxy mode or transparent router mode, you need to
configure a virtual IP address that is on the same subnet as both the real IP addresses for the master
and the failover appliances. This ensures that traffic is directed to whichever appliance is currently
acting as the master appliance.
Network Interface 1 or Network Interface 2

Network Interface 2 is not shown if you select explicit proxy as your operating mode.

Option
Definition
IP Address

aliases.
Network Mask
Specifies the network mask. In IPv4, you can use a format such as 255.255.255.0,
or CIDR notation, such as 24. In IPv6, you must use the prefix length, for example,
64.
Enabled
Virtual
Product Guide
441


Option
Definition
New Address/
Delete Selected
Address
NIC 1 Adapter
Options or NIC 2
Adapter Options

bytes.
installation.
Option definitions MAC Addresses

Add and remove multiple MAC addresses for other appliances within the cluster or blade server.
Option
Definition
Attached devices
The section contains a list of devices that are currently members of the cluster.
Each device is identified by its MAC address and hostname and you can check the
items that you want to be included in the MAC address table.
If you are setting up your cluster, this section will be empty.
Unknown devices
(not available
from within the
Setup Wizard)
The section contains a list of MAC addresses that are not currently in the cluster.
Only the MAC address is shown since the device is unrecognized.
If you are setting up your cluster all MAC addresses will appear in this section.
If the cluster has already been configured, a device may be unknown because the
appliance is currently unreachable over the network. You can check the items that
you want to be removed from the MAC address table.
442
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Additional devices
The section offers a convenient way of adding the MAC addresses of devices that
you intend to add to the cluster at a future time.
You may enter any number of addresses separated by spaces.
You will not be able to configure the Encryption Storage option for these unless they are
the addresses of devices that are currently members of the cluster.
Lock DHCP server

to MAC addresses
(Content
Security Blade
Servers only)
Check this option to prevent the management blade from acknowledging DHCP
requests sent by arbitrary hosts on its network.
If selected, you should add the MAC addresses of all scanning blades that you
intend adding to your cluster to the MAC address table. Failing to do this will
prevent a scanning blade from acquiring the correct IP address.
Since the state of the cluster updates periodically, it is possible for a device to move from the unknown
section to the attached section (or vice versa) while you are working in this dialog. This may happen if a
device has just rebooted, for example.
Resilient Mode
Use this page of the user interface to enable resiliency mode on your blade server.
System | System Administration | Cluster Management | Resilient Mode
This page only applies to the McAfee Content Security Blade Server.
Benefits of setting up resilient mode

This information describes the benefits associated with setting up resilient mode.
In resilient mode, all connections between your network, the McAfee Email Gateway Blade Server,
and also the connections within the blade server enclosure are made in such a way that multiple paths
are used.
These multiple pathways provide enhanced resiliency to the failure of any one component either within
the blade server, or of the network devices or cabling needed to route traffic between your network
and the blade server.
Product Guide
443

Option definitions Resilient Mode

Option
Definition
Enable Resilient
Mode
Within this area, you can check the current status regarding resiliency of your blade
server.
You can also enable or disable resiliency mode.
Ensure that you have downloaded the chassis configuration files before enabling
resiliency mode.
After clicking Enable Resilient Mode or Disable Resilient Mode, and clicking OK on the
warning dialog box, your blade server will automatically be shut down,
allowing you to make the required cabling changes.
Configuration Files From the user interface, you can view or download the interconnect configuration
files for both resilient and non-resilient mode operation for all the interconnects.
To download all the configuration files, click interconnect_config.zip, as this file
contains all the other configuration files.
Configure Automatic Configuration Backups wizard

This information describes the Configure Automatic Configuration Backups wizard.
System | System Administration | Configuration Management | Automatic configuration backup
Benefits of the Configure Automatic Configuration Backups wizard

Use this information to understand the benefits of using automatic configuration backups, and of using
the wizard provided to configure them.
444
Product Guide


Option
Definition
Transfer to FTP
Server
Server
Proxy server
Port
Proxy port
Directory
Proxy username

anonymous)
Proxy password

anonymous)
Transfer via SSH

Server
Port
Directory
Option definitions Configure Updates (Time)

Use this page to schedule automatic configuration backups, and set up scheduled updates to the
detection definitin (DAT) files, anti-spam, and package updates.
System | Component Management | Update Status
System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP | System Log Settings
Introduction to Scheduled update settings

You can schedule updates for the following components:
Automatic configuration backups
Spam rules and anti-spam engine
System Log
Appliance software updates (HotFixes and

patches)
Anti-virus engine and database

McAfee recommends that you update all scanning components on a new appliance using the Update
Now feature, then use the Schedule feature for each component to create regular updates at a time
when traffic is low, such as during the night.
Product Guide
445

Option
Definition
Hourly to Weekly
Specifies the schedule. If you do not need this feature, select Never.
Next / Finish
Moves to the next page of the wizard , or closes it and applies the settings.
Option definitions Test Configuration

Option
Definition
Test
Checks that the backup configuration works, and provides the desired information.
Database Maintenance
Use this page to manage the number of events contained in the reporting database, and the number
of items identified using the Message Search feature, and to enable external devices to access
information about email events via SQL.
System | System Administration | Database Maintenance

Retention Limits
Event Options
External Access
Maintenance
Benefits of the database maintenance options

This information describes the benefits of the database maintenance options.
Over time, databases tend to increase in size, consuming available resources and becoming slower to
access to save information or to run reports. Regular maintenance of databases helps to avoid these
problems.
Retention Limits The appliance uses information from this database to display the reports that you
can view from Reports on the navigation bar. Information about earlier events is removed
periodically.
Retention limits are dependent on the type of hardware and the size of the appliance hard disk
space. McAfee recommends that you do not change these values unless directed to do so by your
McAfee Support representative.
446
Event Options You can choose the following options relating to information about events:
Insert events into the database. Doing this can provide useful information in reports, but will increase
the amount of data that is written to, or read from the database.
Insert only primary events into the database. Allow only the most important events data to be logged to
the database.
Pass on events to the logging channels. Select to allow data about events to be available to other
logging methods available from the appliance.
Product Guide

External Access External access to a limited set of views in the reports database on an appliance
can be configured.
Enable off box sql access. Select to allow access to the appliance' database.
Enable external database access for this address range. Limit the systems that can access the external
database to machines within a specified IP address range.
Allow external database to user. Select the level of user that can configure external database access.
Set Reporting Password. Secure the access to the database.
Maintenance When run, the maintenance tasks trim the contents of the reporting database and
items identified using the Message Search feature according to the settings in the Retention Limits
area.
McAfee recommends that you clean up the reporting database and message search items regularly
to prevent the database from becoming too large.
Option definitions Retention Limits

Use this area to set the limits on the maximum time or number of reporting or message items
retained within the database.
Retention limits are dependent on the appliance model, the type of hardware and the amount of
appliance hard disk space. McAfee recommends that you do not change these values unless directed to
do so by your McAfee Support representative.
Option
Definition
Events
Items shown in the reporting database.

Please refer to the user interface for these retention limits.
Quarantined emails
Maximum number or length of time that messages can be held in the quarantine
database.
Delivery status
(delivered, blocked,
bounced)
Maximum number or length of time that delivered, blocked or bounced

messages can be stored in the database for use by the Message Search feature.
Option definitions Event Options

Use this area to define the events that are stored in the database.
Option
Definition
Insert events into the

database
Select to add information about reporting events into the database. Be aware
that the database can fill quickly when reporting events are stored.
McAfee recommends that Content Security Blade Server users use the offbox
syslog feature for reporting events and deselect this option.
Insert only primary

Select to add information only about primary reporting events into the database,
events into the database such as virus detections.
A message that triggers both a virus and spam "hit" is logged twice in the
database. If you deselect this option, only the detection that caused the primary
action on the message is logged in the database.
Pass on events to the
logging channels
Select to allow events to be passed to the logging channels from logging and
alerting sources such as syslog, SNMP, and email detections.
Product Guide
447

Option definitions External Access

Use this area to configure your appliance to allow limited access from an off box SQL client to view
information about email detections and configuration change events, stored available in three separate
views.
Option
Definition
Enable off box sql access
Select to allow an off box SQL client to access the appliance.
Allow external database access for

this address range
Define the address and subnet mask for the external hosts to which
you want to allow access.
Allow external database access to

user
Define the user that the external client uses to log into the appliance.
This is set to reporter by default.
Set Reporting Password
Define the password that the external database uses to log into the
appliance. This is set to reports by default.
Option definitions Maintenance

Use this area to configure the frequency of database maintenance tasks, and to manually trigger these
tasks on the appliance.
Option
Definition
Maintenance schedule Select the frequency that the appliance carries out database maintenance tasks.
The default is every 30 minutes.
Reset Database
Enter the password and then click Reset Database to return the database to its default
state.
All information within the database will be lost.
Maintain Database
Click to manually start the database maintenance tasks ever X minutes. The
database checks for items in the reporting database or identified using the
Message Search feature have reached the retention limit that you set.
Task View information about email detections from an off-box client

using Postgres' PSQL
Use this task to view information about email detections from an off-box client using Postgres' PSQL
interactive application.
Task
448
Open the command line on the computer from which you want to view the database.
Type psql -U <username> -d reports - h <host address> and press the Enter key.
Type the password for the user to whom you gave access.
Press the Enter key to see the list of report view that you have available. Choose from:
Email_details
Configuration_change_view.
Product Guide

Rescue Image
Use this section to force the McAfee Email Gateway to boot from a rescue image stored on a protected
partition on the hard disk. You can also manage your rescue images and create a bootable USB drive
containing the rescue image from here.
System | System Administration | Rescue Image

You can store a rescue image:
On a protected partition on the appliances' hard disk
On a USB drive:
attached to one of the external USB connectors on the appliance
mounted internally within the appliance if you have fitted an optional internal USB drive to
your appliance. (Applies to appliances based on the Dell R610 hardware only.)
Creating a bootable rescue image on a USB drive will result in the loss of all files located on the USB
device.
To prevent tampering or accidental stopping, you must type the appliance password to operate these
features.
Benefits of using the internal rescue image features

Use this page to force the appliance to boot from a rescue image stored on a protected partition on
the hard disk. You can also manage your rescue images and create a bootable USB drive containing
the rescue image from here.
When managing your Email Gateway appliances, having the image for each appliance stored on a
protected partition on the hard disk or USB drive for each appliance enables you to remotely
reimage your appliances without needing to locate a CD containing the correct version of the
software.
The rescue image negates the requirement for remote access cards to be fitted to your appliance
(if you have suitable appliance models) in order for the appliances to be reimaged from a remote
location.
By creating a library of stored rescue images on your local network or on a local FTP or HTTP
server, you can use the rescue images to roll back your appliance to a previous .iso release of the
software, or to upgrade to a newer version. You do this by importing the required image to the
rescue partition on your appliance and then forcing your appliance to boot from the newly imported
rescue image using the Perform a full installation overwriting existing data option. To roll back, you need to
use the option 2 or 3 settings; to upgrade you need to use option 2, 3 or 4 settings.
Product Guide
449

Option definitions Manage Internal Rescue Image

This information describes the options in this section.
Option
Definition
Rescue image details
Provides details of the rescue image currently stored within the rescue partition of
your appliance.
Force Boot from

Rescue Image
Provides options to reboot your appliance from a rescue image:

Boot to menu
If you select Boot to menu, ensure that you are either local to the appliance, or
that you have access to the appliance using a DRAC card.
Perform a full installation overwriting existing data

Install software preserving configuration and email messages
Install software preserving network configuration only
Install software preserving configuration only
Import Image
Browse to a rescue image stored on your local drive, and copy this image onto
the rescue partition on your appliance.
Download Image from

Server
Browse to a rescue image stored on a local FTP or HTTP server, and copy this
image onto the rescue partition on your appliance.
Export Image
Save a rescue image to a file, or select a USB drive to create a bootable copy of
the rescue image on the USB drive.
Refresh USB Device

List
Click to refresh the USB devices shown in the drop down list on the left of this
option.
Burn Image to USB
Click to copy the rescue image onto a USB.
Task - Checking the current rescue image version

Use this task to verify the version of the currently stored rescue image.
When you install a new version of the software (from an .iso image) onto your appliance, the system
automatically loads this image to the rescue partition on the hard disk of the appliance.
Task
1
Click System | System Administration | Rescue Image.
Verify the version information displayed under Rescue image details, or from the About the Appliance
window.
Task Updating the rescue image held on the appliances' hard disk from a local
network or drive
Use this task to update the rescue image on the appliance hard disk from a local drive.
The software allows you to overwrite the rescue partition with a new image, without re-installing the
software. You can import an image from a local network or drive.
Task
450
Click Import Image.
Browse to the relevant file.
Click OK.
Product Guide

Task Updating the rescue image held on the appliances' hard disk from a local
FTP or HTTP server
Use this ask to update the rescue image from a local FTP or HTTP server without re-installing the
software.
You can import an image from a local FTP or HTTP server.
Task
1
Click Download Image from Server.
Specify the server settings, and if required, your proxy settings and passwords.
Click OK.
Your appliance saves these server and proxy settings.
Task Installing from the rescue image on the appliances' hard disk
Use this task to install a rescue image on an appliance.
When you have verified that you have the correct version of the rescue image stored on the protected
partition of the appliances' hard disk, you can use this image to reimage your appliance
Task
1
Click Force Boot from Rescue Image.
Select from:
Boot to menu
If you select Boot to menu, ensure that you are either local to the appliance, or that you have
access to the appliance using a DRAC card.
Perform a full installation overwriting existing data
Perform a full installation overwriting existing date but preserving network settings
If you select either of the full installation options, you will need to take further action to import
saved configurations, or to re-configure the appliance.
Install software preserving configuration and email messages
Enter the appliance password.
Click OK.
The appliance reboots, and uses the rescue image to reimage the appliance, using the installation
options you selected.
Task Export a rescue image to a USB drive

Use this task to export a rescue image to a USB drive.
Before you begin
To use an external USB drive, it needs to be connected on one of the USB connectors on
the appliance.
Product Guide
451

To create an image on a USB drive, you can export the image to any suitable USB drive connected to
your appliance.
You cannot export a rescue image to a USB drive from the VMtrial version of the software.
If you have fitted an optional internal USB drive to your appliance, you can select this USB drive.
(Applies to appliances based on the Dell R610 hardware only.)
Task
1
Click Refresh USB Device List.
Select the required USB device from the USB device drop-down list.
Click Burn Image to USB.
The rescue image is copied to the USB drive, overwriting any existing files, and creates a bootable
image.
Task Installing from the rescue image on the appliance USB drive
Use this task to install from the rescue image on the appliance USB drive.
You can use the bootable rescue image stored on an external USB drive, or on an internal USB drive
(hardware dependant) to reimage your appliance.
Task
1
Ensure that the USB drive with the correct version of the rescue image is attached to your
appliance.
Ensure that a monitor and keyboard are connected to the appliance.
Enter the appliance password into the text box next to Reboot Appliance in the System Commands section.
Click Reboot Appliance from the System Commands area.
As the appliance reboots, choose Boot Menu using the appliances' keyboard and monitor.
From the menu, select the USB drive to boot from.
The appliance reboots, and uses the rescue image found on the USB drive to reimage the appliance,
using the installation options you select in the standard license and console displayed on the monitor
connected to the appliance.
Task - Create a bootable USB drive rescue image without using the
appliance
Use this task to create a bootable rescue image on a USB drive without using your appliance.
Before you begin
You need a computer that has Internet access, your McAfee Grant Number for your Email
Gateway appliance, and third party software that enables you to create a bootable image
onto a USB drive.
452
Product Guide

Task
1
Browse to the McAfee download site, and enter your Grant Number.
Download the .iso file for the version of the Email Gateway appliance software.
Create a bootable image on the USB drive from the downloaded file, using suitable system
commands or disk-imaging software.
System Commands
Use this page to safely turn off the appliance, reboot the appliance, or revert to factory default
settings.
System | System Administration | System Commands

To prevent tampering or accidental stopping, you must type the password to operate these features.
Benefits of using the system commands

This information describes the benefits to using the system commands features.
On occasion, you may need to shut down your appliance, perhaps due to work being carried out on
your power distribution system, or changes to your network topography. You may also need to reboot
the appliance, either as part of a software upgrade, or to restart all services.
Occasionally, you may want to clear all configured options from your appliance, and to revert to the
factory default settings.
Option definitions System Commands

Option
Definition
Shutdown Appliance
When clicked, turns off the power to the appliance or takes the appliance to
a state where you can safely turn off its power.
Reboot Appliance
When clicked, restarts the appliance.
Revert to Default Configuration When clicked, restores all the original out-of-the-box settings to the
appliance.
Task Shutting down the appliance

Use this task to shut down the appliance.
Before you begin
Before shutting down the appliance, ensure that you have the relevant permissions and
network outage plans in place.
To prevent tampering or accidental stopping, you must type the password to operate this feature.
Product Guide
453

Task
1
Navigate to System | System Administration | System Commands.
Enter the system password next to the Shutdown Appliance button.
Click Shutdown Appliance.
The appliance commences its shut down process, and will switch off in a few minutes.
Task Rebooting the appliance

Use this task to restart the appliance.
Before you begin
Before rebooting your appliance, ensure that you have the relevant permissions and
network outage plans in place.
Task
1
Enter the system password next to the Reboot Appliance button.
Click Reboot Appliance.
The appliance commences its shut down process, and reboots after about 5 minutes.
Task Reverting to the default configuration

Use this task to reapply the default configuration to the appliance.
Before you begin
Before reverting to the factory default settings for your appliance, ensure that you have the
relevant permissions and network outage plans in place. We recommend that you create a
backup of your existing configuration before reverting to the factory settings.
Task
1
Enter the system password next to the Revert to Default Configuration button.
Click Revert to Default Configuration

The appliance warns you that your settings will be overwritten and that you will be logged off.
454
Click OK to revert your configuration.
Product Guide

Users
Users
The Users pages enable you to set up your users and roles, and perform session management tasks.
System | Users
From these pages you can configure the appliance to set up and administer your role-based user
accounts to perform tasks such as viewing or managing reports, and managing email and system
settings. Additionally, you can tell the appliance how you want to manage session timeouts, and
whether you want your users to see your company email usage policy as they log on. The email policy
notification text can be edited.
Contents
Users and Roles
Option definitions New Role dialog box
Option definitions Role Details dialog box
Password Management
Forgotten password
Login Services
Add Login Services wizard
Session Management
DoD CAC Authentication
Option definitions CAC Certificate Attribute Mapping
Option definitions Custom Text dialog box
Option definitions User Details
Users and Roles

This information describes the benefits and features of the Users and Roles options.
System | Users | Users and Roles
Benefits of the Users and Roles options

This information describes the benefits of creating roles that have specific access and management
rights associated with them.
Use this feature to create accounts for user who can access the appliance and assign each user
account specific rights. Creating specific user roles allows you to define standard sets of access rights
that can be assigned quickly and easily.
Product Guide
455

Users
Option definitions Users and Roles

Option
Definition
Role
The name of the role. By default, the appliances comes with the following roles already
created:
Super Administrator has the ability to view and manage all aspects of the appliance's email
and system settings.
Email Administrator has the ability to view and manage all email-related configuration and
reports settings.
Reports Administrator has the ability to view and manage the reports settings.
Description Contains any optional description text you entered when you created the role.
Edit
Click to open the Role Details dialog box and view the role's specifications. The Role Details
dialog box is read-only and cannot be saved.
Delete
Remove the selected role from the list.
Add Role
Click to open the New Role dialog box.
Task - Control user access by role

Create a new user category for people who can only create and view reports on the appliance activity.
Task
1
Go to System | Users | Users and Roles.
Click Add User.
Type the Login ID name for this user.
Type the Full name for this user.
If required, add a description for this user.
From User role, select Reports Administrator.
From Account type, select Local user.
Enter a password for this user.
Confirm the password for this user.
10 Click OK.
The new user is created with the selected privileges.
456
Product Guide

Users
Option definitions New Role dialog box

Option
Definition
Role name /
Description
Type the name of the new role, and optionally add a description to help you identify
it in the User Roles list.
Privileges
Under the type of role that you want to create, select the privileges that you want to
associate with it for example, to have the rights to view report results, or set the
data that the report contains.
The following role types are available:
General
Email Administration
Dashboard
Reporting and Queues
Option definitions Role Details dialog box

Option
Definition
Role name / Description
The name of the role you created.
Privileges
The access, management, and viewing rights associated with the role.
The information in this dialog box is based on the information you entered when you created the role. It
is read-only, and cannot be saved.
Password Management
The Password Management page defines the complexity and change control that you want to apply to
the passwords that can access the appliance.
System | Users | Password Management

Password Complexity
Password Change Control
Benefits of using complex passwords to access the appliance

Understand why correctly setting the end user password complexity, frequency of change and the
change process is important in maintaining the security of McAfee Email Gateway.
Using a suitable password ensures that the appliance cannot be accessed by people other than those
authorized to do so.
McAfee Email Gateway allows you to define a suitable end user password policy, which includes
specifying how complex you require the chosen passwords to be, how long each password is valid for
and the process required to update existing passwords. Rules for reuse and change frequency are only
enforced when you set passwords to expire. If you choose not to use this feature, default passwords
of eight characters can be specified.
Product Guide
457

Users
A complex password is more secure than a very simple one, but is more likely to create a greater
volume of "forgotten password" reset requests from your end users. Therefore, you need to decide the
balance between complex passwords that are likely to generate lots of reset requests, and simpler
passwords that will require less maintenance.
When a user changes their password, an expiry date is always set even when password expiry is not
enabled.
This does not apply to resetting the password when the expiry date is set to 0 (zero). If the user
changes the password while completing the Setup Wizard, enabling password expiry will not cause the
password to expire.
If you set the reminder period to >0, the user starts to receive expiry reminders as the expiry date
approaches. A password change is enforced at the login screen when the expiry time is reached.
If you set the minimum period between changes to >0, the user has to wait that many days before
the password can be changed again so that it cannot be immediately changed to be the same
password that has been used for the past six months.
The appliance maintains a history of the past ten password for each user so any reuse policy can be
applied retroactively. When changing their password, a dialog box informs the user that complexity
constraints that are currently in force.
An administrator can still reset passwords for other users. The generated passwords will not
necessarily meet the exact complexity requirements. If password expiry is in force they will only be
good for one login.
Option definitions Password Management

Set the minimum number of alpha, digit, and special characters you want to include in each password,
and how you want to manage password change control.
Password Complexity
Option
Definition
Minimum length
Select the minimum length that you will allow for end user passwords. Longer
passwords are more secure, but may result in more calls to your support address
as end users fine them more difficult to remember.
Minimum number of
ALPHA characters
Specify the minimum number of alphabetical characters to be used within the end
users passwords. To increase security, you can also Require a mixture of upper and
lowercase characters to be used.
Minimum number of
DIGIT characters
The more different types of characters that may be used within an end users
password, the more secure that password can be made. Forcing your end users to
use numbers within their passwords improves the security of the passwords.
Minimum number of
SPECIAL characters
The more different types of characters that may be used within an end users
password, the more secure that password can be made. Forcing your end users to
use special characters within their passwords improves the security of the
passwords.
Special characters are non-alphanumeric characters such as underscores (_),
hyphens (-) and other punctuation.
Minimum difference
from the previous
password
Specify how different a new password must be from the existing password. This is
based on the minimum number of characters that must change between the
passwords.
This option is case-sensitive, so changing the case of existing characters within the
password is seen as a difference.
458
Product Guide

Users
Password Change Control

Option
Definition
Enable
password
expiry
Decide whether your end users will need to periodically renew their passwords. Specify
the required password expiry parameters:
Password lifetime in days The number of days for which a password is valid.
Reminder period in days The time during which the user is reminded about changing
their password.
Number of recent passwords to disallow Configure this to prevent your users re-using
passwords.
Minimum interval between password changes in days Specify any limits you want to place on
the frequency with which end users can change their passwords.
Forgotten password
Understand the process required to regain access to your McAfee Email Gateway if you have forgotten
your password.
Password reset process

To reset the administrator password on your McAfee Email Gateway to the factory default setting of
password, you need to ensure that you have access to the underlying appliance (either the physical
appliance or the virtual appliance.)
If you are resetting the password for a physical appliance, you must have access to the on/off button
on the appliance. If you are resetting the password for a virtual McAfee Email Gateway installation,
you require access to the virtual environment management tools.
Once you have access to the appliance, you reboot the appliance, and, from the appliance console
itself, select the option to reset the password. The appliance then continues rebooting with the factory
default password.
Task Password reset on a physical appliance

Reset the password on your physical (hardware-based) appliance.
Before you begin
Ensure that you can access the physical McAfee Email Gateway appliance, and that you
have a keyboard and monitor connected to the appliance.
You may need to arrange a short service outage for your McAfee Email Gateway whilst you
perform this password reset.
Task
1
From the physical McAfee Email Gateway appliance, press the power button twice within 5 seconds.
This causes the McAfee Email Gateway to reboot.
When the boot menu appears, select Rescue Media. Press Enter.
Type y to agree to the license agreement. Press Enter.
Type w option Reset passwords to factory default. Press Enter.

When the appliance has completed its reboot, the password is reset to the factory default setting,
password.
Product Guide
459

Users
Task Password reset on a virtual appliance

Reset the password on your virtual appliance.
Before you begin
Ensure that you can access the vCenter or similar software that manages the virtual
environment in which your McAfee Email Gateway virtual appliance resides.
You may need to arrange a short service outage for your McAfee Email Gateway whilst you
perform this password reset.
Task
1
From the virtual environment management software, locate the required McAfee Email Gateway
virtual appliance.
Power off the McAfee Email Gateway.
Power the McAfee Email Gateway on.
When the boot menu appears, select Rescue Media. Press Enter.
Type y to agree to the license agreement. Press Enter.
Type w option Reset passwords to factory default. Press Enter.

When the appliance has completed its reboot, the password is reset to the factory default setting,
password.
Login Services
Use the Login Services options to manage user authentication and authorization using either Kerberos or
RADIUS authentication servers.
System | Users | Login Services

The email gateway can integrate with any existing Kerberos or RADIUS authentication management
system.
Kerberos only provides password authentication which means that you will need to define users on the
gateway as well. The RADIUS service can be configured to handle user authorization as well as
password authentication. This means that the gateway can link various attributes to specific roles to
determine access privileges without having to define users on the email gateway.
Contents
Benefits of using the Login Services options
Option definitions Login Services
Benefits of using the Login Services options

This information describes the benefits to using the Login Services options.
Login Services provides a single place for identity management on the email gateway using either
Kerberos or RADIUS authentication servers. For example, you can change information on the RADIUS
server such as passwords, without having to replicate the change on the gateway as well.
460
Product Guide

Users
Option definitions Login Services

This information describes the options available on this page. The information is populated by details
that you specify in the Add Login Service wizard.
Option
Definition
Service Name
The name for the service definition that you create in the Add Login Service wizard.
Service Type
Choose from either Kerberos authentication or RADIUS authentication.
Realm
An authentication realm, such as <companyname-corp>.
Role Determination Shows how the user's privileges for managing the gateway are determined. This can
be done either by referencing locally defined users whose name matches the login
name, or for RADIUS, the gateway can examine the attributes in the Access-Accept
response to determine the role that the user assumes.
This contents of this field is determined by the option you choose on the Role Mappings
page of the Add Login Service wizard.
Default Role
If at login time, it is not possible to determine the role from other information
available, this is the role that an authenticated user will assume. The login will fail if
it is not possible to determine the user's role from data returned that is returned
from the authentication server, or from user information defined on the gateway.
Add Service
Starts the Add Login Service wizard. After you have created a service, you can edit its
details using the standard edit button.
Add Login Services wizard

The Add Login Services wizard allows you set up user authentication and authorization using either the
Kerberos or RADIUS authentication servers.
The Add Login Services wizard sets up the following details for your chosen authentication server, and
test that they work as you want them to:
The IP address of the authentication server
A backup server
The TCP port
A shared secret
The authentication realm, its notation, and delimiter
Role mappings
Contents
Option
Option
Option
Option
definitions
definitions
definitions
definitions
Basic Settings
Type-Specific Settings
Role Mappings
Test
Option definitions Basic Settings

Option
Definition
Service name
Define the name that you want to give the service.
Optional field to add further information to identify the service.
Service type
Choose from RADIUS or Kerberos. After defining the service, you cannot change
this value.
Product Guide
461

Users
Option
Definition
Server address
The IP address or domain name of the authentication server.
Backup server (optional) For RADIUS only, the address of a server that can be used if the primary server
is unavailable.
The TCP port used by the authentication server. This defaults to port 88 for
Kerberos, or to port 1812 for RADIUS.
Port
Option definitions Type-Specific Settings

Option
Definition
Shared secret
Set the key that will be used for encrypting data sent between the gateway and the
RADIUS server to prevent passwords, for example, from being sent by the RADIUS
server in clear text.
This field does not appear if you chose the Kerberos server type on the Basic Settings page.
The authentication realm - in RADIUS you can use it to partition your users database.
If you are linking to a Kerberos server, this field is mandatory because user names are
not globally unique.
Realm
This field is optional if you chose the RADIUS server type on the Basic Settings page.
Realm notation
Choose from either Postfix (such as user@realm), or Prefix (such as realm\user).

This field does not appear if you chose the Kerberos server type.
Realm delimiter Typically, this is an @ for postfix notation, or \ for prefix notation. The character that is
used to join the user name and the realm to form a fully qualified user name.
This field does not appear if you chose the Kerberos server type.
NAS-IP-Address If your RADIUS server is configured to require the IP address attribute, select the
required address from the drop-down list. This is needed, for example, if you have a
Microsoft Active Directory environment with default settings for RADIUS authentication.
If you change the IP addresses used by your Email Gateway, you have to manually
update this field.
Option definitions Role Mappings

Role mapping controls how a user privileges are determined during login. The Kerberos server type does
not support Role Mappings. To allow authentication against an external Kerberos server, either create
locally defined users, or select a default role.
Option
Definition
Use locally defined Select to have the gateway look for a user in its own database with the same name
user details...
as the login name to determine access privileges.
462
Use data returned

from the server...
Select to have the gateway use data returned by the authentication server to
determine access privileges. A RADIUS server returns name value pairs called
attributes. You can define RADIUS attribute to gateway role mappings.
RADIUS Attribute
For example, Service-Type.
Product Guide

Users
Option
Definition
Attribute Value
For example, Administrative-User.

You can use a regular expression to match multiple values.
Role
Includes any role that has been created in Users and Roles, as well as the default roles.
If an attribute with the specified name and value is found in the Access-Accept
response, the authenticated user is assigned that role.
Add Mapping
Opens the RADIUS Attribute Mapping dialog box where you can set a name and value for
the attribute, and select the type of user role that you want to associate with it.
Default role
If it is not possible to determine a user's role through other means (either a user
defined on the gateway, or by examining data from the authentication server), this
is the role that an authenticated user is assigned. You can select any defined role, or
None. If you select None and it is not possible to determine a user's role, login fails
even if authentication is successful.
Option definitions Test

Option Definition
Username A valid user who can access the authentication server.
Password The password associated with that username.
Status
The result of the last authentication test, either success or failure. If you have not yet
performed a test, the status shows as Unknown.
Output
The response from the authentication server in a readable format.

For RADIUS, some attributes are binary values and are shown using hexadecimal notation.
Test
Click to start the test authentication against the authentication server.
Finish
Click to exit the wizard. The details you entered are displayed on the Login Services page.
Session Management
This information describes the benefits and features of the Session Management options.
System | Users | Session Management
Benefits of the Session Management options

This information describes the benefits of using the Session Management options.
Session management provides the means to control the amount of time a user can remain logged on
to the appliance. This option prevents the user interface from remaining accessible inadvertently,
providing additional security.
Product Guide
463

Users
Option definitions Session Management

Option
Definition
Enable session managemnt
Choose whether to allow session management settings to apply to the

appliance. This option is selected by default.
Action to perform after

session timeout
Choose from:
Prompt for password
Log off
Timeout
Set the length of time, in minutes, before the appliance times out.
Display custom user

notification
Select to have the appliance display a notification to your users that details
your usage policy. Click Edit to open the Custom Text dialog box and view the
default notification message, or change it.
DoD CAC Authentication

Understand the benefits and features of the DoD CAC Authentication options.
System | Users | DoD CAC Authentication
Benefits of using DoD CAC Authentication

Understand the benefits of configuring DoD CAC Authentication.
The United States Department of Defense use Common Access Card (CAC) technology to access many
of its core IT systems. McAfee Email Gateway can be configured to use this method of authentication.
Once configured to use DoD CAC Authentication, your users will only be able to log onto the McAfee
Email Gateway after inserting their CAC into the reader, and then being authenticated against the
Department of Defense certificate authority.
Option definitions DoD CAC Authentication

Understand the options relating to DoD CAC Authentication within the user interface.
Table 5-13 DoD CAC Authentication
Option
Definition
Enable DoD CAC authentication
Select to enable CAC authentication.

Once CAC authentication has been configured and applied, you will only
be able to log onto the McAfee Email Gateway user interface after
inserting your CAC into the reader, and being authenticated against the
DoD certificate authority.
Link to import CA
certificates
Click the link to move to Email | Certificate Management | Certificates, to view,

import or export a Department of Defense CA certificate.
Table 5-14 Role Mapping

Option
Definition
CAC Certificate Subject Field Shows the Distinguished Name (DN) component used to map a user to a
specific role.
464
Field Value
Shows the value used to identify the user.
Role
The role selected for the user.
Product Guide

Users
Table 5-14 Role Mapping (continued)

Option
Definition
Add Mapping
Click to open the CAC Certificate Attribute Mapping dialog box, to create a new role
mapping.
Default role
You can configure a default role if a role cannot be established when a user
logs into McAfee Email Gateway using DoD CAC Authentication.
Default value is None.
Option definitions CAC Certificate Attribute Mapping

Configure your McAfee Email Gateway to automatically map a DoD CAC authenticated user to a
particular role.
Table 5-15 CAC Certificate Attribute Mapping dialog box
Option
Definition
CAC Certificate Subject DN

Component
To create the roll mapping, select the Distinguished Name (DN) component
to use as the identifier.
Options are:
C
CN
OU
Email
ST
UID
L
Attribute Value
Enter the Attribute Value to be used to identify the user when mapping them
to a role.
Role
Select the required role.

By default, the options are:
Email Administrator
Reports Administrator
Super Administrator
Option definitions Custom Text dialog box

Option
Definition
NOTICE TO USERS
Displays the system usage policy text that your users see when
they log on to the appliance.
Use this text as the banner text on the

appliance console
Deselect to edit the NOTICE TO USERS.
Reset
Click to return the text to the default.
Product Guide
465

Virtual Hosting
Option definitions User Details

Understand the options available when you are editing user details.
Option
Definition
Login ID
Edit the Login ID for this user.
Full name
Change the information displayed in the Full name field for this user.
Provide or change the optional description field.
Primary role
Specify the Primary role . The options are:

Super Administrator.
Email Administrator.
Reports Administrator.
Account type
Select the Account type. The options are:

Local user.
External user.
Reset password
Click the link to reset the password for this user to the default value.
After a short time, a message displays the new password for that user.
Virtual Hosting
The Virtual Hosting pages enable you to configure the virtual hosts and virtual networks that the
appliance needs to scan.
System | Virtual Hosting

From these pages, you can enable virtual hosting on the appliance, add a new virtual host, edit any
virtual networks.
Contents
Virtual Hosts
Virtual Networks
Option definitions - Edit Virtual Network
Add Virtual Host wizard
Option definitions New Scanning Policy
Virtual Hosts
Use this page to add, edit, or delete virtual hosts and show available virtual hosts.
System | Virtual Hosting | Virtual Hosts
466
Product Guide

Virtual Hosting
You can specify the addresses where the appliance receives or intercepts traffic on the Inbound
Address Pool. At least one IP address must be present.
These addresses must be unique. They must not be referenced in the Inbound addresses for any other
virtual host. However, they are allowed in the Outbound addresses of any other virtual host.
An overview of virtual hosting

This information describes the concept of virtual hosting.
Using virtual hosts, a single appliance can appear to behave like several appliances. Each virtual
appliance can manage traffic within specified pools of IP addresses, enabling the appliance to provide
scanning services to traffic from many customers.
This enables you to:
Separate each customer's traffic.
Create policies for each customer or host, which simplifies configuration and prevents clashes that
might occur in complex policies.
Provide reports for each customer or host in the appliance's Favorite reports feature (Reports |
Scheduled Reports | Favorite, which removes the need for complex filtering.
If any behavior places the appliance on a reputation black list, only a single virtual host is affected
not the whole appliance.
There are two types of virtual host:
Transparent This type of virtual host can only be created on an appliance configured for bridge
or router mode. A transparent virtual host intercepts traffic passing through the appliance destined
for an address in the range specified for the virtual host. To configure a transparent virtual host,
simply specify the IP address (or range) of the SMTP servers for which traffic should be
intercepted.
Proxy This type of virtual host configures the appliance to listen for SMTP connections on the IP
address ranges specified for the virtual host. A proxy-mode virtual host can be configured to have
any number of addresses used for delivering mail from the appliance (Outbound address pool).
Configuring a proxy-mode virtual host is more complex, because the appliance needs to have some
knowledge of the routing to the networks for each of the IP addresses it intercepts.
Virtual hosts behave differently depending on whether the virtual host is running in proxy mode which
listens on the inbound addresses, while virtual hosts running in transparent mode intercept traffic
going to the IP addresses listed.
If you create outbound IP address pools on both the LAN1 and LAN2 NICs, the virtual host uses the IP
addresses on the appliance interface as determined by the routing table.
The following constraints apply when you create virtual hosts and virtual networks:
Virtual Host IP address ranges must not overlap
All Virtual Host IP address ranges must be contained within a Virtual Network
Virtual Networks must not overlap
Virtual networks
The concept of a virtual network is used to bind a subnet to a specific interface of the appliance. With
this knowledge the appliance knows to route traffic to or from that subnet via the appropriate network
interface.
Product Guide
467

Virtual Hosting
Virtual network configuration is handled automatically by the Add Virtual Host wizard, which selects
(or suggests) the appropriate virtual network and populates the Network address field accordingly when
you specify an inbound or outbound address.
Option definitions Virtual Hosts

Option
Definition
Enable virtual hosting

on this appliance
Click to allow your appliance to have virtual hosting configured.
Name
Displays the name of the virtual host. The name must be unique, and is used in
other locations on the appliance user interface, such as:
Email Configuration
Email Policies
Message Search
Reports
The icons indicate the type of host:
Physical host
Virtual host
The policy name must be unique across all virtual hosts.
Host Name
Displays the host name of the virtual host.
Domain name
Displays the domain name of the virtual host.
Inbound/Intercept
Address Pool
Displays the number of addresses available. The range is shown as a tooltip.
Outbound Address
Pool
Displays the number of addresses available. The range is shown as a tooltip.
Add
When clicked, opens a wizard where you can type the details of a new virtual
host.
This option is available to virtual hosts running in proxy mode. The addresses are
used in a round robin fashion.
Task Creating a new virtual host

Use this task to create a new virtual host.
Before you begin
Before creating a new virtual host, ensure that you have the relevant information (Host
name, Domain name, IP address ranges) needed to correctly configure the virtual host
available.
Task
468
Go to System | Virtual Hosting | Virtual Hosts.
Ensure that Enable virtual hosting on this appliance is checked.
Click Add. The Add Virtual Host dialog box appears.
Type a Virtual host name.
Product Guide

Virtual Hosting
Type a Description for this virtual host. This step is optional, but enables you to quickly identify
further information about this virtual host.
Type the Host name.
Type the Domain name. This is in the format example.com.
Click Next.
Click Add to specify addresses in the Inbound/Intercept Address Pool.

a
Specify the Address range, Network address and Network interface for the Inbound/Intercept Address Pool.
Click OK.
Click Next.
10 Click Add to specify addresses in the Outbound Address Pool. This step is optional.
a
Specify the Address range, Network address and Network interface for the Outbound Address Pool.
Click OK.
11 Click Finish.
Task Creating a new virtual policy

Use this task to create a new virtual policy.
Virtual policies can be used as a template policy for similar kinds of virtual hosts.
Task
1
Ensure that Enable virtual hosting on this appliance is checked.
Apply the changes to the appliance.
Go to Email | Email policies | Scanning policies.
Click Add policies, and type a policy name.

The same policy name cannot be used across virtual hosts.
Select the Virtual policy type.
In Base scanning policy, select the Virtual policy in a new virtual host, or an existing one.
Virtual Networks
Use this page to specify virtual networks.
System | Virtual Hosting | Virtual Networks
Product Guide
469

Virtual Hosting
Benefits of configuring virtual networks

This information describes the benefits of managing virtual networks, such as deleting virtual networks
that you no longer need.
Virtual networks permit you to subdivide email traffic by allowing a single network to appear as
multiple networks. Virtual hosts assigned to these virtual networks make creating and applying
policies to specific groups much easier.
Option definitions - Virtual Networks

Option
Definition
Network address
Displays a virtual network address such as 192.168.254.0 /24.
Network interface
Displays the network interface for that virtual network address Bridge, LAN1
or LAN2.
When clicked, opens the Edit Virtual Network dialog box.
Edit
Delete
When clicked, deletes the network in that row. You cannot delete networks that
are in use.
Add
When clicked, opens the Edit Virtual Network dialog box.
Delete Unused Networks Removes unused networks from the list.
Option definitions - Edit Virtual Network

Option
Definition
Network address Enter the required IP address and range for the virtual network, such as
192.168.254.0/24.
Network interface Select the network interface to associate with the virtual network.
Add Virtual Host wizard

Use this wizard to set up a virtual host.
System | Virtual Hosting | Virtual Hosts | Add Virtual Host
470
Product Guide

Virtual Hosting
Option definitions Basic Host Settings page

Option
Definition
Virtual host name Specify a unique name and description of the virtual host that is used by other
and Description locations on the appliance user interface, such as:
Email Configuration
Email Policies
Message Search
Reports
(
Icon for virtual appliance.)
Host name
This value is used with the domain name to generate the SMTP greeting banner. If
the domain name is a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), the host name does not
appear in the SMTP greeting banner.
Domain name
The domain name has the form domain.dom and must be unique across all virtual
hosts. If the domain name is a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), the host name
does not appear in the SMTP greeting banner.
Mode
This option is only available when the appliance runs in a transparent mode.
There are two types of Virtual Host:

Transparent This type of virtual host can only be created on an appliance
configured for bridge or router mode. A transparent virtual host intercepts traffic
passing through the appliance destined for an address in the range specified for the
virtual host. To configure a transparent virtual host, simply specify the IP address
(or range) of the SMTP servers for which traffic should be intercepted.
Proxy This type of virtual host configures the appliance to listen for SMTP
connections on the IP address ranges specified for the virtual host. A proxy-mode
virtual host can be configured to have any number of addresses used for delivering
mail from the appliance (Outbound address pool). Configuring a proxy-mode virtual
host is more complex, because the appliance needs to have some knowledge of the
routing to the networks for each of the IP addresses it intercepts.
Base scanning
policy
Offers a choice of policies from the physical host, or allows you to specify a new
policy.
To view all the policies at any time, select Email | Email Policies | Scanning Policies on the
navigation bar.
Base protocol
preset
Offers a choice of presets from the physical host, or allows you to specify a new
preset. Presets are the connection-based policies.
Base McAfee
Secure Web Mail
policy
Offers a choice of policies from McAfee Secure Web Mail, or allows you to specify a
new policy.
Product Guide
471

Virtual Hosting
Option
Definition
Email relaying
Configures the virtual host domain as a local relay domain.
Enable logical
virtual hosting
Logical virtual hosting allows you to configure virtual hosts on different appliances
with the same policies, but with different network configuration.
When you push a configuration to another appliance within the same cluster:
If a virtual host with the same logical identifier has not yet been defined, an empty
virtual host entry will be created.
If a virtual host with the same logical identifier has been defined, then the IP
addresses for the virtual host are preserved.
A logical identifier can be a combination of characters and numbers.
Option definitions Inbound / Intercept Address Pool

Option
Definition
Address
range
Displays the address range for this virtual host. At least one IP address must be specified.
Add
Click Add to display the Edit IP Address Range dialog box. This enables you to define the
inbound IP address pool for the virtual host. These are the addresses that the appliance
intercepts traffic on.
Address range You must specify at least one inbound IP address.
These addresses must be unique, and cannot be used as the inbound addresses for any
other physical or virtual host. The addresses, can, however, be used as outbound
addresses for other virtual hosts.
The range of addresses can be specified in formats such as:

192.168.254.1 a single IP address
192.168.254.1-254 a range of IP addresses from 192.168.254.1 to
192.168.254.254
192.168.254.1+9 a range of IP addresses from 192.168.254.1 to 192.168.254.10
192.168.254.0/24 all host IP addresses in the /24 subnet
The IP addresses are created on the network driver, so you cannot ping or see the IP
address by running the ip addr show commands.
Network address Specify the subnet for the address range. The appliance auto-fills this
field, based on the information you enter in Address range. Check that this is appropriate
for your infrastructure, and edit the value if necessary.
Network interface Select the interface on which you need to create the IP addresses.
Choose from the available network interfaces.
You cannot ping the IP address externally, or see the address by running the ip addr
show commands. To test that the virtual host is listening on the expected address, telnet
to the configured SMTP port.
472
Product Guide

Virtual Hosting
Option definitions Outbound Address Pool page

The outbound address pool feature enables the appliance to deliver mail for a specific Virtual Host (or
the Physical Host) from a range of IP addresses. The IP address selected for the outbound is chosen
using a round-robin.
Definition
Outbound
address pool
Option
Address range
Displays the address range for this virtual host. At least one IP address must be
specified.
Add
Click Add to display the Edit IP Address Range dialog box. This enables you to define the
outbound IP address pool for the virtual host. These are the addresses on which the
appliance will deliver scanned email.
If you do not specify any outbound IP addresses, the appliance will use the physical
host IP address.
The addresses are used in a round-robin fashion.

The addresses can be used as outbound addresses for other virtual hosts.
Address range
The range of addresses can be specified in the following formats:
192.168.254.1 a single IP address
192.168.254.1-254 a range of IP addresses from 192.168.254.1 to
192.168.254.254
192.168.254.1+9 a range of IP addresses from 192.168.254.1 to
192.168.254.10
192.168.254.0/24 all host IP addresses in the /24 subnet
The IP addresses are created on the network driver, so you cannot ping or see the
IP address by running the ip addr show commands.
Host name (for

SMTP HELO)
Specifies the name that appears in the SMTP HELO greetings, using one of the
following options:
Resolve at runtime This option can impact performance
Use an IP address literal The IP address of a host used in place of its domain name.
To indicate that it is an address literal, it is in [square] brackets. Fr example,
[192.168.254.3]. Literal IP addresses are used because no DNS lookup needs to be
done, so it is always correct.
n
Use the following value Click Look Up to resolve the IP address to a name
Network address
Specify the subnet for the address range. The appliance auto-fills this field, based on
the information you enter in Address range. Check that this is appropriate for your
infrastructure, and edit the value if necessary.
Network interface
Select the interface on which you need to create the IP addresses. Choose from the
available network interfaces.
You cannot ping the IP address externally, or see the address by running the ip addr
show commands. To test that the virtual host is listening on the expected address,
telnet to the configured SMTP port.
Product Guide
473

Virtual Hosting
Option definitions New Scanning Policy

Use this dialog box to create a new virtual host policy.
Option
Definition
Policy name
Description
Inherit settings from
Select the policy from which you want to inherit settings.
Email direction
Apply the policy to either inbound or outbound messages.

Use this dialog box to create a protocol preset to apply to a policy.
Some of these options may not be available in all instances of creating a new protocol preset.
Option
Definition
Policy name
Description
Inherit settings
from
Select the protocol preset from which you want to inherit the settings, that is, any
settings that are not overridden by this protocol preset will be taken from the
protocol preset specified here.
Policy type
Select either:
Physical A standard policy that has rules available. A physical policy can be
triggered when its rules are matched and can also be used for inheritance.
Virtual A virtual policy can be considered to be a collection of settings available
for the purposes of inheritance. A virtual policy can never be triggered.
Configuration when virtual hosting has been enabled on the appliance.
Match logic
Select either:
Match one or more of the following rules this policy triggers if any of the specified rules
are matched.
Match all of the following rules this policy triggers if all of the specified rules are
matched.
Configuration.
Rule type /
Move / Edit
Lists the rules associated with the preset, and allows you to move or edit them as
appropriate.
Configuration.
474
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Add Rule
Click to specify the type of rule that you want to apply to the preset, and set its
Match and Value.
Configuration.
Add network
group
Click to create a network group to associate with the preset.

Configuration.

Before you create your Advanced Threat Defense policies on McAfee Email Gateway, configure the
communications to the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers that Email Gateway is to use.
System | ATD Servers | McAfee Advanced Threat Defense Server Configuration

See also
Using McAfee Advanced Threat Defense on page 181
Benefits of configuring McAfee Advanced Threat Defense

Servers
Before configuring your McAfee Email Gateway policies to provide McAfee Advanced Threat Defense
services, configure the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers to use.
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense services are provided on dedicated hardware appliances installed
within your network. To integrate scanning from your McAfee Email Gateway and McAfee Advanced
Threat Defense systems, first configure McAfee Email Gateway with the details of the McAfee
Advanced Threat Defense servers McAfee Email Gateway is to use.
Option definitions ATD Servers

Configure the Advanced Threat Defense appliances that Email Gateway is to use.
Table 5-16 Option definitions ATD Servers
Option
Definition
IP Address / Hostname Displays the IP address or the host name of the Advanced Threat Defense
appliance.
User
Displays the user name for the Advanced Threat Defense appliance.
Virtual Machines
After the Email Gateway successfully communicates with the Advanced Threat
Defense appliance, the list of virtual machines available on the Advanced Threat
Defense appliance is displayed.
Enabled
Select to enable individual Advanced Threat Defense appliances for Email Gateway
to use.
Edit
Select any Advanced Threat Defense appliance to edit the configuration or details
for that appliance.
Delete
Select any Advanced Threat Defense appliances to be deleted from the Email
Gateway configuration, and remove them from this list.
Product Guide
475

Table 5-16 Option definitions ATD Servers (continued)

Option
Definition
Add Server
Opens the Add Server dialog box.
Test Connection
Test that connections are correctly defined and the Advanced Threat Defense
appliances are available.
Import
Click the Import link to select a file containing Advanced Threat Defense appliance
details to be imported to your Email Gateway.
Export
Click the Export link to save details of your configured Advanced Threat Defense
appliances so that this information can be backed up or imported to other Email
Gateway appliances.
Table 5-17 Option definitions Scan these file types

Option
Definition
Scan these file types Select the file types to be sent to your Advanced Threat Defense appliances when
detected within email messages. The types of files that can be send for further
analysis include:
Advanced Threat Defense - Supported formats
Adobe PDF
Microsoft PowerPoint
Archive/Compressed files (All formats)
Microsoft Word
Compuserve GIF
PDF Image
Java Class
Portable Network Graphics Format
JPEG
Tagged Image File Format
JPEG 2000
Windows Executables
Microsoft Excel
Use Email | Email Policies | Compliance | File filtering to control file submissions to your
Advanced Threat Defense appliances on a per-policy basis.
To quickly unselect all file types, click Clear selections.
Clear selections
Task Configure Email Gateway to communicate with your

Advanced Threat Defense appliances
Configure Email Gateway with the address and logon information for the Advanced Threat Defense
appliances.
Before you begin
Ensure that each Advanced Threat Defense appliance to be used with Email Gateway has a
user account with a common name that includes the RESTful API permission.
McAfee does not recommend using the in-built ATDAdmin account on the Advanced Threat
Defense appliances to send traffic between your Email Gateway and your Advanced Threat
Defense appliances.
Task
1
Navigate to System | ATD Servers | McAfee Advanced Threat Defense Server Configuration.
Click Add Server.

The Add ATD Server wizard opens.
476
Product Guide

Enter the information required to access the Advanced Threat Defense appliance.
Click Next.
If needed by your network, enter information required to access any proxy server.
Click Next.
Click Test Connection to ensure that you have entered valid information.
Click Finish.
The Advanced Threat Defense appliance is added to the ATD Servers list.
Task Configure the file types to be sent to Advanced Threat

Defense
Define the categories of attachments to be sent to your Advanced Threat Defense appliance.
Before you begin
Ensure that you have configured access from your Email Gateway to your Advanced Threat
Defense appliances.
Task
1
Select System | ATD Servers | McAfee Advanced Threat Defense Server Configuration | Scan these file types, then
select the categories of files to be sent to your Advanced Threat Defense appliances.
This allows you to select categories of files, such as all Adobe PDF files, or any type of archive or
compressed file, for further analysis. If you require more granular control of the types of files to
send to Advanced Threat Defense, configure File Filtering from Email | Email Policies | Compliance | File
filtering.
Apply your changes.

Use the Add ATD Server wizard to configure each McAfee Advanced Threat Defense server used by your
The Add ATD Server wizard consists of the following pages:
Table 5-18 Option definitions Basic Settings
Option
Definition
IP Address / Hostname Define the IP address or the host name for the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense
server for McAfee Email Gateway to use.
Port
Define the port to use to communicate with the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense
server. By default, this port is 443.
User
Define the user name that McAfee Email Gateway uses to communicate to the
Password
Define the password that McAfee Email Gateway uses to communicate to the
Product Guide
477

Table 5-19 Option definitions Proxy Settings

Option
Definition
Proxy Server
If necessary for your network, define the proxy server settings required to enable
communications between McAfee Email Gateway and the McAfee Advanced Threat
Defense server.
Proxy Port
Define the port to use to communicate with the proxy server.
Proxy Username Define the user name for the proxy server to allow communication between McAfee
Email Gateway and the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense server.
Proxy Password Define the password for the proxy server to allow communication between McAfee
Email Gateway and the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense server.
Table 5-20 Option definitions Test
Option
Definition
Test Connection Use the Test Connection button to verify that the information you entered into the Add ATD
Server wizard is valid, and that communications between McAfee Email Gateway and the
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense server are working.

The Logging, Alerting and SNMP pages help you configure the options within the appliance to log
information, and provide alerts.
System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP

You can configure the appliance to send emails containing information about viruses and other
detected threats, and to use SNMP to transfer information from your appliance.
Contents
Email Alerting
SNMP Alert Settings
SNMP Monitor Settings
System Log Settings
Logging Configuration
Logging Configuration Override events dialog boxes
Configure System Log Archive wizard
Email Alerting
Use this page to decide who receives an email message when events such as a virus detection occur.
System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP | Email Alerting

See Alert tokens for Email alert messages on page 479 for information on the usage of each
substitution variable.
478
Product Guide

Benefits of the Email Alerting features

Email alerting is a mechanism by which you can ensure that designated individuals are notified when
specific events occur.
This is particularly helpful when any event warrants immediate attention.
Option definitions - Email Alerting

Option
Definition
Anti-virus events to
Authentication
events
When selected, sends email messages when this type of event occurs. To change
the message, click Edit to open an email alert window.
Alert Settings
Supported event types:

Anti-virus events
System events
Anti-spam and Phish events
LDAP synchronization events
Compliance events
Aggregated data events
Data Loss Prevention events
Authentication events
Specifies the sender name and sender email address that appears in the From field
of the email message. This does not have to be a real email address. Default value
is MEG.
Subject Specifies the subject line of the email message. Default value is MEG Alert.
Recipients Click Add to specify the email addresses of recipients who receive the
alerts. We recommend that you choose people who often read their email and can
respond quickly to these alerts.
Alert tokens for Email alert messages

You can customize alert messages with alert tokens. For example, the message: Virus detected at
%LOCALTIME% might become: Virus detected at 10:31.
System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP | Email Alerting

Alert tokens (also known as replacement tokens or substitution variables) allow you to create
meaningful email alert messages for your users.
The following tables list the available alert tokens for different circumstances.
These tables contain:
The alert token Names begin and end with the % character.
Description Displays the type of information that replaces the substitution variable.
The following tables provide information on:
Alert tokens for Scanner alerts Theses are the actions that have been triggered on your Email
Gateway. For example, these tokens can be used to provide information about why a message
triggered an action or what action was taken.
Alert tokens for Email notifications This information is often used in the notifications that are
sent to your users.
Product Guide
479

Alert tokens for Quarantine digest messages When you configure Quarantine digest messages,
you can select tokens to provide information to your users about the messages being quarantined.
Alert tokens for Email alerts (Logging and Alerting) These tokens are useful when configuring
your logging and alerting messages.
Table 5-21
480
Alert tokens for Scanner alerts
Token name
Description
%ACTIONNAME%:
The action being taken (AV)
%ACTIVECONTENT%:
The list of active content found in the item (HTML)
%ATTACHMENTCONTEXT%:
A detailed description of the sub contexts that triggered (only

different from %ATTACHMENTNAME% when have multiple
condition rules) (Compliance)
%ATTACHMENTNAME%:
Name of the item being scanned
%AVDATVERSION%:
The DAT version used by the anti-virus engine (AV)
%AVENGINENAME%:
The name of the anti-virus engine (AV)
%AVENGINEVERSION%:
The version of the anti-virus engine (AV)
%BLOCKED_URL%:
The URL that has been requested and blocked by the URL
filtering engine. (URL)
%CONTENTREPORT%:
A detailed report of the rule(s) triggered; including the

term(s), matching text and contextual text (Compliance)
%CORRUPTIONTYPE%:
The type of corruption that has occurred (Corrupt Content)
%DESTINATIONHOST%:
Destination Hostname
%DESTINATIONIP%:
Destination IP address
%DETECTIONS%:
List of detections in the item
%DICTIONARYGROUP%:
The name(s) of the content scanning rule(s) that triggered

(Compliance)
%DLP_FINGERPRINTSOURCE%:
Protected Document Name (DLP)
%DLP_REPORT%:
A detailed report of the rule(s) triggered; including the name,

category, size and digest of the protected documents (DLP)
%DLP_RULE%:
Name of triggered DLP rule (DLP)
%DOSLIMIT%:
The DoS limit value that has been exceeded (DOS)
%FILTERCONTEXT%:
The name(s) of the rule(s) that triggered (Compliance)
%FILTERNAME%:
The name of the file filtering rule that has triggered (File
Filtering)
%FILTERNAME%:
The name(s) of the top level rule(s)/group(s) that triggered (as

per policy statement) (Compliance)
%FORMAT%:
Description of the type of blocked message format. (Mail

Filtering)
%ID%:
Email Gateway unique message ID (SMTP)
%LOCALTIME%:
Local time
%POLICY%:
Policy which triggered the event
%POLICY_ID%:
Policy identity which triggered the event
%PROTOCOL%:
Protocol
%REASON%:
Description of the DoS limit that has been exceeded. E.g. max
nesting depth, file size or AV scanner timeout (DOS)
%RECIPIENTS%:
Envelope Email recipient list. Available in SMTP (SMTP)
Product Guide

Table 5-21
Alert tokens for Scanner alerts (continued)
Token name
Description
%SENDER%:
Envelope Email Sender. Available in SMTP (SMTP)
%SITEADVISOR%:
The SiteAdvisor web reputation of the requested URL. (URL)
%SIZE%:
Size of data
%SOURCEHOST%:
Source host name
%SOURCEIP%:
Source IP address
%SUBJECT%:
Email Subject. Available in SMTP (SMTP)
%TOTALSCORE%:
Total accumulated score for the stream (Compliance)
%URL_CATEGORY%:
The filtered category that has matched the requested URL.

(URL)
%URL_REQUEST_DISPLAY_NAME%: Contact name for queries regarding URL alerts (URL)

%URL_REQUEST_EMAIL_ADDR%:
Contact email address for queries regarding URL alerts (URL)
%UTCTIME%:
UTC time
%WEB_REPUTATION_INFO%:
The SiteAdvisor web reputation of the requested URL. (URL)
%WEBSHIELDIP%:
McAfee Email Gateway IP address
%WEBSHIELDNAME%:
McAfee Email Gateway appliance name
%WEBSHIELDVIRTUALIP%:
Virtual IP address
Table 5-22 Alert tokens for Email notifications

Token name
Description
%ATTACHMENTCONTENTS_LIST% A comma-separated list of the content of attachments found

within an email message.
%ATTACHMENTCONTENTS_TREE% The content of attachments found within an email message,
displayed in a tree structure.
%ATTACHMENTNAME%:
Name of the item being scanned
%AVDATVERSION%:
The DAT version used by the anti-virus engine
%AVENGINENAME%:
The name of the anti-virus engine
%AVENGINEVERSION%:
The version of the anti-virus engine
%DESTINATIONHOST%:
Destination Hostname
%DESTINATIONIP%:
%DETECTIONS%:
%ID%:
McAfee Email Gateway unique message ID
%LOCALTIME%:
Local time
%POLICY%:
Policy which triggered the event
%POLICY_ID%:
Policy identity which triggered the event
%PROTOCOL%:
Protocol
%RECIPIENTS%:
Envelope Email recipient list. Available in SMTP
%SCANNER%:
Scanner name(s)
%SENDER%:
Envelope Email Sender. Available in SMTP
%SIZE%:
Size of data
%SOURCEHOST%:
Source host name
%SOURCEIP%:
Source IP address
Product Guide
481

Table 5-22 Alert tokens for Email notifications (continued)

Token name
Description
%SPAMENGINEVERSION%:
Spam Engine Version. Available in SMTP
%SPAMSCORE%:
Spam Score. Available in SMTP
%SUBJECT%:
Email Subject. Available in SMTP
%UTCTIME%:
UTC time
%WEBSHIELDIP%:
%WEBSHIELDNAME%:
%WEBSHIELDVIRTUALIP%:
Virtual IP address
This group of tokens can also be used within the Modify subject and Modify header actions.
Table 5-23 Alert tokens for Quarantine digest messages

Token name
Description
Message body:
%SPAM_LIST%:
A list of email messages quarantined as spam since last digest
%FULL_SPAM_LIST%:
A full list of email messages quarantined as spam
%CONTENT_LIST%:
A list of email messages quarantined because of content violations since

the last digest
%FULL_CONTENT_LIST%: A full list of email messages quarantined because of content violations

%WHITE_LIST%:
A list of email addresses in the whitelist
%BLACK_LIST%:
A list of email addresses in the blacklist
%SENDER%:
The email address of the digest sender
%RECIPIENT%:
The email address of the recipient
%EXP_DELAY%:
The user expiration delay in days
%MAX_EXP_DELAY%:
The maximum expiration delay in days
%PRODUCT_NAME%:
The product name of the appliance that generated the digest
%POST_MASTER%:
The email address of the postmaster
%DIGEST_DATE%:
The date on which the digest was generated
%ADD_WHITE_LIST%:
An HTML form for adding email addresses to the whitelist (interactive

HTML)
%ADD_BLACK_LIST%:
An HTML form for adding email addresses to the blacklist (interactive

HTML)
%SET_EXP_DELAY%:
An HTML form for setting the expiration delay (interactive HTML)
Responses:
%REQUEST_RESULTS%:
An HTML table displaying the results of the actions performed
Error response:
%ERR_TEXT%:
Text describing the error
Table 5-24 Alert tokens for Email alerts (Logging and Alerting)
Token name
Description
Anti-Virus:
482
%PRODUCT%:
The product name
%EVENT%:
The name of the event
Product Guide

Table 5-24 Alert tokens for Email alerts (Logging and Alerting) (continued)
Token name
Description
%REASON%:
The reason for the event
%SOURCEIP%:
Source IP address
%SOURCEHOST%:
Source host name
%DESTINATIONIP%:
%DESTINATIONHOST%:
Destination host name
%SERVERUSERNAME%:
The login name of the user (POP3)
%LOCALTIME%:
Local time
%UTCTIME%:
UTC time
%WEBSHIELDNAME%:
%WEBSHIELDIP%:
%APPLICATION%:
The name of the process that generated the event
%SENDER%:
Envelope Email Sender (SMTP)
%RECIPIENTS%:
Envelope Email recipient list (SMTP)
%DETECTIONS%:
%POLICY%:
The name of the policy that triggered the event
%POLICY_ID%:
The ID of the policy that triggered the event
%SUBJECT%:
Email Subject (SMTP)
%SIZE%:
Size of data
%LDAP_ADDRESS%
The address queried from LDAP
%LDAP_SYNC_ERROR%
A synchronization error occurred
%LDAP_SYNC_ERROR_TEXT%
The text for the synchronization error
%LDAP_SYNC_SERVER%
The name server that encountered the synchronization error
%AVDATVERSION%:
The DAT version used by the anti-virus engine (AV)
%AVENGINEVERSION%:
The version of the anti-virus engine (AV)
%ATTACHMENTNAME%:
Name of the item being scanned (AV, DLP)
%IASCORE%
The score assigned to an image by Image Analysis scanning
%IATHRESHOLD%
The score that triggers an Image Analysis detection
%DLP_RULE%:
The DLP rule that triggered
%DLP_CATEGORY%
The registered document categories that triggered
%DLP_FILEDIGEST%
Checksum for the trained document that resulted in the DLP

detection
%DLP_FILESIZE%
Size of the trained document
%DLP_FINGERPRINTDATE%
Date when the trained document was fingerprinted
%DLP_FINGERPRINTSOURCE%:
The registered document name
%DLP_REPORT%:
Detailed report containing the document name, the category

name, the size and the digest as per the registered documents
%LB_APPLIANCE_IP_ADDRESS%
IP address of the scanning appliance
%LB_APPLIANCE_IP_NAME%
Domain name of the scanning appliance
%LB_APPLIANCE_MAC_ADDRESS%
MAC address of the scanning appliance
Product Guide
483

Token name
Description
%FILESYSTEM%:
The name of the filesystem on the appliance (system events)
%FILTERCONTEXT%:
The name or names of the rules that triggered (compliance)
%SPAMSCORE%:
Spam score (AS)
%SPAMRULESBROKEN%:
The name or names of the spam rules that triggered the

detection (AS)
%SPAMTHRESHOLD%
Spam reporting threshold (AS)
Aggregated data:
%PRODUCT%:
The product name
%EVENT%:
The name of the event
%PROTOCOL%
The mail protocol, SMTP or POP3
%SMTPNUMMESSAGES%:
The number of messages received via SMTP
%SMTPVIRUSDETECTED%:
The number of viruses detected (SMTP)
%SMTPPUPSDETECTED%:
The number of PUPs detected (SMTP)
%SMTPANTIRELAYDETECTED%
The number of items that triggered anti-relay measures
%SMTPBATVDETECTED%
The number of messages that failed BATV signature

verification
%SMTPCONTENTDETECTED%:
The total number of content detections
%SMTPCOMPLIANCEDETECTED%
The number of compliance detections (SMTP)
%SMTPDENYSENDERDETECTED%
The number of emails that triggered the denied senders list
%SMTPDHDETECTED%
The number of emails that triggered directory harvest

detections
%SMTPDKIMDETECTED%
The number of emails that included DKIM signature failures
%SMTPDLPDETECTED%
The number of DLP violations detected (SMTP)
%SMTPFILEFILTERDETECTED%
The number of emails that triggered file filtering
%SMTPGREYLISTDETECTED%
The number of emails that triggered Greylisting
%SMTPGTIMSGREPDETECTED%
The number of TrustedSource lookups reported as being

malicious
%SMPTIADETECTED%
The number of emails that triggered Image Analysis
%SMTPLDAPRCPTDETECTED%
The number of recipients that failed LDAP verification
%SMTPMAILFILTERDETECTED%
The number of emails that triggered message/partial,

message/external-body, and missing/empty header detections
%SMTPMAILSIZEFILTERDETECTED% The number of detections based upon email message size

(SMTP)
484
%SMTPPACKERSDETECTED%
The number of packers detected (SMTP)
%SMTPPHISHDETECTED%
The number of phishing messages (SMTP)
%SMTPRBLDETECTED%
The number of emails that failed to pass testing the origin

against an RBL
%SMTPRECIPIENTDETECTED%
The number of emails that failed recipient ID verification
%SMTPSENDCONNECTDETECTED%
The number of emails failed sender connection verification
%SMTPSENDERIDDETECTED%
The number of emails that failed Sender ID verification
%SMTPSPAMDETECTED%
The number of spam messages detected (SMTP)
Product Guide

Token name
Description
%SMTPSPFDETECTED%
The number of messages that failed Sender Policy Framework

(SPF) verification
%SMTPTOTALDETECTED%
The total number of detections (SMTP)
%POP3NUMMESSAGES%:
The number of messages scanned (POP3)
%POP3VIRUSDETECTED%:
The number of viruses detected (POP3)
%POP3PUPSDETECTED%:
The number of PUPs detected (POP3)
%POP3IADETECTED%
The number of Image Analysis detections (POP3)
%POP3MAILSIZEFILTERDETECTED% The number of detections based upon email message size

(POP3)
%POP3PACKERSDETECTED%
The number of packers detected (POP3)
%POP3PHISHDETECTED%
The number of phishing messages (POP3)
%POP3SPAMDETECTED%
The number of spam messages (POP3)
%POP3TOTALDETECTED%
The total number of detections (POP3)
%SPAMBLOCKEDRBL%:
The number of spam messages detected using RBLs
%SPAMDETECTED%:
The number of spam messages detected
%SPAMBLOCKED%:
The number of spam messages discarded
%SPAMQUAR%:
The number of spam messages quarantined
%CONTENTQUAR%:
The number of messages quarantined through compliance
%VIRUSQUAR%:
The number of viral messages quarantined
%SOURCEIP%:
Source IP address
%SOURCEHOST%:
Source host name
%DESTINATIONIP%:
%DESTINATIONHOST%:
Destination host name
%LOCALTIME%:
Local time
%UTCTIME%:
UTC time
%WEBSHIELDNAME%:
%WEBSHIELDIP%:
%GATEWAYIP%
The gateway IP address
%GATEWAYNAME%
The gateway host name
%APPLICATION%:
The name of the process that generated the event
%SCANHOSTNAME%
Scan host name
%SCANHOSTIP%
Scan host IP address
%LOGINUSER%
Login user name
Product Guide
485

SNMP Alert Settings

Use this page to configure the SNMP alerts sent by the appliance.
System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP | SNMP Alert Settings

The SNMP alerts are cumulative and are derived by adding data from the real-time logs. The real-time
logs are updated every 24hours.
The page is divided into these sections:
SNMP Alert Settings
Trap Manager Settings
Benefits of SNMP Alerts

SNMP alerts provide alert messages directly to specified computer workstations.
You can configure one or more workstations to receive the various types of alerts Email Gateway
generates.
Option definitions - SNMP Alert Settings

Option
Definition
Anti-virus events to Authentication

events
When selected, specifies the types of events that will be sent.

Anti-virus events
System events
Compliance events
LDAP synchronization events
Conversation events
SPF events
Trap manager, Community name,
Protocol version
Specifies various details for SNMP trap managers.
SNMP Monitor Settings

Use this page for settings that allow other devices to communicate with the appliance via SNMP.
System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP | SNMP Monitor Settings
Benefits of the SNMP Monitor Settings

Use SNMP monitor settings to enable other devices to access your appliance.
You can allow queries from all devices in your network, or restrict access to specific devices.
486
Product Guide

Option definitions - SNMP Monitor Settings

Basic settings
Option
Definition
Name
Provide a name that is used to identify your appliance.
Location
If required, provide information about the location of the appliance. This could be the
office in which it is located, or a specific rack position.
Contact details
Enter the email address to be used.
Bind address
Select the network interface that the SNMP daemon uses to listen.
Protocol version
Select the required SNMP protocol version. When c3 is selected, the Security options
become available.
Community name Versions 1 and 2 of the SNMP protocol use the community name like a password. The
community name is required with each SNMP Get request to allow access to the
appliance. The default community name is public.
If you have several appliances, change the default name.
Security Options (v3 only)

SNMP version 3 incorporates both authentication and privacy. You need to set the user name, and the
protocols and passwords for authentication and privacy.
Option
Definition
Username for authentication
Provide a user name for the SNMP v3 authentication.
Authentication protocol
Select the required protocol for SNMP authentication. You can select MD5
or SHA protocols for this option.
Privacy protocol
Select the required protocol for privacy. You can select DES or AES
protocols for this option.
Authentication passphrase
Provide a passphrase for authentication.
Privacy passphrase
Provide a passphrase for privacy.
Store for configuration push

(plain text)
Select Store for configuration push (plain text) to include these settings in
configuration pushes between your appliance.
Be aware, however, that if you select this option, the configuration settings
for the SNMP v3 protocol are stored on the appliance in plain text.
Access control list

Option
Definition
Access control list The appliance is set to allow SNMP queries from all devices. We recommend that you
change the settings to allow access from known devices only. Specify the IP address
numbers of the devices that can read the appliances MIB parameters.
System Log Settings

Use this page to specify standard or extended system logging and the events to be recorded in the
system log. You can also send logs to off-box servers.
Product Guide
487

Syslog provides log information about the system itself, rather than about messages the system
processes. Extended logging allows you to use external software to generate reports.
Benefits of the System Log Settings

System Log (Syslog) is a method for delivering log information across a network, usually via UDP port
514.
Extended logging creates a structured output log file using the syslog protocol. The extended logging
provides name-value pairs for each logged event.
The syslog protocol and message format are defined in RFC 3164.
Option definitions - System Log Settings

This information describes the options that are available on this page.
Option
Definition
Enable system Enables system logging (syslog) information to be collected and delivered to the
log events
on-appliance logging system, or sent to an off-box solution.
Select the type of logging format that you want to use. This option creates an output
log file that is structured so that it can be easily read by third-party applications and
used to generate custom reports. Due to the amount of data generated, we recommend
that this option is only enabled when using TCP syslog. Choose from:
Original
Content Security Reporter
Splunk
McAfee Enterprise Security Manager
Common Event Format

Conversation events and Aggregated data events are not reported in the extended
logging format.
Click View the system logs to see the log files on the appliance.
Log events to
the syslog for
the following
event types:
Specify the events to capture within the syslog. To prevent very large log files, we
recommend that you record only events that you want to monitor closely, and deselect
the events when you have finished.
Anti-virus events
SPF events
Compliance events
System events
Transport events
Aggregated data events
Conversation events
The appliance cannot store the transport events produced by heavy traffic for long
periods. We recommend that you use the off-box syslog option to forward the transport
events to a central syslog server.
488
Product Guide

Option
Definition
Off-box
system log
Enable off-box system log To send system logs for storage off-box, enable this setting and
define the receiving server parameters:
Receiving server Specifies the IP address or host name of the server that receives the
syslog information.
Use IPv6 protocol Check this option when sending system logging information over an
IPv6 network.
Port Specify the port on the receiving server to be used to transfer the system log
information.
When using off-box system logging, you can specify different ports for each configured
off-box syslog server.
Protocol Either TCP or UDP. Specifies the packet type. UDP has a limit of 1024 bytes
per packet.
Add Server You can configure multiple off-box servers.
System Log
Archive
Send archive copies of the mail logs to another server, and set up a schedule for this to
happen. Click Enable log archive to open the Configure System Log Archive wizard. After
the wizard is complete, this section displays a summary of the schedule settings you
entered.
Extended Syslog attributes for Splunk

Using the extended Syslog functions within the appliance, you can use external, third party software
such as Splunk to generate Syslog reports.
Table 5-25
Extended Syslog attributes for Splunk
Syslog Entry
Notes
Time and Appliance

Name
Example
Dec 30 10:58:10 Appliance1
app
Protocol
SMTP
name
A description
of the event
Anti-virus engine detection
policy_name
Name of in
force policy
My policy Note: __smtp_master refers to the default

policy
dvc_host
Host
responsible
for scanning
in a blade
environment
Appliance1
event_id
Event ID
180000
reason_id
Reason ID
145 - Clean
146 - Replace
624 - PuP Detection
625 - Packer Detection
direction
Whether
inbound (0)
or
outbound(1)
as defined by
the
administrator
for the policy
0, 1
Product Guide
489

Table 5-25
Extended Syslog attributes for Splunk (continued)
Syslog Entry
Notes
Example
src_ip
Originating
client IP
address of
the host
sending the
email
src_host
Originating
client host
name if
available
dest_ip
Destination
client IP
address of
the host
sending the
email
dest_host
Destination
client host
name if
available
is_primary_action
Indicates if
the action
taken is the
main action
defined for
the event. 1
indicates
primary
action
0,1
scanner
Which
scanner
detected the
event
AV - Anti Virus
action
The action
taken for the
event
ESERVICES:REPLACE - Replace with an alert

WEBSHIELD:REFUSEORIGINAL - Refuse the email
WEBSHIELD:ACCEPTANDDROP - Accept the email and
then drop it
ESERVICES:ALLOWTHRU - Allow the email through
WEBSHIELD:DENYCONNECTION - Refuse the email and
deny the connection for a period of time
490
status
A descriptive
message for
the event
sender
The sender of <a@somewhere.com>

the email
recipient
A list of
recipient
email
addresses
msgid
A unique id
assigned to
each mail
message
The content was categorized as uncleanable content
<testuser@domain.com>, <anotheruser@domain.com>,
<user@domain.com>
Product Guide

Table 5-25
Syslog Entry
Notes
nrcpts
Number of
3
the recipients
for the mail
relay
Address of
10.1.1.108
the next MTA
the mail
would be sent
to if known
subject
The subject
of the email
A subject line here
size
Size of the
message in
bytes
231
attachments
The
attachments
of the email
(optional)
file1.doc, file2.doc
number_attachments
The number
of
attachments
of the email
(optional)
virus_name
The name of
the detected
virus
EICAR test file
file_name
Filename in
which the
detection
occurred
eicar_com.zip
spamscore
The score this

message
achieved
spamthreshold
The threshold
it exceeded
spamrules
A list of the
rules to
determine it's
status as
spam
URL
Url which
caused the
event to be
generated
contentrule
The rule that

caused the
event
content_terms
The terms
that caused
the content
filter event
tz
The timezone UTC

where the
event is
generated
Example
http://www.eicar.org/download/eicar.com
Product Guide
491

Table 5-25
Syslog Entry
Notes
Example
tz_offset
The timezone +0000

offset in use
where the
event is
generated
dlpfile
The
TestSpecTemplate.doc
registered
document file
name that
matched the
DLP trigger
dlprules
The DLP
category
Finance
dlpclassification
The DLP
category
Finance
dlpfileuploaded
Upload time
in UTC
2010-11-10 10:13:47
dlpfiledigest
The digest of 6e70e63d3dadfc331b917696bda46c04ed2c8de0

the registered
document
dlpfilesize
The file size

of the
registered
document in
bytes
23040
url_filter_categorization For a URL

Pornography
detection, the
category it
was detected
for.
encryption_type
The
PGP 2
encryption
SMIME 4
type of the
email, shown Push delivery 8
as a number:
Pull delivery 16
Both push and pull delivery 32
492
orig_subject
The original
Meeting report
subject of the
email
orig_sender
The original
sender of the
email
scan-host-ip
Host (IP)
responsible
for scanning
host-name
Originating
hostname of
the client
making the
connection
exampleuser@example.com
Product Guide

Table 5-25
Syslog Entry
Notes
Example
host-domain-name
Domain name
of the
originating
client host
mac-address
MAC address
of the
appliance
product
Appliance's
product
version
uuid
Unique ID of
the event
user-name
User who
admin
logged in or
logged off the
appliance
30bc_0001_5d144be2_48dc_4590_87af_0836d4624407'
Table 5-26 Glossary

event_id
Name
Scanner
50006
Email Status
180000
Anti-virus engine detection
AV (Anti Virus)
180002
Anti-spam classification
AS (Anti Spam)
180002
AP (Anti Phish)
180003
File format detection
FF (Format Blocking)
180004
MIME format detection
MF (Mime Format)
180008
URL request denied
UF (URL Filtering)
180010
Compliance detection
PX (Compliance)
180011
Data Loss Prevention detection
DL (Data Loss Prevention)
180012
Mail Size detection
MS(Mail Size)
180031
URL has been blocked due to categorization
SA (Site Advisor)
reason_id
Text
77
Email Delivered
83
Email Deferred
142
Access to the requested URL is not permitted
145
clean
146
replace
161
Content categorized as spam
206
Content was categorized as non spam
305
Email blocked with SMTP Code 550
306
Email accepted and dropped
420
Email blocked with SMTP Code 550. Connection closed
611
URL categorized by URL filter
623
Phish Detection
Product Guide
493

reason_id
Text
624
PuP
625
Packer
689
DLP
728
Compliance
737
The undeliverable email has been bounced
Extended Syslog attributes for Common Event Format

Using the extended Syslog functions within the appliance, you can use external, third party software
to generate Syslog reports.
Table 5-27
Events for Common Event Format
Event ID
Event Description
50005
Logging of the email status during processing
50006
Logging of the email status during processing
50022
Logging of the email status during McAfee Quarantine Manager processing
180000
Anti-Virus Engine Detection
180001
Content rule detection
180002
180003
File-format detection
180004
Mail-Filtering detection
180010
Compliance detection
180011
Data Loss Prevention detection
180012
Mail Size detection
180013
Regular expression scanning failure
180014
Image-Filtering detection
Device Event Mapping to Common Event Format Data Fields

Information contained within vendor-specific event definitions is sent to the Common Event Format
SmartConnector, then mapped to a data field for the third party software.
The following table lists the mappings from Common Event Format data fields to the supported
vendor-specific event definitions.
Table 5-28
McAfee Email Gateway Appliance Connector Field Mappings
McAfee-Specific Event Definition
Third party Event Data Field
The Action taken for the event:
act
ESERVICES:REPLACE - Replace with an alert

WEBSHIELD:REFUSEORIGINAL - Refuse the email
WEBSHIELD:ACCEPTANDDROP - Accept the email and
then drop it
ESERVICES:ALLOWTHRU - Allow the email through
WEBSHIELD:DENYCONNECTION - Refuse the email and
deny the connection for a period of time
Protocol
494
app
Product Guide

Table 5-28
McAfee Email Gateway Appliance Connector Field Mappings (continued)
A descriptive message for the event
msg
Host responsible for scanning
dvc
Destination IP address of the connection (if available)
dst
Destination hostname of the connection (if available)
dhost
Originating IP address of the host making the connection
src
Originating hostname of the host making the connection
shost
The sender of the email
suser
A list of recipient email addresses
duser
Whether inbound (0) or outbound(1) as defined by the

administrator for the policy
deviceDirection
Name of active policy
sourceServiceName
Filename in which the detection occurred
filePath
A unique id assigned to each mail message
fileId
Size of the message in bytes
fsize
Time of the event, in milliseconds since epoch
rt
Reason ID for event. See 'msg' field for textual

description
flexNumber1
'reason-id'
flexNumber1Label
The definition of this field depends on the value of the

field 'cs5':
cs1
If cs5 is 'AV' or 'PA' or 'PU': The name of the detected

virus/packer/PuP.
If cs5 is 'AS': The spam rules that triggered the event.
If cs5 is 'DL': The file that triggered the DLP rule.
If cs5 is 'FF': The file rule that triggered the event.
If cs5 is 'PX': The content rule that triggered the event
field 'cs5':
cs1Label
If cs5 is 'AV' or 'PA' or 'PU': 'virus-names'

If cs5 is 'AS': 'spam-rules-broken'
If cs5 is 'DL': 'dlpfile'
If cs5 is 'FF': 'content-rules'
If cs5 is 'PX': 'content-rules'
field 'cs5':
cs2
If cs5 is 'AV' or 'PA' or 'PU': The version of the Anti-Virus

engine
If cs5 is 'AS': The spam score
If cs5 is 'DL': The DLP categories that triggered
If cs5 is 'PX': The terms that caused the content filter
event
Product Guide
495

Table 5-28

field 'cs5':
cs2Label
If cs5 is 'AV' or 'PA' or 'PU': 'av-engine-version'

If cs5 is 'AS': 'spam-score'
If cs5 is 'DL': 'dlp-rules'
If cs5 is 'PX': 'compliance-terms'
field 'cs5':
cs3
If cs5 is 'AS': The threshold the message exceeded

field 'cs5':
cs3Label
If cs5 is 'AS': 'spam-threshold-score'

The attachments of the email (if available)
cs4
'email-attachments'
cs4Label
For a detection event, the scanner which triggered the

event:
cs5
'AP' - Anti-Phish
'AS' - Anti-Spam
'AV' - Anti-Virus
'DL' - Data Loss Prevention
'FF' - File Filtering
'MF' - Mail Filtering
'MS' - Mail Size
'PA' - Packer
'PU' - Potentially Unwanted Program
'PX' - Compliance
'IA' - Image Filtering
'master-scan-type'
cs5Label
The subject of the email
cs6
'email-subject'
cs6Label
Indicates if the action taken is the main action defined for cn1
the event. 1 indicates primary action
496
'is-primary-action'
cn1Label
The number of attachments in the email (if available)
cn2
'num-email-attachments'
cn2Label
The number of recipients of the email
cn3
'num-email-recipients'
cn3Label
The original subject of the email
McafeeEmailgatewayOriginalSubject
The original sender of the email
McafeeEmailgatewayOriginalSender
The original message ID number, such as

5f84_00f8_48fd8314_29f1_472b_9c9f_1adff4733814
McafeeEmailgatewayOriginalMessageId
Product Guide

Table 5-28
The encryption type of the email, shown as a number:
McafeeEmailgatewayEmailEncryptionType
PGP 2
Pull delivery 16
SMIME 4
Both push and pull

delivery 32
Push delivery 8
utc-time
Time of the event, in milliseconds since

epoch , e.g '1413279311'
local-time
Event time in UTC , e.g '201410

14_09:35:11_UTC_(+0000)'
utc-time-txt
Event time in textual form , e.g '201410

14_09:35:11'
scan-host-name
Host (name) responsible for scanning
scan-host-ip
Host (IP) responsible for scanning
host-name
Originating hostname of the client making

the connection
host-domain-name
Domain name of the originating client

host
mac-address
MAC address of the appliance
product
Appliance's product version
user-name
User who logged in or logged off the

appliance , e.g, 'admin'
Logging Configuration
Use this page to specify which events are recorded in the appliances logs
System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP | Logging Configuration

Although the appliance can record many types of events in the logs, normally only the most serious
events are needed.
Benefits of the Logging Configuration features

Use the logging configuration features to configure and to adjust the kinds of events logged.
You can set logging configuration for both SMTP and POP3 settings.
Product Guide
497

Option definitions - Logging Configuration

This information describes the options available from the linked pages.
Table 5-29 SMTP Settings
Option
Definition
Protocol events
Provides a list of types of protocol events.

High severity events include a suspected denial-of-service attack.
Communication
events
Provides a list of types of communication events.
Detection events
Provides a choice of events, such as virus detections.
Advanced
When clicked, opens another window where you can examine the settings for
each event and choose which events to log or ignore. The information includes:
High severity events include failure of a scanner.
Enabled Whether the event is being recorded in the log now.

ID The event number, such as 50012, which is recorded in the log with the time
and date of the event.
Level A symbol that indicates the severity of the event:
High Severity. We recommend that this event is recorded in the log.
Medium Severity
Low Severity.
High Volume A symbol that indicates how often this event occurs:
The event can generate a high volume of log records.
Description A description of the event, such as Quarantine.

Table 5-30 POP3 Settings
Option
Definition
Protocol events
Provides a list of types of protocol events.

Communication
events
498
Provides a list of types of communication events.

Product Guide

Table 5-30 POP3 Settings (continued)

Option
Definition
Detection events
Provides a choice of events, such as virus detections.
Advanced
When clicked, opens another window where you can examine the settings for
each event and choose which events to log or ignore. The information includes:
ID The event number, such as 50012, which is recorded in the log with the time
and date of the event.
Medium Severity
Low Severity.

Table 5-31 Non-proxy Settings
Option
Definition
System events
Provides a list of types of system events.

User interface
events
Provides a list of types of user interface events.
Advanced
When clicked, opens another window where you can examine the settings for each
event and choose which events to log or ignore. The information includes:

ID The event number, such as 50012, which is recorded in the log with the time and
date of the event.
Medium Severity
Low Severity.
Logging Configuration Override events dialog boxes

Use these dialog boxes to edit protocol and communications events for the SMTP and POP3 protocols,
and system and user interface events for the non-proxy settings.
Option
Definition
Enabled
Shows whether the event is logged
ID
The ID associated with the event
Product Guide
499

Option
Definition
Level
Displays the level of severity of the event
High Volume
Displays a warning icon if the event is likely to produce a high volume of alerts
Description
A more detailed description of the event
Restore defaults
Revert the list of events and their status to the original
Configure System Log Archive wizard

Use this wizard to configure the server to which you want to send the system log archive, set up a
regular update schedule, and test the configuration you created.

Option
Definition
Transfer to FTP
Server
Server
Proxy server
Port
Proxy port
Directory
Proxy username

anonymous)
Proxy password

anonymous)
Transfer via SSH

Server
Port
Directory


500
Product Guide

System Log

patches)
Option
Definition
Hourly to Weekly
Next / Finish
Option definitions Test Configuration

Option
Definition
Test
Checks that the backup configuration works, and provides the desired information.
The Component Management pages enable you to view the status of your updates, to specify Package
Installer and ePolicy Orchestrator options, and to enable additional anti-virus engines.
System | Component Management

Through the Component Management pages, you can schedule and perform anti-virus and anti-spam
detection file updates, as well as updates to software packages through hotfixes and patches.
Additionally, you can set up how packages are updated, or use ePolicy Orchestrator. You can also
configure your McAfee Email Gateway to use additional anti-virus engines when scanning your email
traffic.
Contents
Update Status
Package Installer
ePO
Anti-virus engines
Configure Anti-Virus Updates wizard
Configure Anti-Spam Updates wizard
Configure Automatic Package Updates
Edit Preferences (Warning Thresholds)
Product Guide
501

Update Status
Use this page to check that each scanning component is using the most up-to-date threat detection
data to maintain your appliance security.

From the Update Status page, you can manage updates for the following scanning components:
Appliance software updates (HotFixes and patches)
Extra DAT emergency update file
Default anti-virus engine and database update settings

By default, the appliance is set to update the anti-virus engine and database every day at 03:00 hours
using first HTTP to download the update file, then using FTP if the HTTP update failed.
Benefits of using Update Status

This information describes the benefits of using the Update Status features.
You can choose to update scanning components immediately, and create schedules to regularly update
the components when the server traffic is low. Additionally, you can have the appliance import
anti-virus engine and database files from the update server, and export them onto other appliances
that do have Internet access.
If you are using the Commtouch Command anti-virus engine, updates for that engine are downloaded
and applied at the same time as those for the McAfee anti-virus engine.
McAfee recommends that you update all scanning components on a new appliance using the Update Now
options, then use the scheduling options for each component to create regular updates at a time when
traffic is low, such as during the night. To update appliance software updates such as HotFixes and
patches, go to System | Component Management | Package Installer.
McAfee Email Gateway no longer supports the v1 detection definition (DAT) files. The appliances now
use the McAfee Agent to handle the updating of the v2 DAT files and scanning engine files even
without having an ePolicy Orchestrator server configured on your network. When not using an ePolicy
Orchestrator server, you can now configure your appliance to use ftp or http to download the v2 DAT
files and scanning engine files. These DAT files and scanning engine updates can be obtained by ePolicy
Orchestrator and pulled from the ePolicy Orchestrator repository using the McAfee Agent. You can also
manually download the files and install them onto your appliance.
You cannot use the Update Status pages to update the Hardware Acceleration PDB files used by older
hardware fitted with Hardware Acceleration cards.
502
Product Guide

Option definitions - Update Status

Table 5-32 Version information and updates
Option
Definition
Edit warning
thresholds
When clicked, opens a dialog box where you can specify the warning thresholds for
various component updates.
When applied, these thresholds are used in the Dashboard and within Version information
and updates to bring any missing or failed updates to your attention.
Component name
Displays the component name, preceded by an icon that indicates whether the
component is up-to-date:
Up-to-date.
Out-of-date. We recommend that you update soon.
Out-of-date. We recommend that you update immediately.
Version
Displays the component version.
Update Status
Displays information about the status of each installed component.
Last Updated
Displays the date and time that each installed component was last updated.
Scheduled
Displays the schedule, such as Every day at 03:00.

To change the location where the appliance collects the component and the
schedule, click the link, which opens a wizard.
Action
Update Now When clicked, updates a component immediately rather than wait for
the scheduled update.
Configure opens the Configure Anti-Spam Updates dialog box where you can specify a
proxy server from which the appliance downloads the update, or accept any default
server settings that you have already entered.
Import
Click Import to install the Engine and Database files previously exported from this, or
another appliance.
Export
Click Export to create a zip file containing the Engine and Database files currently
installed on the appliance.
You can include:
Anti-virus engine
Anti-virus database
Spam engine
Spam rules
within the exported file.
When you import the updates zip file, all updates that are contained within it are
imported to your appliance. If you do not want a particular update to be applied, then
McAfee recommends that you do not include that update when you export the update
file.
Product Guide
503

Table 5-33 Automatic package updates

Option
Definition
Update scheduled When clicked, the link opens a wizard, where you can specify the type, source and
schedule for installing packages, such as hot fixes and service packs.
Update now
Installs packages immediately. You can select options about how the package update
is handled.
When first configuring your appliance, using Update now confirms that the user settings
are configured correctly and working. Alternatively, you can browse to Troubleshoot |
Tests and run the System Tests to confirm these settings.
Table 5-34 Anti-virus Extra DAT

Option
Definition
Install Extra DAT
Opens a file browser to install any Extra DAT files.
Remove Extra DAT If you have existing Extra DAT files installed, allows you to remove them once the
additional protection has been added to the standard DATs.
Table 5-35 Anti-virus DAT roll back
Option
Definition
Roll back to previous installed

version
When specifically instructed to do so by McAfee Technical Support, click to

roll back to the previous installed version of the Anti-virus DAT file.
The currently installed version of the Anti-virus DAT file will be removed
from your McAfee Email Gateway. The proxies will also be restarted.
Option definitions Configure Anti-Spam Updates dialog box

Option
Definition
Use the default proxy settings
Uses the FTP proxy settings set up on the Default Server Settings page (System
| Appliance Management | Default Server Settings).
configure defaults
Opens the Default Server Settings page where you can edit the default FTP
proxy settings.
Proxy Server to Proxy Password Displays the settings of the FTP proxy server.
Task Update the anti-virus engine and database daily at 04:00 over HTTP
using a proxy server
Use this task to update the anti-virus engine using detailed settings.
Task
1
Go to System | Component Management | Update Status.
Click the link in the Scheduled column for the Anti-virus engine component.
On the Specify the server settings for downloading the update via HTTP page, keep the default settings, and click
Next.
The update will use the proxy server that you set up in System | Appliance Management | Default Server
Settings.
504
Product Guide

In Select how the McAfee FTP update site should be used, select Not Used, and click Next.
In Time to schedule update for, select the Daily option, and set the time to 0400, and click Finish.
Task - Disable updates for the additional anti-virus engine
Updates for the Commtouch Command anti-virus engine occur simultaneously with the updates for
the McAfee anti-virus engine. You can choose to disable updates for the additional anti-virus engine.
Task
1
Navigate to System | Component Management | Update Status.
In the Scheduled column under Version information and updates, click the scheduled update link on the row
with the McAfee anti-virus engine.
A series of Configure Anti-Virus Updates pages opens.
Click Next on the first and second pages that appear, to get to the third page labeled Time to schedule
update for.
Uncheck the Enable updates for Commtouch Command anti-virus check box, then click Finish.
Updates for Commtouch Command anti-virus engine are now disabled.
Task Update the spam engine daily at 05:00

Use this task to update the anti-spam engine files every day at a regular time.
Task
1
Click the link in the Scheduled column for the Spam engine component.
Click Next to have the update use the default FTP update server settings.
In Time to schedule update for, select the Daily option, and set the time to 0500, and click Finish.
Task Roll back to the previous installed Anti-virus DAT file

Remove the currently installed Anti-virus DAT file, and use the previously installed version.
If instructed by McAfee Technical Support, use this task to roll back to the previous installed version of
the Anti-virus DAT file, and remove the existing file from your McAfee Email Gateway.
Task
1
Click Roll back to previous installed version, in Anti-virus DAT roll back .
Click OK to roll back to the previous installed version of the Anti-virus DAT file.
Product Guide
505

Package Installer
Use this page to examine and install new software packages.
System | Component Management | Package Installer

McAfee recommends that you update the software packages manually on a new appliance using the
Update From File option, then go to the System | Component Management | Update Status scheduling options in
Automatic package updates to create regular updates at a time when traffic is low, such as during the
night.
Benefits of the Package Installer

This information describes the benefits of the Package Installer.
From the Package Installer page, you can view information about installed appliance software packages
such as patches and Hotfixes, and update them immediately to ensure that your appliance remains as
up-to-date as possible.
Option definitions - Package Installer

Option
Definition
Update From file When clicked, opens another window where you can select a file from a local source to
upload to the appliance.
Package Type
Displays the type of package, such as a Service Pack or Hotfix.
Name
Displays a name that uniquely identifies the package.
Severity
Displays information such as whether we recommend that you install the package, or
allow you to decide.
Status
Displays information such as whether the package has been downloaded or installed.
Required Actions Displays information such as whether the appliance needs to be restarted when the
package is installed.
Notes
Describes any dependencies or requirements, for example, whether the patch

supersedes a previous installation.
Click any Details link for more information, such as the resolved issues and
KnowledgeBase information.
506
Install
When clicked, makes the selected patch ready to install. The patch is installed when
you click Apply.
Download
When clicked, makes the selected patch ready to download. The patch is downloaded
when you click Apply.
Export
When clicked, exports the downloaded file to another location so that another
appliance can use it via Manual Package Install
Refresh
When clicked, sends a request to the FTP server for any changes.
Apply
When clicked, installs or downloads the patches that you specified.
Product Guide

ePO
Use this page to manually set up the appliance to be managed by ePolicy Orchestrator.
System | Component Management | ePO

The information and settings in this page provide similar features to those found in the ePO Managed
Setup pages of the Setup Wizard
Benefits of using ePolicy Orchestrator

This information describes the benefits of using ePolicy Orchestrator to manage your appliances.
McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator enables you to unify your security management, making risk and
compliance management simpler and more successful for organizations of all sizes.
Using McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator enables you to manage multiple McAfee Email Gateway appliances
from a single location; sharing policies across each appliance.
Option definitions ePO

Understand the options available when configuring your appliance to function with McAfee ePO.
ePO Server Configuration

Option
Definition
Export Appliance
Configuration
Use this option to create an .xml file containing your Email Gateway
configuration that you can then load directly into the Policy Catalog within
McAfee ePO.
Migrate ePO Configuration
Use this option to select the configuration file from your McAfee ePO server,
to import your McAfee ePO settings into Email Gateway.
Settings for ePO Management

Option
Definition
Import ePO connection

settings
Click to browse to the McAfee ePO connection settings file, to import the
McAfee ePO connection information into the appliance.
Enable ePO management
Select to allow reporting and monitoring of your Email Gateway events to be

sent to your McAfee ePO server. You can then compile statistics from all your
McAfee ePO-managed Email Gateway appliances.
You can enable the reporting and monitoring of your Email Gateway appliance
from your McAfee ePO v4.5 (or later) software.
Allow configuration to be
applied from ePO
When Enable ePO management is selected, use McAfee ePO to create, edit, and
manage all policies, and to have them pushed to your McAfee ePO-managed
To create, edit, and manage policies for your Email Gateway appliance, use
McAfee ePO v4.5 (or later) software.
Product Guide
507

Option
Definition
Private key passphrase

and Repeat passphrase
Enter and confirm the passphrase required to unpack the TLS certificate
package.
Unless an appliance uses McAfee ePO encryption policies that only reference
the default appliance SSL certificate, all McAfee ePO-managed appliances must
be configured with the same passphrase.
Export TLS certificates

and keys
Create a package of your TLS certificates and keys to be imported into your
McAfee ePO server.
Task Export the TLS certificate package from your Email Gateway
appliance
Export TLS certificates and keys from your Email Gateway appliance, to then import them into your
McAfee ePO server before pushing them to other Email Gateway appliances.
Before you begin
Ensure you have installed the Email Gateway extensions onto your McAfee ePO server, and
have exported the ePO Connection Settings from the McAfee ePO server.
The Email Gateway appliance from which you are exporting the TLS certificate and key
package must be enabled for McAfee ePO management.
Task
1
within the Email Gateway user interface, select System | Component Management | ePO.
Click Import ePO Connection Settings, and browse to the connection settings file (ePOConfigxxxx.zip).
Click OK to import the settings.
Select Enable ePO management.

You do not need to apply these changes at this time.
Enter and confirm the Private key passphrase.

The passphrase is stored in the Email Gateway configuration, and is used to unpack the TLS
certificate packages enforced by McAfee ePO. All Email Gateway appliances managed by McAfee
ePO must be configured with the same passphrase.
If you do not enter the private key passphrase, the keys are exported and stored in clear text,
viewable by anybody that accesses the file.
Click Export TLS certificates and keys. Optionally, include the TLS certificate and key used by the
appliance by default.
Click Generate Package.

A file named epo_tls_package.zip is created.
508
Click the link to download the TLS certificate package in preparation to import the certificates to
McAfee ePO.
Click Close to exit the dialog box.
Product Guide

Task Configuring the appliance to work with ePolicy Orchestrator

Set up the appliance to be managed by ePolicy Orchestrator.
Task
1
From your McAfee Email Gateway appliance, select Resources and then click ePO Extensions and ePO
Help Extensions to download the extension files.
On the ePO server, install the extensions using Menu | Software | Extensions | Install Extensions.
On the ePO server, save the connections settings from Menu | Gateway Protection | Email and Web Gateway |
Actions | Export Connection Settings.
Choose one of the following options:
On the McAfee Email Gateway appliance, return to the Settings for ePO Management page in the
appliance Setup Wizard, and click Import ePO connection settings.
Click System | Component Management | ePO page, and click Import ePO connection settings.
Browse to the ePO connections settings file and click OK to upload it.
Choose one of the following options:
From the Setup Wizard, click Next to continue to the Basic Settings page and complete the setup.
From System | Component Management | ePO, select Enable ePO management and Allow configuration to be
applied from ePO and apply the changes to the appliance.
When a policy is sent from ePolicy Orchestrator and is then enforced on your McAfee Email Gateway,
events are sent back from your McAfee Email Gateway to ePolicy Orchestrator giving indications of
the success or failure of that enforcement, and of any warnings that may have been generated. You
can view these events from within ePolicy Orchestrator by browsing to Menu | Reporting | Threat Event
Log.
When you have configured your appliance to enable it to be managed by ePolicy Orchestrator, you will
be reminded each time that you make a configuration change using the appliance's user interface that
the appliance is under ePolicy Orchestrator management, and that your changes will be overwritten
the next time that ePolicy Orchestrator updates the configuration.
Task Upgrade from Email Gateway 7.6.2 or higher appliances managed

by McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator
McAfee ePO.
Before you begin
Product Guide
509

McAfee ePO.
Task
1

server.
510
Product Guide

Anti-virus engines
Configure your McAfee Email Gateway to additionally use the Commtouch Command anti-virus
engine.
System | Component Management | Anti-Virus Engines

The information and settings in this page provide options about how you enable the additional
Commtouch Command anti-virus engine within McAfee Email Gateway.
When enabled, the Commtouch Command anti-virus engine works in series with the McAfee anti-virus
engine, rather than in place of it.
Benefits of using the additional anti-virus engine

Configuring McAfee Email Gateway to use an additional anti-virus engine enables you to provide a
further layer of protection to your email traffic.
Many security vendors provide anti-virus engines and signature files to detect a wide range of viruses
and other malware. These anti-virus engines use different methods to identify and detect the
unwanted files. Because of these different methods, anti-virus engines for each vendor have different
strengths and weaknesses when detecting unwanted content.
To provide a stronger and wider level of protection for your email users, McAfee Email Gateway
enables you to enable and configure an additional anti-virus engine.
This additional anti-virus engine is produced by Commtouch Command.

Although enabling an additional anti-virus engine can provide stronger protection, it will also use more
resources within the McAfee Email Gateway, and might impact overall performance and mail
throughput.
Configure Anti-Virus Updates wizard

Use this wizard to specify how and when you want to update the detection definition (DAT) files.
Benefits of the Configure Anti-Virus Updates wizard

This information describes the benefits of updating anti-virus protection using the Anti-Virus Updates
wizard.
Using the wizard to update your anti-virus database and anti-virus engine ensures updates are applied
correctly and completely.
Option definitions Configure Updates (HTTP)

Use this page to specify anti-virus engine and anti-virus database update settings over HTTP.
Introduction to the HTTP update settings

You can choose to have the HTTP update server as the primary, or secondary update site, or switch off
HTTP as an update method altogether. If the HTTP update method fails, you can continue to the next
page of the wizard, and set up an FTP update site.
Product Guide
511


Option
Definition
How HTTP update site should

be used
Default value is Primary Site. If the appliance receives its updates from an
ePO server, the value is Not Used.
Server
Default value is update.nai.com.
Port
Directory
For anti-virus updates, the default value is /virusdef/4.x

For anti-spam updates, the default value is spamdefs/1.x
Products/CommonUpdater
Username
Default value is anonymous.
Password

(configure defaults)
The appliance uses information that you type here or the default settings
from another page.
To access that page at any other time, select System | Appliance Management |
Default Server Settings on the navigation bar.
Proxy server to Proxy

Password
If the appliance obtains updates via a proxy server, type the details here.
Option definitions Configure Updates (FTP)

Use this page to specify anti-virus engine, anti-spam, and package update settings over FTP.
Introduction to the FTP update settings

You can choose to perform an anti-virus update using an FTP server if an HTTP update fails, or switch
off FTP as an update method altogether.
Option
Definition
How FTP update site should be

used
Default value is Secondary Site. If the appliance receives its updates

from an ePO server, the value is Not Used.
Server
Default value is ftp.nai.com.
Port
Directory
Username
Password

The appliance uses information that you type here or the default
settings from another page. To access the page at any other time,
select System | Appliance Management | Default Server Settings on the navigation
bar.
Proxy server to Proxy Password
If the appliance obtains updates via a proxy server, type the details
here.
Configure Anti-Spam Updates wizard

Use this page to specify anti-spam rules, and anti-spam engine update settings.
512
Product Guide

Benefits of the Configure Anti-Spam Updates wizard

This information describes the benefits of updating anti-spam protection using the Anti-Spam Updates
wizard.
Using the wizard to update your anti-spam rules and spam engine ensures updates are applied
correctly and completely.
Option definitions Configure Updates

Use this page to specify anti-spam update settings.

Option
Definition

settings from another page. To access the page at any other time, select
System | Appliance Management | Default Server Settings on the

navigation bar.
here.
Configure Automatic Package Updates

Use this wizard to configure update settings for the appliance software package updates.
Benefits of the Configure Automatic Package Updates wizard

This information describes the benefits of the Configure Automatic Package Updates wizard.
You can choose to tell the appliance how you want to retrieve the package, the type of package that
you want to apply, and what you want the appliance to do when it's downloaded the update.
Option definitions Configure Updates (FTP)

Use this page to specify anti-virus engine, anti-spam, and package update settings over FTP.
Introduction to the FTP update settings

You can choose to perform an anti-virus update using an FTP server if an HTTP update fails, or switch
off FTP as an update method altogether.
Option
Definition
How FTP update site should be

used
Default value is Secondary Site. If the appliance receives its updates

from an ePO server, the value is Not Used.
Server
Default value is ftp.nai.com.
Port
Directory
Username
Product Guide
513


Option
Definition
Password

settings from another page. To access the page at any other time,
select System | Appliance Management | Default Server Settings on the navigation
bar.
here.
Option definitions Configure Automatic Package Updates (Update action)

Option
Definition
Update action
Choose from:
Update database
Download
Download and install
Allow automatic reboot and Allow

automatic services restart
Specifies the action that the appliance will take on receiving the
new software.
Feature packs to Hotfixes
Specifies the type of new software to download.


System Log

patches)

514
Option
Definition
Hourly to Weekly
Next / Finish
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Edit Preferences (Warning Thresholds)

Edit the time before you are warned or alerted about update files being out of date.
Option
Definition
Parameter You can configure the warning thresholds for the following updates:
McAfee anti-virus engine
McAfee anti-virus database
Spam
Spam engine
If you have installed the additional Commtouch Command anti-virus engine, the following
rows will appear:
Commtouch Command anti-virus engine
Commtouch Command anti-virus database
Warn After Specify the time between the last update and when an amber warning is shown within the
Dashboard.
Alert After Specify the time between the last update and when a red "critical level" alert is shown
within the Dashboard.
Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is available from the user interface to allow you to edit settings that you made in
the configuration console when you first installed the appliance.
Introducing the Setup Wizard options

The following describe pages that you might see when you complete the Setup Wizard. The options
differ depending on the setup option that you select.
Welcome
Use this page to select the type of installation that you want to follow.
This is the first page of the Setup Wizard. Use this page to select the type of installation you want to
perform.
Standard Setup (default) use this option to set up your device in transparent bridge mode, and
configure it to protect your network. The SMTP protocol is enabled by default. You can choose to
enable scanning of POP3 traffic.
Choosing Standard Setup forces the device to run in transparent bridge mode.
Custom Setup use this option to select the operating mode for your device. You can choose to
protect mail traffic using SMTP and POP3 protocols. You should use this if you need to configure
IPv6 and to make other changes to the default configuration.
Product Guide
515

Setup Wizard
Restore from a file (not available from the Configuration Console) use this to set up your device
based on a previously saved configuration. Following the import of the file you will be able to check
the imported settings before finishing the wizard. If the file came from an earlier McAfee Email and
Web Security Appliance, some details are not available.
ePolicy Orchestrator Managed Setup use this to set up your device so that it can be managed by your
ePolicy Orchestrator (McAfee ePO) server. Only minimal information is needed, as the device will
get most of its configuration information from your ePolicy Orchestrator server.
Encryption Only Setup use this option to set up your appliance as a standalone encryption server.
The appliance operates in one of the following modes transparent bridge, transparent router, or
explicit proxy. The mode affects how you integrate the appliance into your network and how the
appliance handles traffic. You will need to change the mode only if you restructure your network.
Explicit Proxy mode

Use this page to specify the type of installation.
In Explicit Proxy mode, some network devices send traffic to the appliance. The appliance then works as
a proxy, processing traffic on behalf of the devices.
Explicit Proxy mode is best suited to networks where the client devices connect to the appliance
through a single upstream and downstream device. For example, you can configure your network to
have your web cache logically connected on one side of the appliance and a firewall on the other side,
with both physically connected through the LAN1 port. The advantage of this scenario is that you need
to reconfigure only the web cache and firewall. You do not need to reconfigure the clients.
Transparent Router mode

Use this page to specify the type of installation.
In Transparent Router mode, other network devices, such as mail servers, are unaware that the appliance
has intercepted and scanned the email before forwarding it. The appliance's operation is transparent to
the devices.
Transparent Router mode is suitable for networks that have firewall rules, because the firewall still
sees the IP addresses of the clients and can therefore apply the Internet access rules to client traffic.
516
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Transparent Bridge Mode

This information describes the Transparent Bridge appliance operating mode.
In Transparent Bridge mode, other network devices, such as mail servers, are unaware that the appliance
has intercepted and scanned the email before forwarding it. The appliance's operation is transparent to
the devices.
Transparent Bridge mode requires the least configuration. You do not need to reconfigure your clients
or default gateway to send traffic to the appliance. You do not need to update a routing table.
Standard Setup
Use the Standard Setup wizard to set up your appliance in Transparent Bridge mode, and configure it
to protect your network.
The Standard Setup wizard consists of the following pages:
Contents
Benefits of the Standard Setup wizard
Email Configuration page (Standard Setup)
Basic Settings page (Standard Setup)
Summary page (Standard Setup)
Benefits of the Standard Setup wizard

This information describes the benefits to setting up an appliance using the Standard Setup wizard.
Standard Setup enables you to quickly set up your McAfee Email Gateway using the most common
options.
Use this option to set up your device in transparent bridge mode, and configure it to protect your
network. The SMTP protocol is enabled by default. You can choose to enable scanning of POP3 traffic.
Choosing Standard Setup forces the device to run in transparent bridge mode.
Email Configuration page (Standard Setup)

Option
Definition
Enable protection
against Potentially
Unwanted Programs
Click to activate protection against Potentially Unwanted Programs. Read the

advice from McAfee about the effects that activating this protection can have.
Enable URL Reputation

checking
Click to activate Global Threat Intelligence scanning of URLs embedded in

messages.
Product Guide
517

Setup Wizard
Option
Definition
Use McAfee Email

Protection (Hybrid) to
process inbound email
Click to activate hybrid email protection, with McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid)
scanning your inbound email traffic.
After enabling McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid), the configuration pages for this
service are displayed automatically when you next log into the user interface.
Enable Graymail
Protection
Click to enable protection from messages (such as email newsletters) that some
users want, but that others might prefer to block.
When selected, the Graymail dictionary is added to the Anti-Spam Terms list, found
in Email | Email Policies | Spam | Spam Terms.
To view the terms within the Graymail dictionary, select this dictionary from Email
| DLP and Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries.
Enable McAfee Global

Threat Intelligence
feedback
Select this option to enable McAfee Global Threat feedback.
Local relay domain
Enter both the IP address and netmask for your local relay domain.
Click What is this? to read about how the feedback is used, and view the McAfee
Privacy Policy.
Ensure that you define at least one local domain, as well as the domains from
which you want to permit email relaying, and that you want to deny email
relaying. Defining a domain as a Permitted domain ensures that email traffic from
that domain is always allowed to be relayed.
Basic Settings page (Standard Setup)

Use this page in the Standard Setup wizard, to specify basic settings for the appliance in transparent
bridge mode.
Option
Definition
Device name
Domain name
Specifies a name, such as domain1.com.
IP address
Specifies an address, such as 198.168.200.10.

The fully qualified domain name (Device name.Domain name) must resolve to this IP
address when the DNS server (specified here) is called. We recommend that this IP
address resolves to the FQDN in a reverse lookup.
518
Subnet
Specifies a subnet address, such as 255.255.255.0.
Gateway Address
Specifies an address, such as 198.168.10.1. This is likely to be a router or a

firewall. You can test later that the appliance can communicate with this device.
DNS Server IP
Specifies the address of a Domain Name Server that the appliance uses to convert
website addresses to IP addresses. This can be an Active Directory or a Domain
Name Service server. You can test later that the appliance can communicate with
this server.
Mode
Specifies the mode Transparent Bridge, Transparent Router or Explicit Proxy.
User ID
The scmadmin user is the super administrator. You cannot change or disable this
account and the account cannot be deleted. However, you can add more login
accounts after installation.
Current
Password/New
Password
The original default password is password. Specify the new password. Change the
password as soon as possible to keep your appliance secure.
You must type the new password twice to confirm it.
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Option
Definition
Appliance Time zone Specifies the time zone of the appliance. You might need to set this twice each year
if your region observes daylight saving time. The zones are organized from west to
east to cover mid-Pacific, America, Europe, Asia, Africa, India, Japan, and Australia.
Appliance Time
(UTC)
Set Now
Client Time
Synchronize
appliance with client Client Time. You can use this checkbox as an alternative to manual setting of Appliance
Time (UTC). The appliance calculates the UTC time based on the time zone that it
finds on the client's browser.
Ensure that the client computer is aware of any daylight savings adjustments. To
find the setting on Microsoft Windows, right-click the time display in the bottom
right corner of the screen.
NTP server address
To use Network Time Protocol (NTP) , specify the server address.

Alternatively, you can configure NTP later.
Summary page (Standard Setup)

Use this page in the Standard Setup wizard, to review a summary of the settings that you have made
for the network connections and scanning of the network traffic.
To change any value, click its blue link to display the page where you originally typed the value.
After you click Finish, the setup wizard has completed, and the appliance is configured as a transparent
bridge.
Use the IP address shown here to access the interface. For example https://192.168.200.10.
The address begins with https, not http.
When you first log on to the interface, type the user name, admin and the password that you gave on
the Basic Settings page.
Table 5-41 Basic settings
Option Definition
The value is set according to best practice.
The value is probably not correct. Although the value is valid, it is not set according to best
practice. Check the value before continuing.
No value has been set. The value has not been changed from the default. Check the value
before continuing.
Product Guide
519

Setup Wizard
Custom Setup
Use the Custom Setup Wizard to choose the operating mode when you set up your appliance. You can
also make other choices, such as setting up IPv6 networking.
The Custom Setup Wizard consists of the following pages:
Contents
Benefits of the Custom Setup wizard
Important considerations for the Custom Setup Wizard
Basic Settings page (Custom Setup)
Cluster Management page
DNS and Routing page
Email Configuration page (Custom Setup)
Time Settings page
Password page
Summary page
Benefits of the Custom Setup wizard

This information describes the benefits of setting up an appliance using the Custom Setup wizard.
Use the Custom Setup to give you greater control in the options that you can select, including the
operating mode for your device.
You can choose to protect mail traffic using SMTP and POP3 protocols. You should use this
configuration option if you need to configure IPv6 and to make other changes to the default
configuration.
Important considerations for the Custom Setup Wizard

This information describes important considerations before you complete the Custom Setup Wizard
Cluster Management
When configuring a group of appliances or McAfee Content Security Blade Servers, the current master
uses a "least used" algorithm to assign connections to the appliances or blades configured to scan
traffic. The scanning appliance or blade that is currently showing the least number of connections, at
that moment in time, is assigned the next connection.
For a cluster of appliances:
If you have only a master and a failover appliance, with both configured to scan traffic, the master
will send most connections to the failover appliance for scanning.
If you have scanning appliances, and scanning enabled on the master and failover, then the
scanning appliances will receive the most traffic to scan, then the failover, with the master
receiving the least. If you have more than three appliances in a cluster, McAfee recommends that
you do not enable scanning on the master appliance.
You cannot configure the master or the failover blades of the McAfee Content Security Blade Server to
scan traffic.
McAfee recommends that when using your appliance in a cluster environment, you use McAfee
Quarantine Manager to quarantine email messages.
Delivering email
Using the recipient's domain, the appliance uses the following logic to decide how it will deliver
messages:
520
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
If the recipient's domain matches those listed in Known Domains and relay hosts, it uses those relays to
deliver the message.
If the recipient's domain does not match those listed in Known Domains and relay hosts, it can be
configured to use an MX record lookup to deliver using DNS. If no MX records are available, it
attempts to make the delivery using an A record lookup. MX delivery is attempted to hosts in the
order of priority that is returned by the DNS server.
If it cannot deliver using one of the previous methods, it uses fallback relays to make the delivery
(providing the recipient's domain matches those listed in the Fallback relays field).
If the domain does not exist, the appliance generates a non-delivery report and sends it to the
originator.
If the receiving server cannot accept delivery, or there are no IP addresses to complete the
delivery, the message is queued.
Basic Settings page (Custom Setup)

Use this page when selecting the Custom Setup wizard, to specify basic settings for the appliance.
The appliance tries to provide some information for you, and shows the information highlighted in
amber. To change the information, click and retype.
Option
Definition
Cluster mode
Defines the options that appear on the Cluster Management page of the Setup Wizard.
appliance.
appliances.
instead.
Device name
Domain name
Default Gateway
Specifies an IPv4 address, such as 198.168.10.1. You can test later that the appliance
can communicate with this server.
Next Hop Router
Specifies an IPv6 address, such as FD4A:A1B2:C3D4::1.

This IPv6 address must be a link-local address.
Network Interface Becomes available when you set the Next Hop Router for IPv6.

Option
Definition
<mode>
Network Interface 1
Product Guide
521

Setup Wizard
Option
Definition
Network Interface 2
Change Network
Settings

Use this page to specify cluster management balancing requirements.
Depending on the cluster mode you selected on the Basic Settings page, the options that appear on the
Cluster Management page change.
Cluster Management Configuration (Standard appliance)

Do not use. Cluster management is disabled.
Table 5-42 Cluster Management (Cluster Scanner)
Option
Definition
Cluster identifier If you have more than one cluster or McAfee Content Security Blade Server on the
same subnet, assign each a different Cluster identifier to ensure the clusters do not
conflict.
Cluster Management (Cluster Master)

In explicit proxy mode or transparent router mode, you can enable failover between two appliances in a
cluster by assigning a virtual IP address to this appliance and configuring another appliance as a Cluster
Failover appliance using the same virtual address. In transparent bridge mode, this is achieved by
setting a high STP priority for this appliance and configuring another appliance as a Cluster Failover
appliance with a lower STP priority.
Option
Definition
Cluster identifier
If you have more than one cluster or McAfee Content Security Blade Server
on the same subnet, assign each a different Cluster identifier to ensure the
clusters do not conflict.

balancing
Specifies the appliance address.
Option
Definition
Cluster identifier
If you have more than one cluster or McAfee Content Security Blade Server on
the same subnet, assign each a different Cluster identifier to ensure the clusters do
not conflict.

balancing

appliance
appliances.
522
Product Guide

Setup Wizard

hard disk space.
Table 5-43 Advanced scanning device settings (appliances)
Option
Definition
MAC Address

Disabled
Add MAC Address
Table 5-44 Advanced scanning device settings (blade servers)
Option
Definition
MAC Address

Disabled
Add MAC Address
Manage MAC Addresses
Opens the MAC Addresses dialog box that enables you to manage the list of
Lock DHCP server to MAC

addresses
Select to prevent the management blade from acknowledging DHCP requests

sent by arbitrary hosts on its network.
If selected, add the MAC addresses of any scanning blades to be added to
your Content security Blade Server to the MAC address table. Failing to do this
will prevent a scanning blade from acquiring the correct IP address.
Table 5-45 Cluster Management (Cluster Failover)

Option
Definition

balancing
Specifies the appliance address. Provides a list of all subnets assigned to the
appliance.
Cluster identifier

appliance
If not selected, this appliance distributes all scanning workload to the

scanning appliances.
Product Guide
523

Setup Wizard

Option
Definition
Address to use for load balancing Specifies the appliance address. Provides a list of all subnets assigned to
the appliance.
If you have more than one cluster or McAfee Content Security Blade
Server on the same subnet, assign each a different Cluster identifier to
ensure the clusters do not conflict.
Cluster identifier

Use this page to configure the appliance's use of DNS and routes.
Domain Name System (DNS) servers translate or "map" the names of network devices into IP
addresses (and the reverse operation). The appliance sends requests to DNS servers in the order that
they are listed here.

Option
Definition
Server Address
New Server/
Delete Selected
Servers
Adds a new server to the list, or removes one when, for example, when you need to
decommission a server due to network changes.
Only send
queries to these
servers
might speed up DNS queries as the appliance sends the queries to the specified DNS
Routing Settings
524
Option
Definition
Network Address
Mask
Gateway
Metric
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Option
Definition
New Route /
Delete Selected
Routes
Add a new route to the table, ore remove routes. Use the arrows to move routes up
Enable dynamic
routing
Email Configuration page (Custom Setup)

Initial email configuration

Option
Definition
Enable protection against

Potentially Unwanted
Programs
Click to activate protection against Potentially Unwanted Programs. Read the

advice from McAfee about the effects that activating this protection can have.
Enable URL Reputation

checking
Click to activate McAfee Global Threat Intelligence scanning of URLs embedded

in messages.
Use McAfee Email

Protection (Hybrid) to
process inbound email
Click to activate hybrid Email Protection, with McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid)
scanning your inbound email traffic.
After enabling McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid), the configuration pages for
this service are displayed automatically when you next log on to the user
interface.
Enable Graymail
Protection
Click to enable protection from messages (such as email newsletters) that

some users want, but that others might prefer to block.
When selected, the Graymail dictionary is added to the Anti-Spam Terms list, found
in Email | Email Policies | Spam | Spam Terms.
To view the terms within the Graymail dictionary, select this dictionary from
Email | DLP and Dictionaries | Compliance Dictionaries.
Enable McAfee Global

Threat Intelligence
feedback
Click to allow Email Gateway to send threat intelligence to McAfee to help

improve detection rates.
Enable Anti-Spam Cloud

Lookup
Click to send information about your email messages to McAfee data centers
for real-time spam analysis.
Click What is this? to read about how the feedback is used, and view the McAfee
Privacy Policy.
Click What is this? to read about the information that is sent to McAfee and to
view the McAfee Privacy Policy.
Scan SMTP traffic / Scan
POP3 traffic
Both protocols are selected by default. Deselect a protocol to prevent scanning

occurring.
Option definitions Domains for which the appliance will accept or refuse email
Use these options to define how the appliance will relay email. After you complete the Setup wizard,
you can manage the domains from Email | Email Configuration | Receiving Email.
Product Guide
525

Setup Wizard
Option
Definition
Domain
Name/
Network
Address/MX
Record
Type
Domain name For example, example.com. The appliance uses this information to
compare the recipient's email address and compare the connection against an A
record lookup.
Network Address For example, 192.168.0.2/32 or 192.168.0.0/24. The appliance
uses this information to compare the recipient's IP literal email address such as
MX Record Lookup For example, example.com. The appliance uses this information to
compare the connection against an MX record lookup.
Wildcard domain name For example, *.example.com. The appliance only uses this
information to compare the recipient's email address.
Category
Local domain
Permitted domain
Denied domain
to be relayed.
Add Domain
delivery. For convenience, you can import a list of your local domain names using the
Import Lists and Export Lists options. McAfee recommends that you add all domains or
networks that are allowed to relay messages as local domains.
You must set up at least one local domain.
Add MX
Lookup
Click to specify a domain that the appliance uses to identify all mail server IP addresses
from which it delivers messages.
Delete
Selected
Items
Remove the selected item from the table. You must apply the changes before the item is
removed from the appliance configuration.
Option definitions Domain Routing

Configure hosts that the appliance uses to route email. After you complete the Setup wizard, you can
manage the domains from Email | Email Configuration | Sending Email.
526
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Option
Definition
Domain name /
Network
Address / MX
Record

This list allows you to specify specific relays/sets of relays to be used to deliver
messages destined for specific domains. Domains can be identified using exact
matches, or using pattern matches such as *.example.com.
To specify multiple relays for a single domain, separate each with a space.
If the first mail relay is accepting email, all email is delivered to the first relay. If that
relay stops accepting email, subsequent email is delivered to the next relay in the list.
Type
Domain name For example, example.com. The appliance uses this information to
compare the recipient's email address and compare the connection against an A
record lookup.
Network Address For example, 192.168.0.2/32 or 192.168.0.0/24. The appliance
uses this information to compare the recipient's IP literal email address such as
MX Record Lookup For example, example.com. The appliance uses this information to
compare the connection against an MX record lookup.
Wildcard domain name For example, *.example.com. The appliance only uses this
information to compare the recipient's email address.
Category
Entered domains are one of the following:

Local domain
Permitted domain
Denied domain
to be relayed.
Add Relay List
Click to populate the Known domains and relay hosts table with a list of host names or IP
addresses for delivery. Delivery is attempted in the order specified unless you select
the Round-robin the above hosts option, which distributes the load between the specified
hosts.
Host names/IP addresses can include a port number.
Add MX Lookup Click to populate the Known domains and relay hosts table with an MX record lookup to
Delivery is attempted to host names returned by the MX lookup in the order of priority
given by the DNS server.
Delete Selected
Items
Remove the selected item from the table. You must apply the changes before the item
is removed from the appliance configuration.
Enable DNS
lookup for
domains not
listed above
If selected, the appliance uses DNS to route email for other, unspecified domains. DNS
delivery attempts an MX-record lookup. If there are no MX records, it does an A-record
lookup.
If you deselect this checkbox, the appliance delivers email only to the domains that are
specified under Known domains and relay hosts.
Product Guide
527

Setup Wizard
Time Settings page

Use this page to set the time and date, and any details for the use of the Network Time Protocol
(NTP).
Option
Definition
Appliance Time
Zone
Appliance Time
(UTC)
Set Now
Client Time
Synchronize
appliance with
client
Enable NTP

performance.
Enable NTP client

broadcasts
NTP Server
New Server
Password page
Use this page to specify a password for the appliance.
For a strong password, include letters and numbers. You can type up to 15 characters.
Option Definition
User ID
This is admin. You can add more users later.
Password Specifies the new password. Change the password as soon as possible to keep your
appliance secure.
You must enter the new password twice to confirm it. The original default password is
password.
Summary page
Review a summary of the settings that you have made for the network connections and scanning of
the email traffic.
528
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
After you click Finish, the Setup Wizard has completed.

Use the IP address shown here to access the interface. For example https://192.168.200.10. The
address starts with https, not http.
If you have configured your McAfee Email Gateway to provide Secure Web Mail, then you need to
access the appliance using port 10443. So, using the example above, you would need to enter https://
192.168.200.10:10443.
the Password page.
Option Definition
before continuing.
Network Interfaces Wizard

The options you see in the Network Interfaces Wizard depend on the operating mode. On the first
page of the wizard, you can choose to change the operating mode for the appliance. You can change
the settings by clicking Change Network Settings to start a wizard. Click Next to progress through the wizard.
In Explicit Proxy mode, some network devices send traffic to the appliances. The appliance then
works as a proxy, processing traffic on behalf of the devices.
In Transparent Router or Transparent Bridge mode, other network devices, such as mail servers,
are unaware that the appliance has intercepted and scanned the email before forwarding it. The
appliance's operation is transparent to the devices.
If you have a standalone appliance running in transparent bridge mode, you will have the option to add
a bypass device in case the appliance fails.
If the appliance is operating in Transparent Bridge mode, and the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is
running on your network, make sure that the appliance is configured according to STP rules.
Additionally, you can set up a bypass device in transparent bridge mode.
To configure your McAfee Email Gateway Blade Server to failover from the management blade to the
failover management blade, you must specify at least one virtual IP address, shared between the
management and failover management blades.
Network Interfaces Wizard Explicit Proxy mode

This version of the Network Interfaces Wizard becomes available when you select the Explicit Proxy
mode.
Specify the details for Network Interface 1, then use the Next button to set details for Network Interface
2 as necessary.
Product Guide
529

Setup Wizard
Network Interface 1 or Network Interface 2 page

Option
Definition
IP Address

aliases.
Network Mask
Specifies the network mask. In IPv4, you can use a format such as 255.255.255.0, or
CIDR notation, such as 24. In IPv6, you must use the prefix length, for example, 64.
Enabled
Virtual
When selected, the appliance treats this IP address as a virtual address.

This option only appears in cluster configurations, or on a McAfee Content Security
Blade Server.
New Address/
Delete Selected
Addresses
NIC 1 Adapter
Options or NIC
2 Adapter
Options

bytes.

Enable IPv6 auto-configuration Select this option to allow the appliance to automatically
installation.
530
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Network Interfaces Wizard Transparent Router mode

Use the Network Interfaces Wizard to change the chosen operating mode, then specify the IP address
Network Interface 1 or Network Interface 2 pages

Option
Definition
IP Address

address at the top of a list is the primary address. Any IP addresses below it are
aliases.
Network Mask
Enabled
Virtual
New Address/
Delete Selected
Addresses
NIC 1 Adapter
Options or NIC
2 Adapter
Options

MTU size Specifies the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) size. The MTU is the
bytes.

installation.
Enable sending IPv6 router advertisements on this interface When enabled, allows IPv6 router
advertisements to be sent to machines on the sub-net that require a router
response to complete auto-configuration.
Network Interfaces Wizard Transparent Bridge mode

Specify the details for the Ethernet Bridge, then use the Next button to set details for the Spanning Tree
Protocol and Bypass Device as necessary.
Product Guide
531

Setup Wizard
Option definitions Ethernet Bridge page

Option
Definition
Select all
Click to select all the IP addresses.
IP Address

addresses are combined into one list for both ports. The IP address at the top of a list
is the primary address. Any IP addresses below it are aliases.
Use the Move links to reposition the addresses as necessary.
Network Mask
Enabled
New Address/
Delete Selected
Addresses
NIC Adapter
Options

maximum size (expressed in bytes) of a single unit of data (for example, an Ethernet
Frame) that can be sent over the connection. The default value is 1500 bytes.

Enable IPv6 auto-configuration select this option to allow the appliance to automatically
installation.
Option definitions Spanning Tree Protocol Settings page

Option
Definition
Enable STP
STP is enabled by default.
Bridge priority
Sets the priority for the STP bridge. Lower numbers have a higher priority. The
maximum number that you can set is 65535.
Advanced parameters Expand to set the following options. Change the settings only if you understand
the possible effects, or you have consulted an expert:
Forwarding delay
Garbage collection interval (seconds)
Hello interval (seconds)
Ageing time (seconds)
Maximum age (seconds)
532
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Option definitions Bypass Device Settings page

Option
Definition
The bypass device inherits settings from those you entered in NIC Adapter Options
.
Select bypass device
Choose from two supported devices.
Watchdog timeout
(seconds)
For the bypass device, the time, in seconds, that can elapse before the system
bypasses the appliance.
Heartbeat interval
(seconds)
Set to monitor heartbeat by default.
Advanced parameters This option becomes active when you select a bypass device.
Mode choose to monitor the heartbeat or the heartbeat and the link activity.
Link activity timeout (seconds) becomes active when you select Monitor heartbeat and link
activity in Mode
Enable buzzer enabled by default. If the bypass device fails to detect the
heartbeat signal for the configured Watchdog timeout, the buzzer sounds.
Network Interface Layout

Look at the detail provided regarding the layout of the Network interfaces.
This dialog box shows the current assignments for the network interfaces. Use it to confirm that the
assignments are as you expect.
Option
Definition
LAN 1
This shows how LAN 1 is described.
LAN 2
This shows how LAN 2 is described.
Out of band interface
This shows how the Out of band interface is described.
Restore from a file Setup

Use the Restore from a file Setup wizard to configure your appliance based on the settings saved from
another appliance.
The Restore from a file Setup wizard consists of the following pages:
Contents
Import Configuration
Values to Restore
Basic Settings page (Restore from a File)
Time Settings page
Password page
Summary page
Product Guide
533

Setup Wizard
Import Configuration
Use this dialog to import the configuration file containing the details that you want to use to configure
your appliance.
Option
Definition
Browse
Locate the configuration file to use as a basis for your new settings.
The configuration filename is in the format:
config_<date and time stamp>.zip
Values to Restore
Use this dialog to choose the areas of the configuration that you want to restore.
By default, the setup wizard attempts to restore all settings found within the configuration file onto
your appliance.
You can choose not to restore settings in particular areas by deselecting them before continuing with
the installation.
The setup wizard enables you to review and change all setting before you apply then to the appliance.
Option
Definition
Protocol configuration
Information about the protocols the appliance uses.

This information is always restored.
Network configuration
Information about the IP addresses, host names and other details that are
specific to your appliance and your network.
The reporting configuration Information about how you have configured your Favorite Reports and Scheduled
Reports.
The user preferences
Information about how you have configured user interface options, such as the
Dashboard configuration.
Role-based user accounts
Selecting this re-installs information about the role-based user accounts that
you have set up.
This does not include the passwords for default accounts.
ePO configuration
If the appliance that generated the configuration file was under ePolicy
Orchestrator management, this option applies these ePO configuration
settings.
Basic Settings page (Restore from a File)

Use this page when selecting the Restore from a File wizard, to specify basic settings for the appliance.
534
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Option
Definition
Cluster mode
Defines the options that appear on the Cluster Management page of the Setup Wizard.

appliance.
appliances.
instead.
Device name
Domain name
Default Gateway
Specifies an IPv4 address, such as 198.168.10.1. You can test later that the appliance
can communicate with this server.
Next Hop Router

This IPv6 address must be a link-local address.
Network Interface Becomes available when you set the Next Hop Router for IPv6.

Use this page to specify cluster management balancing requirements.
Depending on the cluster mode you selected on the Basic Settings page, the options that appear on the
Cluster Management page change.

Table 5-51 Cluster Management (Cluster Scanner)
Option
Definition
conflict.

Option
Definition
Cluster identifier

balancing
Product Guide
535

Setup Wizard
Option
Definition
Cluster identifier
not conflict.

balancing

appliance
appliances.

hard disk space.
Table 5-52 Advanced scanning device settings (appliances)
Option
Definition
MAC Address

Disabled
Add MAC Address
Table 5-53 Advanced scanning device settings (blade servers)
Option
Definition
MAC Address

Disabled
Add MAC Address
Manage MAC Addresses
Opens the MAC Addresses dialog box that enables you to manage the list of
Lock DHCP server to MAC

addresses
Select to prevent the management blade from acknowledging DHCP requests

sent by arbitrary hosts on its network.
If selected, add the MAC addresses of any scanning blades to be added to
your Content security Blade Server to the MAC address table. Failing to do this
will prevent a scanning blade from acquiring the correct IP address.
536
Product Guide

Setup Wizard

Option
Definition

balancing
appliance.
Cluster identifier

appliance
If not selected, this appliance distributes all scanning workload to the


Option
Definition
the appliance.
If you have more than one cluster or McAfee Content Security Blade
Server on the same subnet, assign each a different Cluster identifier to
ensure the clusters do not conflict.
Cluster identifier


Option
Definition
Server Address
New Server/
Delete Selected
Servers
Only send
queries to these
servers
Product Guide
537

Setup Wizard
Routing Settings
Option
Definition
Network Address
Mask
Gateway
Metric
New Route /
Delete Selected
Routes
Enable dynamic
routing
Time Settings page

(NTP).
Option
Definition
Appliance Time
Zone
Appliance Time
(UTC)
Set Now
Client Time
Synchronize
appliance with
client
Enable NTP

performance.
Enable NTP client

broadcasts
538
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Option
Definition
NTP Server
New Server
Password page
Option Definition
User ID
appliance secure.
password.
Summary page
the email traffic.
192.168.200.10:10443.
the Password page.
Option Definition
before continuing.
ePO Managed Setup

Use the ePO Managed Setup wizard to configure your appliance so that it can be managed from your
ePolicy Orchestrator server.
The ePO Managed Setup wizard consists of the following pages:
Contents
Settings for ePolicy Orchestrator Management
Product Guide
539

Setup Wizard
Basic Settings page (ePolicy Orchestrator Managed Setup)

Cluster Management page (ePolicy Orchestrator Managed Setup)
Time Settings page
Password page
Summary ePolicy Orchestrator Managed Setup
Settings for ePolicy Orchestrator Management

Select ePolicy Orchestrator Managed Setup within the Setup Wizard to configure your appliance for
management by McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator.
Option
Definition
ePO Extensions Download the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator extensions for McAfee Gateway products,
including McAfee Email Gateway.
The file MEGv7.x_ePOextensions.zip contains both the EWG and the MEG McAfee
ePolicy Orchestrator extensions.
The EWG extension allows reporting from within McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator for the
following products:
McAfee Email and Web Security appliances
McAfee Web Gateway appliances
McAfee Email Gateway appliances
The MEG Extension provides full McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator management for McAfee
Email Gateway versions 7.0 onwards.
For you to use McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator for either reporting or management, the
McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator Extensions need to be installed on your McAfee ePolicy
Orchestrator server.
ePO Help
Extensions
Download the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator help extensions.

The file MEGv7.x_ePOhelpextensions.zip contains the online help information for the
above McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator Extensions.
This file installs the help extensions relating to the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator
extensions for McAfee Email and Web Gateway and McAfee Email Gateway appliances
onto your McAfee ePolicy Orchestratorserver.
Import ePO
connection
settings
Click to browse to the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator connection settings file, to import
the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator connection information into the appliance.
Task Configure the appliance to work with ePolicy Orchestrator

Use this task to set up the appliance to be managed by ePolicy Orchestrator:
540
From your McAfee Email Gateway, on Settings for ePO Management, select ePO Extensions and click Save to
download the extension file.
From your McAfee Email Gateway, on Settings for ePO Management, select ePO Help Extensions and click Save
to download the help extension file.
On your McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator server, install these extensions using Menu | Software | Extensions
| Install Extensions.
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
On the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator server, save the connections settings from Menu | Gateway
Protection | Email and Web Gateway | Actions | Export Connection Settings.
On the McAfee Email Gateway, return to the Settings for ePO Management page in the Setup Wizard, and
click Import ePO connection settings. Browse to the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator connections settings file.
Click Next to continue to the Basic Settings page in the Setup Wizard.
Basic Settings page (ePolicy Orchestrator Managed Setup)

Use this page to configure the basic settings for the appliance that will be managed by ePolicy
Orchestrator.
Option
Definition
Cluster mode
The options are:

Off (Standard appliance)
Cluster scanner
Cluster Master
Cluster failover
Device Name
Domain Name
Default Gateway (IPv4) Specifies an IPv4 address, such as 198.168.10.1. You can test later that the
appliance can communicate with this server.
Next Hop Router (IPv6) Specifies an IPv6 address, such as FD4A:A1B2:C3D4::1.
Network Interface
Becomes available when you set the Next Hop Router for IPv6.

Option
Definition
<mode>
Network Interface 1
Network Interface 2
Change Network
Settings
Cluster Management page (ePolicy Orchestrator Managed Setup)

Use this page to specify load-balancing requirements that apply to ePolicy Orchestrator Managed
appliances.

Do not use this page. Cluster management is disabled.
Product Guide
541

Setup Wizard
Cluster Management (Cluster Scanner)

Use this page to specify information for a scanning appliance.
Option
Definition
Cluster identifier
Specifies an identifier. Range is 0-255.

Use this page to specify information for a master appliance.
Option
Definition
Address to use for load balancing Specifies the appliance address.

Cluster identifier
Enable scanning on this appliance If not selected, this appliance distributes all scanning workload to the
Cluster Management (Cluster Failover)

Use this page to specify information for a failover appliance.
Option
Definition
the appliance.
Cluster identifier
Enable scanning on this appliance If not selected, this appliance distributes all scanning workload to the


Option
Definition
Server Address
New Server/
Delete Selected
Servers
Only send
queries to these
servers
542
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Routing Settings
Option
Definition
Network Address
Mask
Gateway
Metric
New Route /
Delete Selected
Routes
Enable dynamic
routing
Time Settings page

(NTP).
Option
Definition
Appliance Time
Zone
Appliance Time
(UTC)
Set Now
Client Time
Synchronize
appliance with
client
Enable NTP

performance.
Enable NTP client

broadcasts
Product Guide
543

Setup Wizard
Option
Definition
NTP Server
New Server
Password page
Option Definition
User ID
appliance secure.
password.
Summary ePolicy Orchestrator Managed Setup

Use this page when using the ePolicy Orchestrator Managed Setup Wizard, to review a summary of the
settings that you have made for the network connections and scanning of the network traffic,
clustering status, and the scanning settings that ePolicy Orchestrator will manage for the appliance.
After you click Finish, the setup wizard has completed.
Use the IP address shown here to access the interface. For example https://192.168.200.10. Note
that the address begins with https, not http.
When you first log onto the interface, type the user name, admin and the password that you gave to
this setup wizard.
The appliance is now managed by ePolicy Orchestrator. Log onto the ePolicy Orchestrator server to
manage your appliance.

Option Definition
before continuing.
544
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Encryption Only Setup

Use the Encryption Only Setup wizard to configure your appliance to act as an encryption server,
working alongside other McAfee Email Gateway scanning appliances.
The Encryption Only Setup wizard consists of the following pages:
Basic Settings page (Encryption Only Setup)

Use this page when selecting the Encryption Only Setup Wizard, to specify basic settings for the
appliance.
Option
Definition
Cluster mode
Defines the options that appear on the Cluster Management page of the Setup
Wizard.
appliance.
appliances.
Cluster Failover If the master fails, this appliance controls the scanning
workload instead.
Device name
Domain name
Default Gateway
Specifies an IPv4 address, such as 198.168.10.1. You can test later that the
appliance can communicate with this server.
Next Hop Router
Network Interface
Becomes available when you set the Next Hop Router for IPv6.
Select management port Specifies the port that manages the gateway. By default, McAfee Email Gateway
uses port 10443.
Network Settings page (Encryption Only Setup)

Use these options to view and configure the IP address and network speeds for McAfee Email Gateway
as an encryption only appliance. You can use IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, separately or in combination.
Option
Definition
<mode>
The operating mode that you set during installation or in the Setup Wizard.
Network Interface 1
Network Interface 2
Change Network
Settings
View Network Interface

Layout
Click to see the <?> associated with LAN1, LAN2, and the out of band interface.
Product Guide
545

Setup Wizard
Cluster Management page (Encryption Only Setup)

Use cluster management to specify load balancing requirements.
Depending on the cluster mode you selected on the Basic Settings page, the options that appear on
the Cluster Management page change.

Cluster Management (Cluster Scanner)

Option
Definition
conflict.

Option
Definition
Cluster identifier

balancing
Option
Definition
Cluster identifier
not conflict.

balancing

appliance
appliances.
546
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Cluster Management (Cluster Failover)

Option
Definition

balancing
appliance.
Cluster identifier
not conflict.
Enable scanning on this If not selected, this appliance distributes all scanning workload to the scanning
appliance
appliances.
with both configured to scan traffic, the master will send most connections to the
failover appliance for scanning.
Option
Definition

balancing
appliance.
Cluster identifier
the same subnet, assign each a different Cluster identifier to ensure the clusters
do not conflict.
DNS and Routing page (Encryption Only Setup)


Option
Definition
Server Address
New Server /
Delete Selected
Servers
Only send
queries to these
servers
Product Guide
547

Setup Wizard
Routing Settings
Option
Definition
Network Address
Mask
Gateway
Metric
New Route /
Delete Selected
Routes
Add a new route to the table, or remove routes. Use the arrows to move routes up
Enable dynamic
routing
Email Configuration page (Encryption Only Setup)

Define how the appliance will relay email and configure the hosts that the appliance will use to route
email.
Domains for which the appliance will accept or refuse email

After you complete the Setup Wizard, you can manage the domains from Email | Email Configuration |
Receiving Email .
Option
Definition
Domain
Name /
Network
Address / MX
Record
Type
Network Address for example, 192.168.0.2/32 or 192.168.0.0/24. The appliance uses
this to compare the recipient's IP literal email address such as user@[192.168.0.2], or
the connection.
MX Record Lookup for example, example.dom. The appliance uses this to compare the
548
Product Guide

Setup Wizard
Option
Definition
Category
Entered domains are one of the following:

Local domain
Permitted domain
Denied domain
to be relayed.
Add Domain
delivery. For convenience, you can import a list of your local domain names using the
Import Lists and Export Lists options. McAfee recommends that you add all domains or
networks that are allowed to relay messages as local domains.
to be relayed.
Click to specify a domain that the appliance will use to identify all mail server IP
addresses from which it will deliver messages.
Add MX
Lookup
Delete
Selected Items is completely removed from the appliance configuration.
Domain Routing
After you complete the Setup Wizard, you can manage the domains from Email | Email Configuration |
Sending Email .
Option
Definition
Domain
Type
Network Address for example, 192.168.0.2/32 or 192.168.0.0/24. The appliance
uses this to compare the recipient's IP literal email address such as
MX record lookup for example, example.dom. The appliance uses this to compare the
Relay List/MX
Record
Displays either the Relay List of the MX record for the selected domain.
Product Guide
549

Setup Wizard
Option
Definition
Add Relay List
Click to populate the Known domains and relay hosts table with a list of host
names, or IP addresses for delivery. Delivery will be attempted in the order specified
unless you select the Round-robin the above hosts option which will distribute the
load between the specified hosts.
Add MX Lookup
Click to populate the Known domains and relay hosts table with an MX record
lookup to determine the IP addresses for delivery.
Delete Selected
Items
is completely removed from the appliance configuration.
Enable DNS
lookup for
domains not
listed above.
If selected, the appliance uses DNS to route email for other, unspecified domains.
DNS delivery attempts an MX-record lookup. If there are no MX records, it does an
A-record lookup.
If you deselect this checkbox, the appliance delivers email only to the domains that are
specified under Known domains and relay hosts.
Time Settings page (Encryption Only Setup)

Set the time and date, and any details for the use of the Network Time Protocol (NTP).
Option
Definition
Appliance Time
Zone
Appliance Time
(UTC)
Set Now
Client Time
Synchronize
appliance with
client
on the client's browser. When selected, the time in the Appliance Time (UTC)
immediately takes its value from Client Time . You can use this checkbox as an
alternative to manual setting of Appliance Time (UTC). The appliance calculates the UTC
time based on the time zone that it finds on the client's browser.
Enable NTP
550

performance.
Product Guide

Setup Wizard

Option
Definition
Enable NTP client

broadcasts
NTP Server
New Server
Password page (Encryption Only Setup)

Specify a password for the appliance.
Option
Definition
User ID
Current Password
The existing password. The original default password is password. Change

the password as soon as possible to keep your appliance secure.
New Password / Confirm New

Password
Specifies the new password.

You must enter the new password twice to confirm it.
Summary page (Encryption Only Setup)

the email traffic.
192.168.200.10:10443.
the Password page.
Option Definition
before continuing.
Product Guide
551

Setup Wizard
552
Product Guide
This topic provides an overview of the features within the McAfee Email Gateway that assist you in
troubleshooting the appliance.
Troubleshoot
Figure 6-1 Troubleshoot
If you are experiencing problems, read the troubleshooting section, which answers some frequently
asked questions. The appliance includes many diagnostic tools for identifying problems.
The Resources link at the top of the window provides links to the following information:
Contacting support.
Submitting a sample.
The Virus Information Library.
Additional resources, including links to a list of McAfee addresses and to the SNMP MIB definitions.
Contents
Troubleshooting Tools
Troubleshooting Reports
Tests
Use these topics to learn about the troubleshooting tools included within the appliance.
Troubleshoot | Tools
Product Guide
553

Contents
Ping and Trace Route
Generate Test Email
System Load
Route Information
Disk Space
Hardware Status
FIPS Status
ATD
Ping and Trace Route

Use this page to test whether the appliance can reach other devices over the network.
Troubleshoot | Tools | Ping and Trace Route

If a response comes back, that device can be reached. If the request times-out, that device cannot be
reached. This test rules out physical problems with the network connection and ensures that other
devices are switched on.
Option
Definition
Target IP and Domain Name Specifies the target device or domain.

Ping count
Specifies the number of times to send the request.
Use IPv6 protocol
When selected, uses IPv6 protocol. When not selected, uses IPv4 protocol.
Ping Target
When clicked, sends the request and provides information about the packets.
Trace Route
When clicked, sends the request and provides information about route taken.
Generate Test Email

Use this page to generate a test email message.
Troubleshoot | Tools | Generate Test Email

Option
Definition
Recipient address Type the name of the mailbox that you want to receive the test notification message.
554
Subject
Type the subject line that you want to appear in the test notification message.
Generate
Click to send the test notification message to the mailbox you specified.
Product Guide

System Load
Use this page to display information about the processors state.
Troubleshoot | Tools | System Load

The display is updated every few seconds. The information is similar to that from the Linux top
command.
Option
Definition
Pause
When clicked, stops the information being updated, Click Resume to return to normal
updating.
Uptime Info
Displays how long the system has been running.
Load Averages
Displays the load averages, which are the average number of processes that are
ready to run during the last 1, 5 and 15 minutes.
CPU
Displays the percentage of CPU time in user mode, system mode, and idle. (Niced
tasks are only those whose nice value is positive.) Time spent in niced tasks is
included in system and user time, so the total will be more than 100%.
Processes
Displays the total number of processes running at the time of the last update, and
shows the components of the total as processes that are running, sleeping, stopped,
or undead (zombie).
Memory
Displays statistics on memory usage, including total available memory, free memory,
used memory, shared memory, and memory used for buffers.
Swap
Displays statistics on swap space, including total swap space, available swap space,
and used swap space.
Command - State Displays information about each process.
Route Information
Use this page to see information about routes used to access certain networks and hosts.
Troubleshoot | Tools | Route Information

Use this page to see information about:
Routes used to access certain networks.
Routes used to access hosts that have recently received IP packets from the appliance. This host
information is stored in the appliances local cache.
The information might take a few minutes to display. The information is similar to that from the Linux
route command.
Option
Definition
Display Routing
Cache
When selected, can provide address information that the appliance derives from
conversations with other devices. Click Refresh to see the information.
Use Numeric
Addresses
When selected, can provide IP addresses instead of domain names in the Source,
Destination and Gateway columns. Click Refresh to see the information.
Product Guide
555


Option
Definition
Refresh
When clicked, provides the information requested by the settings of Display Routing
Cache and Use Numeric Addresses.
Destination
Displays the network where IP packets are sent for this route. A destination of
0.0.0.0 means that the default route, specified by the Setup Wizard, is used.
Gateway or Next
Hop
Displays IP address of the router used as the next hop out of the network. The
address 0.0.0.0 means that route has no default gateway.
Genmask
Displays network mask that determines whether an IP address is the address of a

network or of a specific host.
Flags
Displays information about the route, for example:

A route has been rejected, probably in preference for an alternative route. (!)
Installed by addrconf. (A or addrconf)
An entry in the appliances cache. (C)
A dynamically installed route. (D)
The destination is a gateway or network (excluding the appliances internal
network). (G or Gateway)
The destination is a host. (H)
The route uses the loopback interface. (I or internal)
The destination is an address of this appliance. (L or local)
A dynamically modified route. (M)
The route was reinstated by dynamic routing. (R)
The route is available and operational. (U or Up)
Metric
Displays the preference given to the route. A low number indicates a high preference
for that route.
Ref
Displays the number of references to this route, and is usually 0.
Use
Displays the number of times that the appliance recently selected the route.
Interface
Displays the port where the IP packets are sent.

lo loopback interface.
ibr0 network interface when in Transparent Bridge mode.
eth0 equivalent to LAN1.
eth1 equivalent to LAN2.
Disk Space
Use this page to see how disk space is being used.
Troubleshoot | Tools | Disk Space
556
Product Guide


Option
Definition
Mounted on
Displays the name of each directory. Click a name to open another window, then
click the arrows next to more names to see the size of the subdirectories.
Size to Percentage used Displays information about each main directory. Percentages are rounded to the
nearest whole number.
Hardware Status
Use this page to find out more about hardware-related issues (or potential issues) highlighted on the
Hardware Summary portlet on the Dashboard.
Troubleshoot | Tools | Hardware Status

The content of this page varies with the hardware upon which you are running McAfee Email Gateway.
If you are running a virtual instance of the software, there will be no information displayed within this
page. The information displayed for the appliance hardware platforms that include hardware monitoring
will differ from the information displayed for a McAfee Email Gateway blade server.
The data used to provide hardware information on this page is refreshed every 10 minutes. However,
it can take some time for the hardware to report its hardware status to the user interface. To be sure
that the latest information is being displayed within this page, reload the page if it has been displayed
for some time.
Option
Definition
Temperature
Displays the temperature at various points within your hardware.
Voltage
Lists the measured voltages at key points within the hardware.
Cooling
Provides the status and current fan speed for the components in the cooling system
within the hardware.
Power Supplies Displays information about the power supplies within the hardware.
Other Modules
Provides information on other modules included within your hardware. These can
include intrusion detection information, as well as information about memory usage
within the hardware.
Hard Disks
For appliances and blade servers that include RAID systems, and depending on the type
of the RAID controller and the hard disk drives, the status of each logical volume, as
well as the status, serial number and location of each hard disk drive might reported.
FIPS Status
Find out about FIPS 140-2 compliance issues highlighted on the System Summary portlet on the Dashboard.
Troubleshoot | Tools | FIPS Status

The FIPS standards govern which encryption algorithms are approved for the purposes of secure
communications. If the appliance is configured to use algorithms not approved by the FIPS standards,
this page shows warnings. Other warnings relating to concerns about your high-security installation
such as shell access to the appliance being enabled are also displayed.
Product Guide
557

In addition to compliance warnings, any compliance failures relating to security-critical software

libraries are also displayed. You should contact your McAfee Technical Representative for assistance in
resolving these issues.
ATD
When instructed to do so by your McAfee Support representative, use the controls on this page to
clear the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense cache on your McAfee Email Gateway appliance.
Option
Definition
Refresh
Ensure that the interface is displaying the up-to-date information about the status of the
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense cache.
Clear cache Remove all cached information relating to your McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers.
Clearing the contents of the McAfee Advanced Threat Defense cache can lead to duplicate
scans being triggered.
The ATD cache on Email Gateway includes details about the ATD server name and the job
ID. If you clear the ATD cache, MEG no longer has the information needed to download the
ATD report.
Use these topics to learn about the troubleshooting reports included within the appliance.
Troubleshoot | Reports
Contents
Minimum Escalation Report
Capture Network Traffic
Save Email Queues
Save Log Files
Error Reporting Tool
Minimum Escalation Report

If requested by McAfee Support, use this page to create a minimum escalation report to help them
diagnose a problem with your appliance.
Troubleshoot | Reports | Minimum Escalation Report

The report provides the minimum information they need. You might be asked to provide further
information later.
The report goes to a .zip file and can take a few minutes to produce. The file size is several
megabytes.
558
Product Guide


Option
Definition
Include TLS certificates and

private keys in the configuration
backup
When selected, includes certificates and keys in the Minimum Escalation Report.
Include Email Hybrid

configuration in the backup
When selected, includes the Email Hybrid configuration in the Minimum

Escalation Report.
The TLS Certificates and private keys are not encrypted when stored in
the Minimum Escalation Report.
The Email Hybrid private key is not encrypted when stored in the Minimum
Escalation Report.
Run network tests
When selected, runs the network tests and includes the results in the
Minimum Escalation Report.
Collect appliance logs
When selected, includes the appliance logs within the Minimum Escalation
Report.
Collect system logs
When selected, includes the system logs within the Minimum Escalation Report.
Collect SMTP dump files
When selected, includes any SMTP dump files in the Minimum Escalation
Report.
Collect reporting database
When selected, includes the reporting database in the Minimum Escalation

Report.
Collect MTA database
When selected, includes the Mail Transfer Agent database in the Minimum
Escalation Report.
Collect SMTP conversation logs
When selected, includes the logs for the SMTP conversations in the
Minimum Escalation Report.
Do not include the user

credentials
When selected, ensures that any credentials are not included within the
Minimum Escalation Report. This setting is enabled by default.
Generate report
When clicked, collects the specified items into a .zip file.

While data is collected, a new window shows the progress of the
collection. To hide the window, click Close. To reopen the window, click
Display Current Progress.
Save the report
When clicked, allows you to view the information as several .html files on
the appliance, or save the information as a .zip file.
The file name includes the date and time.
Delete the report
When clicked, removes the report from the appliance.
Capture Network Traffic

Use this page to capture the TCP traffic coming in and out of the appliance for later analysis.
Troubleshoot | Reports | Capture Network Traffic

This tool will not work correctly if the appliance is running in transparent router mode or transparent
bridge mode.
The output file is gzip-compressed tcpdump capture file. You can analyze the output with a tool such
as Wireshark or WinDump.
Product Guide
559


Option
Definition
Everything
When selected, collects information about TCP packets in all protocols.
Selected Protocols
When selected, collects only information about TCP packets that are from or to a
port corresponding to the selected protocols.
The file can become large, therefore do not collect from more protocols than you
need.
Duration of capture
Specifies how long to run the capture.

Default value is 30 minutes.
Maximum size of
output file
Specifies a limit to the size of the report.
Generate report
When clicked, begins capturing information about network traffic. While data is
collected, a new window shows the progress. To hide the window, click Close. To
reopen the window, click Display Current Progress.
Default value is 50 MB.
The capture stops when one of the following events occurs:

The duration ends.
The maximum file size is exceeded.
You click Stop Capture in the Network capture progress window.
The disk on the appliance is nearly full.
Save the report
When clicked, allows you to view the information as a several files on the
appliance, or save the information as a zipped tar file.
Delete the report
Save Email Queues

Use this page to specify email queues to save offline, to assist troubleshooting by McAfee Support.
Troubleshoot | Reports | Save Email Queues

Only use this page to save copies of the email messages held within your email queues when requested
to do so by your McAfee Support representative.
The items are saved to a .ZIP file, which can take a few minutes to produce. To view the lists of email
queues on the appliance, select Reports | Message search on the navigation bar.
560
Product Guide


Option
Definition
Quarantine viruses to
MQM deferred
When selected, specifies the items to include in the report.
Generate report
When clicked, collects the specified items into a .ZIP file.
If you select Quarantine viruses, Quarantine queue or MQM deferred, the report may
contain infected files.
While data is collected, the status window shows the progress.
Depending on the number and size of the email messages within the email
queues, this file may be very large.
Save the report
When clicked, allows you to save the report containing the email messages
within the select email queues to your local computer.
Delete the report
Save Log Files

Use this page to save the log files for later analysis or to view them within the user interface.
Troubleshoot | Reports | Log File Tools

You might want to regularly save your log files, because the appliance automatically removes log
entries after some time, or when the log files are nearly full. You can also use this page to view logs
currently stored on your appliance.
Option definitions Save Log Files

Option
Definition
Date ranges
Select the date ranges that you are interesting in saving.

You can either select All Dates, or you can specify a Date Range using the controls
provided.
Limit total size of

log file to
Specifies the maximum size of the file when backing up the logs.
Default value is 30MB.
The output file is a collection of compressed files, containing information about
system activity, performance history, web server activity, and version numbers. For
more information about performance history, specify a large file size.
Backup Logs
When clicked, collects all the appliances log settings into a file, and allows you to
download the file.
You can safely store configuration details about the appliance offline, and restore
that information later if the original appliance fails. The system configuration files
are saved to a ZIP file.
Save the logs
When clicked, allows you to download the logs.

The link is active only after the log files have been generated.
Product Guide
561

Option definitions System Log Viewer

Option
Definition
Log file to view
From the drop-down list, select the log file that you want to view.
System log - this shows the contents of the system log stored at /var/log/
messages.
Mail log - with on-box syslog enabled, this shows the contents of mail log stored
at /var/log/mail. With off-box syslog enabled, this log is empty.
UI error log - this shows the log file of the web server that is hosting the
appliance user interface.
Number of lines to retrieve Select the number of lines to display at a time.

Update view as the logs
change
When selected, the displayed logs are updated as new entries are recorded by
the appliance.
Get Logs
Click to display the selected logging information using the selected options.
Stop Getting Logs
Click to stop displaying the log files. The current screen is retained, but no
further updates are shown until you select a further action.
Configure off-box system

logs and system log
archive
Click this link to move to the System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP | System Log Settings
page, where you can configure your system logging options.
Error Reporting Tool

Use this page to create a report to help McAfee Technical Support diagnose any problems with your
appliance.
Troubleshoot | Reports | Log File Tools

McAfee Technical Support might ask for this report in addition to the Minimum Escalation Report. The
report goes to a ZIP file and can take a few minutes to produce. The file size is several megabytes.
McAfee recommend that you select Enable error monitor.
Option
Definition
Enable error monitor
This allows the appliance to capture information about any errors it

encounters.
Add content data
When the appliance encounters an error, selecting Add content data will allow
the appliance to store information about the data that was being handled
by the appliance at the time of the error.
This can greatly assist McAfee in diagnosing the problem.
562
Auto-submit error events
Allows the appliance to automatically submit information about error

events to McAfee.
Event lifetime
The number of days that the appliance will store events for, if an error is
detected.
Submit selected events to

McAfee
Use this to send error reports to McAfee for further analysis.
Delete selected events
Use this to remove events that are no longer needed.
Product Guide

Tests
Tests
Use these topics to learn about the troubleshooting tests that you can carry out from the appliance.
Troubleshoot | Tests
Option definitions System Tests

Test that the appliance is correctly connected to other devices, such as servers that provide DNS
services and the McAfee update servers.
Troubleshoot | Tests | System Tests

The list of tests that you see depends on the features that you have enabled in the appliance.
Option
Definition
Start Tests
Starts the tests. They can take several minutes to complete.

The results appear in place of this symbol.
Indicates that the test was successful.
Indicates that the test failed. Click the Details link for more information.
Indicates that a test is still running.
Stop Tests
Stops the tests. Any test that has already started runs to completion.
Gateway tests
Ping the gateway. States whether the gateway can be pinged for every static route.
Ping by itself is not a reliable test of connections, because some devices might be
configured to ignore ping requests. However, even if the ping test fails, the
gateway must always appear in the ARP routing table.
Look for the gateway in the ARP table. States whether the gateway is listed in the ARP
routing table.
DNS servers tests
Ping the DNS server. States whether the appliance can contact the DNS servers.
Query the DNS server for the external address www.mcafee.com. States whether each DNS
server can resolve the address www.mcafee.com into the correct set of IP
addresses.
NTP servers test(s)
Time Synchronization status with server <servername>. Displays the status of each NTP server
that you have configured.
Off-box syslog servers Ping UDP syslog server <servername>. Checks that the UDP syslog server is responding.
tests
Check connectivity to TCP syslog server <servername>Check for connectivity to the TCP
syslog server.
MQM server test
Check if the MQM server is available. Sends a health check request to the McAfee
Quarantine Manager (MQM) server.
Appliance name and

domain tests
Query the appliance domain name and Query the appliance address. States whether each DNS
server can find the appliance, given its domain address and its fully qualified
domain name.
Product Guide
563

Tests
Option
Definition

Intelligence File
Reputation Servers
test
Check for McAfee GTI file reputation connectivity. Confirms that the servers can be accessed
using a test sample.

Intelligence Feedback
Server test
Query the McAfee GTI feedback server. States whether the appliance can contact the
McAfee GTI feedback server.
Sender Authentication Query the McAfee GTI message reputation lookup server. States whether the appliance can
Servers tests
contact the server.
Query the RBL server/Test the RBL server. If you have defined an RBL server, the appliance
checks that:
A name server record exists for the RBL domain name.
An A (address) record for 2.0.0.127@RBL_DOMAIN exists.
Most RBL servers use the address 127.0.0.2 for testing.
The appliance performs a static query against the servers and tests the
connection.
LDAP Servers test
Check for connectivity to LDAP server. States whether the appliance can connect to the
LDAP server.
McAfee SaaS Email

Protection Service
tests
Connect to the web service. Verifies that the appliance can connect to the McAfee SaaS
web service.
Component Updates
tests
Talk to the AV update ftp server. Checks that the ftp anti-virus update site can be
accessed.
Connect to the anti-spam cloud lookup service. Verifies that the appliance can connect to
the McAfee anti-spam cloud service.
Talk to the AV update http server. Checks that the anti-virus update http site can be
accessed.
Talk to the Commtouch Command update server. Checks that the Commtouch Command
update site can be accessed.
Talk to the SPAM update server. Checks that the anti-spam update sites can be accessed.
(Only available when email is scanned.)
ePO tests
Updater running. Checks that the updater has started.

Updater listening to ePO. Checks that the appliance is listening to the McAfee ePO
server.
Initiating communication to ePO. Checks that the appliance can send data to the McAfee
ePO server.
Sending events to ePO. Checks that the number of McAfee ePO events waiting to be
sent to the McAfee ePO server does not exceed a predefined threshold.
SNMPD client tests
Snmpd client running. Checks that the snmpd process is running.

Snmpd listening for snmp requests. Checks that snmpd is listening for snmp requests.
564
Product Guide
Overview of Email Gateway appliances

and ePolicy Orchestrator Integration
This topic provides an overview of the integration of McAfee Email Gateway appliances with McAfee
Contents
How appliances work with ePolicy Orchestrator
Differences in Email Gateway appliance administration under ePolicy Orchestrator
Configuring your appliance for ePolicy Orchestrator management
Managing your appliances from within ePolicy Orchestrator
Orchestrator
Policy comparisons in ePolicy Orchestrator 5.1
How appliances work with ePolicy Orchestrator

This topic give a top-level overview of how you can integrate your McAfee Email Gateway appliance
with your McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator server.
With this release, you can monitor the status of your appliances and also directly manage your
appliances from within ePolicy Orchestrator, without needing to launch the interface for each
appliance.
Within ePolicy Orchestrator, the user interface pages that you use to configure and manage your
McAfee Email Gateway appliances have a familiar look-and-feel to the pages that you find within the
appliances.
When you enable ePolicy Orchestrator management on McAfee Email Gateway appliances, the McAfee
Agent that is pre-packaged as part of each appliance is given the configuration information server
name, IP address, passwords to access the ePolicy Orchestrator update repositories, and the public
keys needed to gain access for your ePolicy Orchestrator server.
The agent then starts communication between your appliance and the ePolicy Orchestrator server.
You can download the ePolicy Orchestrator extensions from the Resources link within the McAfee Email
Gateway appliances user interface. This zip file contains two ePolicy Orchestrator extensions:
the EWG 2.x extension that provides the monitoring and reporting capabilities for Email and Web
Security Appliances versions 5.5 and 5.6, McAfee Web Gateway and McAfee Email Gateway
products,
The MEG 7.6.2 extension that provides the method to push policy configuration from the ePolicy
Orchestrator server to your McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.2 appliances and blade servers.
Product Guide
565

In addition, you can also download the help extensions for each of these ePolicy Orchestrator
extensions. These are also available from the Resources link within the McAfee Email Gateway
appliances user interface.
Working from within ePolicy Orchestrator, you can push configurations to all your 'ePolicy
Orchestrator-enabled" appliances using the standard ePolicy Orchestrator workflow and features.
Further information about configuring your appliance for ePolicy Orchestrator management can be
found within the Setup Wizard | ePO Managed Setup help page.
Differences in Email Gateway appliance administration under

ePolicy Orchestrator
This information describes differences in the Email Gateway appliance software when it is run from
McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator.
Introduction
When McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator manages Email Gateway appliance, there are some noticeable
differences in the available features, and their behavior:
Data that is generated from "live" information for an Email Gateway appliance is not available in
Some Email Gateway appliance features and options have different menu paths under ePolicy
Orchestrator.
The following tables provide a breakdown of the Email Gateway appliance 5.6 features that are not
part of ePolicy Orchestrator management, or located in a different place in the interface.
The menu paths are those used in Email Gateway appliance. The Troubleshooting tab available in Email
Gateway appliance does not appear in ePolicy Orchestrator.
Table 7-1
Report information
Menu path
Description
Dashboard
Dashboard information is based on live information, and is not

available from ePolicy Orchestrator.
Reports | Scheduled
Reports
The Favorite report, and the Email Now, and Download reporting actions are
based on live information from the appliances, and are not available in
Reports | Email Reports
Live reporting information is based on live information, and is not

Reports | System Reports

Table 7-2 Email tab
566
Menu path
Description
Email | Message Search

Email | Email Overview

Product Guide

Table 7-2 Email tab (continued)

Menu path
Description
Email | Email Configuration |

Protocol Configuration |
Transport Layer Security
(SMTP)
The Transport Layer Security (SMTP) tab is available from the

Certificate Management category in ePolicy Orchestrator.

Protocol Configuration |
Receiving Email | Permit and
Deny Lists
The Blocked connections list is based on live information, and is

not available in ePolicy Orchestrator.

Virtual Host Configuration
Virtual hosts cannot be configured for Email and Web Security

Appliance in ePolicy Orchestrator.
You can configure virtual hosts in parallel with ePolicy
Orchestrator management of the physical host settings. Virtual
host configuration inherits from the physical host unless
overridden in the appliance user interface on a per virtual host
basis.

Network groups cannot be added to Protocol Presets in ePolicy

Orchestrator.
and
Connection and Protocol
Settings (POP3)
Email | Email Policies |
Scanning Policies: Spam
Settings - User Submitted
Blacklists and Whitelists
User blacklists and whitelists contain live information, and are not
shown in ePolicy Orchestrator.

Scanning Policies: Spam
Settings - Rules
Spam rules are based on live information and are not shown in
ePolicy Orchestrator. However, you can manually exclude
individual rules by name from ePolicy Orchestrator.

Scanning Policies | Virtual
Host Configuration
Virtual hosts cannot be configured for Email and Web Security

Appliance in ePolicy Orchestrator.

Dictionaries

basis.
In ePolicy Orchestrator, compliance dictionaries are located in
Gateway Protection | EWS 5.6 DLP and Compliance |
Dictionaries.
All Email and Web Security Appliances managed by ePolicy
Orchestrator share the same set of dictionaries, and dictionaries
are shared across all ePolicy Orchestrator policies.

In ePolicy Orchestrator, documents registered for data loss

prevention are uploaded and trained in Gateway Protection |
EWS 5.6 DLP and Compliance | Registered Documents.
Product Guide
567

Table 7-2 Email tab (continued)

Menu path
Description
Email | Quarantine
Configuration | Quarantine
Options
When using McAfee Quarantine Manager, the Appliance ID is

specific to an individual Email and Web Security Appliance, and
not managed by ePolicy Orchestrator.
Email |Quarantine
Configuration | Quarantine
Digest Options
To enable quarantine digest messages in ePolicy Orchestrator, go

to Sending Email | Quarantine digest messages in the Email
Configuration policy category.
The Message Preview and Send options relate to messages in
Email and Web Security Appliances, and cannot be performed in
Table 7-3 System tab

Menu path
Description
System | Appliance
Management | General
This tab contains information that is appliance-specific, and is not

available in ePolicy Orchestrator.
System | Appliance
Management | Time and Date
Setting the Appliance Time is a dynamic action, and cannot be

set in ePolicy Orchestrator.
System | Appliance
Management | Remote Access
The Out of band management option needs appliance-specific

information, and is not available in ePolicy Orchestrator.
System | Appliance
Management | UPS Settings
This setting is appliance-specific, and is not available in ePolicy

Orchestrator.
System | Appliance
Management | Database
Maintenance
Setting the Reporting Password in the External Access

section is a dynamic action, and cannot be set through ePolicy
Orchestrator.
Manually resetting and maintaining the database in
Maintenance cannot be performed from ePolicy Orchestrator.
The ePolicy Orchestrator interface allows the database Retention
Limits to be left blank. When no data is entered, the appliance
hardware specific defaults are used. These are empty by default
in ePolicy Orchestrator.
568
System | Appliance
Management | System
Administration
This tab contains actions that are appliance-specific, and is not

System | Appliance
Management | Default Server
Settings
Obtaining the appliance's public key in the Remote Backup

section cannot be done through ePolicy Orchestrator.
System | Cluster Management
Cluster management is based on appliance-specific information,

and cannot be set up in ePolicy Orchestrator.
System | Users, Groups and

Services | Directory Services
Authentication services cannot be set up in ePolicy Orchestrator.

Services | Web User
Authentication
Authentication services cannot be set up in ePolicy Orchestrator.
Product Guide

Configuring your appliance for ePolicy Orchestrator management
Table 7-3 System tab (continued)

Menu path
Description

Services | Policy Groups
Configure Network Groups in the Policy Groups area of the

Email Policies or Web Policies category in ePolicy
Orchestrator.
Configure Email Senders and Recipients in the Policy Groups
area of the Email Policies category in ePolicy Orchestrator.
Configure Web Users and URL Groups in the Policy Groups
area of the Web Policies category in ePolicy Orchestrator.

Services | Role-Based User
Accounts
Role-based user accounts contain appliance-specific information,

and cannot be set up in ePolicy Orchestrator.
System | Virtual Hosting
You can set and apply physical host configuration in ePolicy

Orchestrator. However, virtual hosts cannot be configured for
Email and Web Security Appliance in ePolicy Orchestrator.
basis.
System | Certificate
Management | Certificates |
CA Certificates

Orchestrator share the same lists of certificates.

Orchestrator share the same lists of certificates.
Appliance HTTPS Certificate
Importing, exporting, and generating certificate signing request

for an Email and Web Security Appliance HTTPS certificate is not
Management | Certificate
Revocation Lists (CRLs) |
Installed CRLs
Certificate Revocation lists relate to actual appliances, and cannot

be set up in ePolicy Orchestrator.
Management | Certificate
Revocation Lists (CRLs) | CRL
updates
Configuring specific HTTP proxy settings for CRL updates is not

available in ePolicy Orchestrator. The default proxy settings are
managed in ePolicy Orchestrator.
System | Component
Management
These settings are appliance-specific, and cannot be managed

from ePolicy Orchestrator.
These settings are appliance-specific, and cannot be performed

from ePolicy Orchestrator.
Manually updating the CRL list cannot be performed from ePolicy

Orchestrator.
Configuring your appliance for ePolicy Orchestrator

management
To enable your appliance to be managed by your McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator software, you need to
configure your appliance to accept management by ePolicy Orchestrator, and you also need to import
Product Guide
569

the ePolicy Orchestrator extensions to your ePolicy Orchestrator software, and import your ePolicy
Orchestrator configuration to your Email and Web security appliance.
To configure your Email Gateway appliance to allow it to be managed by ePolicy Orchestrator, you
need to import the configuration details from your ePolicy Orchestrator software.
In addition, you also need to install the Email Gateway extension available from the Resources link
within the Email Gateway appliances user interface onto your ePolicy Orchestrator software.
To assist you with setting up your Email Gateway appliances for ePolicy Orchestrator management, the
Setup Wizard within Email Gateway appliances (System | Setup Wizard) includes a set of pages aimed
specifically at configuring your appliance to be managed by ePolicy Orchestrator.
If you have both your McAfee Email Gateway and your McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator software
configured to use a language other than English, when you register your McAfee Email Gateway within
McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator, the default locale for the Secure Web Mail Client and the default
language for all notifications will return to English. You must re-configure these to your required
language.
Removing the ePolicy Orchestrator extension

The standard ePolicy Orchestrator workflow allows the removal of the ePolicy Orchestrator extensions.
This topic discusses important notes about the effects of doing so.
From within the ePolicy Orchestrator user interface, navigate to Menu | Software | Extensions to remove
extension.
If you remove the Email Gateway appliance extension from your ePolicy Orchestrator server, all data
relating to your Email Gateway appliances will be deleted.
To upgrade to a later version of the Email Gateway appliance extension, you should install the newer
extension without removing the existing extension. This preserves the Email Gateway appliances data
held within your ePolicy Orchestrator server.

Use this topic to give an overview of the process to manage your Email Gateway appliances from
within ePolicy Orchestrator.
When you have configured your McAfee Email Gateway appliances to be managed by McAfee ePolicy
Orchestrator, most configuration changes that you want to make to your appliances should be made
via your ePolicy Orchestrator server.
If you have enabled ePolicy Orchestrator management on your appliance, making configuration changes
from within the appliance' user interface will make the required changes, but these changes are likely to
be overwritten with the next configuration push from your ePolicy Orcestrator server.
Within ePolicy Orchestrator, the configuration pages for your appliances can be found by browsing to
Menu | Gateway Protection and then selecting either Email Gateway or DLP and Compliance.
Management of your Email Gateway appliances follows the standard ePolicy Orchestrator workflows.
Please refer to the McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator 4.5 Product Guide or McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator 4.6
Product Guidefor further information.
570
Product Guide

Task Upgrade from Email Gateway 7.6.2 or higher appliances managed by McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator
Task Upgrade from Email Gateway 7.6.2 or higher appliances

managed by McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator
McAfee ePO.
Before you begin
McAfee ePO.
Task
1

server.
Product Guide
571


McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator version 5.1 introduces a policy comparison feature, allowing you to easily
identify any changes between new and old versions of a policy.
Currently, McAfee Email Gateway policies cannot be compared using this policy comparison feature.
572
Product Guide
Overview of McAfee Quarantine Manager

Integration
This topic provides an overview of the integration of McAfee Email Gateway appliances with McAfee
Quarantine Manager.
Contents
About McAfee Quarantine Manager
How appliances work with McAfee Quarantine Manager
About McAfee Quarantine Manager
Understand the role of McAfee Quarantine Manager (MQM) in relation to your Email Gateway.
McAfee Quarantine Manager consolidates the quarantine and anti-spam management functionality of
multiple McAfee products, including Email Gateway. It provides a central point to analyze and act upon
emails and files that have been quarantined. These files can be quarantined because they have been
identified as containing spam, phish, viruses, potentially unwanted programs, or other undesirable
content. Integration with ePolicy Orchestrator provides centralized policy management and graphical
reporting.
While MQM is effective in managing unsolicited bulk email or Spam, no anti-spam filter can detect all
spam that flows through a network. Some emails are occasionally misidentified.
MQM allows administrators and users to continuously tune their anti-spam products according to the
changing environments and increase the effectiveness of their spam filtering.

Within the McAfee Email Gateway user interface, you can choose to use either the on-box quarantine
facilities available from within the McAfee Email Gateway, or to use an external, off-box quarantine
solution such as McAfee Quarantine Manager.
Before configuring McAfee Email Gateway to work with McAfee Quarantine Manager, ensure that you
follow the installation information and recommendations given in the McAfee Quarantine Manager
Product Guide for your version of McAfee Quarantine Manager. You should also open port 80 or 49500
in both directions on all firewalls between McAfee Email Gateway and McAfee Quarantine Manager.
Product Guide
573

When McAfee Email Gateway and McAfee Quarantine Manager have been configured to work together,
the McAfee Email Gateway sends all quarantined email messages to McAfee Quarantine Manager for
secure storage.
If, when quarantining large email messages, you get HTTP 413 errors, you need to increase the value of
the Microsoft Internet Information Service (IIS) UploadReadAheadSize metabase property on the
McAfee Quarantine Manager server. In this situation, McAfee recommends that you change the
UploadReadAheadSize property to equal 200000KB. See http://www.microsoft.com/technet/
prodtechnol/WindowsServer2003/Library/IIS/7e0d74d3-ca01-4d36-8ac7-6b2ca03fd383.mspx?mfr=true
for further details.
See also
Option definitions Quarantine Options page on page 402
The relationship between quarantine categories displayed in

Message Search and MQM
Use this information to understand the differences between the categories used by Message Search
within Email Gateway and McAfee Quarantine Manager.
The following table shows what you will see in the McAfee Quarantine Manager queue for each Email
Gateway category detection:
Table 8-1 The relationship between quarantine categories displayed in Message Search and
MQM
Message Search
Anti-Phish
Phish
Anti-Spam
Spam
Anti-Virus
Viruses
Anti-Virus (Packer)
Potentially Unwanted Programs | Packers
Anti-Virus (PUP)
Potentially Unwanted Programs | Potentially Unwanted Programs
Compliance
Unwanted Content | Banned Content
Corrupt Content
Data Leakage Prevention
Encrypted Content
Encryption Compliance
File Filtering
Mail Filtering
Mail Size
Signed Content
Others
Image Filtering
Unwanted Content | Image Analysis
Denial of Service
Custom quarantine queues in McAfee Quarantine Manager

You can review quarantine results for individual custom quarantine queues or for all custom queues as
a group.
Whenever an administrator creates a custom quarantine queue on a McAfee Email Gateway appliance,
that queue appears on McAfee Quarantine Manager. When you select Custom Queues on the McAfee
Quarantine Manager Dashboard, the search page appears. The View Results section shows all messages
574
Product Guide

currently in all custom quarantine queues. A secondary list appears beside Custom Queues. You can
refine your search to any of the individual queues by selecting it from the secondary list. The results
show only messages quarantined in the selected custom queue.
See also
Custom quarantine queues on page 406
Create a custom quarantine queue on page 407
Product Guide
575

576
Product Guide
Overview of Content Security Reporter

integration
McAfee Content Security Reporter (Content Security Reporter) is a reporting software solution that
integrates within ePolicy Orchestrator to help you understand Internet and email usage within your
organization. Content Security Reporter can be configured to accept McAfee Email Gateway Syslog
data as an input source.
Contents
About Content Security Reporter
Benefits of using Content Security Reporter
Configure McAfee Email Gateway to send log data
Task Configure Content Security Reporter to receive Email Gateway data
About Content Security Reporter

To identify and analyze network activity, Content Security Reporter allows you to collect and manage
the data from your integrated alert, authentication, email, and web devices.
Use the collected data to help identify these potential issues:
Bandwidth overload
Liability exposure
Productivity loss
Security threats
Once identified, you can use this information to modify your policies and effectively enhance network
protection.
How Content Security Reporter works

Content Security Reporter uses several elements that work together to provide reporting capabilities.
To successfully set up, use, and maintain Content Security Reporter, understand the role for each of
the following elements.
Product Guide
577

Figure 9-1 Content Security Reporter workflow
Number Description
1
Log source Collects alert, authentication, email, and web data.
Database Central data storage component.
Query Retrieves data from the database and defines how it is displayed.
Filter Limits the data set to specific user names, websites, and reputations.
5a
Dashboard Organizes your data in a customized view to provide detailed information

for analysis.
5b
Report Combines queries, filters, and other elements into PDF documents to provide
detailed information for analysis.
Further information
For further information about Content Security Reporter, see the latest version of the McAfee Content
Security Reporter Product Guide.

Using McAfee Email Gateway and Content Security Reporter allows you to use a single tool to monitor
and analyze information about your email traffic.
All your McAfee Email Gateway appliances can be configured to push their Syslog data to Content
Security Reporter, ensuring the reports from Content Security Reporter contain aggregated
information for all your email traffic.
578
Product Guide


McAfee Email Gateway includes settings to allow you to set up off-box system logging. Use this feature
to send your log files to Content Security Reporter
Before you begin
Before attempting this task, ensure that you have the host name or IP address and the
port number for your Content Security Reporter server.
Task
1
Navigate to System | Logging, Alerting and SNMP | System Log Settings.
Enable the system log events.
From Logging format, select Content Security Reporter.
From Log events to the syslog for the following event types, select the types of events to be sent to Content
Security Reporter.
If needed, expand the Off-box system log section.
Select Enable off-box system log.
Click Add Server.
Type the IP address or host name for your Content Security Reporter server.
If using IPv6 addresses, check Use IPv6 protocol.
Type the port number for your Content Security Reporter server.
10 Apply your changes.

The selected events are forwarded to the selected Content Security Reporter.
Task Configure Content Security Reporter to receive Email

Gateway data
Learn how to configure Content Security Reporter to accept data from McAfee Email Gateway.
To understand the process to configure Content Security Reporter to accept McAfee Email Gateway
Syslog files, see Configure a log source in the McAfee Content Security Reporter Product Guide.
Product Guide
579

Task Configure Content Security Reporter to receive Email Gateway data
580
Product Guide
Index
.csv
download 81
A
about McAfee Quarantine Manager 573
about MQM 573
about this guide 9
actions
primary 138
secondary 138
Active Directory 396
Add Login Services wizard 461
Add Policy 156
Add rule
options 159
adding anti-virus engine 511
additional anti-virus engine
benefits 511
address pool
in virtual hosting 466
administrator roles
create 455
benefits 181
configuring 190
including attachments 190
adware 172
Alert settings 296
alert tokens 479
alphabetically ordering lists 19
anti-phish policy 207
Anti-phish scanning
benefits of 225
Anti-Relay Settings 117
anti-spam
Advanced Options 211
anti-spam cloud lookup 211
anti-spam policy 207
anti-spam updates 512
anti-spyware
anti-virus settings 192
benefits 192
Anti-Spyware policy 192
anti-virus
customized settings 173
features 171
understanding policy for 172
Anti-Virus
Basic Options 174
Anti-virus DAT file
roll back 505
anti-virus engine
adding 511
Commtouch Command 511
enabling 511
anti-virus engine and database
updates 502
Anti-virus engines
disabling updates 505
Anti-Virus policy 171
anti-virus settings
anti-spyware 192
basic options 175
custom malware options 198
packers 195
anti-virus updates
using FTP 512, 513
using HTTP 511
appliance management 457
password settings 457
applying SPF checks to sub-policies 232
archive files
attachments 75
finding attachments 76
archived content
identifying 76
Artemis
see Global Threat Intelligence 175
attachment identification
archived content 76
attachments
archive files 75
finding messages containing 73
identifying 76
in archive files 76
Authentication
Passwords 460
Product Guide
581
Index
automatic configuration backup wizard 444

autonegotiation 412
B
backup configuration 434
backup server 431
basic options
Basic options
Anti-Virus 174
basic settings
secure web mail 351
Basic Settings
Custom Setup Wizard 521
Encryption Only Wizard 545
Restore from a File Setup Wizard 534
batv
benefits 125
behavior
documents and categories 335
benefits
Advanced Threat Defense 181
batv 125
blacklists and whitelists 214
bounce address tag validation 125
CAC 464
domain management 387
hybrid domain management 387
hybrid email scanning 384
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense 181
PGP 362, 379
PGP sending email 363, 380
Policy based actions 318
registering hybrid email scanning 384
scanning policies 146
Secure Web Mail 351
sending email 126
benefits of Configure Automatic Configuration Backups 444
Benefits of configuring McAfee Advanced Threat Defense
servers 475
benefits of data loss prevention 240
benefits of DLP 240
benefits of message search 61
benefits of policy exceptions 141
benefits of setting passwords
appliance management 457
benefits of using additional anti-virus engine 511
benefits of using hybrid email scanning 382
benefits, anti-spyware 192
blacklists and whitelists
benefits 214
blocked messages
retention limits 447
bounce address tag validation
benefits 125
582
bounced messages
branding
secure web mail 367
Bubbleboy 174
C
CAC
benefits 464
CAC Management 464
certificates
PGP Encryption Key 362, 379
s/MIME with encryption 378
S/MIME with encryption 360
changes
making to appliance operation 17
ClickProtect 277
benefits 277
configuring 281
option definitions 279
cloud anti-virus protection 175
cluster configuration
IPv6 auto-configuration 420
summary 544
virtual network address 413, 529
cluster management
network interfaces 440
Cluster Management
ePO Managed Setup 541
load balancing 438
push configuration 436
review configuration changes 17
Setup Wizard 522, 535
Cluster Mode
Setup Wizard 521, 534
Common Access Card
enable 464
Common Event Format
extended syslog attributes 494
Commtouch Command anti-virus engine 511
community threat intelligence 175
complex terms 346
compliance 251, 332
Compliance
benefits of 251
Graymail 344
scanning for 251
compliance dictionaries 337
Compliance policies 236
Compliance policy 236
Compliance Settings
Rule Creation Wizard 287
Rule Creation Wizard from template 288
component update
schedule 445, 500, 514
Product Guide
Index
component update (continued)

using FTP 512, 513
using HTTP 511
component update (spam)
using FTP 512
component updates
software package 506
conditions
configuration backup
automatic 444
configuration changes
external access to 448
reviewing 434
backup and restore 434
configuration push 436
configuration report 434
configure
dictionaries 337
directory services 390
group management 390
network groups 393
configure automatic configuration backups
wizard 444
configure McAfee Advanced Thread Defense appliances 476
configure Policy based actions 321
Configure System Log Archive wizard 500
configuring cluster management 438
configuring load balancing 438
configuring secure web mail 351, 353, 355, 356
content categories
create 332
Content handling policy 289
Content rules
Credit Card (Luhn10) 343
Credit card details 343
content security reporter
about 577
Content Security Reporter
Benefits 578
conventions and icons used in this guide 9
Creating notifications 144
Credit cards
Validating numbers
Algorithms 343
Credit Card (Luhn10) 343
critical thresholds
setting 37
custom malware options
anti-virus setting 198
Custom Malware Options policy 198
Custom notifications
Benefits 144
Creating 144
Custom notifications (continued)

Usage (scenarios) 144
customer questions 26
D
dashboard
threshold 56
Dashboard 35
DAT roll back 505
data loss prevention 332
benefits 240
exlude content 332
register documents 332
data loss prevention (DLP) 240
Data Loss Prevention policy 236
Database Maintenance 446
event options 447
schedule 448
working with retention limits 448
database size
setting retention limits 446
delivered messages
denial-of-service attacks
prevention from 242
Detecting
phish 225
detection
image filtering 255
signed or encrypted content 260
detections
external access to information 446
mail size filtering 242
dictionaries
adding to policies 251
configure compliance 337
editing scores and terms 251
import and export 337
Dictionary of spam term exclusions 223
Dictionary of spam terms 223
Directory harvest prevention 122
directory services
configure 390
Directory Services 390
Directory Synchronization 390
DLP
benefits 240
see data loss prevention 332
DLP (data loss prevention) 240
DLP and Compliance
DNS servers
options 418
setting up 417
Product Guide
583
Index
documentation
audience for this guide 9
product-specific, finding 10
typographical conventions and icons 9
documents
register for dlp 332
domain
adding local domain 117
domain management
benefits 387
download 20
dynamic routing 417
E
E-mail notifications
Creating 144
Custom 144
Edit rule
options 159
Editing spam scores 227
email 95
how messages are processed 95
reports 84
Email Administrator role 455
email configuration
overview 97
email detections
external access to 448
Email Gateway
working with 11
Email Gateway appliances integration 565, 573
email menu 95
Email notifications
Custom
benefits 144
Usage (scenarios) 144
email policies 134
compliance 251
email protection
domains 388
McAfee Email Protection (Hybrid) service 385
registering 385
email reports
benefits 84
email scanning
add domain 388
delete domain 389
edit domain 389
email scanning SaaS
Hybrid 387
enable CAC 464
enable Common Access Card 464
enabling anti-virus engine 511
encrypted content 260
584
encryption 348
available types 349
benefits of setting passwords 356
benefits of user accounts 353
PGP 362, 379
PGP Encryption Key 362, 379
S/MIME 360, 378
secure web mail 350
tls 364
Encryption
PGP 362, 379
Encryption Only
Setup Wizard 545
Encryption policy
benefits of 328
Encryption policy settings 328
ePO
integration with 565
management by 565
monitoring by 565
ePO Managed Setup 539
Cluster Management 541
ePO Managed Setup Wizard
cluster summary 544
ePO policy comparisons 572
ePolicy Orchestrator
Managing appliances from 570
setup 515
ePolicy Orchestrator extension
removing 570
ePolicy Orchestrator integration 565
ePolicy Orchestrator managed appliance
manual setup 507
ePolicy Orchestrator Management setup 540
event options 447
export
from a list 20
export anti-virus engine and database 502
extended syslog attributes for Common Event Format 494
extended syslog attributes for Splunk 489
External Access 448
Extra DAT update 502
F
factory default
password 459
factory default password
resetting to 459
FAQs 26
features
anti-virus 171
file filtering 237
File filtering policy 236
filter
messages based on size 242
Product Guide
Index
filtering
file 237
finding attachments
archive files 76
FIPS status 557
firewall
IP addresses for hybrid email 21
Frequently Asked Questions 26
FTP
adding proxy server 431
update server 512, 513
G
Generic LDAP Server v3 396
getting started 11
Global Threat Intelligence 175
Global Threat Intelligence feedback settings 328
graphic user interface 13
Graymail 344
Setup 344
Greylisting 122
group management 390
directory services 390
network groups 393
senders and recipients 394
groups
senders and recipients 394
GTI feedback, See Global threat Intelligence feedback settings
H
header modification 154
heuristic network checking 175
HotFix
install update 506
HTTP
adding proxy server 431
update server 511
hybrid actions 138
hybrid domain management
benefits 387
hybrid email scanning
benefits 384
registration process 384
hybrid scanning
benefits 382
Hybrid scanning
benefits 201
configure 206
hybrid scanning results 201
I
icons
message search 68
image filtering 255
Image filtering policy 236

import
to a list 20
import anti-virus engine and database 502
inbound address pool 466
adding 470
installation
installing ePolicy Orchestrator extensions 540
installation options
setup wizard 515
instant anti-virus update 175
integration with ePO 565
integration with McAfee Quarantine Manager 573
integration with MQM 573
integration with Quarantine Manager 573
intercept ports 21
interface
layout of 13
IP addresses for hybrid email 21
K
Kerberos 460
L
LDAP 122, 396
LDAP query
create sample 400
LDAP Synchronization 390
least used 438, 522, 535
listening ports 21
lists
changing information 19
making and viewing 18
ordering alphabetically 19
removing many items from 18
removing single items from 18
viewing long 19
load balancing
configuring 438
log files
save 561
view 561
logging
configure system log archive 500
Login Services 460
lookups
with anti-relay 117
Lotus Domino 396
M
mail size filtering policy 242
Mail size filtering policy 236
mail traffic
flow of 11
Product Guide
585
Index
manage internal rescue image 449

protected partition 449
rescue partition 449
Managed Setup
ePolicy Orchestrator 539
Managing appliances from ePolicy Orchestrator 570
maximum file size
scanner limits 289
maximum nesting depth
scanner limits 289
maximum scan time
scanner limits 289
McAfee Advanced Thread Defense appliances
configure 476
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense
benefits 181
Servers 475
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense servers
configuring 475
McAfee Anti-Spyware 192
McAfee ePO
status indicators 57
thresholds 57
McAfee Global Threat Intelligence (GTI) feedback settings 328
about 573
differences with Message Search 402, 574
McAfee Quarantine Manager (MQM) 401
McAfee Quarantine Manager integration 573
McAfee ServicePortal, accessing 10
Melissa 174
menu
Dashboard 35
email 95
reports 59
troubleshoot 553
message search 60
benefits 61
report 73
Message search
Complex search
Conducting 74
Complex searches 74
Message Search
virtual host name 466
Message Search differences with McAfee Quarantine Manager
402, 574
Message Search differences with MQM 402, 574
Message Search differences with Quarantine Manager 402, 574
message search icons 68
Message search results 65
Microsoft Exchange 396
MIME formats 303
586
modify
email headers 154
MQM 401
about 573
MQM integration 573
Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) 303
MX lookups
with anti-relay 117
N
Netscape/Sun iPlanet 396
network groups
configure 393
network interfaces
cluster management 440
network settings
basic 412
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
adding a server 419
NIC adapter settings 412
Notification and Routing settings 289
Novell NDS (eDirectory) 396
NTP 419
O
off-box
access to reporting database 448
off-box quarantine 401
on-box quarantine 401
online troubleshooting resource 26
operating modes
options 515
setting 412
operational language 412
option definitions
McAfee Anti-Spyware 192
Out of Band Management 420
outbound address pool 466
adding 470
overview
Email Gateway appliances integration 565, 573
ePolicy Orchestrator integration 565
McAfee Quarantine Manager integration 573
overview of email configuration 97
P
packers 173
Packers policy 195
password
factory default 459
session management 463
Product Guide
Index
Password
changing 16
password authentication 431
Password authentication 460
password management
complexity 457
setting policy 457
password management settings
appliance 457
secure web mail 356
password reset 459
hardware appliance 460
physical appliance 460
virtual appliance 459
patch software
install update 506
PGP
benefits of 362, 379
encryption 362, 379
Encryption 362, 379
PGP Encryption Key
encryption 362, 379
PGP sending email
benefits 363, 380
Phish
scanning for 225
physical host
with virtual hosting 466
policies
email 134
introduction to 135
POP3 134, 136
Secure Web Mail 137
signed or encrypted content 260
smtp 134
SMTP 135
with virtual hosts 470
policy
Anti-Spyware 192
Custom Malware Options 198
image filtering 255
mail size filtering 242
Packers 195
Policy based actions
benefits 318
configure 321
Policy exceptions 325
using policy exceptions 324
policy exceptions 141
benefits 141
understanding 141
Policy exceptions
Add 142
Add rule 143
Policy exceptions (continued)

change policy 143
configuring 142
Edit 144
Policy based actions 324, 325
POP3
policies 136
POP3 policies 134
pornographic image detection
see image filtering 255
ports 21
email hybrid 21
ePO 21
ePolicy Orchestrator 21
intercept 21
listening 21
transparent 21
Pretty Good Privacy 362, 379
primary action 138
problem solving 553
protocol presets 137
with anti-relay settings 117
proxy server
adding 431
public key authentication 431
PUPs 172
special actions 173
push configuration 436
Q
Quarantine
create queues 407
custom queues 406
Quarantine Manager
Quarantine Manager integration 573
quarantine options
off-box 401
on-box 401
quarantine queues
changing roles 408
deleting 408
multiple 406
options 407
role access 405
settings 405
quarantined items
questions often asked by customers 26
queues
quarantine 408
queues, quarantine 405
Product Guide
587
Index
R
RADIUS 460
re-write
subject 151
Recipient checks 122
with DLP 332
registering hybrid email scanning
benefits 384
registration process
hybrid email scanning 384
regular expressions 341
relay
preventing open relay 117
remote backup server 431
removing ePolicy Orchestrator extension 570
replacement tokens 479
report
message search 73
reporting database
external access to 446, 448
maintenance 448
reset 448
setting event items 446
reporting items
event option settings 447
reports 59
.csv 81
email reports 84
favorite reports 89, 93
scheduled 78
scheduled reports 77
system 91
troubleshooting 558
types of 59
Reports Administrator role 455
Reputation checks
notifications 234
rescue image 449
reset
password 459
resetting to factory default password 459
resolving connection issues
restore configuration 434
results
hybrid scanning 201
Results
Message search 65
review configuration changes 434
roles
create 455
588
roll back
Anti-virus DAT file 505
routing
dynamic and static 417
routing characters
permitted and denied 117
from template 288
S
S/MIME
encryption 360, 378
save log files 561
scanner limits
maximum file size 289
maximum nesting depth 289
maximum scan time 289
Scanning
for compliance 251
phish 225
scanning policies
benefits 146
schedule
reports 77
updates 445, 500, 514
schedule,
component updates 502
scheduled reports 78
search for quarantined messages 60
search for queued messages 60
search quarantine 60
search queues 60
secondary action 138
Secure Shell 420
secure web mail 350
basic settings 351
benefits of setting passwords 356
branding 367
password management settings 356
user account settings 353
user management 355
Secure Web Mail
benefits 351
policies 137
Sender authentication
Adding results to spam scores 232
message reputation 227
options 227
spam scores 227
Spam scores 234
SPF 234
sender authentication policy 207
senders and recipients
create groups 394
Product Guide
Index
sending email
benefits 126
server settings
system log archive 500
Server setup
McAfee Advanced Threat Defense 475
ServicePortal, finding product documentation 10
Session Management 463
setting critical thresholds 37
setting thresholds 56
Setting up ePolicy Orchestrator managed appliances 507
setting warning thresholds 37
settings
Alert 296
Encryption 328
setup options
custom and standard 515
encryption only 515
ePO 515
restore from a file 515
Setup Wizard
Basic Settings (Custom) 521
Basic Settings (Encryption Only) 545
Basic Settings (Restore from a File) 534
Cluster Management 522, 535
Cluster Mode 521, 534
description of options 515
Encryption Only 545
Graymail protection 344
installation options 515
shut down the appliance
with UPS 427
signed content 260
Signed or encrypted content policy 236
SMTP
policies 135
smtp policies 134
Spam rules
Configuring 221
edit spam score 221
editable 220
spam rules and engine updates 502
Spam score
Adding sender authentication results 233
editable 221
Spam scores
Editable
Adding sender authentication 235
Sender authentication results 232
editing 227
Policy exceptions 233
Spam term exclusions
dictionary 223
Spam terms
dictionary 223
special actions 173

SPF
apply to sub-policies 232
Splunk
extended syslog attributes 489
spyware 172
SSH 431
static routing 417
status
FIPS 557
sub-policies
applying SPF checks 232
subject re-write 151
substitution variables 479
summary
Dashboard 35
email 95
reports 59
troubleshoot 553
Super Administrator role 455
Support
system
reports 91
system commands 453
reboot appliance 453
revert to default settings 453
shutdown appliance 453
System Log Archive
configuring 500
system tests 563
T
Technical Support
technical support, finding product information 10
tests
troubleshooting 563
threats
blocking specific 174
thresholds
configurable 37
setting 56
setting critical 37
setting warning 37
Time and Date
setting 419
Time zone 419
Timeout
set time 463
tls 364
tokens
alert 479
replacement 479
Product Guide
589
Index
tools
troubleshooting 553
transparent ports 21
troubleshoot 553
reports
capture network traffic 559
mer 558
minimum escalation report 558
save email queues 560
tests
system tests 563
tools
disk space 556
ping 554
route information 555
system load 555
trace route 554
troubleshooting reports
log files 561
troubleshooting 553
troubleshooting reports 558
troubleshooting tests 563
troubleshooting tools 553
Troubleshooting Tree 26
Troubleshooting, using the online tree 26
URLs
decoding 284
encoding 284
parsing 283
regular expressions 273
simple patterns 273
URLs canonicalize
decode 275
encode 275
parse 275
user account settings
secure web mail 353
user accounts (encryption users)
benefits 353
user interface 13
User Interface Access Configuration 420
user management
secure web mail 355
User preferences 15
benefits 15
options 16
password 16
Setting opening page 16
User preferences configuring opening page 16
types
encryption 349
users
create roles 455
UTC
Universel Temps Coordinee 419
understanding policy exceptions 141

Update Status 502
updates
adding proxy server HTTP and FTP 431
schedule 445, 500, 514
using FTP 512, 513
using HTTP 511
upgrade
ePO 29, 509, 571
using rescue image 449
Upgrade
MEG 7.0 29, 509, 571
upload
documents for dlp 332
Validation algorithms
benefits 343
variables
alert 479
substitution 479
view log files 561
Virtual Host 466
adding 470
UPS Settings 427

URL format 272
URL reputation 175, 272
blacklists 272
ClickProtect 277
configuration 271
configure blacklists 275
configure whitelists 275
embedded URLs 269
whitelists 272
590
virtual networks 470

viruses
VBS/Bubbleboy@MM 174
W97M/Melissa@MM 174
W
warning thresholds
setting 37
web policies
compliance 251
wizard
Add Login Services 461
automatic confuguration backup 444
Configure System Log Archive 500
Rule Creation Wizard from template 288
Product Guide
Index
working with Email Gateway 11
Product Guide
591
0A00

Meg 76400 PG 0a00 En-Us

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Meg 76400 PG 0a00 En-Us

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Product Guide

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

About this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Working with your McAfee Email Gateway

Overview of Dashboard features

Benefits of using the Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

Task Setting System Summary thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Overview of Reports features

Overview of Email menu

Life of an email message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

Option definition - New Protocol Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

Overview of System menu

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

Option definitions User Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of Troubleshoot features

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

Save Email Queues . . . . . .

Overview of Email Gateway appliances and ePolicy Orchestrator Integration

Overview of McAfee Quarantine Manager Integration

Overview of Content Security Reporter integration

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

About Content Security Reporter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About McAfee Quarantine Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About this guide

Title of a book, chapter, or topic; a new term; emphasis.

Text that is strongly emphasized.

User input, code,

A link to a topic or to an external website.

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

What's in this guide

Find product documentation

Go to the Knowledge Center tab of the McAfee ServicePortal at http://support.mcafee.com.

In the Knowledge Base pane, click a content source:

Product Documentation to find user documentation

Technical Articles to find KnowledgeBase articles

Select Do not clear my filters.

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

Working with your McAfee Email

How McAfee Email Gateway processes mail traffic through your

Mail traffic flow

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

Working with your McAfee Email Gateway

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

Working with your McAfee Email Gateway

Figure 1-1 Areas of the user interface

B User information bar

Use the Email pages to manage threats to email messages, quarantine of

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

Working with your McAfee Email Gateway

Use the System pages to configure various features on the appliance.

E Support control buttons

McAfee Email Gateway 7.6.400 Appliances

Working with your McAfee Email Gateway

You can use this feature to:

Set the opening page for Email Gateway.

Reset the password for your user account.

Benefits of configuring user preferences

Setting your opening page

Changing your password